(Zicutake USA Comment - News and Information - contac: zicutake@live.com)
.
Olival Freire Junior




The Quantum
Dissidents
Rebuilding the Foundations of
Quantum Mechanics (1950â€"1990)

With a Foreword by
Silvan S. Schweber
The Quantum Dissidents
Olival Freire Junior




The Quantum Dissidents
Rebuilding the Foundations of Quantum
Mechanics (1950-1990)




With a Foreword by Silvan S. Schweber
Olival Freire Junior
Instituto de Fı́sica â€" UFBa Campus de Ondina
Salvador
Brazil




ISBN 978-3-662-44661-4 ISBN 978-3-662-44662-1 (eBook)
DOI 10.1007/978-3-662-44662-1
Springer Heidelberg New York Dordrecht London
Library of Congress Control Number: 2014955612

© Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2015
This work is subject to copyright. All rights are reserved by the Publisher, whether the whole or part
of the material is concerned, specifically the rights of translation, reprinting, reuse of illustrations,
recitation, broadcasting, reproduction on microfilms or in any other physical way, and transmission or
information storage and retrieval, electronic adaptation, computer software, or by similar or dissimilar
methodology now known or hereafter developed. Exempted from this legal reservation are brief excerpts
in connection with reviews or scholarly analysis or material supplied specifically for the purpose of being
entered and executed on a computer system, for exclusive use by the purchaser of the work. Duplication
of this publication or parts thereof is permitted only under the provisions of the Copyright Law of the
Publisher’s location, in its current version, and permission for use must always be obtained from
Springer. Permissions for use may be obtained through RightsLink at the Copyright Clearance Center.
Violations are liable to prosecution under the respective Copyright Law.
The use of general descriptive names, registered names, trademarks, service marks, etc. in this
publication does not imply, even in the absence of a specific statement, that such names are exempt
from the relevant protective laws and regulations and therefore free for general use.
While the advice and information in this book are believed to be true and accurate at the date of
publication, neither the authors nor the editors nor the publisher can accept any legal responsibility for
any errors or omissions that may be made. The publisher makes no warranty, express or implied, with
respect to the material contained herein.

Printed on acid-free paper

Springer is part of Springer Science+Business Media (www.springer.com)
To Olival and Antonieta, my parents,
in memory.
atima, Inês, and Silvana,
To Vitor, F
with love.
ThiS is a FM Blank Page
Preface




Olival Freire’s The quantum dissidents â€" Rebuilding the foundations of quantum
mechanics 1950-1990 is a compelling, important book. It is also a remarkable book.
At one level it is a richly documented history of how the foundations of quantum
mechanics were formulated and variously interpreted from 1925 until the 1990s.
Special emphasis is given to the developments from the 1950s on, and two threads
are initially followed that eventually combine. The first has as its point of departure,
the interpretation of the mathematical formalism of quantum mechanics that David
Bohm and Hugh Everett formulated in the early 1950s. Bohm’s was a deterministic
interpretation in contrast to the conventional probabilistic one, and Everett’s
became known as a “many world” formulation of quantum mechanics. Their
interpretations differed radically from those by the founding fathers, in particular
the ones formulated by Werner Heisenberg, by Wolfgang Pauli, and by Niels Bohr,
that became amalgamated and loosely referred to as the Copenhagen interpretation.
Freire begins the second thread with Eugene Wigner’s post-World War II critical
analysis of John von Neumann’s formulation of the measurement process as framed
in his Mathematische Grundlagen der Quantenmechanik in 1932. The two threads
became intertwined as foundational issues assumed greater legitimacy in the late
1950s. A new phase opened in the early 1960s when John Bell showed how to
quantitatively address the quantum weirdness exhibited by entanglement and
non-locality, and John Clauser and Abner Shimony indicated how to translate
these insights into executable experiments. Alain Aspect’s definitive experiments
in the early 1980s confirmed the validity of quantum mechanics and corroborated
what John Archibald Wheeler had said regarding delayed choice experiments,
namely that “no phenomenon is a phenomenon until it is an observed phenome-
non.” Research on the foundations of quantum mechanics became highly regarded
by the community after Aspect’s experiments. The subsequent refinements of these
experiments made them critically relevant to computer science and helped establish
the field of quantum information, one of whose aims is to revolutionize computing,
and another is to make the transmission of information absolutely secure and
thereby revolutionizing cryptography. All these developments are beautifully
expounded by Freire.
vii
viii Preface


If The quantum dissidents contained only its detailed, internalist, presentation of
the history of how the foundations of quantum mechanics became differently
interpreted, this would already be a most impressive accomplishment by virtue of
the command and synthesis of the huge amount of materials Freire had gathered and
made use of: personal interviews, the American Physical Society’s Center for the
History of Physics’ as well as other interviews, biographies, documents from
numerous archives, correspondences, published articles and books, unpublished
notes and papers, annotations to papers, . . .. And equally impressive is the fact that
Freire explains all the physics he presents in a readily accessible, accurate, clear,
succinct fashion. For example, we learn what the measurement problem is, how it
became a foundational issue, and why by virtue of the extreme fineness of the level
structure of a macroscopic body when described quantum mechanically, its inter-
actions with its surrounding can never be neglected and that it can never be
considered a closed system. This is the basis of the decoherence mechanism that
Dieter Zeh, Wojciech Zurek, and others have introduced in order to explain how
definitive pointer readings come about in the quantum mechanical description of
the measurement process. Today, by virtue of these advances a complete quantum
mechanical description of the measurement process is almost at hand.
But Freire wanted his presentation to be more than a longue durée internalist
narration of the history of the changes in the conceptualization of the foundations of
quantum mechanics brought about by the investigations of various theorists who
dissented from the orthodox view. He wanted to understand why investigating
foundational questions regarding quantum mechanics was actively discouraged
until the 1960s. And in addition to answers to questions such as: “What were the
factors that led these “dissenters” to choose issues from the foundations of quantum
mechanics as research themes? What issues did each one of them come to grips
with? What were the favorable factors, and what were the obstacles to their
activities? And to what extent did they succeed in their endeavor?” Freire wanted
to know in what ways the political and cultural contexts made the change possible,
and in what ways these contextsâ€"as well as ideology and metaphysicsâ€"were
reflected in the interpretations given.
Considering the founding fathers of quantum mechanicsâ€"Heisenberg, Dirac,
Pauli, Schrödinger, Bohrâ€"as being “off-scale” was part of a creation myth and
contributed to the belief that all foundational problems had been answered by the
Copenhagen interpretation. Similarly, von Neumann, whose axiomatization of
quantum mechanics made rigorous mathematical statements regarding the formal-
ism possible, was deemed off-scale among the then off-scale mathematicians. His
proof of the impossibility of introducing hidden variables was assumed flawless and
went unchallenged until Bellâ€"who was trying to understand the consistency of
Bohm’s deterministic interpretation of quantum mechanics with a particle’s posi-
tion and momentum considered hidden variablesâ€"discovered an invalid assump-
tion in von Neumann’s “proof.” Interestingly, the mistake had been detected in the
mid-1930s by Grete Hermann, but because she was primarily a mathematician
interested in philosophical problems and perhaps because she was a woman, her
finding went unnoticed by the physics community. In any case, physicists during
Preface ix


the 1930s were fully occupied successfully extending the boundaries of the appli-
cability of quantum mechanics to solid state and nuclear physics, and exploring its
validity at ever smaller distances.
After World War II, the plethora of new precision instruments that became
off-shelf equipment in the laboratory, the success of the renormalization program
in quantum electrodynamics, masers, lasers, transistors, and PDP computers opened
up new worlds in “table-top” physics. And ever more powerful accelerators did the
same in high energy physics. In the United States, the one country whose home
grounds had not been devastated by the war, worrying about the foundations of
quantum mechanicsâ€"when the latter had been responsible for successfully design-
ing an atomic bomb during the warâ€"seemed misguided given all the concrete
problems that were being successfully addressed using the conventional interpre-
tation of quantum mechanics to get measurable numbers out. Furthermore, philos-
ophizing had always been looked at askance in the United States and positivistic
pragmatism flourished there after it was introduced by Charles Sanders Pierce and
William James in the last third of the nineteenth century.
But two new factors altered the postwar political and social contexts of the
physics community in the United States. One was the Cold War and the concom-
itant McCarthyism; the other was the large increase of its physics communityâ€"
from some 3,000 before the war to over 8,000 after the warâ€" the number of
theorists among them and the new status accorded to them. Freire sensitively
conveys the consequences of the Cold War and of McCarthyism in his narration
of how and why David Bohm formulated his particular interpretation of quantum
mechanics. Likewise, the paternalism that bound the physics community and the
power it had vested in Bohr and his apostle, Leon Rosenfeld, are clearly described
when Freire tells the story of Hugh Everett and of the reception of his “relative
state” formulation of quantum mechanics. Similarly, the crucial importance of the
political and cultural contexts is convincingly rendered when Freire analyzes the
ways the civil rights movement, the Vietnam war, and the student upheavals
transformed what had been deemed good physics and helped bring center stage
foundational issues in quantum mechanics in the early 1970s.
One of the outstanding features of the book is its weaving together of profes-
sional, cultural, and political contexts with the personal and individual. We thus get
short, incisive biographies of the principal actors, their family background, the
institutions they were educated in, their mentors and thesis advisors, the universities
they became associated with, the resources they could draw on, the encouragement
and support they received from colleagues at their home institution, and from the
wider physics community. And these presentations are supplemented by sociolog-
ical insights gleaned from various sources: Pierre Bourdieu on habitus and various
forms of capital, the strong program of the sociology of scientific knowledge,
Timothy Lenoir, David Kaiser,. . . In the final chapter of the book, Freire makes
use of prosopography to characterize the two dozen or so courageous physicists
who were primarily responsible for effecting the dramatic changes in the concep-
tualization of quantum mechanics, the ones he calls the “quantum dissidents.” They
belonged to different generations, but they all had integrity, were self-confident,
x Preface


and they all shared the belief “that issues in foundations of quantum mechanics
were worthy enough to be pursued as part of a professional career in physics, and
that denying this was a dogmatic attitude. This was the main feature of their
dissidence, as most physicists at the time disagreed with this.” One other feature
stands out as a result of Freire’s analysis. The decisive changes came about by
virtue of what a few in that group had done: Bell, Shimony, Clauser, Aspect. The
changes were engendered by the actions of individuals making use of the resources
of the collectivity they were part of. The seminal paper of John Bell, John Clauser,
Abner Shimony, Michael Horne, and Richard Holt seems to be the exception. But it
turns out to have resulted from pooling together into one paper the conclusions Bell,
Clauser, and Shimony had reached independently. They did so in order to maximize
its impact.
Commendations similar to the above can be made regarding Freire’s discussion
of philosophical issues. One of the central concerns of the book is explaining how
come the same mathematical structure can support so many different physical
interpretations. When explaining why this is so, Freire introduces the reader to
the Quine-Duhem thesis regarding the under-determination of theories, to concerns
with realism, to the equivalence of various mathematical formulations, to what
constitutes deterministic or probabilistic explanations, to when are explanations
causal, and much else. And Freire always does so simply, concisely and without
ostentation.
I would characterize the book as exemplifying what the successful synthesis of
the history, sociology, and philosophy of science can accomplish. I can give The
quantum dissidents â€" Rebuilding the foundations of quantum mechanics 1950-1990
no higher compliment than to say that anyone aspiring to become a physicist would
become a better one by reading it.

Waltham, MA Silvan S. Schweber
Archives and Abbreviations




Aage Bohr Papers, Niels Bohr Archive, Copenhagenâ€"ABP
Abner Shimony Papers, ASP.2009.02, Archives of Scientific Philosophy, Special
Collections Department, University of Pittsburghâ€"ASP
Archives for the History of Quantum Physics, American Philosophical Society,
Philadelphia, PAâ€"AHQP
Archives of the Italian Physical Society, Bolognaâ€"ASIF
Archivio Occhialini, Università degli studi, Milanâ€"AO
Arquivos do CNPq, Museu de Astronomia, Rio de Janeiroâ€"AC
Bohr Scientific Correspondence (BSCâ€"AHQP)
Costas Papaliolios Papersâ€"[Accession 14811], Harvard University Archivesâ€"CPP
Guido Beck Papers, Centro Brasileiro de Pesquisas Fı́sicas, Rio de Janeiroâ€"GBP
David Bohm Papers, Birkbeck College, University of Londonâ€"BP
Eugene Wigner Papers, Manuscripts Division, Department of Rare Books and
Special Collections, Princeton University Libraryâ€"WigP
Everett Papersâ€"American Institute of Physics, College Park, MDâ€"EP
Everett Papers in possession of Mark Everett, available at http://hdl.handle.net/
10575/1060â€"ME
Henry Margenau Papers, Manuscripts and Archives, Yale University Libraryâ€"MP
John Clauser Papers. Clauser’s Personal Archiveâ€"JCP
Klaus S. Tausk Personal Archive, São Pauloâ€"KST
Lancelot L. Whyte Papers, Department of Special Collections, Boston University,
Bostonâ€"LWP
Léon Rosenfeld Papers, Niels Bohr Archive, Copenhagenâ€"RP
John von Neumann Papers, Library of Congress, Washington, DCâ€"JvNP
John Wheeler Papers, American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, PAâ€"WP
Niels Bohr Library & Archives, American Institute of Physics, College Park, MD,
USAâ€"AIP




xi
xii Archives and Abbreviations


Norbert Wiener Papers, MC022, Institute Archive, MIT, Cambridge, MAâ€"NWP
Pipkin Papers [Accession 12802], Harvard University Archivesâ€"PP
Princeton University Library (Seeley G. Mudd Manuscript Library, Graduate
Alumni Records)â€"GAR
Thomas Kuhn Papers, MC240, Institute Archive, MIT, Cambridge, MAâ€"TKP
Contents




1 Dissidents and the Second Quantum Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 The Dynamics of Change in Science . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2 Strategy and Historiographical Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.1 Interpretation of Quantum Theory Before David Bohm . . . . . . . . 17
2.2 Bohm’s Causal Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics . . . . . . . . . 21
2.3 Backgrounds of Bohm’s Causal Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.3.1 Trapped in the Cold War Storm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.3.2 Bohm, de Broglie, and Pauli: Conceptual Issues and
Disputes About Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.3.3 Exile in Brazil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.4 Critics and Supporters of the Causal Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.4.1 Supporters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.4.2 Mixed Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.4.3 The Old Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.4.4 Bohm’s Proposal and Philosophers of Science . . . . . . . . . 48
2.5 Waning Causality and Disenchantment with Communism
(Late 1950sâ€"Early 1960s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.5.1 Break with Communism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.5.2 Causality Relativized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.5.3 Abandonment of the Causal Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.5.4 Citizenship Lost, Dignity Preserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.5.5 New Acquaintances: Students and Collaborators . . . . . . . 57
2.6 New Perspectives: Wholeness and Implicate Order . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.6.1 Returning to the Quantum Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.7 On the Legacy of a Notable Quantum Dissident . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.7.1 Historiography on Bohm’s Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68


xiii
xiv Contents


3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.2 Historical Background: The Twilight of the “Copenhagen
Monocracy” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.2.1 General Attitude Towards the Foundational Issues
in the US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.2.2 Bohr and the Quantum Orthodoxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.2.3 The Revival of Dissidence and the Measurement Problem . . 83
3.3 The Genesis of Everett’s Thesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.3.1 Everett at Princeton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.3.2 The Steps Towards the Dissertation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.4 The Reasons for Everett’s Discontent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.4.1 Standard Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.4.2 Dualistic Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.4.3 Hidden Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.5 Everett’s Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.5.1 A Unitary Model of the World . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.5.2 Objective Description and Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.5.3 Subjective Experience and Probabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.6 Striving for Copenhagen’s Imprimatur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.7 The Issues at Stake in the Debate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3.7.1 Symbolism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3.7.2 Relativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3.7.3 Irreversibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3.7.4 Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3.7.5 Observers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3.8 Epilogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Concluding Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy,
and Wigner’s Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4.2 Measurement Problem Before Wigner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4.3 Enter Wigner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.4 The Heated Dispute: Wigner Versus Rosenfeld and the Italians . . 156
4.5 The Orthodoxy Splits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.6 Wigner’s Style of Intellectual Leadership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Epilogue and Conclusion: Orthodoxy Becomes Heterodoxy . . . . . . . . 166
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
5 The Tausk Controversy on the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics:
Physics, Philosophy, and Politics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.2 Scientific Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Contents xv


5.3 Tausk in Trieste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5.4 Loinger’s and Rosenfeld’s Attacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
5.5 Bohm’s, Jauch’s, and Fonda’s Defenses of Tausk . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
5.6 Further Developments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
5.7 Return to Brazil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5.8 Tausk’s Preprint and the Rosenfeld-Wigner Dispute . . . . . . . . . . 188
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Appendix: Summary of Tausk’s Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism
and the Reconfiguration of Physics Around 1970 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.2 The Mesh of Science and Politics: The Varenna Summer
Schools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
6.3 The Schools and Their Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
6.3.1 1970: Foundations of Quantum Mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . 206
6.3.2 1972: History of Physics in the Twentieth Century . . . . . 214
6.4 Ongoing Political Activism and Its Later Fading . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
6.5 On the Other Side of the Atlantic: The Schwartz Amendment . . . 222
6.6 Physics Today and the Second Life of Everett’s
Quantum Proposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its
First Experimental Tests (1965â€"1982) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
7.2 Bell’s Theorem, the Context of Its Production, and Its Initial
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
7.3 Philosophy Enters the Labs: The First Experiments . . . . . . . . . . 249
7.4 Settling the Tie and Turning the Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
7.5 New Challenges: “While the Photons Are in Flight” . . . . . . . . . . 274
Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
8 The 1980s and Early 1990s, Research on Foundations Takes Off . . 287
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
8.2 The Fate of Bell’s Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
8.2.1 The Ongoing Experiments with Entanglement . . . . . . . . . 297
8.3 Theoretical and Experimental Breakthrough: Decoherence
and the Quantum Classical Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
8.3.1 Work on Decoherence: Zeh, Leggett, Zurek, and Haroche . . 305
8.4 New Techniques and New Experiments in Foundations of
Quantum Physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.4.1 Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
xvi Contents


8.4.2 Experiments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
8.4.3 The Conspicuous Double Slit Experiment . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
8.5 Interlude: Wheeler’s Perennial Concern with the Quantum . . . . . 317
8.6 The Proliferation of Interpretations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
8.7 Early Quantum Information Achievements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
9 Coda: Quantum Dissidents - A Collective Biographical Profile . . . . 339
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
9.2 Achievements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
9.3 Synopsis of the Quantum Controversy Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
9.4 Training, Professional Losses, Philosophical Trends,
and Interpretations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
9.5 The Quantum Dissidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Chapter 1
Dissidents and the Second Quantum
Revolution



Abstract The second quantum revolution, which may lead to a major technolog-
ical breakthrough in science and technology with the creation of quantum com-
puters, was the term coined by the French physicist Alain Aspect to describe
changes in physics, the beginnings of which date back to the 1960s. To flesh out
the new term he brought together two different threads. The first one embraced the
emergence of the awareness of the importance of a new physical effect, entangle-
ment. This refers to the quantum description of a composite system which is not
reducible to the sum of its parts. It started a conceptual revolution, including the
perspective of building quantum computers with calculation power exponentially
greater than the best computers of today. The second thread derives from physi-
cists’ ability to isolate, control, and observe single quantum systems such as
electrons, photons, neutrons and atoms. Finally these threads merged into the
creation of a new field of research entitled quantum information. In Aspect’s
formulation, found in his introduction to John Bell’s papers (Speakable and
unspeakable in quantum mechanics: collected papers on quantum philosophy.
Cambridge University Press, 2004), he posited two quantum revolutions taking
place in the twentieth century. The first one, in the first half of the century, created
the scientific theory that describes the behavior of atoms, radiation, and their
interactions. The second one occurred in the second half and is still evolving, as
the promise of quantum computers remains unaccomplished. This book deals with
the origins of this alleged second revolutionâ€"from the early 1950s to the mid-
1990sâ€"and is a historical account of the context and intellectual aspects that arose
from the renewal of research on the foundations of quantum physics. It roughly
covers the period from the 1950s, when this research gained momentum with the
appearance of new interpretations for the mathematical formalism of this physical
theory, to the early 1990s, when research on these foundations was established as a
promising topic on the agenda of research in physics. As “quantum information”
became a new field of research in the middle of the 1990s, this narrative ends when
quantum information as a blossoming field of research starts. This book can thus be
regarded as a prehistory of quantum information.




© Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2015 1
O. Freire Junior, The Quantum Dissidents, DOI 10.1007/978-3-662-44662-1_1
2 1 Dissidents and the Second Quantum Revolution


Quantum theory is an exemplary case in the history of physics in that the success of
its predictions and explanations coexisted with profound doubts about the sound-
ness of its foundations. However, analogous doubts had appeared with major
physical theories such as Newtonian mechanics and thermodynamics. Devices
such as lasers and transistors, which dramatically changed science, technology,
and society in the second half of the twentieth century, were based on quantum
theory. Strange as it may seem, the number of scientists who called for the need to
scrutinize its foundations grew over the same period. This recalls the Pascalian
view that a broad scope of knowledge leads to restricted certainty about its
foundations. Thus, it is legitimate to ask questions such as, “Does their instrumental
effectiveness stand on the rock of secure concepts or the sand of unresolved
fundamentals?” (Briggs et al. 2013). Physicists were troubled at the existence of
different interpretations for the theory’s mathematical formalism. Indeed, some of
them thought that the theory’s foundations were insufficiently established for the
next stage in the development of physics. John Bell, one of the most distinguished
physicists to work on these issues, used to state that quantum mechanics is “rotten,”
using Hamlet’s famous line in an oblique reference to the father of the standard
interpretation of this theory, the Danish physicist Niels Bohr (Gottfried 1991). The
doubts about the foundations of quantum theory have become one of the most
compelling controversies in the history of science, comparable either to that which
pitted Newtonians against Cartesians at the dawn of modern physics or the sup-
porters of energeticism against those of atomism in the late nineteenth century.
Since most of the research on the foundations of quantum physics in the second half
of the twentieth century was intertwined with controversy that roiled about those
foundations, our account focuses on both of these aspects, which we refer to as “the
quantum controversy.”
The quantum controversy, therefore, drew a divide between those who thought
that there was nothing further to be researched in the foundations of the theory after
they were set by its founding fathers, such as Niels Bohr, Werner Heisenberg,
Wolfgang Pauli, Max Born, Pascual Jordan, Paul Dirac, and John von Neumann,
and those, mostly from a younger generation, who committed their professional
careers to investigating such themes. Indeed, until the late 1970s, research on
alternative interpretations of quantum mechanics was not considered “real physics”
by many; even the existence of such a controversy was a controversial position. This
is why Léon Rosenfeld, for example, objected to the use of the term “Copenhagen
interpretation” because it could mean the validity of a diversity of interpretations
(Ballentine 1987, p. 786; Freire Jr. 2005, p. 28). Let us now illustrate this view with
two recent testimonies. The French physicist Franck Laloë published in 2001 a paper
provocatively titled “Do we really understand quantum mechanics? Strange correla-
tions, paradoxes, and theorems.” The good reception of the paper led him to enlarge it
into a full book (Laloë 2012). Laloë (2001, p. 656) gives us the following account:
Until about 20 years ago, probably as a result of the famous discussions between Bohr,
Einstein, Schrödinger, Heisenberg, Pauli, de Broglie, and others [. . .], most physicists
seemed to consider that “Bohr was right and proved his opponents to be wrong,” even if
this was expressed with more nuance. In other words, the majority of physicists thought that
the so-called “Copenhagen interpretation” had clearly emerged from the infancy of quan-
tum mechanics as the only sensible attitude for good scientists.
1 Dissidents and the Second Quantum Revolution 3


“Most physicists” here requires clarification. The question was not the existence
of a majority of physicists consciously adopting the complementarity view or von
Neumann’s presentation. Indeed, complementarity itself never was part of the
training of physicists, being absent from most textbooks (Kragh 1999, p. 211).
However, the received view among physicists was that foundational issues were
already solved by the founding fathers of quantum physics and one did not need to
spend time reading the papers where such problems were already solved. Refer-
ences to this tacit knowledge will appear many times through this book. The second
testimony to illustrate this view is given by Christopher Gerry and Kimberley
Bruno, who wrote “The Quantum Divide,” intended for a wider audience than
professional physicists. They told us the following anecdote (Gerry and Bruno
2013, p. 172):
Some years ago, the senior author of this book (CCG) gave a talk about Bell’s inequalities,
and in the audience was a retired professor who had once been a post-doctoral research
associate at Bohr’s institute. After the talk he informed the audience that there was nothing
of importance in the Bell inequalities, and that Bohr had already solved all the problems of
quantum mechanics.

This “all foundational issues are solved” approach to the foundations of quantum
physics was, however, challenged by other physicists who thought that these issues
were worth pursuing as part of a professional career in physics. By doing so, the
latter were questioning the very definition of what good physics was and challeng-
ing the established distribution of scientific capital, to use Bourdieu’s notion of
scientific fields (Bourdieu 1975). I have called them, in this sense, “quantum
dissidents,” a borrowing from the notion of dissidence in politics and religion.
They include David Bohm, Jean-Pierre Vigier, Hugh Everett, John Bell, John
Clauser, Abner Shimony, Heinz Dieter Zeh, Bernard d’Espagnat, Anthony Leggett,
Franco Selleri, GianCarlos Ghirardi, Anton Zeilinger, and Alain Aspect, along with
some physicists from the old guard of quantum mechanics, such as Louis de Broglie
and Eugene Wigner.
In the early stages of this controversy the debate was restricted to theoretical
arguments. Bohm, Everett, and de Broglie in the early 1950s, as well as Wigner and
Shimony in the early 1960s, could not have imagined how to move the debate into
the laboratory. The absence of experiments led a physicist, Albert Messiah, to say in
his influential textbook that “the controversy has finally reached a point where it can
no longer be decided by any further experimental observations; it henceforth
belongs to the philosophy of science, rather than to the domain of physical science
proper” (Messiah 1961, p. 48). Such a conclusion had clear-cut professional
implications; it meant the controversy was not a professional matter for physicists,
particularly for those new to the profession. The perception that the beginnings of
the quantum controversy was a philosophical controversy survived in later accounts
by the new protagonists of this research. In 1974, the historian Max Jammer wrote a
comprehensive book on the history of interpretations of quantum mechanics enti-
tled The Philosophy of Quantum Mechanics (Jammer 1974). As late as 1999, the
physicist Anton Zeilinger recalled: “most work on the foundations of quantum
4 1 Dissidents and the Second Quantum Revolution


physics was initially motivated by curiosity and even by philosophical consider-
ations” (Zeilinger 1999, p. S295).
In the late 1960s the scene changed dramatically. In addition to the wide cultural
trends that influenced the controversy, a trio composed of Bell, Clauser, and
Shimony was able to connect this controversy and its philosophical connotations
with the lab benches. A theorem formulated by Bell and developed by Clauser,
Shimony, Michael Horne, and Richard Holt was put to experimental test. This
theorem contrasted plain quantum mechanics with any physical theory with hidden
variables which had “locality” as an assumption. Hidden variables were variables
additional to those used by standard quantum physics which are introduced to assert
that quantum systems have well-defined properties independent of their measure-
ments. In short, hidden variables were a strategy to preserve physical realism in this
new domain. Locality, a widely accepted premise among physicists, voiced by
Einstein in 1935 in a paper co-authored with Boris Podolsky and Nathan Rosen,
states that measuring one system should not affect another far away. Bell’s theorem
could then pit quantum predictions against local realism. Thus, the history of this
also sheds light on the different ways that theory and experiments intertwine in
physical sciences. However, even during the first experiments on Bell’s theorem in
the 1970s the subject was still regarded with suspicion by many. After Alain
Aspect’s experiments in the early 1980s, research on foundations of quantum
mechanics became good physics, plain and simple, as Aspect received wide
recognition for his works. In the late 1980s and early 1990s these experiments
were resumed, gathering since then an impressive number of physicists devoted to
such experiments. The experiments confirmed the predictions of quantum mechan-
ics and physicists resurrected an old term, coined by Erwin Schrödinger, to describe
the new physical effect: entanglement. Since then, physical systems that first
interact and later separate should be considered as just one system, described as a
single quantum state. Some of the quantum dissidents had hoped to invalidate
quantum theory but their hopes remained unfulfilled. Despite this frustration, the
controversy over local realism was fruitful for physics and we now understand
quantum theory better than its founding fathers. In this sense, this is an interesting
case for analyzing the workings of scientific controversies, a theme which has
claimed the attention of scholars.
In the early 1990s, new events brought the foundations of quantum mechanics
into mainstream physics. It did not come on its own, but blended with computer
science in a burgeoning field then called quantum information. The new field
brought the technological promise of revolutionizing computing and cryptography.
It was thus no surprise that it became one of the areas most funded by the military,
corporations, and funding agencies interested in its possible applications.1 Key

1
On this interest, see The Washington Post, 2 Jan 2014, “NSA seeks to build quantum computer
that could crack most types of encryption,” by S. Rich and B. Gellman, at http://www.
washingtonpost.com/world/national-security/nsa-seeks-to-build-quantum-computer-that-could-
crack-most-types-of-encryption/2014/01/02/8fff297e-7195-11e3-8def-a33011492df2_story.html
,
accessed on 30 Apr 2014.
1.1 The Dynamics of Change in Science 5


concepts emerged from the research on foundations of quantum mechanics, such as
entanglement, decoherence, and quantum cryptography. There is an exciting inter-
action between theory and experiment, with experiments with mesoscopic systems
that have been compared to Schrödinger’s cat, which will be explained in later
chapters, now being performed in labs, while other experiments on Bell’s theorem
have reached new peaks. In 2012 a team led by Anton Zeilinger announced that
they had managed to do quantum teleportation, reproduction of a quantum state
from a system far away, over a distance of 144 km (Ma et al. 2012). Thus this story
demonstrates how a subject was brought from the margins of physics, considered by
some a subject for philosophers alone, into the mainstream of science through the
complex and subtle ways in which science works.
The timeline of this book runs until the mid-1990s when the term quantum
information became commonplace and there was a boom in physics research into
this new field. Two historical stories coincide here. The first is that what began as
research without experimental bearings ended in a field with the technological
perspective of changing the landscape of computers. The second is that the times
of the almost-total dominance of the complementarity and of the “all problems were
solved” views were over. Gone were the days when physicists such as Léon
Rosenfeld and Richard Feynman thought that physicists who doubted the founda-
tions and interpretations of quantum mechanics simply did not understand it.2 From
the late 1990s on, hard supporters of complementarity live with and take advantage
of the controversy over the quantum interpretation. One of the most-skilled current
experimenters and supporters of the complementarity view, Anton Zeilinger, both
defends complementarity and values the controversy (Zeilinger 1999, pp. S291â€"
S296; Briggs et al. 2013; Schlosshauer et al. 2013).



1.1 The Dynamics of Change in Science

To a certain extent then both the history of the quantum controversy and of the
research on foundations of quantum theory in the second half of the twentieth
century are success stories. Eventually a subject once considered too philosophical
and marginal in physics became a hot topic for physics research and even contrib-
uted to the appearance of the blossoming field of quantum information. Thus it is a
history whose dynamics deserve some explanation. What were the factors shaping
such changes? We already have an answer given by those who first explored this
new territory, the physicists who work on the research related to the foundations of
quantum physics. They attribute the change to the improvements in technical
procedures enabling real lab experiments which had hitherto only been idealized
experiments (Gedankenexperiments). “Thanks to the recent advancement in


2
On Rosenfeld, see Chaps. 2â€"5; on Feynman, see his comments to John Clauser, Chap. 7, in
this book.
6 1 Dissidents and the Second Quantum Revolution


technology, it becomes now feasible to perform many experiments which could
only be conceived in theoreticians’ brain before” and “[this conference] was
organized [. . .] for the purpose of reviewing fundamental concepts of quantum
mechanics with the aid of experimental means made available by recent techno-
logical advancements.” These were the opening words at the International Sympo-
sia on Foundations of Quantum Mechanics in the Light of New Technology held in
Tokyo in 1983 and 1986 (Nakajima 1983, 1987). Similar ideas were expressed by
American and European physicists leading research on these topics (Greenberger
1986; Haroche 2004). Historian Joan Bromberg has exploited this answer further-
more. After noticing that historiography so far had been focusing on themes such as
Marxism and alternatives to the Copenhagen interpretation, David Bohm’s causal
interpretation, and the inception of Bell’s theorem, she emphasized “one lead that
historians have yet to pursue is constant reference that working physicists make to
the role of new instrumentation” (Bromberg 2008, p. 327).3 This kind of explana-
tion tends to be the received view on the subject not only due to the bulk of
materials concerning Bell’s inequalities and experiments on them in the last two
decades but also for the impressive technical improvements, particularly from the
1980s on, which enabled the manipulation of single quantum systems. Furthermore,
this view is akin to the description of changes in physical sciences in which only
theory and experiments could play a role. It explains the changes in the quantum
controversy mainly as a consequence of the role played by experiments in physics.
It may be a kind of experimental determinism, heir to technological determinism.
However, is it the only or even the most interesting explanation?
This book explores an alternative perspective about the changes in the research
on foundations of quantum mechanics from the 1950s on. There was a slowly
developing change in the perceptions of the physicists concerning the foundations
of physics, both as a controversial subject and a field of research. New institutional
and professional opportunities related to the subject were created, even before the
first experiments on Bell’s theorem had taken place. This change happened during
the 1950s and 1960s, and it can explain the elaboration and the positive reception
the Bell’s theorem experiments obtained. Experiments on Bell’s theorem certainly
increased the speed of that change and later other factors played their role. How-
ever, and this is crucial to our point, even after the first experiments on Bell’s
theorem began to be carried out, professional stigma against the physicists who
were working on these experiments remained, as demonstrated by John Clauser’s
case and John Bell and Alain Aspect’s concerns throughout the 1970s. Explaining
changes in physics based only on theory and experiment as driving factors does not
harmonize with the survival of professional stigma against a topic of research
despite the performance of successful experiments. It begs for a wider kind of


3
Bromberg’s own contributions go in that direction. Bromberg (2008) deals with Wheeler’s
delayed-choice and Vigier’s one-way experiments, while Bromberg (2006) exploits the relation
between “device” and “fundamental” physics considering the case of quantum optics and Scully’s
works.
1.1 The Dynamics of Change in Science 7


explanation. Indeed, it is not enough to have experiments for work to be considered
good physics; it is necessary that many other physicists consider such experiments
to be relevant. It is certainly true that the existence of technical improvements and
real experiments were influential in the emergence and consolidation of the
research on the foundations of quantum physics. It was an effective driver if you
restrict your analysis to the 1980s, but it is a particularly limited explanation if one
considers the whole transformation happening since the early 1950s. In addition, as
we will see, even in the 1980s traces can be found of professional and cultural
prejudice against research on these topics. Indeed, diverse factors may have played
their roles in the evolving controversy over the foundations of this theory. Among
these factors, it is worth considering philosophical and ideological issues, profes-
sional biases, generational and cultural changes, and the diversity of the social and
professional environments in which physics was practiced throughout the century.
In addition to this, there were conceptual and theoretical breakthroughs, technical
innovations, Gedankenexperiments and factual experimental feats as well as tech-
nological expectations.
Let us illustrate the diversity of factors driving the change in the intellectual and
professional landscape of the foundations of quantum theory after World War
II. While the first round of experiments were concerned with Bell’s theorem in
the early 1970s, other theoretical issues were pressing physicists, both before and
during the surge of interest on Bell’s theorem. In the 1950s alternative interpreta-
tions of quantum physics were formulated by David Bohm and Hugh Everett. Bohm
conjectured about different predictions at what he called the subquantum level but
none of them at that time consistently considered the experimental implications of
their proposals. While Bohm’s interpretation was influential in motivating John
Bell for his later work and its experimental implications, Everett’s proposal never
had and possibly never will have experimental predictions other than those of usual
quantum physics. And yet it has been influential for its heuristic capabilities.
Furthermore, after a decade without attracting the attention of experts, Everett’s
approach was revived by Bryce DeWitt. He was motivated by the problem of the
marriage between quantum physics and general relativity, a domain which even
today is far from experimental or observational concerns but has increasingly been
attractive to physicists. Another pressing theoretical issue was the analysis of the
quantum measurement processes, which led Eugene Wigner to diagnose the exis-
tence of a quantum measurement problem in the early 1960s. When discussions on
the measurement problem became acute, pitting Wigner against Léon Rosenfeld,
there was no perspective of experiments to enlighten the debate. Finally, when a
problem related to the measurement problemâ€"the transition from the quantum to
the classical behaviorâ€"gained momentum among physicists in the early 1980s, it
was not immediately driven by possible experiments, although a little later it did
enter the lab. From this we can conclude that there was an agenda of theoretical
problems in the foundations of quantum mechanics driving research after World
War II. This agenda did not have any immediate bearing on experiments as these
came later. In addition, there was the increasing philosophical discomfort with the
instrumentalistic overtones related to the standard views of quantum mechanics.
8 1 Dissidents and the Second Quantum Revolution


The history of the quantum controversy may provide a window on the relation-
ships between physics and its broader contexts. In the early 1950s, for example,
Cold War tensions inevitably framed this debate both in the East and in the West.
McCarthyism was a major factor shaping the career of Bohm and made him perhaps
the most notable American scientist to choose exile in the last century. As philo-
sophical themes such as determinism and realism were at stake, it comes as no
surprise that ideological trends, such as the Soviet Zhdanovism, were influential in
raising criticism against the standard interpretation of quantum theory. Thus as
early as 1974 the historian of physics Max Jammer suggested “the extent to which
this process [decline of influence of the complementarity interpretation] was
fomented and supported by social-cultural movements and political factors such
as the growing interest in Marxist ideology in the West deserves to be investigated”
(Jammer 1974, p. 250). As we have argued elsewhere (Freire Jr. 2011b), Marxist
criticisms contributed to the decline in the influence of the complementarity
interpretation, even though there were Marxist physicists on both sides of the
dispute, both pro and contra the complementarity view, as we will see throughout
this book, particularly in Chaps. 2, 4, and 5. This tension was diluted in the late
1950s, but we can find traces of it later in the 1960s, as we will see in Chaps. 5 and
6. Resonance between physics practice and wider cultural trends were not limited to
the ideological issues concerning Marxism. The surge of interest in foundations of
quantum physics around 1970 was not out of tune with wider political and cultural
changes that marked the times. Opposition to the Vietnam War and the cultural and
political unrest of the late 1960s echoed in the decision of the Italian Physical
Society to dedicate the 1970 issue of its traditional Varenna Summer School to the
foundations of quantum mechanics and its 1972 issue to the history of physics in the
twentieth century and its social implications. The former was the first major
scientific gathering entirely dedicated to the foundations of quantum physics after
World War II. Echoes from that unrest may also be found in John Clauser’s shift
from high precision measurements in astrophysics towards foundations as well as in
the opening of the magazine Physics Today to the debates on the diverse interpre-
tations of quantum physics. In the same vein, historian David Kaiser in his book
How the Hippies Saved Physics (Kaiser 2012) has convincingly argued that cultural
trends inspired by the counter culture and based on the West Coast of the U.S. were
influential in supporting some research on the foundational issues and provoking
the physics establishment to produce one of the key results related to quantum
information, the no-cloning theorem.
Last but not least, the threads of this story are also intertwined with technical
developments such as lasers, photo-detectors, optical fibers, and computers; scien-
tific breakthroughs such as the manipulation of quantum single systems, particu-
larly photons; the flourishing of new disciplines, such as quantum optics; theoretical
breakthroughs, such as the concepts of entanglement and decoherence; and the
trade of skills between applied and foundational research. Thus the challenge for
historians dealing with research on the quantum foundations is integrating such a
diversity of factors into a single narrative. Indeed, bringing together the diversity of
factors shaping science is the ultimate goal of historians of science. However, not
1.2 Strategy and Historiographical Issues 9


all factors prevail at the same time; in fact, in each diachronic slice of this history
the workings of only a few can be found. The job of the historian is therefore to
disentangle the roles played by each factor in each local and temporal context. That
is what we have tried to do throughout this book. In the final chapter I present a
synopsis of the diverse factors which have played a role in each context.



1.2 Strategy and Historiographical Issues

My strategy to build a narrative on the research on foundations of quantum
mechanics after 1950 was to follow people, issues, and their relevant contexts. It
was a choice inspired in the dictum of the historian Marc Bloch: the historian is like
the ogre of fairy tales, “he knows that wherever he catches the scent of human flesh,
there his quarry lies” (Bloch 1953, p. 28). In doing this I deal with figures who
attracted public attention well beyond physics, such as David Bohm, Hugh Everett
and John Bell. However, this is not a story of great men. Bohm and Everett were not
considered such by their fellow physicists at the time; their reputations developed
later. Alongside great physicists, many of our characters are ordinary physicists
who collaborated to develop research on foundations and in some cases also
suffered professional prejudice. Some of these rank-and-file physicists can also be
classified as anti-heroes, bearing the burden of the prejudices of the times, as was
the case of Klaus Tausk, mentioned in Chap. 5. In addition to physicists, some
characters in the quantum controversy were well-known philosophers, such as Karl
Popper, Thomas Kuhn and Paul Feyerabend. Since I only became fascinated by this
topic in the late 1980s when it had already become a regular field for research in
physics, and the field of quantum information was beginning to blossom, it was
important to avoid the sins of anachronism or the Whig interpretation of history
(Kragh 1987, pp. 89â€"107). This choice of strategy was an antidote to these
temptations. Another strategy was to ask the same questions to different people in
order to allow me to build a collective biography of the scholars who worked on a
theme they thought worthy of research. In doing this I was inspired in the historio-
graphical method of prosopography (Stone 1971; Kragh 1987, pp. 174â€"181),
although I did not follow this method strictly as I only used the biographical data
in a qualitative manner. Chapter 9 represents my attempt to synthesize the collec-
tive biography. Thus, archival sources, oral histories, published papers, dynamics of
science citations, and dialogue with the secondary literature relevant to the subject
were the tools used throughout the research.
The subject of the book also required a dialogue with some theoretical issues, in
addition to those presented in the previous paragraph. Our narrative is a story of
disciplinary change and power distribution in an established scientific field, physics
in this case. Issues at stake included the value of the research on foundational issues
and to what extent quantum mechanics could be applied to other areas in physics. If
these issues were addressed by the physics community there would be a
rearrangement in terms of professional recognition. Thus it almost naturally invites
10 1 Dissidents and the Second Quantum Revolution


contributions from Pierre Bourdieu, as already mentioned. Let us use two quota-
tions from Bourdieu’s seminal paper on scientific capital as a form of symbolic
capital. For the French sociologist, “the ‘pure’ universe of even the ‘purest’ science
is a social field like any other, with its distribution of power and its monopolies, its
struggles and strategies, interests and profits, but it is a field in which all these
invariants take on specific forms” (Bourdieu 1975, p. 19). Most of the quantum
controversy may be read as a story of struggles for power and monopolies, as will
be evident throughout the book. Bourdieu also noted that “in the struggle in which
every agent must engage in order to force recognition of the value of his products
and his own authority [. . .], what is at stake is in fact the power to impose the
definition of science (i.e. the delimitation of the field of the problems, methods and
theories that may be regarded as scientific)” (Bourdieu 1975, p. 23). Bohm and
Everett fought to maintain that they were doing good physics instead of metaphys-
ics, philosophy, or, as some critics saw it, just pointless reasoning. We will see that
some American physicists doubted if what Clauser was doing was “real physics.”
Bourdieusian lenses are fruitful not only in these cases but also in a number of other
episodes in our narrative.
Bourdieu’s distinction between two kinds of professional strategies, either
succession or subversion, a choice young scientists in particular need to make
when they enter into the profession, may be helpful for our analysis. According
to his words (Bourdieu 1975, pp. 30â€"31),
Depending on the position they occupy in the structure of the field (and also, no doubt, on
secondary variables such as their social trajectory, which governs their assessment of their
chances), the ‘new entrants’ may find themselves orientated either towards the risk-free
investments of succession strategies, which are guaranteed to bring them, at the end of a
predictable career the profits awaiting those who realise the official ideal of scientific
excellence through limited innovations within authorised limits; or towards subversion
strategies, infinitely more costly and more hazardous investments which will not bring them
the profits accruing to the holders of the monopoly of scientific legitimacy unless they can
achieve a complete redefinition of the principles legitimating domination.

Many of the physicists who appear in our story chose the subversion strategy.
The sociologist Trevor Pinch was the first to look for Bourdieu’s contributions
while analyzing the dispute between Bohm and von Neumann around the validity of
von Neumann’s proof against the possibility of existence of hidden variables
compatible with quantum mechanics (Pinch 1977). I exploited Pinch’s suggestion
further. Everett’s case, with his attempt to provide a new interpretation of quantum
theory that should be the natural presentation of its mathematical formalism, thus
displacing both Bohr’s and von Neumann’s views, fits in the subversion strategy.
While he had meaningful capital to bid this gameâ€"a doctoral thesis at Princeton
under John Wheelerâ€"he did not succeed, at least in the short term, as he did not
achieve a “complete redefinition of the principles legitimating” which was consid-
ered the right interpretation of quantum physics. Short term may be too much time
for a singular career. Everett chose to leave physics and academia for a profession
using mathematics in the U.S. defense system.
1.2 Strategy and Historiographical Issues 11


My narrative also made use of a number of other contributions and readings from
sociology, history, and philosophy. Timothy Lenoir’s book on the cultural produc-
tion of scientific disciplines was influential due to the diversity of factors he
mobilized to discuss how disciplines are created and how they evolve (Lenoir
1997). He also used Bourdieu’s conceptual framework to make sense of the
dynamics of the birth and change of disciplines. Lenoir (1997, p. 12) argues that
“one of the objectives of disciplinary struggles is to rechart the boundaries of the
field, to legitimate and consecrate new combinations of assets with cultural prestige
and authority, to revalue a form of capital previously considered ‘impure,’ and to
secure that valuation through an institutionalized structure.” Among the examples
Lenoir used to illustrate his point are current “efforts to legitimate computational
mathematics as a field of mathematics on a par with traditional mathematical
disciplines,” and “the consecration of science fiction as a literary genre admissible
within academic departments of literature.” The move of the foundations of quan-
tum physics from a fringe position to the mainstream of physics seems to me
another illustration of the disciplinary shifts Lenoir has studied. Furthermore, for
Lenoir (1997, p. 19), “ideology has a crucial role to play in this process.” It is not
“negatively valued in [his] account.” Quantum controversy is a case where the
scientific disputes are loaded with philosophical and ideological commitments, and
this has not been an obstacle to its cognitive development.
The controversy over the interpretation and foundations of quantum physics is
thus an exemplary case of science as a cultural production, which demands that
“understanding science as a cultural activity. . .means learning to identify and to
interpret the complicated and particular collection of shared actions, values, signs,
beliefs and practices by which groups of scientists make sense of their daily lives
and work” (Galison and Warwick 1998). While I have studied each case or episode
as rooted in its local contexts, thus attentive to study the history of science as the
study of science at work, as a practice, the whole story presented in this book had to
deal with a diversity of local settings in order to make this narrative intelligible.
Some of the places featured are Princeton, São Paulo, Copenhagen, London, Paris,
Boston, Berkeley, Heidelberg, Moscow, Geneva, Varenna, Vienna, College Park,
and Bari, making the story truly international. I also had to appeal to history, tout
court, and not only the history of science in order to make sense of backgrounds
such as the Cold War, McCarthyism, Zhdanovism, Marxism, and the cultural and
political unrest of the late 1960s.4 As philosophical themes popped up from time to
time I could not, nor did I want to, be insensitive to the literature of the philosophy
of science. Readings from Michel Paty (1989, 1999, 2000), Abner Shimony (1993),
and Ian Hacking (1983) have been most influential in my own work as I coped with
the philosophical dimension of the quantum controversy and in particular with the



4
On this subject it is impossible to acknowledge all the readings which were influential for my
work, but at least I should cite the following ones: Schrecker (1986), Wang (1999), Graham
(1972), Graham (1987), Gaddis (2005), and Hobsbawm (1994, 1982).
12 1 Dissidents and the Second Quantum Revolution


constraints that the very practice of physics in the twentieth century forced upon
realism in science.
Finally, insofar as this history is also a history of a scientific controversy, I
benefited from the attention science studies scholars have dedicated to controver-
sies (McMullin 1987; Collins and Pinch 1993, 1998a, b).5 Bruno Latour empha-
sized this interest to the point of basing his first rule of method on them: “We study
science in action and not ready made science or technology; to do so, we either
arrive before the facts and machines are blackboxed or we follow the controversies
that reopen them” (Latour 1987, p. 258). However, I must admit that I was attracted
to the controversy over the quantum at a time when I was not familiar either with
the literature on scientific controversies, in particular, or with science studies. Later,
when I read Paul Forman’s paper on “Weimar Culture, Causality, and Quantum
Theory, 1918â€"1927” (Forman 1971), I was impressed both by its historiographical
power as well as by the fact that such a controversy had been revived in the 1950s
and was still alive. One of the pleasures I had while working on this subject was to
establish a connection between Bohm’s proposal of the causal interpretation, in the
early 1950s, and Forman’s motivation for writing his Weimar Culture 1971 paper
(Freire Jr. 2011a). Still on controversies and the history of science, the idea that
science develops most of the time through consensus among its practitioners, as
once suggested by T. S. Kuhn (1970) with the idea of shared paradigms in normal
science, is challenged by the story of the controversy over the foundations of
quantum theory (Freire Jr. 2014). Indeed, the history of the foundations of quantum
theory has not been a history of shared paradigm; instead it has been a matter of
permanent dispute among physics practitioners.
This book is not a comprehensive history of the research on the foundations of
quantum theory in the second half of the twentieth century.6 It is an attempt to make
sense of how a topic once on the fringes of physics moved to its mainstream. Thus I
chose contents, people, cases, and disputes which were in my view the most
influential in this move. Thus many interpretations from the gamut of quantum
interpretations do not appear, or appear only incidentally, in this story. The same
holds for subjects such as quantum logics or axiomatics. Other subjects such as
quantum gravitation and quantum optics were touched upon insofar as they directly
contributed to the recognition of foundations of quantum physics as a worthy theme
of research. Those two subjects reveal fascinating stories in themselves and their
historiographical treatment is only beginning to be done, as one can see in the
following works: Bromberg (2006), Silva and Freire (2013), Silva (2013), and
Hartz (2013).
I present now a brief outline of what appears in each chapter where our history
unfolds. Chapters 2 and 3 are dedicated to the most notorious cases of quantum
dissidence in the 1950s, David Bohm and Hugh Everett with their alternative


5
See also “Controversies”, the special issue of Science in Context 11(2) (1998), 147â€"325.
6
For an updated and comprehensive review of the conceptual issues in foundations of quantum
mechanics, see the book Do we really understand quantum mechanics?, by Franck Laloë (2012).
1.2 Strategy and Historiographical Issues 13


interpretations of quantum physics. In Chap. 4 we move to the 1960s and the
dispute among Eugene Wigner, Léon Rosenfeld, and others concerning the exis-
tence of a problem in quantum measurement. The dispute led to splitting the
dominant orthodoxy in quantum mechanics. Chapter 5 is dedicated to the case of
the lesser-known physicist, Klaus Tausk, who moved to foundations in the
mid-1960s and whose career was subsequently mutilated. In Chap. 6 we explore
how the political and cultural unrest of the late 1960s helped reconfigure the agenda
of research in physics. Chapter 7 is dedicated to John Bell, his seminal theorem
about the conflict between quantum theory and any local realist theories, and the
early experiments on this theorem. Prominent figures include John Clauser, Abner
Shimony, Edward Fry, and Alain Aspect, in addition to Bell himself. The chapter
covers the period from the mid-1960s, when this theorem appeared, to the early
1980s, when Aspect’s experimental results were favorably received among physi-
cists around the world. Chapter 8 summarizes the acceleration of foundational
research in the 1980s leading ultimately to the emergence of a new research field,
quantum information. Finally, while the previous chapters are case studies, locally
grounded, in Chap. 9, I build a collective biography of physicists who worked on
foundations of quantum physics from the early 1950s to the early 1990s. I conclude
by arguing that most of them can be rightly referred to as what I have called
quantum dissidents.

Acknowledgements I am indebted to the following colleagues who read and commented on parts
of this book: David Kaiser, Joan Bromberg, Jeffrey Bub, Osvaldo Pessoa Jr., Thiago Hartz,
Indianara Silva, George Musser, Saulo Carneiro, Jose Perillan, and Ileana Greca. I am also
indebted to Angela Lahee, for editorial assistance, and to Stefano Osnaghi, Osvaldo Pessoa Jr.,
Fabio Freitas, and Alexis De Greiff, who were co-authors of papers I have used in this book. I
acknowledge Denise Key and Shaun Akhtar for their help revising the English. For sure, deficien-
cies in the text are my entire responsibility. The research leading to this book was made possible
due to the encouragement of a number of colleagues and students. When I began to consider
writing this book I was encouraged by Sam Schweber, Michel Paty, Olivier Darrigol, Dieter
Hoffmann, and Cathryn Carson. I am thankful for their support. In addition to these colleagues, I
am indebted to other colleagues and students who read some of the previous papers, or commented
upon them after my talks; thus I am indebted to Paul Forman, Abner Shimony, Alain Aspect, Anja
Jacobsen, Alexei Kojevnikov, Cristoph Lehner, Jan Lacki, Finn Aaserud, Aurino Ribeiro, José
Fernando Rocha, Nelson Studart, Jean-Jacques Szczeciniarz, Jean Eisenstaedt, Martha-Cecilia
Bustamante, Michael Kiessling, Harvey Brown, Albin Volte, Michael Stöltzner, Peter Byrne,
Cássio Vieira, Ana Maria Ribeiro de Andrade, Ademir Santana, Frederik Santos, Virgile Besson,
Climerio Silva, Robert Robinson, Mayane Nóbrega, and Wilson Bispo.
This research would not have been possible without the aid from the following institutions and
agencies: CNPq, the Brazilian federal agency for research, for the continuous funding and support
and the distinction as its fellow; the Brazilian agencies CAPES and FAPESB; the American
Institute of Physics and American Philosophical Society for funding and aid; the General Physics
department at Universidade Federal da Bahia, for my leaves of absence; Dibner Institute for the
History of Science and Technology, the institution which supported me with a Senior Fellowship
in 2004â€"2005; Université Paris 7, where I stayed as a visiting researcher for some months in 2004
and 2012; MIT, Harvard University, and University of Maryland for the stays at those institutions
as a guest researcher in 2005, 2009, and 2014. I am also indebted to the following archives for
allowing me to consult their collections and authorizing citations from those sources: Niels Bohr
Archive, Copenhagen (Aage Bohr Papers and Léon Rosenfeld Papers); Archivio Occhialini,
14 1 Dissidents and the Second Quantum Revolution


Università degli studi, Milan; Arquivos do CNPq, Museu de Astronomia, Rio de Janeiro; Guido
Beck Papers, Centro Brasileiro de Pesquisas Fı́sicas, Rio de Janeiro; David Bohm Papers,
Birkbeck College, University of London; Lancelot L. Whyte Papers, Department of Special
Collections, Boston University; John von Neumann Papers, Library of Congress, Washington;
John Wheeler Papers, American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia; Center for History of
Physics, American Institute of Physics, College Park, Maryland (Archives for the History of
Quantum Physics, Bohr Scientific Correspondence, Physics Today Collection, and all the oral
histories used in this book); Thomas Kuhn Papers, Institute Archive, MIT; and Archives of the
Italian Physical Society, Bologna.
Finally I am thankful to the following journals for allowing me to republish papers or
fragments of papers originally published in their journals: Studies in History and Philosophy of
Modern Physics, Historical Studies in the Physical and Biological Sciences, Foundations of
Physics, and Physics in Perspective.




References

Ballentine, L.E.: Resource letter IQM2: foundations of quantum mechanics since the Bell inequal-
ities. Am. J. Phys. 55, 785â€"792 (1987)
Bell, J.S.: Speakable and unspeakable in quantum mechanics : collected papers on quantum
philosophy. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (2004). With an introduction by Alain
Aspect
Bloch, M.: The Historian’s Craft. Vintage Books, New York (1953)
Bourdieu, P.: Specificity of scientific field and social conditions of progress of reason. Soc. Sci.
Inf. 14, 19â€"47 (1975)
Briggs, G.A.D., Butterfield, J.N., Zeilinger, A.: The Oxford questions on the foundations of
quantum physics. Proc. R. Soc. A Math. Phys. Eng. Sci. 469, 20130299 (2013)
Bromberg, J.L.: Device physics vis-à-vis fundamental physics in Cold War America: the case of
quantum optics. ISIS 97, 237â€"259 (2006)
Bromberg, J.L.: New instruments and the meaning of quantum mechanics. Hist. Stud. Nat. Sci. 38,
325â€"352 (2008)
Collins, H.M., Pinch, T.J.: The golem: what everyone should know about science. Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge (1993)
Collins, H.M., Pinch, T.J.: The golem at large: what you should know about technology. Cam-
bridge University Press, Cambridge (1998a)
Collins, H.M., Pinch, T.J.: The golem: what you should know about science. Cambridge Univer-
sity Press, Cambridge (1998b)
Forman, P.: Weimar culture, causality, and quantum theory, 1918-1927: adaptation by german
physicists and mathematicians to a hostile intellectual environment. Hist. Stud. Phys. Sci. 3, 1â€"
115 (1971)
Freire Jr., O.: Science and exile: David Bohm, the cold war, and a new interpretation of quantum
mechanics. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci. 36, 1â€"34 (2005)
Freire Jr., O.: Causality in physics and in the history of physics: a comparison of Bohm’s and
Forman’s papers. In: Carson, C., Kojevnikov, A., Trischler, H. (eds.) Weimar culture and
quantum mechanics: selected papers by Paul Forman and contemporary perspectives on the
forman thesis. Imperial College & World Scientific, London (2011a)
Freire Jr., O.: On the connections between the dialectical materialism and the controversy on the
quanta. Jahrbuch Für Europäihce Wissenschaftskultur 6, 195â€"210 (2011b)
Freire Jr., O.: On the influence of science milestones on the history and philosophy of science. In:
Blum, A., Gavroglu, K., Renn, J. (eds.) Towards a history of the history of science: 50 years
since “Structure”. Edition Open Access, Berlin (2014)
References 15

Gaddis, J.L.: The Cold War: A New History. Penguin Press, New York (2005)
Galison, P., Warwick, A.: Introduction: cultures of theory. Stud. Hist. Philos. Mod. Phys. 29B,
287â€"294 (1998)
Gerry, C.C., Bruno, K.M.: The quantum divide: why Schrödinger’s cat is either dead or alive.
Oxford University Press, Oxford (2013)
Gottfried, K.: Does quantum mechanics carry the seeds of its own destruction? Phys. World, 34â€"40
(1991)
Graham, L.R.: Science and Philosophy in the Soviet Union. Knopf, New York (1972)
Graham, L.R.: Science, Philosophy, and Human Behavior in the Soviet Union. Columbia Univer-
sity Press, New York (1987)
Greenberger, D. (ed.): New Techniques and Ideas in Quantum Measurement Theory, vol. 480.
Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, New York (1986)
Hacking, I.: Representing and Intervening: Introductory Topics in the Philosophy of Natural
Science. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1983)
Haroche, S.: Physique Quantique. Collège de France - Fayard, Paris (2004)
Hartz, T.: As heterodoxias qu^anticas e o olhar do historiador: uma história dos usos dos
argumentos de Niels Bohr acerca da medição de campos qu^anticos (1930-1970). PhD disser-
tation, Universidade Federal da Bahia and Universidade Estadual de Feira de Santana (2013)
Hobsbawm, E.J.: The History of Marxism. Indiana University Press, Bloomington (1982)
Hobsbawm, E.J.: The Age of Extremes. The Short Twentieth Century 1914-1991. Penguin,
London (1994)
Jammer, M.: The Philosophy of Quantum Mechanicsâ€"The Interpretations of Quantum Mechanics
in Historical Perspective. Wiley, New York (1974)
Kaiser, D.: How the Hippies Saved Physics: Science, Counterculture, and the Quantum Revival.
W. W. Norton, New York (2012)
Kragh, H.: An Introduction to the Historiography of Science. Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge (1987)
Kragh, H.: Quantum Generations : A History of Physics in the Twentieth Century. Princeton
University Press, Princeton, NJ (1999)
Kuhn, T.S.: The Structure of Scientific Revolutions. The University of Chicago Press, Chicago
(1970)
Laloë, F.: Do we really understand quantum mechanics? Strange correlations, paradoxes, and
theorems. Am. J. Phys. 69(6), 655â€"701 (2001)
Laloë, F.: Do We Really Understand Quantum Mechanics? Cambridge University Press,
New York (2012)
Latour, B.: Science in Action: How to Follow Scientists and Engineers Through Society. Harvard
University Press, Cambridge, MA (1987)
Lenoir, T.: Instituting Science: The Cultural Production of Scientific Disciplines. Stanford Uni-
versity Press, Stanford, CA (1997)
Ma, X.S., Herbst, T., Scheidl, T., Wang, D.Q., Kropatschek, S., Naylor, W., Wittmann, B., Mech,
A., Kofler, J., Anisimova, E., Makarov, V., Jennewein, T., Ursin, R., Zeilinger, A.: Quantum
teleportation over 143 kilometres using active feed-forward. Nature 489, 269â€"273 (2012)
McMullin, E.: Scientific controversy and its termination. In: Engelhardt, H.T., Caplan, A.L. (eds.)
Scientific Controversies: Case Studies in the Resolution and Closure of Disputes in Science and
Technology. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1987)
Messiah, A.: Quantum Mechanics. North Holland, Amsterdam (1961)
Nakajima, S.: Opening address. In: Nakajima, S. (ed.) International Symposium on Foundations of
Quantum Mechanics in the Light of New Technology. Physical Society of Japan, Tokyo (1983)
Nakajima, S.: Preface. In: Nakajima, S. (ed.) The 2nd International Symposium on Foundations of
Quantum Mechanics in the Light of New Technology. Physical Society of Japan, Tokyo (1987)
Paty, M.: La Matière dérobée l’appropriation critique de l’objet de la physique contemporaine. Éd.
des Archives Contemporaines, Paris (1989)
16 1 Dissidents and the Second Quantum Revolution


Paty, M.: Are quantum systems physical objects with physical properties? Eur. J. Phys. 20, 373â€"
388 (1999)
Paty, M.: Interpretations and significations in quantum physics. Rev. Int. Philos. 54, 199â€"242
(2000)
Pinch, T.: What does a proof do if it does not prove? A study of the social conditions and
metaphysical divisions leading to David Bohm and John von Neumann failing to communicate
in quantum physics. In: Mendelsohn, E., Weingart, P., Whitley, R. (eds.) The Social Production
of Scientific Knowledge. Reidel, Dordrecht (1977)
Schlosshauer, M., Kofler, J., Zeilinger, A.: A snapshot of foundational attitudes toward quantum
mechanics. Stud. Hist. Philos. Mod. Phys. 44, 222â€"230 (2013)
Schrecker, E.: No Ivory Tower: McCarthyism and the Universities. Oxford University Press,
New York (1986)
Shimony, A.: Search for a Naturalistic World View. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge
(1993). 2 vols
Silva, I., Freire, O.: The Concept of the Photon in Question: The Controversy Surrounding the
HBT Effect circa 1956â€"1958. Hist. Stud. Nat. Sci. 43, 453â€"491 (2013)
Silva, I.: Uma história do conceito de fóton na segunda metade do século XX: para além de
histórias do modelo bola de bilhar. PhD dissertation, Universidade Federal da Bahia and
Universidade Estadual de Feira de Santana (2013)
Stone, L.: Prosopography. Daedalus, 100(1), 46â€"79 (1971)
Wang, J.: American Science in an Age of Anxiety : Scientists, Anticommunism, and the Cold War.
University of North Carolina Press, Chapel Hill, NC (1999)
Zeilinger, A.: Experiment and the foundations of quantum physics. Rev. Mod. Phys. 71, S288â€"
S297 (1999)
Chapter 2
Challenging the Monocracy
of the Copenhagen School



Abstract Quantum mechanicsâ€"the physical theory for atoms, radiation and their
interactionâ€"was developed in the first quarter of the twentieth century. This was
accompanied by a quarrel, with philosophical overtones, on its interpretation. Bohr
called it complementarity and later it was labeled the Copenhagen interpretation.
Complementarity spurred a debate among giants such as Bohr and Einstein. In 1952
David Bohm made the boldest challenge to this interpretation suggesting instead a
causal interpretation. The proposal was harshly criticized by most commentators
and supported by just a few. Bohm had joined the Communist Party in 1943 while at
Berkeley and was caught in the witch-hunt of the McCarthyism era. He opted for a
life of exile in Brazil, then Israel, and eventually England. His passport was
confiscated by U.S. officials and his citizenship was revoked. While some Soviet
scholars criticized the complementarity interpretation as idealistic, and thus bour-
geois, they did not endorse Bohm’s endeavor to recover determinism, which
frustrated Bohm. At the forefront of this battle it was two giants who quarreled:
Bohm and Rosenfeld. Both gifted physicists and dedicated Marxists, they nonethe-
less disagreed about how to interpret physics and its philosophical lessons. Bohm
promised to generalize his approach for the relativistic domain, but this was not
fulfilled. In the late 1950s, Bohm experienced a major intellectual change. He broke
with Marxism, abandoned the causal interpretation, moved towards Eastern
thinkers and began a long-standing project of reforming physics along the themes
of order and wholeness.




2.1 Interpretation of Quantum Theory Before David
Bohm1

The inception of quantum physics, between 1925 and 1927, and its early origins
dating back to 1900, along with the debates about its interpretation, are some of the
topics better exploited in the literature concerning the history of physics of the

1
In this chapter I draw from some of my previous works, in particular (Freire Jr. 1999, 2005,
2011a, b).

© Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2015 17
O. Freire Junior, The Quantum Dissidents, DOI 10.1007/978-3-662-44662-1_2
18 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


twentieth century. As it is impossible to give a fair account of that history in a few
introductory lines, I will only refer to some milestones of the debates before Bohm
entered the scene in the early 1950s. Quantum physics began with old phenomena
concerning electromagnetic radiation and its interaction with matter, and a few new
ideas, such as the quantum of action and the granularity of light. Its development
was marked by a close relationship between novel ideas and precision measure-
ments of new and old phenomena, which led to a completely new theoretical
landscape between 1925 and 1927. This landscape needed to be interpreted in
terms of physics in order to make sense of its abstract mathematical formalism.
This was divisive for physicists, creating what the philosopher Karl Popper (Popper
and Bartley 1982) would later call “the schism in Physics,” a controversy now more
than 8 decades old and only comparable to the one that pitted Newtonians against
Cartesians at the dawn of modern physics.
One of the poles of the controversy was the line of interpretation developed by
the Danish physicist Niels Bohr, which he christened “the complementarity view.”
In general, he considered complementarity’s main features to be the following: Max
Born’s quantum probabilistic descriptions are non-reducible to deterministic
descriptions; quantum jumps are intrinsic to quantum descriptions; the means of
observation play a prominent role, i.e. quantum phenomena should consider both
the system and the observation devices; classic concepts, such as wave and parti-
cles, are used in a complementary manner, i.e. not jointly in the same experiments
but in mutually exclusive ways; discreteness of the physical magnitude action is a
fundamental feature of nature; and quantum theory is considered a complete theory,
i.e. not superseded by other theories dealing with phenomena concerning radiation
and its interaction with matter.
Bohr’s thoughts were presented embedded in philosophical considerations
concerning the role of ordinary language in guaranteeing objectivity to research
in physics. First considered “obscure” by many, Bohr’s philosophy has been
scrutinized by philosophers in recent decades. Shoulder-to-shoulder with Bohr
were some of the creators of quantum theory, such as Werner Heisenberg, Max
Born, Pascual Jordan, and Wolfgang Pauli, each with subtle differences in their
interpretations. However, not all the founding fathers of quantum physics aligned
themselves with Bohr’s complementarity. Albert Einstein was initially skeptical
about the consistency of the theory, and later about its completeness, producing
several Gedankenexperiments to reveal shortcomings in the theory; Louis de
Broglie tried to maintain determinism and the images of wave and particles,
suggesting a model of particles being piloted by waves; and Erwin Schrödinger
did not accept quantum jumps and pleaded for a wave representation of quantum
phenomena.
In parallel to more philosophical and conceptual debates, John von Neumann
looked for a rigorous presentation of the quantum mathematical formalism in an
attempt to replace the coexisting, equivalent presentations of the quantum theory in
terms of matrixes, wave functions, and algebras. The Hungarian-born mathemati-
cian described all these previous presentations as special cases of a more general
mathematical framework, namely that of Hilbert’s space vectors. Von Neumann’s
2.1 Interpretation of Quantum Theory Before David Bohm 19


presentation would leave a lasting imprint on the debates on the foundations of
quantum physics as many of these debates took von Neumann’s as the orthodox
presentation of quantum theory. In particular, he formalized what quantum physi-
cists call “the reduction of the wave packet” to describe measurement processes as
an independent axiom in quantum theory (technically he described it as the work-
ings of a projection operator). It meant that measurements were not ruled by the
Schrödinger equation which now describes only the evolution of quantum states
before measurement processes. Later, this formulation would be the standard
introduction to the intractable measurement problem, the problem of the process
through which superposition of quantum states, the most fundamental quantum
feature, disappears during measurements. In addition, he provided a theorem
prohibiting the enlargement of quantum theory with additional or “hidden” vari-
ables. As we will see, one of David Bohm’s first achievements with his causal
interpretation was to create a practical counterexample to this rule.
The controversy on the interpretation and foundations of quantum physics,
“quantum controversy” as shorthand, was a heated topic among physicists in
1927, particularly at the Fifth Solvay International Conference on Electrons and
Photons held in Brussels in October of that year (Institut International de Physique
Solvay 1928; Bacciagaluppi and Valentini 2009). In the following years the debates
between Einstein and Bohr on this subject attracted the attention of physicists and
images and text featuring the two giants quarreling are now iconic in the culture of
physics. However, as time went by, physicists tended to attribute a less important
role to the controversy as more mundane subjects occupied their agenda. Applica-
tions and extensions of quantum physics and mainly nuclear physics dominated the
scene in the 1930s.
20 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School




Picture 2.1 Bohr and Einstein’s debate portrayed in the artistic imaginationâ€"Sculpture in Park
Muzeon, Moscow. Photo by Climério P. da Silva Neto


During the war more practical efforts, mainly related to the building of the
atomic bomb and radar, absorbed physicists’ energies, at least in the US. After the
war, old themes such as the discovery of new particles, fixing the machinery of
quantum electrodynamics, and a renewed approach to solid state caught the atten-
tion of the physicists. Indeed, since the middle of the 1930s, the typical physicist
either considered foundational issues to be off the main agenda of physics or
thought that they had already been solved by Niels Bohr and his close companions.
As reminded by the Danish physicist Christian Møller, assistant of Niels Bohr in
Copenhagen, “although we listened to hundreds and hundreds of talks about these
things, and we were interested in it, I don’t think, except Rosenfeld perhaps, that
any of us were spending so much time with this thing . . . When you are young it is
more interesting to attack definite problems. I mean this was so general, nearly
philosophical.”2 Those were the times the historian of physics Max Jammer

2
C. Møller, interviewed by T.S Kuhn, 29 July 1963, Archives for the History of Quantum Physics
(hereafter AHQP), American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, PA, cited in Jacobsen (2012,
p. 55).
2.2 Bohm’s Causal Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics 21


referred to as the “almost unchallenged monocracy of the Copenhagen school in the
philosophy of quantum mechanics.” Although research on the foundations of
quantum theory was not a priority in the early 1950s, interest in the subject was
far from dead. Indeed the first salvos in the new battles were fired by Niels Bohr
reviewing their disagreements in the paper (“Discussion with Einstein on Episte-
mological Problems in Atomic Physics”) for the volume of “The Library of Living
Philosophers” edited by P. A. Schilpp to honor Einstein (Bohr 1949; Einstein 1949;
Schilpp and Einstein 1949). Bohr’s paper and Einstein’s reply played a role in
arousing the dormant debate. Einstein himself continued to voice his discomfort
with quantum physics and new critics of the complementarity view were appearing
among Soviet physicists and philosophers.3 All these criticisms influenced David
Bohm, as we will see.



2.2 Bohm’s Causal Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics

In early July 1951, the American physicist David Bohm, from Princeton University,
submitted a lengthy paper entitled “A suggested interpretation of the quantum
theory in terms of ‘hidden’ variables” to the prestigious journal Physical Review.
The paper was organized in two parts, both published in early 1952, and the
technical title hid its far-reaching philosophical implications (Bohm 1952b). Soon
both David Bohm and his critics were using “causal interpretation” to label his
approach to quantum theory, clarifying Bohm’s ambition to restore a kind of
determinism analogous to that of classical mechanics (Bohm 1952a, 1953a;
Bohm and Vigier 1954). Unlike the early critics of quantum mechanics, Bohm
did not just express hopes of going back to a causal description for atomic
phenomena. In fact, he built a model for his approach which assumed that an object
like an electron is a particle with a well defined path, which means it is simulta-
neously well defined in both position and momentum. It is noteworthy that in
quantum theory it is precisely the impossibility of such a simultaneous determina-
tion which breaks with the classical determinism, while in classical mechanics the
possibility of that simultaneous definition assures the classical deterministic
description. Bohm’s work had philosophical implications as a consequence of its
physical assumptions. According to him, this interpretation “provides a broader
conceptual framework than the usual interpretation, because it makes possible a
precise and continuous description of all processes, even at the atomic level.” More
explicitly, he stated that,
This alternative interpretation permits us to conceive of each individual system as being in a
precisely definable state, whose changes with time are determined by definite laws,
analogous to (but not identical with) the classical equations of motion. Quantum-



3
For the debates before 1950 see Jammer (1974), for Jammer’s quotation, see his p. 250. For the
Soviet critics see Graham (1987).
22 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School

mechanical probabilities are regarded (like their counterparts in classical statistical
mechanics) as only a practical necessity and not as a manifestation of an inherent lack of
complete determination in the properties of matter at the quantum level. (Bohm 1952b,
p. 166)

Fully aware of the philosophical implications of his proposal, Bohm concluded
the paper by criticizing the usual interpretation of quantum mechanics on philo-
sophical grounds. He accused “the development of the usual interpretation” of
quantum theory of being “guided to a considerable extent by the principle of not
postulating the possible existence of entities which cannot now be observed,” and
remarked that “the history of scientific research is full of examples in which it was
very fruitful indeed to assume that certain objects or elements might be real, long
before any procedures were known which would permit them to be observed
directly,” the case of the atomistic hypothesis being the best historical example.
Bohm also noted that this principle derived from the “general philosophical point of
view known during the nineteenth century as ‘positivism’ or ‘empiricism.’” Then
he explained to his readers that “a leading nineteenth-century exponent of the
positivist view was Mach.” While conceding that “modern positivists appear to
have retreated from this extreme position,” he stated that this position was still
reflected “in the philosophical point of view adopted by a large number of modern
theoretical physicists.” Apart from this philosophical digression, the philosophical
implications of Bohm’s proposal concerned not only the recovery of determinism as
a mode of description of physical phenomena, but also the adoption of a realist
point of view toward physical theories, both discarded by the complementarity
view.4
Later in his career, Bohm (1987, p. 33) emphasized that recovering determinism
was not his main motivation and that his major dissatisfaction was that “the theory
could not go beyond the phenomena or appearances.” Building an ontology to
explain phenomena would become a permanent goal in Bohm’s research with
determinism pushed down on his agenda. However, in the 1950s Bohm and the
debate triggered by his proposal did indeed promote the recovery of determinism.
To illustrate the strength of the attachment of Bohm and his collaborators to the
philosophical priority of causality, we can make reference to the work he and Jean-
Pierre Vigier did in 1954, changing Bohm’s original model slightly. In this work,
they embedded the electron in a fluid undergoing “very irregular and effectively
random fluctuation” in its motion (Bohm and Vigier 1954). While these fluctuations
could be explained by either a deterministic or a stochastic description, Bohm and
Vigier framed them into the causal interpretation approach, giving their paper the
title “Model of the causal interpretation of quantum theory in terms of a fluid with
irregular fluctuations.”


4
Bohm (Bohm 1952b, pp. 188â€"189). Bohm’s reference to Ernst Mach, criticizing the positivist
view, is a shibboleth of his Marxist background, a feature we will return to later, as this reference
gained currency among Marxists in the first half of the twentieth century following the diffusion of
Materialism and Empirio-criticism (Lenin 1947).
2.2 Bohm’s Causal Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics 23


Bohm not only suggested a new conceptual and philosophical framework. He
also raised the stakes by suggesting his approach could be fruitful in new domains
of physics, promising that “modifications can quite easily be formulated in such a
way that their effects are insignificant in the atomic domain [. . .] but of crucial
importance in the domain of dimensions of the order of 10 13 cm.” Bohm was
indeed referring to intra-nuclear distances, an area in which there was a prolifera-
tion of discoveries of new particles requiring the development of new methods in
quantum field theories. Bohm’s promises, however, were as appealing as vague,
saying that “it is thus entirely possible that some of the modifications describable in
terms of our suggested alternative interpretation, but not in terms of the usual
interpretation, may be needed for a more thorough understanding of phenomena
associated with very small distances.” The promise of fulfillment of such an
expectation was then postponed: “we shall not, however, actually develop such
modifications in any detail in these papers” (Bohm 1952b, p. 166).
In Bohm’s original model, electrons suffer physical influences both from poten-
tials, such as electromagnetic potentials, and from a new potential resulting from
mathematical manipulations of the Schrödinger equation, which Bohm labeled the
“quantum potential.” Technically this new potential arises when one exploits
analogies between the Schrödinger equation of quantum theory and the Hamilton-
Jacobi equation of classical mechanics. To make a clear comparison, let us take an
electron with well defined positions described by a function of the form ψ ¼ R exp
(iS/ h), which must satisfy the Schrödinger equation, and let us call R(x)2 ¼ P(x).
After some mathematical manipulations we get Eqs. (2.1) and (2.2) resulting from
Bohm’s approach.

∂P=∂t þ ∇ðP∇S=mÞ ¼ 0 ð2:1Þ
2
∂S=∂t þ ð∇SÞ =2m þ V þ U ¼ 0 ð2:2Þ

where

U ¼ h 2 =2m ∇2 R=R

Bohm then further exploited these analogies by suggesting that electrons have a
well defined momentum p ¼ ∇S(x). The same analogies suggest that the “extra”
term U in Eq. (2.2) may be interpreted as the action of a “quantum potential” on
electrons, in addition to the potentials known from classical physics, such as
electromagnetic potentials. In addition, according to this model, Eq. (2.1) is a
continuity equation, and Bohm suggests that we take P ¼ jψ(x)j2, where ψ is the
solution of the Schrödinger equation, to assure the conservation of the probability
density of an ensemble of particle positions. As remarked by Max Jammer (1988,
p. 693), “Bohm interprets [P] as the probability of the particle’s being at the
position defined by the argument x of ψ(x) and not, as Born conceived it, as the
probability of finding the particle at that position if performing a suitable measure-
ment.” Bohm’s model of electrons has well defined positions as well as momenta;
24 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


thus, they have continuous and well defined trajectories. These p’s and x’s are the
hidden variables in Bohm’s models. They are “hidden” when compared to standard
quantum mechanics as Heisenberg’s uncertainty relations forbid the simultaneous
precise definitions of positions and momenta. Later on, however, the physicist John
Bell, a supporter of Bohm’s proposal, would consider Bohm had been unhappy
choosing the term “hidden variables.” Bell would remark that complementarity is
the interpretation which hides either of the complementary variables as they could
not be considered images of the phenomena (Bell 2004, p. 201).5 In order to get
models which were able to produce the same results as quantum mechanics, Bohm
needed to ascribe well defined positions and momenta to the measurement devices
too. Thus, from the Hamiltonian (kinetic plus potential energies) of the coupling
between such devices and the micro systems, observable results could be predicted.
Bohm used these models to carry out detailed calculations of a number of different
problems, for instance, stationary states, transitions between stationary states
(including scattering problems), the Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen Gedankenexperi-
ment, and photoelectric and Compton effects. To achieve results compatible with
those from quantum mechanics, Bohm modeled light as electromagnetic waves. In
all these problems he found the results predicted by the usual mathematical
formalism of quantum theory (Jammer 1988; Bohm 1952b, p. 183).
Bohm’s achievement was not a minor one. He was able to build an approach to
quantum theory leading to the same predictions as usual quantum mechanics and
develop the first alternative interpretation to the dominance of the complementarity
view among physicists. This empirical equivalence was dependent on adopting
hidden variables in the system and in the measurement device, which was an
improvement on his initial approach. This was done in reacting to criticisms
made by Wolfgang Pauli. In fact, with this improvement Bohm’s approach became
superior to an earlier and analogous approach that had been suggested by Louis de
Broglie in 1927, then entitled the “pilot-wave approach” (Bohm 1952b, pp. 191â€"
193). This earlier approach was unknown to Bohm until he received Pauli’s
criticisms, as we will see later. To be more precise, Bohm’s approach was equiv-
alent to non-relativistic quantum mechanics as his electron model, for instance, did
not have “spin.”
That Bohm’s approach was unable to deal with relativistic systems is clear from
the equation of the quantum potential. Indeed, it is enough to take a system with two
electrons to see that the quantum potential tells us that an interaction could
propagate from one electron to the other instantaneously without any time depen-
dency. This would not have been considered a major flaw when Bohm published his
papers if one recalls that in the historical process of the creation of quantum
physics, non-relativistic equations came first and relativistic generalizations a little


5
According Bell’s words, “absurdly, such theories are known as ‘hidden variable’ theories.
Absurdly, for there is not in the wavefunction that one finds an image of the visible world, and
the results of experiments, but in the complementary ‘hidden’(!) variables.” I am thankful to
Michael Kiessling for calling my attention to Bell’s remarks.
2.3 Backgrounds of Bohm’s Causal Interpretation 25


later. At any rate, critics would ask Bohm for these generalizations and Bohm
would promise that they were under way.
Bohm’s papers also raised other philosophical and technical issues. Empirically
equivalent to the standard quantum mechanics, Bohm’s would be a nice example of
what philosophers call the underdetermination of theories by empirical data.
According to the philosopher Paul Feyerabend, after Bohm’s work, “it follows
that neither experience nor mathematics can help if a decision is to be made
between wave mechanics and an alternative theory which agrees with it in all
those points where the latter has been found to be empirically successful”
(Feyerabend 1960, p. 325). This philosophical thesis, also called the Duhem-
Quine thesis, a reference to the scientist and philosopher Pierre Duhem and the
philosopher Willard Van Orman Quine, was well set in logical terms but it was, and
it is, at least unpleasant for physicists to realize that some of their best theories are
not the only possible description of phenomena.6 Finally, Bohm’s approach was a
practical example showing that something was wrong with von Neumann’s math-
ematical proof against the possibility of introducing hidden variables in quantum
mechanics. Bohm was fully aware of this in his approach, making it explicit in his
papers, and he would attentively follow von Neumann’s reactions to his proposals
(Bohm 1952b, pp. 187â€"188). Finally, as we have already noted, Bohm did not
refuse the philosophical debate implied by his proposals as he not only defended his
approach with both technical and conceptual arguments, but also accused sup-
porters of the standard interpretation of being the twentieth-century equivalents
of the anti-atomists in the nineteenth century.



2.3 Backgrounds of Bohm’s Causal Interpretation

Before analyzing the reception of Bohm’s proposal by his fellow physicists, let us
go back to see how Bohm evolved towards this interpretation of quantum mechan-
ics. In addition, let us flesh out our history by considering the life and environment
of the person involved. Bohm’s proposal of a causal interpretation for quantum
physics was a surprising move both on the physics scene at the time and in his own
professional career. He had been awarded his PhD during World War II at Berkeley
under the supervision of Robert Oppenheimer, who was then already involved in
the Manhattan Project. His dissertation was dedicated to the subject of scattering in
proton deuteron collisions, which was a sensitive subject for the Manhattan Project;
thus it was immediately classified. As Bohm had no clearance to present his
dissertation and did not work on the atomic project due to his union activities and
links with the Communist Party he could not defend his PhD dissertation. Bohm
was then involved with the American Communist Party and the union activities of


6
On the Duhem-Quine thesis, see (Harding 1976). On quantum mechanics as an illustration of this
thesis, see Cushing (1994).
26 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


technical and scientific workers. It was the eve of the war and Bohm was attracted to
the Communist ranks as it seemed to him that the USSR could be an essential force
against the Nazis. In this move he was joined by a few of Oppenheimer’s students,
all of whom paid a high price for it after the war. Subsequently Bohm broke his
organizational ties with the Communist Party while keeping the same ideological
inclinations until the late 1950s. According to historian Alexei Kojevnikov (2002,
p. 166), “Bohm severed his ties with the organized communist movement while
remaining a convinced Marxist with a special interest in the philosophy of dialec-
tical materialism.”
The problem was solved with Oppenheimer testifying to the quality of Bohm’s
dissertation, which led Berkeley to grant him his doctoral degree. Still during the
war, as a research fellow at Berkeley, he began to work with the Australian Harrie
S. W. Massey on the problem of electrical currents passing through a gas in
magnetic fields, an issue considered relevant for the enrichment of uranium and
thus part of the Manhattan Project. The problem led them to study plasmas, but the
process of enrichment did not prove useful for the war effort. After the war, hired by
Princeton University, Bohm and his graduate student Eugene Gross resumed work
on plasmas, developing the approach called “collective variables in classical
plasmas.” Then, with the graduate student David Pines, Bohm moved to study
current in metals, elaborating a quantum approach to the phenomenon using the
same collective variable resource he had successfully applied to the classical
treatment of plasmas. His jointly-authored papers with Pines and Gross would
become landmarks in this field.7
Bohm was then considered by elder fellow physicists to be one of the most
promising American theoretical physicists of his generationâ€"“probably
Oppenheimer’s best student at Berkeley” according to historian Sam Schweberâ€"
and it was in this capacity that he was one of the few to be invited to the 1947
Shelter Island conference, the first of a series of conferences held in the US dealing
with topics such as high energy nuclear physics, new nuclear particles, and anom-
alies and procedures for fixing quantum electrodynamics.8 The list of topics on
which Bohm had worked until the late 1940s did not presage his move towards
working on the foundations of quantum physics.
Clues that might shed light on the inception of his alternative interpretation of
quantum theory come from his teaching duties at Princeton. Having been educated
at Berkeley, where “Bohr was God and Oppie [Oppenheimer] was his prophet,”
according to Weinberg, one of Oppenheimer’s students at Berkeley, Bohm’s classes
on quantum mechanics naturally reflected Bohr’s views on this theory. From these
classes his textbook Quantum Theory (Bohm 1951) emerged. A close inspection of

7
On Bohm’s biography, see Peat (1997) and Mullet (2008b). For an analysis of Bohm’s works, see
Kojevnikov (2002). Bohm and Gross (1949a, b), Bohm and Pines (1951, 1953), Pines and Bohm
(1952). The fourth paper in the series was authored only by Pines (1953).
8
Sam Schweber, “Bohm Memorial,” Folder A.M., David Bohm Papers, Birkbeck College,
University of London (hereafter BP), cited in Mullet (2008a, p. 40) and Mehra (1994, pp. 217â€"
218).
2.3 Backgrounds of Bohm’s Causal Interpretation 27


this book, however, reveals how far Bohm was from being truly Bohrian. Indeed,
Bohm’s Quantum Theory is remarkable for its attempt to combine Niels Bohr’s
complementarity with Bohm’s own kind of realism. While the former denied
quantum theory the ambition of describing a world independent of measurements,
the latter included an ontological description of the quantum world, referred to by
Bohm as “an attempt to build a physical picture of the quantum nature of matter.”
The book is also noteworthy for his conceptual clarity and a few innovations, such
as the reformulation of the EPR thought experiment using spin instead of position
and momentum, which later became the standard formulation for EPR theory and
experiments due to its mathematical simplicity. Bohm also included a treatment of
the measurement process using random phases, which he would use later in his
work on the causal interpretation.9
When the book came out, Bohm was already moving towards the elaboration of
his causal interpretation. Later he would acknowledge at least two influences on his
move: a discussion with Albert Einstein at the Institute of Advanced Studies in
Princeton after the book was published and the reading of a paper by a Soviet
physicist criticizing the complementarity view for its idealistic and subjectivist
inclinations. As told by historian Max Jammer,
Stimulated by his discussion with Einstein and influenced by an essay which, as he told the
present author, was “written in English” and “probably by Blokhintsev or some other
Russian theorist like Terletzkii,” and which criticized Bohr’s approach, Bohm began to
study the possibility of introducing hidden variables. (Jammer 1974, p. 279)

Later Jammer (1988, p. 692) reiterated this story in a kind of Festschrift for
Bohm’s 70th birthday. Bohm never contested it. This information, however, raised
a doubt, as Jammer himself noted. “Bohm [had] forgotten the exact title and author
of this paper” and there was no paper either by Blokhintsev or by Terletzkii
published in English before Bohm’s shift to the causal interpretation (Jammer
1974, p. 279 footnote 63). Indeed, the papers by the Soviets criticizing comple-
mentarity published in Western languages appeared in French in 1952, while
Bohm’s shift to the causal interpretation occurred in 1951.10 The riddle may be
explained by free translations from the Soviet papers which may have circulated
among Marxist intellectual circles in the West before their publication. Plausible as
this explanation is, unfortunately, we do not have documentary evidence to support
it. Furthermore, the statement on the influence of the Soviet views in the inception
of the causal interpretation is crucial information given Bohm’s Marxist beliefs and
the role played by the criticisms from Soviet philosophers and physicists against the
complementarity interpretation in the quantum controversy (Graham 1972, 1987).
However, and again unfortunately, archival documents unearthed since then have
not been able to reinforce Jammer’s interesting clue. Indeed, most of Bohm’s
personal papers did not survive and he did not keep copies of his correspondence.
Later on, a few letters from him to some friends and fellow physicists surfaced but

9
For Weinberg’s statement, see Mullet (2008a, p. 39).
10
Blokhintsev (1952) and Terletsky (1952).
28 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


they are not enough to document the personal and intellectual environment at the
time of his move.11 Einstein’s conversation with Bohm after the publication of
Quantum Theory was the start of a relationship which would last until Einstein’s
death in 1955. Ironically, as it may seem, Einstein would support Bohm on several
grounds except in defense of Bohm’s approach to quantum mechanics. We will see
some of their exchanges throughout this chapter.



2.3.1 Trapped in the Cold War Storm

During the 1950s David Bohm would fight his most important intellectual battle
while pushing for the causal interpretation of quantum theory. That battle happened
in extreme personal circumstances as he was trapped in a Cold War storm that made
his story almost Kafkaesque. Back in 1949 he had been subpoenaed to appear
before the HUAC (House Committee on Un-American Activities) where he was
asked about his connections with the Communist Party. Bohm took the Fifth
Amendment of the US Constitution (the right to refuse to answer a question because
the response could be self-incriminating). In the anti-communist hysteria typical of
Cold War times in the US, a period later called McCarthyism, he was indicted for
contempt of Congress, arrested and then released on bail. In the following months
the court would find him not guilty. Like Kafka’s character in The Trial, Bohm
never knew exactly what he was accused of. As the historian David Kaiser
remarked, being a theoretical physicist with leftist inclinations in Cold War Amer-
ica was enough to mark anybody as a highly probable target of anticommunist
hysteria. For the American laymen, the atomic bomb could be reduced to a single
equation which could be passed on to the USSR. This would mean that the enemy
would immediately possess the same weapons America had developed during
World War II.12 Meanwhile, Princeton University suspended his contract,



11
The David Bohm Papers, deposited at Birkbeck College, University of London, reveal few
documents from the period prior to his departure to Brazil at the end of 1951, when the papers on
the causal interpretation had already been submitted for publication. After leaving the U.S., there is
a meaningful correspondence with Einstein; Melba Philips, an American physicist and friend of
Bohm; Hanna Loewy and Miriam Yevick, his friends. Most of the correspondence with Wolfgang
Pauli, relevant for the period prior to his departure from the U.S. and after the completion of his
paper in the causal interpretation, was recovered and published by Karl von Meyenn in the
collection dedicated to Pauli’s correspondence (Pauli and Meyenn 1996, 1999). More recently, a
batch of letters between Bohm and the French astrophysicist Evry Schatzman was unearthed by
Virgile Besson at Schatzman’s papers, Observatoire de Paris. These letters corroborate the main
points of our work. Furthermore, they weaken the possibility of Bohm’s reading of Soviet papers
while moving to build the causal interpretation. Indeed, he did not mention this in his letters to
Schatzman while describing his work to obtain this interpretation.
12
“The early years of the Cold War were not a pleasant time to be an intellectual in the United
States, especially if he or she happened to have a past or present interest in the political left. [. . .]
2.3 Backgrounds of Bohm’s Causal Interpretation 29


prevented him from attending classes and using the university libraries, and in June
1951 did not renew his contract.13




Picture 2.2 David Bohm reading a newspaper; after refusing to testify whether or not he was a
member of the Communist Party before the House Un-American Activities Committee. Library of
Congress, New York Worldâ€"Telegram and Sun Collection, courtesy AIP Emilio Segre Visual
Archives




theoretical physicists emerged as the most consistently named whipping-boys of McCarthyism”
(Kaiser 2005, p. 28).
13
Historians have already set the record of most of this history. The cases of persecution towards
Bohm and his colleagues at Berkeley, Bernard Peters, Joseph Weinberg, and Giovanni Rossi
Lomanitz have been well charted by Shawn Mullet (2008a); Princeton’s attitudes towards him
were analyzed by Russell Olwell (1999); the anti-communist hysteria in American academia was
studied by Ellen Schrecker (1986), Jessica Wang (1999), and David Kaiser (2005). Bohm’s
imprisonment and bail is also in Kojevnikov (2002, p. 181).
30 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


The intersection of Bohm’s political persecution and his move towards a new
interpretation of quantum theory has attracted the attention of historians. Christian
Forstner has suggested that isolation from Princeton and the American community
of physicists was influential in Bohm’s abandoning the standard interpretation of
quantum physics and adopting a heterodox interpretation. Unfortunately, as we
have previously discussed, historians have to deal with the scant documentary
evidence around the circumstances of these events in the crucial months in
Bohm’s life between his appearance at the HUAC in 1949, the publication of his
book Quantum Theory, and the completion of his causal interpretation in the middle
of 1951. As such, we may only deal with plausible conjectures in mapping the
influences and motivations of his move toward the causal interpretation.14



2.3.2 Bohm, de Broglie, and Pauli: Conceptual Issues
and Disputes About Priorities

Bohm was unaware of previous work by Louis de Broglie along analogous lines.
What we may reconstruct about how Bohm reacted when informed of de Broglie’s
works sheds light on the kind of technical problems he needed to solve in order to
make his proposal consistent. It is also illuminating regarding the disputes and
alliances in the controversy over the foundations of quantum physics. Last but not
least, as Wolfgang Pauli was one of the people to warn Bohm about de Broglie’s
works and as their exchange is one of the most relevant for the early debate on the
causal interpretation, it is interesting to see their discussion in some detail. Before
Bohm’s papers appeared in print, Einstein and Pauli informed him that de Broglie
had suggested a similar approach at the 1927 Solvay conference, which Bohm had
not known about. Pauli had criticized de Broglie’s approach when first proposed
and de Broglie had reacted by giving up his idea. Now Bohm had to face the same
objections. Pauli had argued that de Broglie’s proposal fitted Max Born’s probabi-
listic interpretation of the ψ function only for elastic collisions. In the case of
inelastic scattering of particles by a rotator, a problem Enrico Fermi had solved in
1926, de Broglie’s idea was incompatible with assigning stationary states to a
rotator, before and after the scattering. Pauli had considered this failure intrinsic
to de Broglie’s picture of particles with definite trajectories in space-time, an
approach de Broglie had called the “pilot wave”, which means particles with well
defined paths ruled by waves coming from the Schrödinger equation.15

14
On the influences on Bohm’s shift towards the causal interpretation, see Jammer (1974, 1988)
and Forstner (2008).
15
Einstein’s remark is in Paty (1993). Bohm to Pauli, [Jul 1951], in Pauli and Meyenn (1996,
pp. 343â€"345). Most of Pauli’s letters to Bohm did not survive; we infer their contents from Bohm’s
replies. Bohm to Karl von Meyenn, 2 Dec 1983, ibid, on 345. Broglie’s pilot wave and Pauli’s
criticisms are in (Institut International de Physique Solvay 1928, pp. 105â€"141 and 280â€"282). See
also Bacciagaluppi and Valentini (2009).
2.3 Backgrounds of Bohm’s Causal Interpretation 31


Pauli addressed his criticisms toward a draft version, which Bohm corrected in
consequence. This draft has not survived, but an indication of the corrections has. In
response to Pauli’s criticisms Bohm wrote: “I hope that this new copy will answer
some of the objections to my previous manuscript . . . to sum up my answer to your
criticisms . . . I believe that they were based on the excessively abstract assumptions
of a plane wave of infinite extent for the electrons’ Ψ function. As I point out in
section 7 of paper I, if you had chosen an incident wave packet instead, then after
the collision is over, the electron ends up in one of the outgoing wave packets, so
that a stationary state is once more obtained.” Initially Pauli did not read the second
manuscript as he considered it too long, which angered Bohm. He rebuked Pauli:
“If I write a paper so ‘short’ that you will read it, then I cannot answer all of your
objections. If I answer all of your objections, then the paper will be too ‘long’ for
you to read. I really think that it is your duty to read these papers carefully.” As a
precaution, he summarized his views and the improvements in letters16:
In the second version of the paper, these objections are all answered in detail. The second
version differs considerably from the first version. In particular, in the second version, I do
not need to use “molecular chaos.” You refer to this interpretation as de Broglie’s. It is true
that he suggested it first, but he gave it up because he came to the erroneous conclusion that
it does not work. The essential new point that I have added is to show in detail (especially
by working out the theory of measurement in paper II) that his interpretation leads to all of
the results of the usual interpretation. Section 7 of paper I is also new [transitions between
stationary statesâ€"the Franck-Hertz experiment], and gives a similar treatment to the more
restricted problem of the interaction of two particles, showing that after the interaction is
over, the hydrogen atom is left in a definite “quantum state” while the outgoing scattered
particle has a corresponding definite value for its energy.

Eventually, Pauli analyzed Bohm’s papers as well as the letters. Pauli conceded
that Bohm’s model was logically consistent, which was recognition of Bohm’s
work: “I do not see any longer the possibility of any logical contradiction as long as
your results agree completely with those of the usual wave mechanics and as long as
no means is given to measure the values of your hidden parameters both in the
measuring apparatus and in the observed system.” Pauli ended with a challenge,
related to Bohm’s promise of applying his approach to new domains such as high
energy physics: “as far as the whole matter stands now, your ‘extra wave-
mechanical predictions’ are still a check, which cannot be cashed.” Pauli never
ceased to oppose the hidden variable interpretation and would formulate new
objections, as we will see later. For Bohm, however, Pauli’s challenge now was
less pressing than de Broglie’s.17
Before 1927, Louis de Broglie had had the idea of a “double solution,” in which
the waves of Schrödinger’s equation pilot the particles, which are singularities of
the waves. Just before the meeting of the Solvay council on October 24â€"29, 1927 he
gave up this idea because of its mathematical difficulties and presented his report to


16
Bohm to Pauli, July 1951, Summer 1951, Oct 1951, 20 Nov 1951 (Pauli and Meyenn 1996,
pp. 343â€"346, 389â€"394, and 429â€"462).
17
Pauli to Bohm, 3 Dec 1951, plus an appendix, (Pauli and Meyenn 1996, pp. 436â€"441).
32 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


the meeting with just the “pilot wave” proposal. The particles were reduced to
objects external to the theory. After the 1927 meeting he adhered to the comple-
mentarity interpretation. Bohm was right in remarking that de Broglie had not
carried his ideas to their logical conclusion, but de Broglie surely had a share in the
idea of hidden variables in quantum mechanics. Bohm resisted accepting this. He
suggested the following interesting analogy which expresses the silent dispute
about priorities between the two physicists, the young American and the elder
Frenchman: “If one man finds a diamond and then throws it away because he
falsely concludes that it is a valueless stone, and if this stone is later found by
another man who recognize its true value, would you not say that the stone belongs
to the second man? I think the same applies to this interpretation of the quantum
theory.”18
In the end Bohm adopted a diplomatic way, suggested by Pauli, to recognize de
Broglie’s contribution while maintaining the superiority of his own work: “I have
changed the introduction of my paper so as to give due credit to de Broglie, and
have stated that he gave up the theory too soon (as suggested in your letter).” In
addition to changing the introduction, he added “a discussion of interpretations of
the quantum theory proposed by de Broglie and Rosen” and rebutted Pauli’s
criticisms. By the time Bohm’s papers appeared in print, de Broglie had returned
to his old causal approach reviving the idea of “double solution” with his assistant
Jean-Pierre Vigier. They would become the most important of Bohm’s allies in the
hidden-variable campaign.19



2.3.3 Exile in Brazil

Let us now return to the outcomes of the troubles Bohm was facing in the era of
McCarthyism. After Princeton refused to renew his contract, Bohm realized that it
was highly unlikely that he would get another job in American academia as the
witch-hunt was growing in America. He therefore looked for opportunities abroad
and left the US exiling himself for the rest of his life. He left the US for Brazil,
Brazil for Israel, and Israel for the UK, where he finally settled. It was after
unsuccessfully attempting to work in the UK, in particular Manchester, that
Bohm considered the possibility of exile in Brazil. A small group of Brazilian
physicists had graduated from Princeton, among them Jayme Tiomno, who had
graduated under John Wheeler and Eugene Wigner in 1950; José Leite Lopes, who
had studied under Wolfgang Pauli and Josef Jauch in 1946 and was named a
Guggenheim Fellow in 1949; and Walter Schutzer who had completed a Master’s
degree in 1949. Bohm was one of the readers of Tiomno’s doctoral dissertation and


18
For the evolution of de Broglie’s ideas, see Broglie (1956, pp. 115â€"143). Bohm to Pauli, Oct
1951, op. cit.
19
Bohm to Pauli, 20 Nov 1951, op. cit. (Bohm 1952b, pp. 191â€"193).
2.3 Backgrounds of Bohm’s Causal Interpretation 33


served as the chairman of his dissertation committee when Wigner was away.
Tiomno invited Bohm to the University of São Paulo. The appointment had the
recommendation of Einstein and Oppenheimer and the support at the University of
São Paulo of Abrahão de Moraes, then the head of the Physics Department, and
Aroldo de Azevedo, an influential geographer. Later, to keep Bohm in his Brazilian
position, de Moraes asked Einstein to send letters for an eventual promotion
addressed to the highest administrative levels, including President Getúlio Vargas.
Bohm arrived in Brazil on October 10, 1951 and would leave for Israel in early
1955.20
Bohm went to Brazil an innocent and, as soon as he arrived, he wrote optimis-
tically to Einstein, “The university is rather disorganized, but this will cause no
trouble in the study of theoretical physics. There are several good students here,
with whom it will be good to work.” Later, however, he expressed considerable
dissatisfaction: “The country here is very poor and not as advanced technically as
the U.S., nor is it as clean.” “I am afraid that Brazil and I can never agree.” “Brazil
is an extremely backward and primitive country.” One month after his arrival
American officials confiscated his passport and told him that he could only retrieve
it to return to his native country. This profoundly changed Bohm’s fate and morale.
He wrote to Einstein, “Now what alarms me about this is that I do not know what it
means. The best possible interpretation is that they simply do not want me to leave
Brazil, and the worst is that they are planning to carry me back because perhaps
they are reopening this whole dirty business again. The uncertainty is certainly very
disturbing, as it makes planning for the next few years very difficult.” Bohm’s stay
in Brazil, without a passport, changed his mood; he wrote to Melba Phillips: “Ever
since I lost the passport, I have been depressed and uneasy, particularly since I was
counting very much on [a] trip to Europe as an antidote to all the problems that I
have mentioned.” Bohm’s mood oscillated also depending on the reception of his
ideas and the work he had done on them. In addition, his hopes were not modest. “If
I can succeed in my general plan, physics can be put back on a basis much nearer to
common sense than it has been for a long time.” Once he wrote, “I gave two talks on
the subject here, and aroused considerable enthusiasm among people like Tiomno,
Schutzer, and Leal-Ferreira, who are assistants . . . Tiomno has been trying to
extend the results to the Dirac equation, and has shown some analogy with
Einstein’s field equations.” And then, “I am becoming discouraged also because I
lack contact with other people, and feel that there is a general lack of interest in new
ideas among physicists throughout the world.”21


20
Albert Einstein to Patrick Blackett, 17 Apr 1951, Albert Einstein Archives. Jayme Tiomno,
interviewed by the author, 4 Aug 2003. Record number 816/51 [microfilm], Archives of the
Faculdade de Filosofia, Ciências e Letras, USP. Abrahão de Moraes did not need to use the letter
to President Vargas, it is published in Estudos avançados, [São Paulo] 21 (1994).
21
David Bohm to Albert Einstein, Nov 1951, BP (C.10â€"11). David Bohm to Hanna Loewy, 6 Oct
1953, BP (C.39). David Bohm to Albert Einstein, Dec 1951, BP (C.10â€"11). David Bohm to Albert
Einstein, 3 Feb 1954. Albert Einstein Archives. David Bohm to Melba Phillips, n.d., BP (C.46â€"
C.48). David Bohm to Melba Phillips, 28 June 1952; ibid., [w.d.], BP (C.46â€"C.48). David Bohm to
Hanna Loewy, 6 Oct 1953, BP (C.39).
34 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


As we will see, in Brazil Bohm continued to work consistently on the causal
interpretation, kept in contact with colleagues abroad, discussed his proposal with
visitors from Europe and the United States, profited from collaboration with
Brazilian physicists, and published results on the causal interpretation. Thus
Bohm’s activities in Brazil did not reflect the pessimistic views he expressed in
some of the letters he wrote at the time. They tell us more about his personality and
the context. That context was conditioned by political insecurity and by the adverse
reception of his proposal among his fellow physicists, a subject we discuss in the
following section. Bohm would have faced many of the obstacles that he faced in
Brazil elsewhere in working on a causal interpretation. Furthermore, Bohm’s
double identity as a Marxist and a Jew was not a liability in Brazil; on the contrary,
it probably garnered him support. Brazil had been a terre d’accueil for Jews since
the beginning of the twentieth century and following the participation of the
country in World War II with the Allies, the dictatorship called Estado Novo
(1937â€"1939) ceded room to a democratic regime. While political liberties were
limited from 1945 to 1964, they were enough for Communists to continue to play a
role in Brazilian life. Examples are the writers Jorge Amado and Graciliano Ramos,
the painter C^andido Portinari, the historian Caio Prado Jr., the physicist Mário
Schönberg, and the architect Oscar Niemeyer.22
Moreover, Bohm arrived in Brazil at a propitious time for Brazilian physics.
Cesare Lattes had participated in the discovery of cosmic-ray pions in 1947 in the
UK, and in 1948 in the detection of artificially produced pions at Berkeley. These
achievements resonated in Brazil, especially after the role of science in the war and
the production of the first atomic bomb. An alliance among scientists, the military,
businessmen, and politicians was developed so as to strengthen physics in Brazil.
This led to the creation of the Centro Brasileiro de Pesquisas Fı́sicas [CBPF] in Rio
de Janeiro and, in the same year that Bohm arrived in Brazil, to the creation of the
first federal agency exclusively dedicated to funding scientific research, CNPq.
Bohm received several grants from CNPq to develop the causal interpretation.
Visits to Brazil by Ralph Schiller and Mario Bunge, both his invitees, and visits
by Jean-Pierre Vigier and Léon Rosenfeld were afforded by this agency. Most of
the money Bohm received went to research on cosmic rays, a field under Bohm’s
responsibility at USP. Nevertheless, the board of CNPq explicitly supported the
development of the causal interpretation. An indication of the interest of CNPq in
the research appears in the report of Joquim Costa Ribeiro, physicist and the
Scientific Director of the agency, on Bohm’s application for funds for Vigier23:


22
For more details on Bohm’s stay in Brazil, see (Freire Jr. 2005, pp. 4â€"7 and 10â€"19). On Jews in
Brazil, see Rattner (1977); on Brazilian communist intellectuals, see Rodrigues (1996, p. 412).
During the 1930s, however there were some obstacles to Jews in Brazil, see Saidel and
Plonski (1994).
23
On Lattes’s cosmic ray work, see Vieira and Videira (2014). On Brazilian physics in the early
1950s, see Andrade (1999), Brownell (1952). Costa Ribeiro’s report is in Arquivos do CNPq
(Records of the Conselho Diretor, 139th meeting, 25 Feb 1953), Museu de Astronomia, Rio de
Janeiro.
2.4 Critics and Supporters of the Causal Interpretation 35

I call the attention of the Board to the interest of this subject. Prof. Bohm is today on the
agenda of theoretical physics at an international level owing to his theory, which is a little
revolutionary because it intends to restore to quantum mechanics the principle of deter-
minism, which seems, in a certain way, to have been shaken by Heisenberg’s principle.
Prof. Bohm seems to have found one solution to this difficulty of modern physics, trying to
reconcile quantum mechanics with the rigid determinism of classical physics. I am not
speaking in detailed technical terms, but summarizing the issue. Bohm’s theory has given
rise to a great debate in Europe and United States, and Prof. Vigier has expressed his
willingness to come to Brazil, mainly to meet the team of theoretical physicists and discuss
the problem here. This seems to me to be a very prestigious thing for Brazil and our
scientific community.




2.4 Critics and Supporters of the Causal Interpretation

Bohm’s approach to quantum mechanics did not pass unnoticed, as revealed by
research into archives containing correspondence and papers from the early 1950s.
As a matter of fact, most of the physicists who reacted to the causal interpretation
were downright hostile to it, while a few of them became strong supporters, and a
number of others had mixed reactions. Let us try to chart the initial reception of the
causal interpretation, as it is illuminating of the dominant climate at that time
towards research on the foundations of quantum physics. Wolfgang Pauli and
Léon Rosenfeld were the first to react, Pauli even while the papers were in draft,
as we have seen. Pauli concentrated on the physical and epistemological aspects,
Rosenfeld on the philosophical and ideological ones. As Rosenfeld explained his
strategy to Pauli, “My own contribution to the anniversary volume [for de Broglie]
has a different character. I deliberately put the discussion on the philosophical
ground, because it seems to me that the root of evil is there rather than in physics.”
Let us first examine Pauli’s reaction.24
After Bohm’s papers appeared in print, Pauli advanced new criticisms, which
Bohm knew of before their publication. Bohm was astonished: “I am surprised that
Pauli has had the nerve to publicly come out in favor of such nonsense . . . I
certainly hope that he publishes his stuff, as it is so full of inconsistencies and
errors that I can attack him from several different directions at once.” Pauli had
criticized the causal interpretation for not preserving the symmetry between posi-
tion and momentum representations, expressed in the standard formalism by the
possibility of changing basis in the vector space through unitary transformations.
He had also complained that Bohm’s approach had borrowed the meaning of Ψ
from quantum theory. In a letter to Markus Fierz, Pauli raised the stakes on the
philosophical grounds. He observed that Catholics and Communists depended on
determinism to buttress their eschatological faiths, the former in the heaven to
come, the latter in paradise on earth. These references were implicitly directed to
Louis de Broglie on the one hand, and to Bohm and Vigier on the other. Pauli also

24
Léon Rosenfeld to Wolfgang Pauli, 20 Mar 1952, in Pauli and Meyenn (1996).
36 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


warned his old friend Giuseppe Occhialini about “Bohm in São Paulo and his
‘causal’ quantum theory.” Occhialini had worked in Brazil at USP during the
1930s and continued scientific collaboration there after the war. Pauli’s substantive
and persistent attack on Bohm’s approach was based on two issues: Since it does
not have “any effects on observable phenomena, neither directly nor indirectly . . .
the artificial asymmetry introduced in the treatment of the two variables of a
canonically conjugated pair characterizes this form of theory as artificial metaphys-
ics.” And yet, “[if the] new parameters could give rise to empirically visible effects
. . . they will be in disagreement with the general character of our experiences, [and]
in this case this type of theory loses its physical sense.” Apparently, this criticism of
Pauli echoed well among physicists. “Incidentally, Pauli has come up with an idea
(in the presentation volume for de Broglie’s 50th birthday) which slays Bohm not
only philosophically but physically as well,” wrote Max Born to Einstein.25
Among the physicists who supported the complementarity view Rosenfeld
played a singular role as a vocal and harsh critic of the causal interpretation. This
role should be framed, however, by considering the following issues. While he had
been Niels Bohr’s closest assistant for epistemological matters, as an adept of
Marxism he saw the battle against the causal interpretation as part of the defense
of what he considered to be the right relationship between Marxism and science.
Indeed Rosenfeld was sensitive to criticisms against complementarity coming from
the Marxist camp even before the appearance of the causal interpretation. It was the
beginning of what the historian of science Loren Graham called “the age of the
banishment of complementarity” in the USSR, as part of the Zhdanovshchina, “the
most intense ideological campaign in the history of Soviet scholarship.” As early as
1949, following criticisms appearing in the USSR, he wrote to Bohr, “[I am] just
writing an article on ‘Komplementaritet og modern Rationalisme’ in order to clear
up the various misunderstandings which arise when one tries to mix complemen-
tarity in all possible sorts of mysticism, whatever it is a question of idealism as with
Eddington and others, or about the Russian Pseudo-Marxism. These many ‘ismes’
are surely too tedious to [you] but [I] feel that one cannot any longer content oneself
by ignoring that nonsense.”26
Rosenfeld went so far as to deny the very existence of a controversy on the
interpretation of quantum physics, writing to Bohm, “I certainly shall not enter into
any controversy with you or anybody else on the subject of complementarity, for
the simple reason that there is not the slightest controversial point about it.”


25
Bohm to Beck [w/d], Guido Beck Papers, Centro Brasileiro de Pesquisas Fı́sicas, Rio de Janeiro.
Beck had reported to Bohm the content of Pauli’s seminar in Paris, in 1952. The criticisms were
published in Pauli’s contribution to the Louis de Broglie Festschrift, see Pauli (1953). Pauli to
Markus Fierz, 6 Jan 1952, in Pauli and Meyenn (1996, pp. 499â€"502); Pauli to Giuseppe Occhialini,
[1951â€"1952]. Archivio Occhialini 5.1.14, Università degli studi, Milan. Max Born to Einstein,
26 Nov 1953, in (Einstein et al. 1971).
26
For Rosenfeld’s biography, see Jacobsen (2012). On the debates on the quantum theory in the
former USSR, see Graham (1987, p. 325 and 328). Rosenfeld to Bohr, 31 May 1949, Bohr Scient.
Corr, AHQP.
2.4 Critics and Supporters of the Causal Interpretation 37


For Rosenfeld, complementarity was both a direct result of experience and an
essential part of quantum theory. Since complementarity implied the abandonment
of determinism, as it precludes the simultaneous definition of position and momen-
tum, which is the basis of mechanical determinism, Rosenfeld saw the causal
interpretation as a metaphysical regression, writing, “determinism has not escaped
this fate [becoming an obstacle to progress]; the physicist who still clings to it, who
shuts his eyes to the evidence of complementarity, exchanges (whether he likes it or
not) the rational attitude of the scientist for that of the metaphysician.” Every good
Marxist should understand that. “The latter [metaphysician], as Engels aptly
describes him, considers things ‘in isolation, the one after the other and the one
without the other,’ as if they were ‘fixed, rigid, given once for all.’” Rosenfeld
believed that complementarity was a dialectical achievement that had to be
defended not only against Bohm’s criticisms but also against Soviet critics who
blamed it for introducing idealism into physics. Rosenfeld’s brand of Marxism was
Western Marxism rather than the Soviet variety, to use the terms used by Perry
Anderson. Thus Rosenfeld was orthodox in quantum mechanics and heterodox in
Marxism.27
Rosenfeld mobilized colleagues wherever he could to take up the fight against
the causal interpretation. He appealed to his professional connections as well as
companions sharing ideological ties with Marxism. He pushed Frédéric Joliot-
Curieâ€"a Nobel prize winner and member of the French Communist Partyâ€"to
oppose French Marxist critics of complementarity28; advised Pauline Yatesâ€"
Secretary of the “Society for cultural relations between the peoples of the British
Commonwealth and the USSR”â€"to withdraw her translation of a paper by Yakov
Ilich Frenkel critical of complementarity from Nature; asked Nature not to publish
a paper by Bohm entitled “A causal and continuous interpretation of the quantum




27
Léon Rosenfeld to David Bohm, 30 May 1952, Léon Rosenfeld Papers, Niels Bohr Archive,
Copenhagen (hereafter RP). In the French version of the paper, Rosenfeld (1953) emphasized the
idea of complementarity resulting from experience, but in the English version, reacting to
criticisms from Max Born, he attenuated his stand, changing “La relation de complémentarité
comme donné de l’expérience” to “Complementarity and experience.” On Born’s criticism, see
Freire Jr. and Lehner (2010). “But in any case the relation of complementarity is the first example
of a precise dialectical scheme, whose formal structure has been accurately analysed by the
logicians” (Rosenfeld 1953). For Western Marxism, see Anderson (1976).
28
“Je crois mon devoir de vous signaler une situation que je considère comme très sérieuse et qui
vous touche de près. Il s’agit de vos ‘poulains’ Vigier, Schatzman, Vassails e tutti quanti, tous
jeunes gens intelligents et pleins du désir de bien faire. Malheureusement, pour le moment, ils sont
bien malades. Ils se sont mis en teÌ‚te qu’il fallait mordicus abattre la complémentarité et sauver le
déterminisme.” He did not succeed; Joliot diplomatically kept his distance from the battle. “Autant
je suis d’accord avec leurs préoccupations concernant les grands principes de la physique
moderne, autant je suis d’accord avec vous sur la nécessité d’en comprendre le sens exact et
profond avant de se lancer dans des discussions avec des citations qui ne sont que des planages
trahissant parfois leurs auteurs.” Léon Rosenfeld to Frédéric Joliot-Curie, 6 Apr 1952; Joliot to
Rosenfeld, 21 Apr 1952. RP. See also Pinault (2000, p. 508).
38 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


theory;” and advised publishers not to translate one of de Broglie’s books dedicated
to the causal interpretation into English.29
Rosenfeld’s correspondence shows that his campaign had wide support, as
testified by Denis Gabor, “I was much amused by the onslaught on David Bohm,
with whom I had a long discussion on this subject in New York, in Sept. 51. Half a
dozen of the most eminent scientists have got their knife into him. Great honour for
somebody so young.” Positive letters came from Abraham Pais, Robert Cohen,
Vladimir Fock, Jean-Louis Destouches, Robert Havemann, and Adolf Grünbaum.
Pais, who had been a student of Rosenfeld in Utrecht, wrote, “I find your piece
about complementarity interesting and good . . . I could not get very excited about
Bohm. Of course it doesn’t do any good, but (with the exception of Parisian
reactions) it also doesn’t do any harm. I find that Bohm wastes his energy and
that it will harm him personally a lot because he is moving into the wrong
directionâ€"but he needs to realize this himself, he is a difficult person.” Cohen, a
young Marxist physicist, wrote, “I turn to you because my own reaction to the
Bohm thing and to the pilot wave revival has been quite negative, while yet I share
Professor Einstein and others’ uneasiness at the orthodox situation.” Fock, who was
the most influential and vocal supporter of complementarity in the USSR, wrote
complaining that “Bohm-Vigier illness” was so widespread. Havemann, a German
Communist physical chemist, sent him a paper on quantum complementarity, and
Rosenfeld replied, “I read with great interest your paper and I am glad to see that
our ideas are, in their essential aspects, in agreement.”30
Guido Beck and Eric Burhop took issue with Rosenfeld’s rhetoric, however, and
Lancelot L. Whyte challenged him publicly over his review of Bohm’s later book
Causality and chance in modern physics. Guido Beck, one-time assistant to Hei-
senberg who had fled to Brazil from the Nazis, did not share a belief in the causal
interpretation, but defended Bohm against Léon Rosenfeld’s criticisms and insisted
Bohm should be encouraged to show what his approach could achieve. Rosenfeld
was sensitive to Beck’s remarks. In the English translation of the original French


29
Pauline Yates to Léon Rosenfeld, 7 Feb 1952, 19 Feb 1952, RP. Rosenfeld succeeded, “the
editors stopped work on this article.” The paper had been submitted to Nature by Harrie
S.W. Massey [with whom Bohm had worked in the Manhattan Project at Berkeley]. Nature’s
editors to Léon Rosenfeld, 11 Mar 1952, RP. “Also I sent a brief article to Massey with the
suggestion that he publish it in Nature.” David Bohm to Miriam Yevick, n.d., BP. Bohm did not
keep a copy of the unpublished paper, but there is a copy of it in Louis de Broglie Papers, Archives
de l’Académie des sciences, Paris. Léon Rosenfeld, “Report on L. de Broglie, La théorie de la
mesure en mécanique ondulatoire.” n.d. RP. The book Rosenfeld advised against translating was
Broglie (1957).
30
Denis Gabor to Léon Rosenfeld, 7 Jan 1953; Abraham Pais to Léon Rosenfeld, 15 May [1952];
Robert Cohen to Léon Rosenfeld, 31 Jul 1953; Vladmir Fock to Léon Rosenfeld, 7 Apr 1956; all
papers at RP. For Fock’s criticism of Bohm’s views, see Fock (1957). Jean-Louis Destouches to
Léon Rosenfeld, 19 Dec 1951; Léon Rosenfeld to Robert Haveman, 7 Oct 1957; Haveman to
Rosenfeld, 13 Sep 1957; Adolf Grünbaum to Léon Rosenfeld, 1 Feb 1956; 20 Apr 1957, 3 Oct
1957; Rosenfeld to Grünbaum, 14 Feb 1956; 21 May 1957; 11 Dec 1957. All letters are at RP. On
Havemann, see Hoffmann (1999).
2.4 Critics and Supporters of the Causal Interpretation 39


paper Rosenfeld deleted the comparison which had been criticized by Beck. The
original expression is: “on comprend que le pionnier s’avançant dans un territoire
inconnu ne trouve pas d’emblée la bonne route; on comprend moins qu’un touriste
s’égare encore après que ce territoire a été levé et cartographié au vingt-millième.”
Burhop, who was at that time organizing a meeting among Rosenfeld and Marxist
or left-wing physicists, such as John Bernal, Maurice Levy, Maurice Cornforth, and
Cecil Powell to discuss Rosenfeld’s article, also wrote: “Incidentally the only other
comment I would offer on your article was I thought perhaps you were a little cruel
to Bohm. Do you think you could spare the time to write to him? He is a young
Marxist. . .being victimized for his political views in the U.S.”31
Rosenfeld went to Brazil to discuss the epistemological problems of quantum
mechanics. He offered a course on classical statistical mechanics in Rio de Janeiro,
published papers in Portuguese on the epistemological lessons of quantum mechan-
ics, and gave a talk in São Paulo on complementarity. Bohm met him and reported
on their exchange to Aage Bohr: “Prof. Rosenfeld visited Brazil recently, and we
had a rather hot and extended discussion in São Paulo following a seminar that he
gave on the foundations of the quantum theory. However, I think that we both
learned something from the seminar. Rosenfeld admitted to me afterwards that he
could at least see that my point of view was a possible one, although he personally
did not like it.” Bohm and Rosenfeld would meet each other again at the conference
held in Bristol in 1957 and dedicated to foundational issues in quantum
mechanics.32
Werner Heisenberg criticized Bohm’s approach as “ideological” while Max
Born initially was not impressed.33 It was Rosenfeld who brought to his attention
this interpretation, which led Born to criticize it. “I have already written my Guthrie
Lecture in rough draft and have done there just what you suggest, namely, I have
included the other party who prefer particles, like Bohm and the Russians which
you quote (I cannot read Russian and I take it from your article.)” The common
front against the causal interpretation hid disagreements, usually in private, over
tactics. Rosenfeld publicly criticized Heisenberg of leaning towards idealism. Pauli
and Born privately criticized Rosenfeld’s mixture of Marxism with complementar-
ity. As part of their debate, Max Born sent Rosenfeld a ten-page typed text arguing

31
Guido Beck to Léon Rosenfeld, 1 May 1952, RP. Rosenfeld to Beck, 9 Feb 1953; Bohm to Beck,
16 Sep 1952; 31 Dec 1952; 13 Apr 1953; 5 May 1953; 26 May 1953; Guido Beck Papers, Centro
Brasileiro de Pesquisas Fı́sicas, Rio de Janeiro. Rosenfeld (1953). Eric Burhop to Léon Rosenfeld,
5 May 1952, RP. Lancelot Whyte to Léon Rosenfeld, 8 Apr 1958; 14 Mar 1958; 22 Mar 1958;
27 June 1958; Rosenfeld to Whyte, 17 Mar 1958, RP. Rosenfeld to Whyte, 28 May 1958, is in
Lancelot L. Whyte Papers, Department of Special Collections, Boston University. The disputed
papers were Rosenfeld (1958) and Whyte (1958).
32
Bohm to Aage Bohr, 13 Oct 1953, ABP; Rosenfeld (1954) and Rosenfeld (2005). For the Bristol
conference’s proceedings, see Körner (1957).
33
Heisenberg’s criticism was published in the widely read and translated Physics and Philosophy
(Heisenberg 1958). However, Heisenberg did not pursue the combat. In the late 1950s, “[he] had
written more than enough on the subject and had, he said, ‘nothing new to say’” (Carson 2010,
p. 92).
40 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


that dialectical materialism could not be corroborated by reference to just one
achievement of contemporary science. Born abandoned the idea of publishing the
text in the atmosphere of détente between West and East in the late 1950s. Acting as
editor of a volume in honor of Bohr, Pauli prevented Rosenfeld, whom he labeled
“√BohrxTrotzky,” from adorning his paper with banalities on materialism.34
While Rosenfeld, Pauli, and Heisenberg were the most active critics among the
old guard who had created quantum physics (some mixed reactions will be analyzed
later), among the younger generation criticism also predominated, but sometimes
using different arguments. Bohm presented his approach at an international meeting
held in Brazil and met open opposition to his ideas. As he wrote to a colleague in the
US:
We had an international Congress of Physics . . . 8 physicists from the States (including
Wigner, Rabi, Herb, Kerst, and others), 10 from Mexico, Argentina, and Bolivia, aside
[a] few from Europe, were brought here by the UNESCO and by the Brazilian National Res.
Council. . .. The Americans are clearly very competent in their own fields, but very naı̈ve
and reactionary in other fields. . .. I gave a talk on my hidden variables, but ran into much
opposition, especially from Rabi. Most of it made no real sense.35

Isidor Isaac Rabi was an American physicist (born in Galicia) from Columbia
University who had won the 1944 Physics Nobel Prize for his work using resonance
for recording magnetic properties of nuclei. Bohm formulated Rabi’s view thus:
“As yet, your theory is just based on hopes, so why bother us with it until it produces
results. The hidden variables are at present analogous to the ‘angels’ which people
introduced in the Middle Ages to explain things.”36 Rabi’s own statement of his
criticism was,
I do not see how the causal interpretation gives us any line to work on other than the use of
the concepts of quantum theory. Every time a concept of quantum theory comes along, you
can say yes, it would do the same thing as this in the causal interpretation. But I would like
to see a situation where the thing turns around, when you predict something and we say,
yes, the quantum theory can do it too.37

Bohm answered making a comparison with the debates on atomism in the
nineteenth century, an analogy he had already used in his papers: “[E]xactly the
same criticism that you are making was made against the atomic theoryâ€"that
nobody had seen the atoms, nobody knew what they were like, and the deduction
about them was gotten from the perfect gas law, which was already known.” But
Bohm faced tougher questions than his analogy suggested. How would the model
be made relativistic? Anderson wanted to know how Bohm could recover the


34
Born to Rosenfeld, 28 Jan 1953, RP (Rosenfeld 1960, 1970; Freire Jr. and Lehner 2010). Pauli to
Heisenberg, 13 May 1954; Pauli to Rosenfeld, 28 Sep 1954, in Pauli and Meyenn (1999, pp. 620â€"
621 and 769).
35
David Bohm to Miriam Yevick, [received 20 Aug 1952]; Bohm to Melba Phillips, n.d., BP. I
merged the two letters in my narrative.
36
Ibid.
37
New research techniques in physics (1954, pp. 187â€"198).
2.4 Critics and Supporters of the Causal Interpretation 41


quantum feature of indiscernibility of particles, i.e., the exclusion principle; Medina
asked if Bohm’s approach could “predict the existence of a spin of a particle as in
field theory;” Leite Lopes and Kerst called for experiments that could decide
between the interpretations; and Moshinsky asked whether there was a “reaction
of the motion of the particle on the wave field.” Bohm’s answer to Anderson is
interesting. He said that the causal interpretation only needed to reproduce the
experimental predictions of quantum theory, not each one of its concepts. “All I
wish to do is to obtain the same experimental results from this theory as are
obtained from the usual theories, that is, it is not necessary for me to reproduce
every statement of the usual interpretation. . .. You may take the exclusion principle
as a principle to explain these experiments [levels of energy]. But another principle
would also explain them.”38
Among other criticisms of the causal interpretation, it is interesting to note the
case of Mario Schönberg as it illustrates the complexity of the quantum controversy
for the case when physicists shared the same background and Marxist ideological
beliefs.39 Bohm and Schönberg were both Jews and Communists but they failed to
agree on one issue, the interpretation of quantum physics. Schönberg, a theoretical
physicist, was working on the mathematical foundations of quantum theory and on
the hydrodynamic model of quantum mechanics, a model close to that developed by
Bohm and Vigier, as we will see later, but he opposed seeking a causal description
in atomic phenomena. However, Schönberg exploited the physical implications of
the quantum potential through hydrodynamic models. For instance, in Schönberg
(1954), he showed that “the trajectories of the de Broglie-Bohm theory appear as
trajectories of the mean motion of the turbulent medium.” Despite their deep
divergences, one of Schönberg’s remarks was taken seriously by Bohm. Indeed, it
was Schönberg who “first pointed Bohm in the direction of the philosopher
G.W.F. Hegel, saying that Lenin had suggested that all good Communists read
the German philosopher.” This was an influence which would appear in Bohm’s
Causality and Chance, published in 1957. Unfortunately, Schönberg did not pub-
lish his views at the time, but from Bohm’s reaction to them one can infer how close
to Rosenfeld he was on the subject at stake40:
Schönberg is 100 percent against the causal interpretation, especially against the idea of
trying to form a conceptual image of what is happening. He believes that the true dialectical
method is to seek a new form of mathematics, the more “subtle” the better, and try to solve
the crisis in physics in this way. As for explaining chance in terms of causality, he believes
this to be “reactionary” and “undialectical.” He believes instead that the dialectical




38
All quotations are from New research techniques in physics (1954, ibid.).
39
Other criticisms include Takabayasi (1952), Takabayasi (1953), Halpern (1952), Keller (1953),
and Epstein (1953a, b).
40
For discussions between Bohm and Schönberg, see Peat (1997, pp. 155â€"157). David Bohm to
Miriam Yevick, 24 Oct 1953, BP. For Schönberg’s work on quantum mechanics and geometry, see
Schönberg (1959). Schönberg’s scientific works are collected and reprinted in Schönberg and
Hamburger (2009, 2013).
42 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School

approach is to assume “pure chance” which may propagate from level to level, but which is
never explained in any way, except in terms of itself.




2.4.1 Supporters

If the critics set the tone in the reception of Bohm’s proposal, supporters were no
less active, and included attempts to further develop the initial papers. The most
important adherents came from France with Louis de Broglie, who reconverted to
his early ideas of a deterministic description of quantum systems, and Jean-Pierre
Vigier, his young assistant. The importance of de Broglie’s support may be inferred
from the fact that Rosenfeld and Pauli chose to criticize Bohm’s approach in their
contributions to the de Broglie Festschrift, while the French Nobel Prize laureate
was cogitating about the implications of Bohm’s papers. Eventually de Broglie
abandoned the complementarity view in the quest for a causal interpretation of
quantum physics.
The influence of de Broglie’s reconversion to his earlier ideas can be seen in
terms of the weight Rosenfeld attributed to it in a later letter to Niels Bohr: “This
comedy of errors [the attempt to develop a ‘theory of measurement’ based on the
‘causal interpretation’ of quantum mechanics] would have passed unnoticed, as the
minor incident in the course of scientific progress which it actually is, if it had not
found powerful support in the person of L. de Broglie, who is now backing it with
all his authority.” In fact, de Broglie did not directly support Bohm’s proposal,
instead he pleaded for what he called the “double solution,” which would remain as
a mathematical suggestion and not a physical model for a causal interpretation.
From 1953, through Vigier’s visit to Bohm in Brazil, when their collaboration was
already underway, de Broglie reminded Bohm of their differences: “You know our
viewpoints are not entirely the same because I do not believe in the physical
existence of the Ψ wave, which seems only to be the representationâ€"rather
subjectiveâ€"of probabilities. By the way, when we have more than just one particle
the Ψ wave must be represented in the configuration space with more than three
dimensions and its non physical character appears then absolutely evident.”41
Vigier brought momentum to the causal interpretation. He was influential among
the French communists and in the Cold War times of the early 1950s he mobilized
young Marxist physicists to work on the causal interpretation. With de Broglie and
Vigier, the Institut Henri Poincaré became the world headquarters of the causal
interpretation. A testimony from Jean-Louis Destouches reveals the isolation of
complementarity in the French milieu: “The young people received with enthusi-
asm Bohm’s work, which corresponds to the philosophical trends supporting their
positions: Thomistic realism, Marxist determinism, Cartesian rationalism. I am

41
Rosenfeld to Bohr, 21 Oct 1957, BSC, reel 31, AHQP, reel 31, cited in (Osnaghi et al. 2009,
p. 101). Louis de Broglie to Bohm, 29 March 1953, Louis de Broglie Papers, Box 7, Archives de
l’Académie des sciences, Paris.
2.4 Critics and Supporters of the Causal Interpretation 43


almost the only one here to support Bohr’s quantum interpretation.”42 Bohm also
gathered support from the US, Argentina, and Brazil, through Hans Freistadt, Ralph
Schiller, Mario Bunge, and Jayme Tiomno.43
Bohm considered the papers he wrote with Tiomno and Schiller and with Vigier
to be the main achievements of the causal program in the early 1950s. With Vigier,
Bohm answered Pauli’s objection that he had included an arbitrary element in the
causal interpretation, by using a ψ function that satisfied Schrödinger’s equation.
Bohm had tried to solve the issue by himself without success, while De Broglie and
Vigier were cognizant of the problem in 1952. In 1954, Bohm and Vigier were able
to prove that under certain general conditions any function could become a solution
of the Schrödinger equation. To achieve this, they used an analogy between Bohm’s
approach and the hydrodynamic model suggested by Erwin Madelung in 1926,
which embedded microscopic quantum particles in a subquantum medium with
random fluctuations. Thus, the “molecular chaos”, an idea Bohm had abandoned
after his discussions with Pauli, came back into his work with Vigier.44
Jayme Tiomno had met Bohm at Princeton while he was doing his PhD under
John Wheeler on weak interactions. Ralph Schiller had worked on gravitation in his
PhD under the supervision of Peter Bergmann at Syracuse University and had gone
to Brazil to be Bohm’s research assistant. With Tiomno and Schiller, Bohm
enlarged the scope of his model to include spin, although via analogy with Pauli’s
equation and not through a relativistic treatment of electrons. Tiomno, however,
was not an adherent of the causal interpretation. He worked with Bohm looking for
the consequences of extending Bohm’s model to other fields of physics, but did not
share its philosophical assumptions concerning causality. The Argentinian Mario
Bunge, who had been supervised by Guido Beck at La Plata University, spent a year
working with Bohm in Brazil, but nothing came of it. Bunge attacked the difficult
problem of the “Bohmization” of relativistic quantum mechanics and the elimina-
tion of infinities in quantum electrodynamics. Bunge had studied physics in order to
develop a better philosophy of the subject, later developing a successful career in


42
“Les jeunes gens ont accueilli avec enthousiasme le travail de Bohm qui correspond à toutes les
tendances philosophiques qui les animent: réalisme thomiste, déterminisme marxiste, rationalisme
cartésien. Je suis donc maintenant à peu près le seul ici à soutenir encore l’interprétation quantique
de Bohr.” Jean-Louis Destouches to Léon Rosenfeld, 19 Dec 1951, RP.
43
Freistadt worked both on the philosophical and technical aspects of the causal interpretation; on
his activities on this subject in the context of American physics, see (Kaiser 2012, pp. 20â€"22). For
Freistadt’s works, see Freistadt (1953, 1955, 1957). Schiller, Bunge, and Tiomno worked with
Bohm in Brazil and their cases are discussed in this chapter.
44
For the role Bohm attributed to those papers, see Bohm (1981, pp. 114 and 118, notes 11 and
12), Bohm and Hiley (1993, p. 205), Pauli (1953) and Bohm (1953a); a simplified and shortened
version of this paper was presented in New research techniques in physics (1954, pp. 187â€"198).
“C’était aussi un des problèmes décisifs que Bohm n’avait pas traité dans ses papiers de 1952.”
Jean-Pierre Vigier, interviewed by the author, 27 Jan 1992 (Bohm and Vigier 1954, 1958; Broglie
et al. 1963). A lacuna in the history of physics in the twentieth centuryâ€"an analysis of the
activities of the de Broglie-Vigier groupâ€"is now being filled by the works of Vals (2012) and
Besson (2011).
44 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


the philosophy of science in Canada. In the mid-1960s, disenchanted with the
hidden variable interpretation, he gave up on it, accepted indeterminism as part of
physics theories, and focused his criticisms of quantum mechanics on the role
played by observation in the complementarity view.45
The collaboration between Bohm and Vigier was aided by an irony typical of the
Cold War. Had Bohm remained in the U.S., Vigier might not have been able to visit
and work with him. Vigier had made a name for himself in the Communist Party in
France and, as Jessica Wang has pointed out in writing about the “age of anxiety” in
American history, “in addition to refusing passports to American scientists, the
State Department also restricted the entry of foreign scientists with left-wing
political ties into the United States . . . Scientists from France, where the Left was
particularly strong, had an especially hard time. As much as 70â€"80 % of visa
requests from French scientists were unduly delayed or refused.” However, sup-
porters who just applauded the causal interpretation on ideological grounds without
trying to develop it did not help Bohm much; apparently, this was the case of French
astrophysicist, and Marxist, Évry Schatzman.46 After all, the causal interpretation
needed to win the technical challenges promised by Bohm himself.



2.4.2 Mixed Reactions

Not all reactions were clear-cut criticisms or support. The contributions of two
peopleâ€"Einstein and Feynmanâ€"were especially meaningful for Bohm. Einstein,
the iconic critic of complementarity, had influenced Bohm while at Princeton to see
quantum theory as an incomplete theory. On political grounds, Einstein was an
enduring supporter of Bohm against McCarthyism. When the causal interpretation
came out, however, he did not support it. “Have you noticed that Bohm believes
(as de Broglie did, by the way, 25 years ago) that he is able to interpret the quantum
theory in deterministic terms? That way seems too cheap to me,” was his comment
in a letter to Max Born. Moreover, he wrote a paper to a Festschrift for Max Born
saying that Bohm’s model led to the unacceptable consequence that particles in
stationary states, such as an electron in a hydrogen atom, were at rest. Einstein may
have used the opportunity to distance himself from the widespread opinion that he
was stubbornly attached to determinism. “For the presentation volume to be
dedicated to you, I have written a little nursery song about physics, which has
startled Bohm and de Broglie a little. It is meant to demonstrate the indispensability
of your statistical interpretation of quantum mechanics, which Schrödinger, too, has
recently tried to avoid. [. . .] This may well have been so contrived by that same
‘non-dice-playing God’ who has caused so much bitter resentment against me, not


45
Bohm et al. (1955) and Bohm and Schiller (1955). On Tiomno, see Freire Jr. (1999, p. 95).
Mario Bunge to the author, 1 Nov 1996, and 12 Feb 1997.
46
Wang (1999, p. 279) and Schatzman (1953).
2.4 Critics and Supporters of the Causal Interpretation 45


only amongst the quantum theoreticians but also among the faithful of the Church
of the Atheists.” Einstein, however, was kind enough to let Bohm read this paper
before its publication and accepted Bohm’s request to publish his reply in the same
volume. Bohm showed that an adequate use of his model, including changes in the
system due to measurements, could save it.47
Bohm’s main hope for an ally among the foreign visitors he met in Brazil was
Richard Feynman, who had been his colleague at Berkeley and spent his sabbatical
year in 1951 at the Centro Brasileiro de Pesquisas Fisicas (CBPF) in Rio de Janeiro.
Bohm liked Feynman’s initial reaction: “At the scientific conference in Belo
Horizonte, I gave a talk on the quantum theory, which was well received. Feynman
was convinced that it is a logical possibility, and that it may lead to something
new.” Thus to Hanna Loewy:
Right now, I am in Rio giving a talk on the quantum theory. About the only person here who
really understands is Feynman, and I am gradually winning him over. He already concedes
that it is a logical possibility. Also, I am trying to get him out of his depressing trap down
long and dreary calculations on a theory [procedures of renormalization in Quantum Field
Theory] that is known to be of no use. Instead maybe he can be gotten interested in
speculation about new ideas, as he used to do, before Bethe and the rest of the calculations
got hold of him.

This letter is evidence of how disconnected Bohm was at the time with the main
themes of research on the physics agenda as he was criticizing as “dreary” the kind
of calculations which were exciting not only Feynman and Hans Bethe, but almost
all physicists involved with quantum field theories. Bohm’s hopes about Feynman
were unfounded as “in his physics Feynman always stayed close to experiments and
showed little interest in theories that could not be tested experimentally” (Schweber
2005). The only reference Feynman made to hidden variables as a result of his
Brazilian sabbatical was a mention, as a possible avenue for the development of
theoretical physics. Furthermore, it came out in a general paper published in a
Brazilian science journal. That could scarcely nourish Bohm’s hopes.48



2.4.3 The Old Guard

From the old guard of quantum theory, let us now look at the cases of Niels Bohr,
Erwin Schrödinger, and John von Neumann. Bohm particularly looked for reactions
from Bohr and von Neumann, which is no surprise given that their views were the
targets of his hidden variable interpretation. Bohm received the first report of
Bohr’s views through the American theoretical physicist Arthur Wightman, who

47
Einstein to Born, 12 May 1952 and 12 Oct 1953 (Einstein et al. 1971; Einstein 1953; Bohm
1953b). For Einstein’s stances, see Paty (1993, 1995).
48
On Feynman in Brazil, see Lopes (1990) and Mehra (1994, pp. 333â€"342). David Bohm to Hanna
Loewy, [w/d], 4 Dec 1951, BP (C.38) (Feynman 1954). For the role played by Feynman, Bethe,
and the renormalization calculations in physics at that time, see Schweber (1994).
46 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


was then in Copenhagen. As Bohm wrote to Melba Phillips: “the elder Bohr [Niels]
didn’t say much to Art[hur] Wightman, but told him he thought it ‘very foolish.’”
The distinction between the “two Bohrs” was particularly important as Bohm had
met the younger, Aage Bohr, in the spring of 1948 while at Princeton,49 and was
pleased to discover that Aage Bohr was more sympathetic to the causal interpreta-
tion than his father, Niels Bohr. As Bohm reported to Wightman, “I am glad that
Aage Bohr admits its logical consistency.”50 Indeed, the younger Bohr [Aage] was
more receptive to Bohm’s proposalâ€"“it would be nice to meet some time and
discuss things, also the epistemological problems”â€"while he respected the value of
the complementarity view: “there it seems to me that the very fact that one can give
a logically consistent non-deterministic description of natural phenomena is a very
great lesson which gives one a much freer way of thinking about things.” The
conversation continued and Bohm explained to Aage Bohr the two assumptions he
considered to be “unnecessarily dogmatic” in the principle of complementarity:
(1) “that the quantum of energy will remain indivisible and unanalyzable at all
levels . . .”, and (2) “that the statistical laws of quantum mechanics are final, in the
sense that no deeper causal laws will ever be found . . .”. 51 As for the elder Bohr,
there was never any sign of empathy towards the causal interpretation, even after
they had the opportunity of having personal conversations, for Bohm visited
Copenhagen twice, in 1957 and 1958. As Bohm recorded 5 years later, Niels
Bohr had “expressed especially strong doubts that such a theory [causal interpre-
tation] could treat all significant aspects of the problem of indivisibility of the
quantum of action” (Bohm 1962, p. 363).
However, the main interest of Aage Bohr in the exchange with Bohm was not
related to the epistemological issues in quantum mechanics, but to Bohm and David
Pines’ work on plasma, metals as electron gas, and collective variables. Aage Bohr
was extending the collective variable approach to his own work on nuclear physics.
He sent Bohm a preprint of a paper written with Ben Mottelson, and observed, “I
would be also very interested in any comments from you on this, admittedly still
rather primitive attempt of ours to develop a more comprehensive and self-
consistent treatment of a many-body system such as the nucleus. In some ways,
there are parallelities, I think, to your treatment of the electron gas, even though the
forces and the geometry are quite different.” Bohm, who was still in Brazil, was
interested in Aage Bohr’s work on nuclear physics, comparing it with results from
the Van der Graaf accelerator being built in São Paulo. This would produce slow
neutrons with very accurately determined energy.52



49
David Bohm to Melba Phillips, n.d., BP (C.46â€"C.48). Letter from Aage Bohr to the author,
17 Oct 1997.
50
David Bohm to Arthur Wightman, [1953], Niels Bohr Archive, Copenhagen.
51
Aage Bohr to David Bohm, 3 Oct 1953; Bohm to Aage Bohr, 13 Oct 1953, emphasis in the
originals, Aage Bohr Papers, Niels Bohr Archive, Copenhagen.
52
Aage Bohr to David Bohm, 3 Oct 1953; Bohm to Aage Bohr, 24 Sep 1953, ibid.
2.4 Critics and Supporters of the Causal Interpretation 47


Thus in the late 1950s when Bohm was already in Israel and Pines visited
Copenhagen, Bohm wrote to Aage Bohr. “I would very much like to spend [the
summer] in Copenhagen and to work with Pines on plasma theory, on which subject
both of us have interesting new ideas.”53 Bohm visited Copenhagen between
08 August and 29 September 1957 and then from 07 July 1958 to 13 September
1958. The influence of Pines and Bohm’s plasma work on nuclear physics in
Copenhagen was acknowledged by Ben Mottelson, the American physicist living
in Copenhagen who went on, with Aage Bohr and Leo Rainwater, to win the 1975
Physics Nobel Prize for “the discovery of the connection between collective motion
and particle motion in atomic nuclei and the development of the theory of the
structure of the atomic nucleus based on this connection.” In the Nobel acceptance
speech, Mottelson recalled that: “It was a fortunate circumstance for us that David
Pines spent a period of several months in Copenhagen in the summer of 1957,
during which he introduced us to the exciting new developments in the theory of
superconductivity. Through the discussions with him, the relevance of these con-
cepts to the problem of pair correlations in nuclei became apparent.”54
As for von Neumann, Bohm considered his reaction a little better than Bohr’s.
Bohm reported that “von Neumann thinks my work correct, and even ‘elegant,’ but
he expects difficulties in extending it to spin.” Von Neumann probably interested
himself in Bohm’s work in the 1950s while revising the English translation of his
Mathematische Grundlagen der Quantenmechanik (1932), in which his famous
proof appeared. To his publisher, he explained the difficulties, “the text had to be
extensively rewritten, because a literal translation from German to English is
entirely out of question in the field of this book. The subject-matter is partly
physical-mathematical, partly, however, a very involved conceptual critique of
the logical foundations of various disciplines.” In a recent analysis, the philosopher
Michael Stöltzner suggested that “von Neumann could accept Bohm’s proposal as
an interesting model, but not as a promising interpretation.”55 As for Schrödinger,
in spite of criticisms of the complementarity view, his insistence on the wave
function ontology of the quantum world and absence of interest in the recovery of
determinism hampered the dialogue with those, such as Bohm, Vigier, and de



53
Bohm to Aage Bohr, 18 Dec 1956, ibid. Aage Bohr replied, “I hope very much you can manage
to come here next summer, when we also expect Pines to be here. We should, of course, be very
pleased if you would tell us a little about plasma theory.” Aage Bohr to Bohm, 26 Jan 1957, ibid.
For the next summer, Aage mentioned they wanted to hear Bohm on superconductivity, reflecting
the interest arose by the work of Bardeen and colleagues, Aage Bohr to Bohm, 25 Oct 1957, ibid.
54
Visitors records, Niels Bohr Archive. “The Nobel Prize in Physics 1975”, http://www.
nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/physics/laureates/1975/. “Ben R. Mottelson - Nobel Lecture”, http://
www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/physics/laureates/1975/mottelson-lecture.html, on page 240.
Both information accessed on 11 Jan 2014 (Bohr et al. 1958).
55
J. von Neumann’s reaction is in David Bohm to Wolfgang Pauli, [Oct 1951], in Pauli and
Meyenn (1996, pp. 389â€"394). John von Neumann to H. Cirker, [President of Dover Pub], 3 Oct
1949. John von Neumann Papers (Box 27, Folder 8), Library of Congress, Washington, DC (Von
Neumann 1955; Stöltzner 1999).
48 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


Broglie, who worked with a world populated by particles in a deterministic
framework.56



2.4.4 Bohm’s Proposal and Philosophers of Science

Bohm’s causal interpretation also contributed to enticing philosophers of science to
enter the quantum debate. Indeed they were never absent, as in the early stages of
the debate some philosophers, such as Karl Popper, Hans Reichenbach, Gaston
Bachelard, Grete Hermann, and Alexandre Kojève had ventured into this field.57
Now, with the reheated controversy, there was new fuel for the philosophy of
science. However, while in the 1930s philosophers mostly produced works more
of an epistemological nature, in the sense of providing a critical analysis of an
existent scientific theory, now they divided themselves along the same lines as the
physicists. Some were sympathetic towards Bohm’s enterprise, as in the case of
Paul Feyerabend, who praised Bohm’s Causality and Chance as containing “an
explicit refutation of the idea that complementarity, and complementarity alone,
solves all the ontological and conceptual problems of microphysics.” Others
aligned with Bohr’s point of view, notably Norwood Hanson, who maintained
that “when an interpretation of a theory has been as successful as this one [Copen-
hagen interpretation] has been, there is little practical warrant for the ‘alternative
interpretations’ which have, since Bohm, been receiving prominence.” And yet,
there were cases, such as Bachelard, who retired from the debate as it became
heated because de Broglie reconverted to the deterministic description of the
quantum phenomena. Since then, the debate on the foundations of quantum physics
has been an attractive topic for philosophers of science and deserves further
historical research.58




56
Schrödinger (1953). On Schrödinger’s philosophical views, see Michel Bitbol’s comments in
Schrödinger and Bitbol (1992, pp. 140â€"141) and Bitbol (1996a). In private, Schrödinger kept high
his fight against the complementarity view, as in this letter to Max Born, on October, 10, 1960:
“The impudence with which you assert time and again that the Copenhagen interpretation is
practically universally accepted, assert it without reservations, even before an audience of the
laityâ€"who are completely at your mercyâ€"it’s at the limit of the estimable . . . Have you no anxiety
about the verdict of history?” (Moore 1989, p. 479).
57
Popper and Bartley (1982), Reichenbach (1944), Bachelard (1934), Hermann et al. (1996), and
Kojève and Auffret (1990).
58
Feyerabend (1960) and Hanson (1959). On Bachelard, see Freire Jr. (2004a). An illustrative
example of how attractive this topic may be is Mara Beller’s criticism of Kuhn’s paradigms (Beller
1999). In her view, the appearance of the notion of paradigm is related to the quantum controversy.
I discussed these issues in Freire Jr. (2014c). Popper, who was interested in the foundations of
quantum mechanics from the 1930s, only became an active protagonist in the quantum controversy
in the early 1980s. See Freire Jr. (2004b) and Popper and Bartley (1982).
2.5 Waning Causality and Disenchantment with Communism (Late 1950sâ€"Early 1960s) 49


2.5 Waning Causality and Disenchantment
with Communism (Late 1950sâ€"Early 1960s)

In 1955 David Bohm left Brazil for Israel and in 1957 moved again, this time to the
UK, first to Bristol and then to the Birkbeck College in London. Bohm’s main
motivation for leaving Brazil was the possibility of travelling abroadâ€"Europeâ€"in
order to discuss and defend his causal interpretation for quantum mechanics. Life,
however, brings unexpected turns and he went on to experience a major intellectual
change from 1956 on. Politically he broke his ideological ties with Marxism, in
philosophical terms he weakened his beliefs on the centrality of causality for
science and society, and in the scientific arena he gave up the causal interpretation
discouraged with its developments. All these changes were not unrelated, as we will
argue. He began to look for new research directions but they only would coalesce in
the late 1960s. The peregrination to Israel was tainted by the worsening of his
situation with the US government related to the confiscation of his passport. In
order to travel to Israel he applied for Brazilian citizenship, which led to the loss of
his American citizenship. Only in the UK, in 1960, would he face the obstacles to
get it back. This period of transition did not only bring unpleasant experiences. He
made new and lasting acquaintances; got married to Sarah Woolfson, with whom he
would spend the rest of his days, in Israel; and met Basil Hiley, who would become
his enduring collaborator on the new perspectives of research, in Britain. In
addition, he found two graduate students deeply interested in touching upon the
foundations of quantum mechanics, which, as we already saw, had become the
intellectual pet of David Bohm. They were Yakir Aharonov in Haifa, and Jeffrey
Bub in London.



2.5.1 Break with Communism

As one would expect, Bohm was very sensitive to the reactions to his reinterpre-
tation of quantum theory in terms of hidden variables. In particular, he paid
attention to the way Marxists, physicists and philosophers, reacted to it, which is
no surprise given Bohm’s Marxist background. He made much of the French work,
no doubt in part because of Vigier’s Marxist engagement: “I have heard from
someone that in a debate on causality given in Paris, when our friend Vigier got
up to defend causality, he was strongly cheered by the audience (which contained a
great many students). I would guess that many of the younger people in Europe
recognize that the question of causality has important implications in politics,
economy, sociology, etc.” The connection appeared so obvious to Bohm that he
complained when fellow travelers like the American physicist Philip Morrison did
not support him. “This type of inconsistency in Phil [Morrison] disturbs me. He
should be helping, instead of raising irrelevant obstacles.” And he wondered why
the causal interpretation had appeared in the West and not in the USSR and why
50 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


Soviet physicists did not join him. “I ask myself the question ‘Why in 25 years
didn’t someone in USSR find a materialistic interpretation of quantum theory?’ . . .
But bad as conditions are in U.S., etc, the only people who have thus far had the idea
are myself in U.S., and Vigier in France.”59 If it is hard for historians to chart the
precise influence on Bohm’s shift towards the causal interpretation, there is no
doubt that the influence of Marxism was effective in supporting the causal inter-
pretation, especially among the French team led by Vigier, and that such support
was influential on Bohm himself, albeit weaker than Bohm had hoped for. The
unfulfilled expectations were mainly related to the USSR, as evidenced in a letter he
sent in 1955 to the American physicist Melba Phillips60:
At times I feel discouraged about the state of the world. A thing that particularly strikes
home to me is the report I got from Burhop (confirmed by others) on Russian physicists.
Apparently, they are all busy on doing calculations on electrodynamics according to
Feynman, Dyson, et al. Their orientation is determined strongly by the older men, such
as Fock and Landau, who in addition to their training, are influenced by the fear of a sort of
“Lysenko affair” in physics. The typical physicist appears to be uninterested in philosoph-
ical problems. He has not thought much about problems such as the re-interpretation of
qu. mchs, but tends to like the word of the “big-shots” that ideas on this such as mine are
“mechanistic”. Actually, the standard procedure is just to label such a point of view, and
then most people accept the label without even bothering to read about such questions.
There are some philosophers in Moscow who criticized the usual interpretation, but they
haven’t had much influence on the physicists. All in all, the situation in Soviet physics
doesn’t look very different from that in Western physics. It is disappointing that a society
that is oriented in a new direction is still unable to have any great influence on the way in
which people work and think.

What Bohm did not realize was that part of the support for complementarity and
resistance to the causal interpretation was also based in commitment to Marxism.
This was the case of Rosenfeld, as we have already seen, and also of Vladimir Fock,
who supported Bohr’s views in the USSR basing his position on dialectical mate-
rialism. From 1957 on, after Stalin’s death and the ideological thaw in the USSR,
Fock would become an outspoken defender of Bohr’s views. In addition, a number
of Soviet physicists, such as Blokhintsev and Terletsky, while being critics of
complementarity were not supporters of the causal interpretation either. Indeed,
the former became a leader in the defense of the ensemble interpretation, which
says quantum theory does not describe states of single systems but only an equally
prepared ensemble of them.61 The latter devoted his energies to attempts to include
non-linearities in the standard quantum mechanics, an approach which resonated
with de Broglie’s proposal of a “double solution.” Indeed, we may see in hindsight,


59
David Bohm to Miriam Yevick, 5 Nov 1954, BP. David Bohm to Melba Phillips, n.d. BP. David
Bohm to Miriam Yevick, 7 Jan 1952, BP.
60
Bohm to Melba Phillips, 18 March 1955, BP (C49). Andrew Cross (1991) saw Bohm’s work as
just a reflection of the ideological Marxist climate of the time; thus he missed the fact that the
quantum controversy continued even when that climate faded. For the critique of this position, see
(Freire Jr. 1992).
61
For a description of the ensemble interpretation, see Home and Whitaker (1992).
2.5 Waning Causality and Disenchantment with Communism (Late 1950sâ€"Early 1960s) 51


the relationship between Marxism and the spectrum of stances in the quantum
controversy was not one-to-one. Instead, Marxism influenced both critics as well as
defenders of complementarity. This multi-sided relationship should be no surprise
as when speaking of Marxism in the twentieth century it is better to use the plural
Marxisms than the singular Marxism.62
At any rate in 1955 Bohm could still think that Soviet and Marxist physicists
should support his causal interpretation in a stronger manner. The vicissitudes of
the times, however, would make such a matter meaningless for Bohm. By late 1956
or early 1957, a crisis point in his commitment to Marxism was reached, triggered
by Khrushchev’s report on Stalin’s crimes and by the invasion of Hungary by Soviet
troops. Bohm’s break with Communism, while he was visiting Paris to work with
Jean-Pierre Vigier and Louis de Broglie, was witnessed by the physicist Jan Meyer
and is well-recorded in two long letters to Melba Phillips. How dramatic Bohm’s
involvement was with these critical events may be seen from the following
fragments63:
It is clear from the above that what is needed in the left-wing movement today is a certain
measure of disengagement from Russia. Russia has made an enormous number of errors.
. . . This raises the question of the probable future of the C.P.’s [Communist Parties]
throughout the world. . . . As soon as a man opposed the direction of the C.P. he became
a traitor guilty of the most heinous crimes. Confessions were manufactured and extorted on
a large scale. The truth had nothing to do with the case; what was published was only what
would be convenient for the interests of the gov’t. This was a direct perversion of the
principle that dialectical materialism should be scientific and objective. Perhaps some
people said that false confessions served the interests of a “larger truth”. Similarly,
Humanité [the official newspaper of the French Communist Party] still publishes lies
about Hungary; quite cynically since the truth is evident. It is clear also that the Russian
gov’t publishes whatever it thinks is convenient about world affairs. Perhaps they have
already ceased to lie consciously, and they may be only deceiving themselves.

Thus by 1958 Bohm’s relation to Marxism came to an end. It had lasted from the
late 1930s, when he approached the US Communist Party at Berkeley, in the wake
of the Great Depression and the rise of Nazism in Europe, to 1956â€"1957 following
Khrushchev’s report and the invasion of Hungary by the USSR. That history had
cost him the right to live in his home country and would still cause a lasting battle to
recover his American citizenship. He lived the main political passions of his times
and was a man trapped in the Cold War storm. And yet, his history, including
adhesion to and a later break with Communism, was not exceptional, indeed it was


62
On Marxism and the controversy over the interpretation of quantum theory, see Freire
Jr. (2011c). See also Graham (1987, pp. 320â€"353), on Fock and Blokhintsev; Kuzemsky (2008),
on Blokhintsev; Pechenkin (2012), on the early ensemble interpretation in the USSR and in the
US; Forstner (2008), on Bohm; Jacobsen (2007, 2012), on Rosenfeld; Kojevnikov (2011), on
ensembles; Pechenkin (2013), on Mandelstam; Kojevnikov (2004), on Soviet physics, and Besson
(2011), on Vigier.
63
For an account of those events, see Gaddis (2005, pp. 83â€"194). Jan Meyer, conversation with
Olival Freire, 30 January 1997; Bohm to Phillips, undated, BP (C49). This rupture is also noted by
Kojevnikov (2002, p. 191) and Peat (1997, p. 178).
52 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


typical of the generation of intellectuals in the mid-twentieth century, around World
War II.64



2.5.2 Causality Relativized

After Bohm’s break with Communism he made few references to Marxist ideas.
However, one of them is very meaningful for the philosophy of science as it
concerns the role of determinism in society. It appears in a letter to the American
artist Charles Biederman, with whom he exchanged a large correspondence, over
4,000 pages between March 1960 and April 1969, now being edited by the Finnish
philosopher Paavo Pylkkänen. The reference came in the middle of a discussion
about determinism, on which I will comment later: “For they [Marxists] felt that by
studying the evolutionary process of the past, they could pick out the main direction
in which history was moving. They became so attached to their theories that they
were unable to review their own role objectively, or to admit new and unexpected
developments not fitting into these theories.” How much Marx’s historical materi-
alism depends on adopting determinism in history is debatable, however. For the
purposes of our analysis, nonetheless, it is enough to consider that Bohm’s rupture
with Marxism may have destroyed his general belief in determinism as a feature of
society and its history.65
The connection between the break with Marxism and abandonment of deter-
minism in science, particularly in physics, and not only in society, in Bohm’s path is
a guess, albeit a plausible one. The best evidence of how and when Bohm shifted his
focus away from the philosophical priority for causal laws in physics can also be
found in the correspondence with Biederman. The intellectual turn was acutely
noted by Pylkkänen, “here we have Bohm, who is internationally known as a
defender of a deterministic interpretation of the quantum theory, and thus for
many a defender of strict determinism in nature, arguing strongly for the objective
existence of properties such as contingency, chance, determinism, etc. Of course,
Bohm does this already in Causality and Chance, but here the point is made more
vividly, given that Bohm is defending the role of indeterminism rather than
questioning it, as he most famously did in his 1952 papers.”66
From this extensive correspondence between Bohm and Biederman, I have
selected fragments from a few letters to provide the reader with an idea of the
issues at stake. In his very first letter, in 1960, Biederman was clear-cut in his

64
Ory and Sirinelli (2004), Hobsbawm (2011), Chaps. 11 and 14, Caute (1967).
65
Bohm to Biederman, 2 February 1961, (Bohm et al. 1999, p. 95). As the historian Eric
Hobsbawm remarked, at least two features of Marxism should not be abandoned unless one
gives up historical materialism as a way to change the world: (a) the triumph of socialism is the
logical end of all historical evolution until the present, and (b) socialism marks the end of
prehistory as it cannot and will not be an antagonistic society (Hobsbawm 1997, Chap. 11).
66
Paavo Pylkkänen’s statement is in the introduction of Bohm et al. (1999, p. xix).
2.5 Waning Causality and Disenchantment with Communism (Late 1950sâ€"Early 1960s) 53


defense of determinism: “To explain my interest in your book [Causality and
Chance]. To put it briefly, the notion of indeterminism has always seemed contrary
to experience, which, even after reading your very fine book, I cannot accept even
as an eventually limiting case.” And yet, “I sympathize with your belief that a
deeper penetration will reveal a nature of causality. But there is the possibility that
this will also dispel the basis for the present ‘lawless’ view of nature and, rather than
make it a limited case, will dispense with it entirely.” Bohm’s answer to Biederman
is that time implies a certain ambiguity. “Thus, there is some ambiguity in past and
future. We experience this ambiguity in certain ways directly. For when we try to
say ‘now,’ we find that by the time we have said it, the time that we meant is already
past, and no longer ‘now.’” He continues, citing an example closer to physics, “and
if we try to do it with clocks, so as to be more precise, quantum theory implies that a
similar ambiguity would arise because of the quantal structure of matter. In fact,
there is no known way to make an unambiguous distinction between past and
future.” Thus, “it becomes impossible that the past shall completely determine
the future, if only because there is no way to say unambiguously what the past really
was until we know its future.” As Biederman might have compared that letter with
the book which was the catalyst of their correspondence, Bohm anticipated this, “as
you may perhaps have noticed, my ideas on determinism and indeterminism have
developed since I wrote Causality and Chance, although what I now think about
these questions was, to a considerable extent, implicit in the point of view expressed
in the book.” His conclusion, in short, is that “neither determinism nor indetermin-
ism (causality or chance) is absolute. Rather, each is just the opposite side of the
whole picture,” and that “in the question of determinism vs. indeterminism, there is
as I have said, a necessary complementary relation of the two ideas.”67
Bohm’s reference to Causality and Chance deserves some attention. The phil-
osophical convictions he held while writing this book weakened the prominence he
attributed to causal laws in science, as he concluded that causal and probabilistic
laws should be accorded the same philosophical status. Also noteworthy is the fact
that these philosophical studies were motivated, at least partially, by his ideological
commitment to Marxism. For our purposes, however, the most meaningful remark
in his letter to Biederman was the comment that “my ideas on determinism and
indeterminism have developed since I wrote Causality and Chance.” This can be
seen as a clue to the kind of change Bohm experienced after writing the book and
before the first letter from Biederman. The book was finished in 1955 while he was
in Brazil, then he left for Israel, visited Paris and Bristol, and eventually settled in
London, and the single most relevant change he experienced during this time was
his break with Marxism.




67
Biederman to Bohm, 6 March 1960; Bohm to Biederman, 24 April 1960; both in Bohm
et al. (1999, pp. 3â€"4 and 8â€"19).
54 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


2.5.3 Abandonment of the Causal Interpretation

Throughout the 1950s Bohm worked consistently on the development of the causal
interpretation. Two directions of research were particularly prioritized. The first
was to develop a relativistic generalization of the initial approach and was consid-
ered by him and his supporters to be the main goal of their work. “The day that we
defeat the Dirac equation, we are going to have a special victory party, with a case
of champagne,” he confessed to a correspondent in the mid-1950s. Till today this
remains an unreached goal, considered by many to be a shortcoming of the causal
interpretation. The second direction was related to Bohm’s promises that his
approach, conveniently modified, could approach the domain of intra-nuclear
particles, which he labeled in 1952 as the domain of 10 13 cm distances. Bohm
joined a collaboration between the French team led by Vigier and Japanese phys-
icists which included the Nobel Prize winner Hideki Yukawa as its most prominent
name. They looked to classify the myriad of recently discovered intra-nuclear
particles through representing them as extended bodies in space-time and relating
the number of degrees of freedom from these models to their quantum numbers.68
While this approach was neither a clear-cut extension of the 1952 model of
electrons nor based on the requirement of causality, before the quark model, in
the late 1950s, this was an exciting adventure in a new physical territory. And yet, if
philosophically it was not entirely based on the causal interpretation it was not
strange to it. Indeed its philosophical assumptions were realism and the primacy of
descriptions in the arena of space-time instead of abstract mathematical spaces.
In the late 1950s however, Bohm’s research departed from that of his collabo-
rators like Vigier and de Broglie. While they persevered in their research into the
causal interpretation, Bohm gave it up. A number of factors may have played a role
in his decision, including discouragement over the limited response to these ideas
and, as he would acknowledge later, “because I did not see clearly, at the time, how
to proceed further, my interests began to turn in other directions” (Bohm 1987,
p. 40).69 An inspection of the list of Bohm’s publications related to the foundations
of quantum mechanics suggests the late 1950s and the early 1960s as the time when
this abandonment occurred. Indeed, while in the 1950s he wrote an average of 1.6
papers per year on these topics, in the 1960s and 1970s this figure drops to half,
reversing in the 1980s to increase to 2.2 papers per year. Closer inspection reveals
however, that most of the papers from the 1960s were related to the reaction to
external challenges such as the appearance of John Bell’s paper, a subject we will
deal with in Chap. 7, or new perspectives he was adopting (Freire Jr. 1999, pp. 167â€"
170). As a matter of fact from 1960 on Bohm gradually began to search for a new


68
Bohm et al. (1960a, b); a review of the state of the art of this research is Broglie et al. (1963).
Virgile Besson is studying the French side of the mentioned collaboration while Pablo Ruiz de
Olano is studying the Japanese side.
69
A balance of how far Bohm went with hidden variable theory is provided by Bohm (1962). See
particularly pp. 359â€"363 for his evaluation of the criticisms it suffered.
2.5 Waning Causality and Disenchantment with Communism (Late 1950sâ€"Early 1960s) 55


approach to the interpretation of quantum mechanics. The new approach would take
more than 10 years to mature. Indeed, it was only around 1970 that the first papers
appeared suggesting “a new mode of description in physics” and taking “quantum
theory as an indication of a new order in physics.” We return to these new
perspectives later.



2.5.4 Citizenship Lost, Dignity Preserved

Let us go back to early 1952 in Brazil, after the American officials confiscated
Bohm’s passport. Under pressure to travel abroad to discuss his causal interpreta-
tion with wider audiences he early began to consider applying for Brazilian
citizenship. It would be a difficult choice, as he wrote to Hanna Loewy: “also, if I
want, I can apply for citizenship. This would have some advantages: as with it, I
could travel. But the disadvantage is that I could not return to the U.S., at least for a
long time. For according to the McCarran act they can exclude any non-citizen from
the U.S., who, in their opinion, was ever connected with Communism. So it’s a
tough decision, isn’t it?” In the middle of 1954, anxious because of the tension of
the political times (a year before the Rosenberg couple, accused of espionage, had
been executed in the U.S., and in August 1954 the Brazilian President Getúlio
Vargas had committed suicide in the middle of a serious political crisis), and having
received a job offer from Israel sent by Nathan Rosen, Bohm decided to apply for
Brazilian citizenship.70 Helped by Brazilian scientists and politicians the whole
process was quick. He applied for citizenship on 15 September 1954, received the
presidential decree on 22 November 1954, and took the oath on 20 December 1954.
In early 1955 he left the country for Israel. Getting Brazilian citizenship, however,
was a fateful decision for Bohm as it led to the loss of his American citizenship.
Indeed, in accord with the oath, he gave up his former citizenship. As early as April
1955, Marc Severe, an official from the American consulate, required the Brazilian
Police Department to give the US government information about the Brazilian



70
Bohm tried to convince Einstein to support his move to Israel, but Einstein was reluctant,
writing, “to go there with the intention to leave on the first occasion would be regrettable.” Einstein
to Bohm, 22 Jan 1954. Bohm, however, was decided to go: “I have decided to go to Israel. This
decision was precipitated by the receipt of an offer of a job in Haifa from Rosen [. . .] I have cited
you as a possible recommendation, so you may be receiving a letter from them soon.” He also
promised to stay there for years to Einstein (“. . . do not plan to leave unless after several years of
effort”), a promise he would not keep. In addition, Bohm was considering the possibility of getting
a passport without losing American citizenshipâ€"“I am informed that the Israeli Embassy in Brazil
may issue a passport for me to go to Israel, if the Technion request it.”â€"which did not materialize,
Bohm to Einstein, 3 Feb 1954. Then Einstein changed his views and supported Bohm’s plans.
Einstein to Bohm, 10 Feb 1954; and Einstein to Nathan Rosen, 11 March 1954. The Albert
Einstein Archives, The Hebrew University of Jerusalem. My thanks to Michel Paty and Amit
Hagar for providing me with copies of these letters.
56 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


nationality of Bohm. Brazilian authorities took time replying, but eventually they
confirmed that Bohm had been granted Brazilian citizenship.71
Bohm lost his American citizenship on 5 December 1956, but only in 1960,
already in London, did he try to recover it or even to get a visa, so that he could
accept the position that Brandeis University had offered him. His attempts were
unsuccessful. He tried again in 1965â€"1967, with the support of Stirling Colgate,
President of the New Mexico Institute of Mining and Technology, in Socorro.
Colgate became engaged in the fight as a result of the job offer he had made to
Bohm. Again he did not succeed. The backgrounds of these attempts is revealing of
the enduring constraints of the Cold War era. In 1960 in London, he was asked by
the American Consul about his previous relationship with the Communist Party.
Thus, Bohm made a notarized statement on 23 March 1960 about his former links
with the Communist Party, and about his current withdrawal from Communist
views. Although he had made a notarized statement, Bohm did not intend to
make it public. However, this was exactly what the American officials expected
from him. Indeed, it would be necessary to demonstrate an active attitude against
Marxism, i.e. to make public pronouncements against Communism.72
At that stage, Bohm faced a dilemma: either to keep his dignity and not recover
his American citizenship or recover it, even if it meant losing his dignity. Bohm
decided not to pay the price required by the American authorities. His decision is
well documented in a letter to Aage Bohr, “It seems that while they are satisfied that
I am not a Communist, the McCarran act requires that I prove ‘active anti-Com-
munism’, e.g. by writing political articles; and this I am not prepared to do.” Later,
in 1966, Bohm stuck to his decision, as one can see from the letter to Ross
Lomanitz, who had been instrumental in recommending him to Colgate, “My
principal objection to [publishing something of an ‘anticommunist nature’] is that
it is not really compatible with dignity. [. . .] I feel it wrong to say it [his criticisms to
Communism] in order to regain American citizenship. For then, I am saying
something not mainly because I think it is true, but rather, for some ulterior purpose.
It’s rather like writing a scientific article in order to impress one’s superior, so as to
get a better job.” It is worth noting that Stirling Colgate understood and supported
Bohm’s attitude, writing to the US State Department, “He could apply for a visa as
an immigrant, and I believe this would require a full demonstration of active
opposition to communism with a question on his mind, I am sure, of just how



71
Bohm to Hanna Loewy [Beginning of 1952]. BP (C.40). According to physicist José Leite Lopes
[Interview with A.M.R. Andrade, 18 March 2003], Brazilian physicists had asked João Alberto
Lins de Barros, a very influential politician and supporter of Brazilian physics, to accelerate
Bohm’s Brazilian citizenship application. File 40.135/54. Archives of the “Instituto de
Identificação Ricardo Gumbleton Daunt”, SSPâ€"Polı́cia Civil, São Paulo.
72
For the date of the “Certificate of Loss of Nationality”, see Stirling Colgate folder in BP (C.8). “I
would like very much to get the question of my US citizenship settled again”. Bohm to Stirling
Colgate, 28 April 1965, BP (C.8). I am thankful to Basil Hiley for his kindness in sending me a
copy of the notarized documents.
2.5 Waning Causality and Disenchantment with Communism (Late 1950sâ€"Early 1960s) 57


active is active. This question relates, of course, to a sense of personal dignity
among his friends and peers.”73
Let us now break the chronology to report the outcome of Bohm’s citizenship
affair. In the twilight of the Cold War, Bohm eventually won the right to recover his
American citizenship after living more than 30 years as a Brazilian citizen. He used
his letters to Einstein written from Brazil, in which it was clear that Bohm did not
intend to give up American nationality, and that he had applied for Brazilian
citizenship only in order to get a passport. He succeeded in the legal process in
1986: “Dear Dr. Bohm. I am pleased to inform you that the Department of State has
today notified the Embassy that your citizenship case has been reconsidered. It has
now been determined that your naturalization which took place in Brazil, in
November 1954, was an involuntary act. Consequently your loss of United States
citizenship has been overturned; and the Certificate of Loss of Nationality that was
initially prepared has been vacated.” The victory came too late as he had no income
to live in the US as a retiree. In Cold War times, keeping dignity came at a high
price.74



2.5.5 New Acquaintances: Students and Collaborators

During this period of transition Bohm also had pleasant professional experiences
meeting people who would collaborate in the new directions he would undertake.
At Technion in Israel he met two new students, Yakir Aharonov and Gideon
Carmi.75 Aharonov analyzed the role of electromagnetic potentials in quantum
theory and suggested a new effect, now known as the Aharonov-Bohm effect.
Aharonov and Bohm illustrated this effect arguing that when an electron beam is


73
Bohm to Aage Bohr, November 17, 1960, Aage Bohr Papers, Niels Bohr Archive, Copenhagen.
The distinction between declaring not to be Communist and expressing active anti-Communism
was not understood by Bohm’s biographer David Peat (1997, pp. 254â€"255). Peat also asked “Why
did he place his rejection of Communism at the end of the Second World War when in fact his
letters from Brazil are staunchly pro-Communist?” I think Peat was not very sensitive to the
carefully diplomatic manner in which Bohm wrote, in the statement previously cited: “Gradually
however, and especially after the war was over, I began to see that . . .” He was simply avoiding any
great disparity between that statement and what he had declared before the HUAC, in 1949â€"1950.
Bohm to Ross Lomanitz, 21 Nov 1996, BP (C.42), underlined in the original. Stirling Colgate to
George Owen (Deputy Director Visa Officeâ€"US State Dept), 4 Nov 4, 1966, BP (C.8).
74
Bohm’s lawyer, Edward S. Gudeon, based his petition on the decision of the Supreme Court, in
1967, in the case Afroyim v Rusk, which stated that an American citizen could only lose his
citizenship if required by himself. Edward Gudeon to Ehud Benamy, 11 Feb 1986, BP [Probably
C.8]. Richard Haegeleâ€"American Consul in Londonâ€"to David Bohm, 11 Feb 1986, BP [Prob-
ably C.8]. “I cannot see how I could settle there permanently, because my pension could not be
adequate for this”. Bohm to Hanna Loewy, 3 March 1986, BP (C.41).
75
David Bohm, interviewed by Maurice Wilkins, sessions 4 and 7, 25 Sept 1986 and 30 Jan 1987,
Niels Bohr Library and Archives, American Institute of Physics, College Park, MD.
58 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


split around a region where an electromagnetic field is confined, the beam passing
through a field-free region may undergo a physical change. They then argued that
this was a quantum effect related to the vector potential, which is classically
considered to be without physical meaning. This paper stirred up a flood of
experiments and theoretical explanations and is by far the most influential paper
authored by David Bohm, amounting to 3,500 citations as of May 2012
(Aharonov and Bohm 1959; Peshkin and Tonomura 1989).76 It brought wide
recognition to both, which included the 1998 Wolf Prize to Aharonov. However,
the Aharonov-Bohm effect did not appear at Technion. Aharonov had followed
Bohm to Bristol, where he got his PhD. Bristol was then a thrilling center for
physics under the leadership of Maurice Pryce, the head of the Department. “Pryce
appointed David Bohm (1917â€"1994), who arrived in 1957 with his student Yakir
Aharonov (b. 1932). Their discovery [. . .] was central to the formulation of modern
gauge theories of fundamental interactions.” These are the recollections of Michael
Berry and Brian Pollard (2008).
In London Bohm met Jeffrey Bub, who began to work with him as a graduate
student on problems related to the foundations of quantum physics. Bub came from
Cape Town, where he had become interested in foundational issues in quantum
mechanics through the mathematician and mystic Michael Whiteman (Bub 1997,
p. xi). He went to London to study under Karl Popper but at the time Popper was in
the US. Bub was advised by G.J. Whitrow to work either with Bohm or Rosenfeld if
he wanted to work on foundations of quantum mechanics. Bub chose Bohm because
his scholarship funds were insufficient to support a move to Denmark, and he
thought the language would present a problem. The research directions Bub
would have followed, had he chosen Rosenfeld, we can only wonder. He began
to work under Bohm in early 1963, however, Bohm was no longer interested in
hidden variables. According to Bub’s recollections,77
At the time Bohm was no longer interested in hidden variables. He was trying to develop a
general framework for physics based on a discrete space-time structure for events and held
a weekly seminar where he discussed ideas on algebraic topology using Hodge’s book on
harmonic analysis. It was rather too abstract for me. We graduate students tried to make
sense of Bohm’s ideas with Hiley, but it seemed that every few days ideas he had talked
about earlier were scrapped for new ideas, so it was rather frustrating.

In hindsight we can see that Bub was experiencing the attempts Bohm was
making to develop new perspectives for his research. Eventually Bub found his own
way through the reading of a paper by Margenau on the measurement problem;
subsequently Bohm suggested he “read a paper by Wiener and Siegel, ‘The
differential space theory of quantum systems,’ and consider treating the collapse
problem in the framework of a hidden variables theory.” More particularly,
“Bohm’s thought was that one should be able to exploit the Wiener-Siegel


76
For the debate on the theoretical interpretation of the Aharonov-Bohm effect, see Lyre (2009).
77
Talk with Jeffrey Bub, 22 May 2002, American Institute of Physics, College Park, MD. E-mails
from Bub to the author, 29 May 2014.
2.6 New Perspectives: Wholeness and Implicate Order 59


‘differential space’ approach to quantum mechanics to construct an explicit
nonlinear dynamical ‘collapse’ theory for quantum measurement processes” (Bub
1997, p. xii). Thus, with Bub as a student, Bohm came back to the hidden variable
approach while in a different manner from that in the early 1950s. Bub coped with
the suggestion and a thesis and papers resulted (Bohm and Bub 1966a, b).78
Bub was probably one of the first students to get a PhD in physics working on
foundations of quantum mechanics. After a string of positions he eventually
became a Distinguished Professor at University of Maryland. After working with
Bohm, Bub’s interests moved to quantum logic. Bub ultimately evolved for a kind
of reconciliation between the two themes he had worked through his life: hidden
variables and quantum logic (Bub 1997, p. xiii). In 1998 he won the prestigious
Lakatos Award with the book Interpreting the Quantum World (Bub 1997) where
this reconciliation is presented. Thus Bub’s story is a success story of somebody
who began and endured in the field of foundations of quantum mechanics. How-
ever, the very fact that most of his academic career was developed in philosophy
departments, a standard followed by many quantum foundationalists till today, is
reminiscent of the adversities such physics researchers have found among their
fellow physicists. When he began his doctoral dissertation, Bohm had warned him
that with such a subject he would not get a position in a physics department.79
Bohm was premonitory.



2.6 New Perspectives: Wholeness and Implicate Order

Looking for new perspectives to understand quantum mechanics, Bohm drew
heavily on analogies and images to convey the content of his new ideas on order,
the most well-known being the image of a drop of ink falling into a rotating cylinder
full of glycerin. When the cylinder rotates in one direction the ink disappears in the
glycerin, which Bohm referred to as the implicate order. When it rotates in the
opposite direction, the drop reappears, namely the explicate order. Bohm would
associate the explicate order with classical or macroscopic phenomena and the
implicate order with quantum phenomena. For Bohm, the usual interpretation of
quantum mechanics was not the final word in quantum physics, and he went on to
associate the implicate order with a physical theory yet to be worked out that has
standard quantum mechanics as a limiting case.80
Bohm’s ideas of implicate and explicate order resulted from diverse influences
and inspirations. As he recalled, there was his search for new ideas and his enduring
reflection about what was common to his previous approach and standard quantum


78
Margenau’s paper was Margenau (1963) and the papers by Norbert Wiener and Armand Siegel
were Wiener and Siegel (1953, 1955) and Siegel and Wiener (1956).
79
Jeffrey Bub, talk with the author, 3 April 2014.
80
Bohm et al. (1970), Bohm (1971, 1973), Bohm (1981).
60 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


mechanics (a task that was eased by John Bell’s 1965 work pointing to non-locality
as the irreducible quantum feature, as we will see in Chap. 7). In addition, there
were the insights from a TV program in which he saw the demonstration with ink
and glycerin and the fruitful interaction with mathematicians and mathematical
physicists. The question remains of how much Bohm was influenced in the early
1960s by his dialogues with the influential Indian writer Jiddu Krishnamurti, with
whom Bohm kept a longstanding interaction (Peat 1997, Chap. 11). Bohm once
acknowledged some influence from Krishnamurti’s psychological ideas on the
non-separability between observer and observed, which reinforced his ideas on
the analogous problems in quantum measurement. Later, however, he did not
mention this influence again. Basil Hiley, Bohm’s longstanding collaborator to
whom we will refer later, thinks that these dialogues were not influential in
Bohm’s physics; rather, they played a role in Bohm’s reflections about society,
thoughts, and creativity. A reflection on the relationship between observer and
observed had been an essential feature of Bohm’s early reflections on the founda-
tions of quantum mechanics, see for instance how he treated measurement both in
his 1951 book and 1952 causal interpretation. Thus, it seems that the influence of
these dialogues on his physics, if any, was superseded by his enduring reflection on
measurement in quantum physics.81
Implicate and explicate order would have remained mere philosophical or
scientific intuitions if it had not been for the mathematical elaboration they later
received. To accomplish this Bohm did not work alone. He counted on the collab-
oration of Basil Hiley, who was born in Burma, then part of the British Raj. He
came to England when India gained independence. Hiley did his degree and
doctoral studies at King’s College working with the theory of condensed matter,
but he was interested in abstract mathematics and foundational physics. He attended
a lecture by Bohm at the end of his degree and was spellbound. Professional
interaction with Bohm, however, came later, after Hiley was hired by Birkbeck
College in 1961. Bohm was also there and he became Bohm’s assistant. At the
beginning of their collaboration there was no connection with Bohm’s previous
work on the causal interpretation. “When I started with Bohm we did not mention or
discuss his ’52 Hidden Variable approach at all” and “for about the first 10 years we
didn’t discuss the Hidden Variable Theory hardly at all,” Hiley stated. Furthermore,
according to Hiley’s recollections, he “was brought up in an atmosphere where it
was generally agreed that there was something basically wrong with the ’52 paper
of Bohm.” Instead of hidden variable models, Hiley engaged with new mathemat-
ical objects with Bohm and the mathematician Roger Penrose, in a seminar they
informally ran on Thursday afternoons.82


81
Bohm (1982, 1987). Basil Hiley 2008, American Institute of Physics, ibid.
82
Basil Hiley interviewed by Olival Freire, 11 Jan 2008, Niels Bohr Library and Archives,
American Institute of Physics, College Park, MD. See also Basil Hiley interviewed by Alexei
Kojevnikov, 05 Dec 2000, Niels Bohr Library and Archives, American Institute of Physics,
College Park, MD.
2.6 New Perspectives: Wholeness and Implicate Order 61


Bohm and Hiley’s strategy was to analyze the algebraic structures behind
quantum mechanics’ mathematical formalism and subsequently look for more
general algebras which could be reduced to the quantum algebras as special
cases. This strategy was informed by the fact that they did not want to take any
kind of space-time geometry as assumptions in their reasoning. Instead they tried to
develop algebraic structures from which space-time could emerge. Here the alge-
braic primary structure would be the implicate order and the emerging space-time
geometry would be the explicate order. With the benefit of hindsight, we can
identify Hiley’s unique contribution in this sense. Indeed Hiley was, and still is,
the mathematical mind behind the research program related to the idea of order. A
number of different factors also contributed to the development of this mathemat-
ical approach, such as new and mathematically talented students including Fabio
Frescura, interactions with the mathematician Roger Penrose at Birkbeck College,
and inspiration from the Brazilian physicist Mario Schönberg’s early works on
algebras and geometry. Highly sophisticated from the mathematical point of view,
such an approach has, however, suffered from little contact with experimental
results, which could help to inform the mathematical choices to be made.83



2.6.1 Returning to the Quantum Potential

In the late 1970s a new stage in Bohm’s quest for a new approach to quantum
mechanics began, albeit strongly overlapping the previous one. To a certain extent
it meant a return to Bohm’s 1952 ideas. This return, almost 30 years later, is vividly
described by Basil Hiley84:
We had a couple of research students working for us, Chris Dewdney and Chris Philippidis.
They came to me one day with Bohm’s 1952 paper in their hand. And, they said, “Why
don’t you and David Bohm talk about this stuff?” And I then started saying, “Oh, because
it’s all wrong.” And then they started asking me some questions about it and I had to admit
that I had not read the paper properly. Actually I had not read the paper at all apart from the
introduction! And when I took it and, so, you know, I was now faced with embarrassment
that our research students [Laugh] were putting me in, in a difficult position, and so I went
back home and I spent the weekend working through it. As I read it, I thought, “What on
earth is wrong with this? It seems perfectly all right. Whether that’s the way nature behaves
is another matter.” But as far as the logic, the mathematics, and the arguments were
concerned, it was sound. I went back again to see the two again, I said, “Okay, let’s now
work out what the trajectories are, work out what the quantum potential looks like in
various situations.

The students and the surprised Hiley went on to calculate the trajectories allowed
by Bohm’s quantum potential using the recently-arrived desktop computer


83
See Bohm and Hiley (1981), Frescura and Hiley (1980a, b). Reference to Schönberg is in
Frescura and Hiley (1980b).
84
Basil Hiley, ibid.
62 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


resources to plot these trajectories, creating images of quantum phenomena
(Philippidis et al. 1979). Motivated by students and collaborators, Bohm returned
to his 1952 approach, but now he had a new problem: how to interpret such an
approach and its deterministic trajectories shaped by the nonlocal physical interac-
tions resulting from the quantum potential. Here there is a crucial point to consider
while charting Bohm’s thoughts on quantum mechanics. While he and his col-
leagues kept the mathematics and the model used in the 1952 paper, they changed
many of their philosophical and conceptual assumptions. The quantum potential
was no longer considered a new physical potential. Instead it was interpreted as an
indication of a new order, in particular a kind of “active information.” Emphasis
was no longer put on the causality embedded in such an approach. According to
Bohm and Hiley (1993), in the book synthesizing their ideas on quantum physics,
The Undivided Universe, after considering terms such as “causal” and “hidden
variable” interpretations “too restrictive” and stating that “nor is this sort of theory
necessarily causal,” they concluded that “the question of determinism is therefore a
secondary one, while the primary question is whether we can have an adequate
conception of the reality of a quantum system, be this causal or be it stochastic or be
it of any other nature.” Their main philosophical stance was to look for an
ontological view of quantum phenomena, while the main scientific challenge
remained how to tie such a requirement to the mathematical work related to the
idea of an “implicate order.” This challenge has survived Bohm and is a task on
which Hiley remains focused.85
It is time now to ask about the share of continuity and the share of change in
Bohm’s enduring research on the foundations of the quantum theory. Continuity
was related to the philosophical commitment to the quest for an ontology, an
explanation of the kind of world described by quantum physics. From the Quantum
Theory 1951 textbook to the 1993 The Undivided Universe, there was a permanent
commitment to a kind of scientific realism. The changes were also formidable.
Determinism, the leitmotif of the causal interpretation, was abandoned. The style of
scientific research also changed along the way, with the building of physical models
being replaced by a more abstract research on the algebras underlying the mathe-
matical structure of quantum physics. Influences from Marxism were replaced by
Eastern thinking. As influential as Bohm’s thoughts on quantum physics may be, it
has been hard to identify which part or stage of his thinking is being considered
when his ideas are invoked by his current readers. An early example of this was
Fritjof Capra and his bestseller The Tao of Physics, in which Bohm’s ideas on order
in quantum theory were presented while Bohm’s previous ideas on a causal
interpretation of the same theory were ignored. Bohm did not help his readers to
make sense of the evolution of his thoughts and in the most widely influential of his
books, Wholeness and the implicate order, he conflated different stages of his
interpretation of quantum mechanics. Even in a paper showing the connections


85
Philippidis et al. (1979) and Bohm and Hiley (1993, p. 2). For Hiley’s recent work, see Hiley and
Callaghan (2012).
2.7 On the Legacy of a Notable Quantum Dissident 63


between two of his most important approaches to quantum mechanics, when “asked
to explain how [his] ideas of hidden variables tie up with those on the implicate
order,” he emphasized the continuity more than his change of emphasis.86



2.7 On the Legacy of a Notable Quantum Dissident87

Recognition was erratic in David Bohm’s case. In the late 1940s he was considered
among the most promising young American theoretical physicists. During the
1950s, his work on the causal interpretation was poorly received, casting doubts
on that promise. Few were those who, like the Scottish engineer Lancelot L. Whyte,
considered the causal interpretation anything but fleeting. Whyte considered
Bohm’s work comparable to Kepler’s in mechanics, which was a compliment for
a physicist. Later, in the 1980s, to some extent reflecting the physicists’ changed
mood about research on the foundations of quantum physics, his whole work fared
better. A sign of the late prestige accorded to Bohm and to the field in which he
mostly worked was the volume in honor of the centenary edition of Physical
Review, the most influential American physics journal. It included commentaries
and reprints from the most important papers ever published in this periodical. In the
section on “Quantum Mechanics”, edited by Sheldon Goldstein and Joel Lebowitz,
all the papers, including Bohm’s 1952 paper on the causal interpretation, concern
the foundations of quantum mechanics and a photo of Bohm opens the section. The
Festschrift honoring his 70th birthday had already brought tributes from scientists
such as Ilya Prigogine, Maurice Wilkins, and Richard Feynman, all Nobel Prize
laureates at the time the book appeared, Anthony Leggett, who would go on to win
the 2003 Physics Nobel Prize, John Bell, Roger Penrose, David Pines, Bernard
d’Espagnat, and Jean-Pierre Vigier, in addition to a number of Bohm’s collabora-
tors. The ultimate accolade was to be elected Fellow of the Royal Society in 1990.
After his death, his prestige continued to grow, as remarked by his long-standing
friend, the American physicist Melba Phillips (1907â€"2004), “it is too bad, very sad
indeed, that he did not live to see how his reputation has shot up recently. His
interpretation of quantum mechanics is becoming respected not only by philoso-
phers of science but also by ‘straight’ physicists.”88



86
Capra (1991), Bohm (1981) and Bohm (1987).
87
While the use of the term dissident for Bohm and his works in quantum mechanics is almost self-
evident, I use the term for a wide description of those physicists who contributed to develop
the research on the foundations of quantum mechanics after 1950. I postpone a justification for my
use of the term to Chap. 9. The first to use a similar term in this context, as far as I know, was Karl
Popper (Popper and Bartley 1982, p. 100): “Unlike the orthodoxy, the dissenters are far from
united. Not two of them agree (except perhaps Bohm and de Broglie).”
88
Stroke (1995). Lancelot Whyte to Léon Rosenfeld, 8 Apr 1958, RP (Bohm et al. 1987). Melba
Phillips to David Peat, 17 Oct 1994, A22, BP.
64 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School




Picture 2.3 Citations of Bohm’s causal interpretation papers from 1952 to 2014â€"Source of the
data: Web of Science


With the benefit of hindsight, how can Bohm’s legacy be assessed in the first
decades of the twenty-first century? The question requires a multifaceted answer.
First, there were achievements not directly related to his research on the founda-
tions of quantum theory. This was the case of his work on collective variables, in
plasma and metals, conducted with Eugene Gross and David Pines, a work which
had begun before his shift towards the causal interpretation. And then, there was the
Aharonov-Bohm effect, published in 1959, which became a landmark when one
speaks about quantum effects without classical equivalent. These achievements are
beyond debate; they are considered feats in the history of physics in the twentieth
century.89 In addition, if one takes scientometric data, the number of citations, into
consideration, the aforementioned are by far among the most influential contribu-
tions by David Bohm. Second, the research lines on the interpretational issues he
worked on have survived him and are fields of live research with their value to the
future development of physics still subject to controversial assessments. They may
be grouped into three different strands. The first continues work on Bohm’s original
1952 proposal, not only trying to extend the first physical models but also keeping
Bohm’s early philosophical commitments to determinism and realism. This is, for
instance, the path chosen by Peter Holland (1993). More recently, this trend has
been renewed by Antony Valentini. He has worked with deterministic hidden-
variables theories in the direction of relaxing the equality between distribution of
hidden variables and probability distribution from standard quantum theory. As for
him quantum physics may be a mere case of an effective theory of an equilibrium
state, we should look for discrepancies between hidden variables and quantum

89
Basil Hiley cited these achievements and Bohm’s contributions to our understanding of quantum
non-locality when asked for the background for Bohm’s nomination for the Nobel Prize. B. Hiley
to Sessler, 9 Jan 1989, A172, BP.
2.7 On the Legacy of a Notable Quantum Dissident 65


theory predictions in situations of nonequilibrium. Still, for him, we should look for
this in astrophysical and cosmological tests (Valentini 2007, 2010). The second
strand concerns Bohmian mechanics, a name coined by Detlef Dürr, Sheldon
Goldstein, and Nino Zanghi. They construed Bohm’s proposal in a very clean and
elegant way. In his original paper Bohm had worked out analogies between
Schrödinger’s equation and classical Hamilton-Jacobi equations, which led to an
emphasis on the role of the non-classical potential that Bohm christened the
“quantum potential.” Dürr and colleagues, however, adopted just two premises:
the state which describes quantum systems evolves according to Schrödinger’s
equation and particles move, that is, they have a speed in the configuration space.
Thus for them, “Bohmian mechanics is a version of quantum mechanics for non
relativistic particles in which the word ‘particle’ is to be understood literally: In
Bohmian mechanics quantum particles have positions, always, and follow trajec-
tories. These trajectories differ, however, from the classical Newtonian trajecto-
ries.” With this approach, without referring to the quantum potential and the
difficult problem of its physical interpretation, they derived the same results one
gets both with standard quantum mechanics and with Bohm’s original approach for
nonrelativistic phenomena. This approach has been useful for discussing quantum
chaos, and for this reason it has received widespread acceptance, well beyond
physicists just interested in the foundations of quantum mechanics. One should
note that when these physicists define what they understand to be a Bohmian theory,
the preference for determinism disappears and they consider that “a Bohmian
theory should be based upon a clear ontology,” meaning by ontology “what the
theory is fundamentally about.” While for non-relativistic physics they have
adopted a particle ontology, they admit that they “have no idea what the appropriate
ontology for relativistic physics actually is.” This way, the commitment to a
quantum ontology comes before an engagement with a causal pattern for physical
theories, a position analogous to what was adopted by David Bohm and Basil Hiley
since the 1960s.90
The third strand of Bohm’s scientific legacy is represented by Basil Hiley, who
continues to work on research that he and Bohm had been carrying out before
Bohm’s death. This research tries to connect the insights of implicate order and
active information with the quest for algebraic structures able to underpin space-
time geometry and standard quantum mechanics. This program has inherited from
the causal interpretation the major challenge of obtaining a fully relativistic treat-
ment in order to match the level attained by standard quantum mechanics with the
Dirac equation.
Rather than one specific and lasting contribution, I think he should be acknowl-
edged for his attitude to the importance of the research on the foundations of this
theory. His late recognition was not independent of this role. The point is that the
most influential single theoretical result in the foundations of quantum theory after
WWII was Bell’s theorem, which jointly with its experimental tests led to the


90
Dürr et al. (1992, 1996, 2009).
66 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


recognition of entanglement as a physical property with far-reaching implications
both for science and technology. However, John Bell’s work has a close historical
connection with Bohm’s work on a hidden variable interpretation. Max Jammer
wrote that “it was due to Bohm that many physicists and philosophers of science
[. . .] examined more closely the logic of von Neumann’s argument and that finally,
in 1964, J. S. Bell clarified completely the nature of von Neumann’s unnecessarily
restrictive assumptions with the removal of which his proof breaks down.”
According to the recollections of Bell himself, “Smitten by Bohm’s papers,” he
attempted to determine what was wrong with von Neumann’s proof, since it did not
allow for hidden variables in quantum mechanics. Here is not the place to chart the
origins of Bell’s theorem, which will be done in Chap. 7. For our purposes, suffice
to say Bell was directly motivated by the very existence of Bohm’s proposal and by
its reception among physicists. His statementsâ€"“In 1952 I saw the impossible
done,” and “Bohm’s 1952 papers on quantum mechanics were for me a revela-
tion”â€"hide more truth than is usually recognized, “the impossible done” referring
to the appearance of the causal interpretation which was considered by prevailing
wisdom an impossible feat.91



2.7.1 Historiography on Bohm’s Interpretation

The initial poor reception of Bohm’s causal interpretation has attracted the attention
of commentators. Some of them have looked to the political climate of the Cold
War and Bohm’s exile to explain this. “The political atmosphere in the U.S. at that
time did not help rational debate and in consequence there was little discussion and
the interpretation was generally ignored for reasons that had more to do with
politics than science,” stated Bohm’s assistant, Basil Hiley. F. David Peat, a science
writer and former Bohm collaborator, also advanced the political explanation for
the unfavorable reaction to Bohm’s work, but limited its force to the Princeton
physics community. The historians Russel Olwell and Shawn Mullet blamed
Bohm’s Brazilian exile for the poor response to his causal interpretation theory.
Others, such as James Cushing, underestimated the number of physicists who
analyzed Bohm’s papers, writing “[Bohm’s proposal] was basically ignored, rather
than either studied or rebutted.” Our analysis, however, suggests otherwise, more
related to the practice of physics as a cultural field. As pointed out by Max Jammer
and Mara Beller, the dominance of the Copenhagen school in the early 1950s was
very effective. The main critics of Bohm’s ideas were Europeans, aligned with
Bohr’s complementarity, and not influenced by McCarthyism. Some of them were
even Marxists. The record of debates about Bohm’s papers and about his activities



91
Jammer (1988, p. 694), Bernstein (1991, pp. 65â€"68) and Bell (1982, 1987). For the history of
Bell’s theorem and its experiments, see Chap. 7.
2.7 On the Legacy of a Notable Quantum Dissident 67


in Brazil and Israel should not lead us to underestimate these debates. In addition to
the dominance of complementarity, other factors were also influential.
We have seen that Bohm and his collaborators searched in vain for predictions
not foreseen by the usual quantum mechanics and also failed to find a satisfactory
relativistic generalization of their approach.92 Indeed, as most results of the causal
interpretation were to replicate results already obtained with standard quantum
physics, the idea grew that the controversy over the interpretation of quantum
physics was a matter of philosophical taste, without implications for the workings
of physics. Even physicists who were not open critics of the causal interpretation
concluded this. We have seen in Chap. 1 the case of A. Messiah’s influential
textbook. He stated that the controversy “belongs to the philosophy of science
rather than to the domain of physical science proper” (Messiah 1961, p. 48). A
similar example is Fritz Bopp’s statement: “what we have done today was
predicting the possible development of physicsâ€"we were not doing physics but
metaphysics” (in Körner 1957, p. 51). It was not by chance that in the 1950s the
only conference dedicated to the subject was organized by philosophers rather than
by physicists (Körner 1957). The idea of a philosophical controversy survived in the
common discourse on the subject even when the context changed, as was the case
when Max Jammer entitled his 1974 book The Philosophy of Quantum Mechanics.
One should acknowledge, however, that at least in the special context of the young
French Marxist physicists around Jean-Pierre Vigier, the philosophical bias of the
dispute may have been considered more appealing than simply a diverting factor.
And yet, the absence of new results reinforced the derogatory label of “philosoph-
ical” applied by the opponents of the causal interpretation, further discouraging
young physicists from working on a subject that ultimately was more a question of
philosophy than of physics.93
The ensemble of these reasons explains why Bohm’s ideas challenged the
dominance of the complementarity view among physicists, but did not weaken it
enough to create a favorable space for the immediate development of alternative
interpretations.




92
Hiley (1997, p. 113), Peat (1997, p. 133) and Olwell (1999, p. 750). Shawn Mullet, “Political
science: The red scare as the hidden variable in the Bohmian interpretation of quantum theory”
(Senior thesis HIS679, University of Texas at Austin, unpub. paper, 1999). Mullet, after contact
with sources from Bohm’s stay in Brazil, has changed his views; cf. Shawn Mullet, “Creativity and
the mainstream: David Bohm’s migration to Brazil and the hidden variables interpretation,”
unpublished paper, Workshop on “Migrant scientists in the twentieth century,” Milan, 2003.
Cushing (1994, p. 144), Jammer (1974) and Beller (1999).
93
However, Messiah did not please the hard core of the supporters of the Copenhagen interpre-
tation. Rosenfeld wrote to him praising the book, but in disagreement with his diagnosis of the
controversy. For Rosenfeld, “Ce n’est pas en effet d’expérience, mais bien de simple logique qu’il
s’agit ici.” Léon Rosenfeld to Albert Messiah, 16 Jan 1959, RP. About Bopp, by the way, he was
then working on another alternative interpretation, the so-called “stochastic interpretation.”
68 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


References

Aharonov, Y., Bohm, D.: Significance of electromagnetic potentials in the quantum theory. Phys.
Rev. 115(3), 485â€"491 (1959)
Anderson, P.: Considerations on Western Marxism. NLB, London (1976)
Andrade, A.M.R.: Fı́sicos, mésons e polı́tica: a din^amica da ciência na sociedade. HUCITEC, São
Paulo (1999)
Bacciagaluppi, G., Valentini, A.: Quantum Theory at the Crossroads: Reconsidering the 1927
Solvay Conference. Cambridge UniversityPress, Cambridge (2009)
Bachelard, G.: Le Nouvel Esprit Scientifique. Félix Alcan, Paris (1934)
Bell, J.S.: On the impossible pilot wave. Found. Phys. 12(10), 989â€"999 (1982)
Bell, J.S.: Beables for quantum field theory. In: Hiley, B.J., Peat, F.D. (eds.) Quantum Implica-
tions: Essays in Honour of David Bohm, pp. 227â€"234. Routledge & Kegan, London (1987)
Bell, J.S.: Speakable and Unspeakable in Quantum Mechanics: Collected Papers on Quantum
Philosophy. With an Introduction by Alain Aspect. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge
(2004)
Beller, M.: Quantum Dialogueâ€"The Making of a Revolution. The University of Chicago Press,
Chicago (1999)
Bernstein, J.: Quantum Profiles. Princeton University Press, Princeton (1991)
Berry, M., Pollard, B.: The Physical Tourist Physics in Bristol. Phys. Perspect. 10, 468â€"480 (2008)
Besson, V.: Les premiers travaux de Jean-Pierre Vigier sur la théorie des quanta: une rencontre
entre science et marxisme (1951-1954). Master dissertation, Université Claude Bernard Lyon
1 (2011)
Bitbol, M.: Schrödinger’s Philosophy of Quantum Mechanics. Kluwer, Dordrecht (1996)
Blokhintsev, D.I.: Critique de la conception idéaliste de la théorie quantique. Questions
scientifiquesâ€"Physique, pp. 95â€"129. Les éditions de la nouvelle critique, Paris (1952).
Bohm, D.: Quantum Theory. Prentice-Hall, New York (1951)
Bohm, D.: Reply to a criticism of a causal re-interpretation of the quantum theory. Phys. Rev. 87
(2), 389â€"390 (1952a)
Bohm, D.: A suggested interpretation of the quantum theory in terms of hidden variablesâ€"I &
II. Phys. Rev. 85(2), 166â€"179 and 180â€"193 (1952b)
Bohm, D.: Proof that probability density approaches (Psi)2 in causal interpretation of the quantum
theory. Phys. Rev. 89(2), 458â€"466 (1953a)
Bohm, D: A Discussion of Certain Remarks by Einstein on Born’s Probability Interpretation of the
[psi]â€"Function. Scientific Papers presented to Max Born. Edinburgh, Oliver and Boyd,
pp. 13â€"19 (1953b)
Bohm, D.: Hidden variables in the quantum theory. In: Bates, D.R. (ed.) Quantum Theoryâ€"IIIâ€"
Radiation and High Energy Physics, pp. 345â€"387. Academic, New York (1962)
Bohm, D.: Quantum theory as an indication of a new order in physics. Part A. The development of
new order as shown through the history of physics. Found. Phys. 1(4), 359â€"381 (1971)
Bohm, D.: Quantum theory as an indication of a new order in physics. Part B. Implicate and
explicate order in physical law. Found. Phys. 3(2), 139â€"168 (1973)
Bohm, D.: Wholeness and the Implicate Order. Routledge & Kegan Paul, London (1981)
Bohm, D.: Interview. New Sci. 96(1331), 361â€"365 (1982)
Bohm, D.: Hidden variables and the implicate order. In: Hiley, B., Peat, D. (eds.) Quantum
Implications: Essays in Honour of David Bohm, pp. 33â€"45. Routledge, London (1987)
Bohm, D., Bub, J.: A proposed solution of measurement problem in quantum mechanics by a
hidden variable theory. Rev. Mod. Phys. 38(3), 453â€"469 (1966a)
Bohm, D., Bub, J.: A refutation of proof by Jauch and Piron that hidden variables can be excluded
in quantum mechanics. Rev. Mod. Phys. 38(3), 470â€"475 (1966b)
Bohm, D., Gross, E.P.: Theory of plasma oscillations. A. Origin of medium-like behavior. Phys.
Rev. 75(12), 1851â€"1864 (1949a)
References 69

Bohm, D., Gross, E.P.: Theory of plasma oscillations. B. Excitation and damping of oscillations.
Phys. Rev. 75(12), 1864â€"1876 (1949b)
Bohm, D., Hiley, B.J.: On a quantum algebraic approach to a generalized phase-space. Found.
Phys. 11(3â€"4), 179â€"203 (1981)
Bohm, D., Hiley, B.J.: The Undivided Universe : An Ontological Interpretation of Quantum
Theory. Routledge, London (1993)
Bohm, D., Pines, D.: A collective description of electron interactions. 1. Magnetic interactions.
Phys. Rev. 82(5), 625â€"634 (1951)
Bohm, D., Pines, D.: A collective description of electron interactions. 3. Coulomb interactions in a
degenerate electron gas. Phys. Rev. 92(3), 609â€"625 (1953)
Bohm, D., Schiller, R.: A causal interpretation of the Pauli equation (B). Nuovo Cimento Suppl 1
(1), 67â€"91 (1955)
Bohm, D., Vigier, J.P.: Model of the causal interpretation of quantum theory in terms of a fluid
with irregular fluctuations. Phys. Rev. 96(1), 208â€"216 (1954)
Bohm, D., Vigier, J.P.: Relativistic hydrodynamics of rotating fluid masses. Phys. Rev. 109(6),
1882â€"1891 (1958)
Bohm, D., Schiller, R., Tiomno, J.: A causal interpretation of the Pauli equation (A). Nuovo
Cimento Suppl 1, 48â€"66 (1955)
Bohm, D., Hillion, P., Takabayasi, T., Vigier, J.P.: Relativistic rotators and bilocal theory. Prog.
Theor. Phys. 23(3), 496â€"511 (1960a)
Bohm, D., Hillion, P., Vigier, J.P.: Internal quantum states of hyperspherical (nakano) relativistic
rotators. Prog. Theor. Phys. 24(4), 761â€"782 (1960b)
Bohm, D., Hiley, B.J., Stuart, A.E.G.: On a new mode of description in physics. Int. J. Theor. Phys.
3(3), 171â€"183 (1970)
Bohm, D., Hiley, B.J., Peat, F.D.: Quantum Implications: Essays in Honour of David Bohm.
Routledge & Kegan Paul, New York (1987)
Bohm, D., Biederman, C.J., Pylkkänen, P.: Bohm-Biederman Correspondence. Routledge,
London (1999)
Bohr, N.: Discussion with Einstein on epistemological problems in atomic physics. In: Schilpp,
P.A. (ed.) Albert Einsteinâ€"Philosopher-Scientist, pp. 199â€"242. The Library of the Living
Philosophers, Evanston (1949)
Bohr, A., Mottelson, B.R., Pines, D.: Possible analogy between the excitation spectra of nuclei and
those of the superconducting metallic state. Phys. Rev. 110(4), 936â€"938 (1958)
Broglie, L.: Nouvelles Perspectives en Microphysique. Albin Michel, Paris (1956)
Broglie, L.: La théorie de la mesure en mécanique ondulatoire interprétation usuelle et interpré-
tation causale. Gauthier-Villars, Paris (1957)
Broglie, L.D., Vigier, J.P., Bohm, D., Takabayasi, T.: Rotator model of elementary particles
considered as relativistic extended structures in minkowski space. Phys. Rev. 129(1), 438â€"
450 (1963)
Brownell, G. L.: Physics in South America. Physics Today July, pp. 5â€"12 (1952)
Bub, J.: Interpreting the Quantum World. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1997)
Capra, F.: The Tao of Physics : An Exploration of the Parallels Between Modern Physics and
Eastern Mysticism. Shambhala Publications, Boston, MA (1991)
Carson, C.: Heisenberg in the Atomic Age: Science and the Public Sphere. German Historical
Institute, Washington, DC (2010)
Caute, D.: Le Communisme et les intellectuels français, 1914-1966. Gallimard, Paris (1967)
Cross, A.: The Crisis in Physics: Dialectical Materialism and Quantum Theory. Soc. Stud. Sci. 21,
735â€"759 (1991)
Cushing, J.: Quantum Mechanicsâ€"Historical Contingency and the Copenhagen Hegemony. The
University of Chicago Press, Chicago (1994)
Dürr, D., Goldstein, S., Zanghi, N.: Quantum chaos, classical randomness, and bohmian mechan-
ics. J. Stat. Phys. 68(1â€"2), 259â€"270 (1992)
70 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


Dürr, D., Goldstein, S., Zanghi, N.: Bohmian mechanics at the foundation of quantum mechanics.
In: Cushing, J.T., Fine, A., Goldstein, S. (eds.) Bohmian Mechanics and Quantum Theory: An
Appraisal, pp. 21â€"44. Kluwer, Dordrecht (1996)
Dürr, D., Goldstein, S., Tumulka, R., Zanghi, N.: Bohmian mechanics. In: Greenberger, D.,
Hentsche, K., Weinert, F. (eds.) Compendium of Quantum Physicsâ€"Concepts, Experiments,
History and Philosophy, pp. 47â€"55. Springer, Berlin (2009)
Einstein, A.: Remarks to the essays appearing in this collective volume. In: Schilpp, P.A., Einstein,
A. (eds.) Albert Einsteinâ€"Philosopher-Scientist, pp. 665â€"668. The Library of the Living
Philosophers, Evanston, IL (1949)
Einstein, A.: Elementare Überlegungen zur Interpretation der Grundlagen der Quanten-Mechanik.
Scientific Papers presented to Max Born, pp. 33â€"40. Oliver and Boyd, Edinburgh . French
translation in Albert Einstein, Oeuvres Choisies, ed. by F. Balibar, B. Jech, and O. Darrigol,
Paris: Editions du Seuil-CNRS, 1989, pp. 1251â€"1256 (1953)
Einstein, A., Born, M., Born, H.: The Born-Einstein Letters: Correspondence Between Albert
Einstein and Max and Hedwig Born from 1916-1955, with Commentaries by Max Born.
Macmillan, London (1971)
Epstein, S.T.: The causal interpretation of quantum mechanics. Phys. Rev. 89(1), 319 (1953a)
Epstein, S.T.: The causal interpretation of quantum mechanics. Phys. Rev. 91(4), 985 (1953b)
Feyerabend, P.: Professor Bohm’s philosophy of nature. Br. J. Philos. Sci. 10(40), 321â€"338 (1960)
Feynman, R.: The present situation in fundamental theoretical physics. An. Acad. Bras. Cienc. 26
(1), 51â€"60 (1954)
Fock, V.A.: On the interpretation of quantum mechanics. Czechoslov. J. Phys. 7, 643â€"656 (1957)
Forstner, C.: The early history of David Bohm’s quantum mechanics through the perspective of
Ludwik Fleck’s thought-collectives. Minerva 46(2), 215â€"229 (2008)
Freire Jr., O.: The crisis in physicsâ€"comment. Soc. Stud. Sci. 22(4), 739â€"742 (1992)
Freire Jr., O.: David Bohm e a controvérsia dos quanta. Centro de Lógica, Epistemologia e História
da Ciência, Campinas [Brazil] (1999)
Freire Jr., O.: Gaston Bachelard et Louis de Broglie, ont-ils toujours été en synthonie? Cahiers
Gaston Bachelard 6, 160â€"166 (2004a)
Freire Jr., O.: Popper, probabilidade e teoria qu^antica. Episteme [Porto Alegre] 18, 103â€"127
(2004b)
Freire Jr., O.: Science and exile: David Bohm, the cold war, and a new interpretation of quantum
mechanics. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci. 36(1), 1â€"34 (2005)
Freire Jr., O.: Causality in physics and in the history of physics: a comparison of Bohm’s and
Forman’s papers. In: Carson, C., Kojevnikov, A., Trischler, H. (eds.) Weimar Culture and
Quantum Mechanics: Selected Papers by Paul Forman and Contemporary Perspectives on the
Forman Thesis, pp. 397â€"411. Imperial College & World Scientific, London (2011a)
Freire Jr., O.: Continuity and change: charting David Bohm’s evolving ideas on quantum mechan-
ics. In: Krause, D., Videira, A. (eds.) Brazilian Studies in Philosophy and History of Science,
pp. 291â€"299. Springer, Heidelberg (2011b)
Freire Jr., O.: On the connections between the dialectical materialism and the controversy on the
quanta. Jahrbuch Für Europäihce Wissenschaftskultur 6, 195â€"210 (2011c)
Freire Jr., O.: On the influence of science milestones on the history and philosophy of science. In:
Blum, A., Gavroglu, K., Renn, J. (eds.) Towards a History of the History of Science: 50 Years
Since “Structure”. Edition Open Access, Berlin (2014c)
Freire Jr., O., Lehner, C.: ‘Dialectical materialism and modern physics’, an unpublished text by
Max Born. Notes Rec. R. Soc. 64(2), 155â€"162 (2010)
Freistadt, H.: The crisis in physics. Sci. Soc. 17, 211â€"237 (1953)
Freistadt, H.: Connection between recent theories of Bohm, de Broglie, Dirac, and Schrodinger.
Phys. Rev. 98(4), 1176 (1955)
Freistadt, H.: The causal formulation of quantum mechanics of particles: The theory of de Broglie,
Bohm and Takabayasi. Nuovo Cimento Suppl 5, 1â€"70 (1957)
References 71

Frescura, F.A.M., Hiley, B.J.: The implicate order, algebras, and the spinor. Found. Phys. 10(1â€"2),
7â€"31 (1980a)
Frescura, F.A.M., Hiley, B.J.: The algebraization of quantum-mechanics and the implicate order.
Found. Phys. 10(9â€"10), 705â€"722 (1980b)
Gaddis, J.L.: The Cold War: A New History. Penguin, New York (2005)
Graham, L.R.: Science and Philosophy in the Soviet Union. Knopf, New York (1972)
Graham, L.R.: Science, Philosophy, and Human Behavior in the Soviet Union. Columbia Univer-
sity Press, New York (1987)
Halpern, O.: A proposed re-interpretation of quantum mechanics. Phys. Rev. 87(2), 389 (1952)
Hanson, N.R.: Copenhagen interpretation of quantum theory. Am. J. Phys. 27(1), 1â€"15 (1959)
Harding, S.G. (ed.): Can Theories be Refuted? Essays on the Duhem-Quine Thesis. Synthese
Library v 81. D. Reidel Publishing Co., Dordrecht (1976)
Heisenberg, W.: Physics and Philosophy; the Revolution in Modern Science. Harper, New York
(1958)
Hermann, G., Soler, L., Schnell, A.: Les fondements philosophiques de la mécanique quantique
introd., présentation, postf. critique par Lena Soler trad. par Alexandre Schnell en collab. avec
Lena Soler préf. de Bernard d’Espagnat. J. Vrin, Paris (1996)
Hiley, B.J.: David Joseph Bohm. Biogr. Mem. Fellows R. Soc. 43, 106â€"131 (1997)
Hiley, B.J., Callaghan, R.E.: Clifford algebras and the Dirac-Bohm quantum Hamilton-Jacobi
equation. Found. Phys. 42, 192â€"208 (2012)
Hobsbawm, E.J.: On history. Weidenfeld & Nicolson, London (1997)
Hobsbawm, E.J.: How to Change the World : Marx and Marxism, 1840-2011. Little, Brown,
London (2011)
Hoffmann, D.: Robert Havemann: antifascist, communist, dissident. In: Macrakis, K., Hoffmann,
D. (eds.) Science Under Socialism : East Germany in Comparative Perspective, pp. 269â€"285.
Harvard University Press, Cambridge, MA (1999)
Holland, P.R.: The Quantum Theory of Motion: An Account of the de Broglie-Bohm Causal
Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, England
(1993)
Home, D., Whitaker, M.A.B.: Ensemble interpretations of quantum-mechanicsâ€"a modern per-
spective. Phys. Rep. 210(4), 223â€"317 (1992)
Institut International de Physique Solvay: Electrons et photonsâ€"Rapports et discussions du
Cinquième Conseil de Physique tenu à Bruxelles du 24 au 29 octobre 1927. Gauthier-Villars,
Paris (1928) [English translation in Bacciagaluppi and Valentini 2009]
Jacobsen, A.: Léon Rosenfeld’s Marxist defense of complementarity. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci.
37(Suppl), 3â€"34 (2007)
Jacobsen, A.: Léon Rosenfeldâ€"physics, philosophy, and politics in the twentieth century. World
Scientific, Singapore (2012)
Jammer, M.: The philosophy of quantum mechanicsâ€"the interpretations of quantum mechanics in
historical perspective. Wiley, New York (1974)
Jammer, M.: David Bohm and his work on the occasion of his 70th-birthday. Found. Phys. 18(7),
691â€"699 (1988)
Kaiser, D.: The atomic secret in red hands? American suspicions of theoretical physicists during
the early Cold War. Representations 90, 28â€"60 (2005)
Kaiser, D.: How the hippies saved physics: science, counterculture, and the quantum revival.
W. W Norton, New York (2012)
Keller, J.B.: Bohm’s Interpretation of the Quantum Theory in Terms of Hidden Variables. Phys.
Rev. 89(5), 1040â€"1041 (1953)
Kojève, A., Auffret, D.: L’ Idée du déterminisme dans la physique classique et dans la physique
moderne. Présentation de Dominique Auffret. Librairie générale française, Paris (1990)
Kojevnikov, A.: David Bohm and collective movement. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci. 33, 161â€"192
(2002)
72 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


Kojevnikov, A.: Stalin’s Great Science: The Times and Adventures of Soviet Physicists. Imperial
College Press, London (2004)
Kojevnikov, A.: Probability, marxism, and quantum ensembles. Yearb. Eur. Cult. Sci. 6, 211â€"235
(2011)
Körner, S.: Observation and Interpretation; A Symposium of Philosophers and Physicists.
Butterworths, London (1957)
Kuzemsky, A.L.: Works by D. I. Blokhintsev and the development of quantum physics. Phys. Part.
Nucl. 39(2), 137â€"172 (2008)
Lenin, V.I.: Materialism and Empirio-Criticism; Critical Comments on a Reactionary Philosophy.
Foreign Languages Publishing House, Moscow (1947)
Lopes, J.L.: Richard Feynman in Brazil: personal recollections. Quipu 7, 383â€"397 (1990)
Lyre, H.: Aharonov-Bohm effect. In: Greenberger, D., Hentschel, K., Weinert, F. (eds.) Compen-
dium of quantum physics: concepts, experiments, history and philosophy, pp. 1â€"3. Springer,
Berlin (2009)
Margenau, H.: Measurement and quantum statesâ€"I & II. Philos. Sci. 30, 1â€"16 (1963). 138â€"157
Mehra, J.: The Beat of a Different Drum : The Life and Science of Richard Feynman. Clarendon,
Oxford (1994)
Messiah, A.: Quantum Mechanics. North Holland, Amsterdam (1961)
Moore, W.J.: Schrödinger : Life and Thought. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge [England]
(1989)
Mullet, S.K.: Bohm, David Joseph. New Dictionary of Scientific Biography, pp. 321â€"326.
N. Koertge, New York, Thomson - Gale. I (2008b)
Mullet, S.K.: Little Man: Four Junior Physicists and the Red Scare Experience. PhD Dissertation,
Harvard University (2008a)
New research techniques in physics (1954). Rio de Janeiro and São Paulo, July 15â€"29, 1952
Olwell, R.: Physical Isolation and Marginalization in Physics - David Bohm’s Cold War Exile.
ISIS 90, 738â€"756 (1999)
Ory, P., Sirinelli, J.-F.: Les Intellectuels en France de l’affaire Dreyfus à nos jours. Perrin, Paris
(2004)
Osnaghi, S., Freitas, F., Freire Jr., O.: The origin of the Everettian heresy. Stud. Hist. Philos. Mod.
Phys. 40(2), 97â€"123 (2009)
Paty, M.: Sur les ‘variables cachées’ de la mécanique quantiqueâ€"Albert Einstein, David Bohm et
Louis de Broglie. La pensée 292, 93â€"116 (1993)
Paty, M.: The nature of Einsteins objections to the copenhagen interpretation of quantum-
mechanics. Found. Phys. 25(1), 183â€"204 (1995)
Pauli, W.: Remarques sur le problème des paramètres cachés dans la mécanique quantique et sur la
théorie de l’onde pilote. In: George, A. (ed.) Louis de Broglie â€" Physicien et Penseur, pp. 33â€"
42. Editions Albin Michel, Paris (1953)
Pauli, W., Meyenn, K.V.: Wissenschaftlicher Briefwechsel mit Bohr, Einstein, Heisenberg u. a.
Band IV Teil I 1950-1952. Springer, Berlin (1996)
Pauli, W., Meyenn, K.V.: Wissenschaftlicher Briefwechsel mit Bohr, Einstein, Heisenberg u. a.
Band IV Teil II 1953-1954. Springer, Berlin (1999)
Peat, F.D.: Infinite Potential : The Life and Times of David Bohm. Addison Wesley, Reading, MA
(1997)
Pechenkin, A.: The early statistical interpretations of quantum mechanics in the USA and USSR.
Stud. Hist. Philos. Mod. Phys. 43(1), 25â€"34 (2012)
Pechenkin, A.: Leonid Isaakovich Mandelstam: Research, Teaching, Life. Springer, New York
(2013)
Peshkin, M., Tonomura, A.: The Aharonov-Bohm Effect. Springer, Berlin (1989)
Philippidis, C., Dewdney, C., Hiley, B.J.: Quantum interference and the quantum potential. Nuovo
Cimento della Societa Italiana di Fisica Bâ€"Gen. Phys. Relat. Astron. Math. Phys. Methods 52
(1), 15â€"28 (1979)
Pinault, M.: Frédéric Joliot-Curie. O. Jacob, Paris (2000)
References 73

Pines, D.: A collective description of electron interactions. 4. Electron interaction in metals. Phys.
Rev. 92(3), 626â€"636 (1953)
Pines, D., Bohm, D.: A collective description of electron interactions. 2. Collective vs individual
particle aspects of the interactions. Phys. Rev. 85(2), 338â€"353 (1952)
Popper, K.R., Bartley, W.W.: Quantum Theory and the Schism in Physics. Rowan and Littlefield,
Totowa, NJ (1982)
Rattner, H.: Tradição e mudança (a comunidade judaica em São Paulo). Atica, São Paulo (1977)
Reichenbach, H.: Philosophic Foundations of Quantum Mechanics. University of California Press,
Berkeley, CA (1944)
Rodrigues, L.M.: O PCB: Os dirigentes e a organização. História geral da civilização brasileira,
tomo III, vol. 3: O Brasil republicanoâ€"sociedade e polı́tica (1930-1964). B. Fausto. Rio de
Janeiro, Bertrand Brasil, pp. 361â€"443 (1996)
Rosenfeld, L.: (1953) L’évidence de la complementarité. Louis de Broglieâ€"physicien et penseur.
A. George. Paris, Editions Albin Michel, pp. 43â€"65 [A slightly modified English version of this
paper is Strife about complementarity, Science progress. 163, 1393â€"1410 (1953), reprinted in
Robert Cohen and John Stachel (eds.). Selected papers of Léon Rosenfeld (Dordrecht,
D. Reidel, 1979)
Rosenfeld, L.: A filosofia da fı́sica atoÌ‚mica. CieÌ‚ncia e cultura 6(2), 67â€"72 (1954)
Rosenfeld, L.: Physics and metaphysics. Nature 181, 658 (1958)
Rosenfeld, L.: Heisenberg, physics and philosophy. Nature 186, 830â€"831 (1960)
Rosenfeld, L.: Berkeley redivivus. Nature 228, 479 (1970)
Rosenfeld, L.: Classical Statistical Mechanics. Livraria da Fı́sica & CBPF, São Paulo (2005)
Saidel, R.G., Plonski, G.A.: Shaping modern science and technology in Brazil. The contribution of
refugees from national socialism after 1933. Leo Baeck Inst. Year Book 39, 257â€"270 (1994)
Schatzman, E.: Physique quantique et realité. La pensée 42â€"43, 107â€"122 (1953)
Schilpp, P.A., Einstein, A.: Albert Einstein, Philosopher-Scientist. Library of Living Philosophers,
Evanston, IL (1949)
Schönberg, M.: On the hydrodynamical model of the quantum mechanics. Nuovo Cimento XII(1),
103â€"133 (1954)
Schönberg, M.: Quantum theory and geometry. In: Kockel, B., Macke, W., Papapetrou, A. (eds.)
Max-Planck-Festschrift 1958, pp. 321â€"338. Deutscher Verlag der Wissenschaften, Berlin
(1959) [Reprinted in M. Schönberg, Obra Cientı́fica de Mario Schönberg, São Paulo:
EDUSP, 2013]
Schönberg, M., Hamburger, A.I.: Obra Cientı́fica de Mario Schönbergâ€"Volume 1â€"1936â€"1948.
EDUSP, São Paulo (2009)
Schönberg, M., Hamburger, A.I.: Obra Cientı́fica de Mario Schönbergâ€"Volume 2â€"1949â€"1987.
EDUSP, São Paulo (2013)
Schrecker, E.: No Ivory Tower : McCarthyism and the Universities. Oxford University Press,
New York (1986)
Schrödinger, E.: The meaning of wave mechanics. In: George, A. (ed.) Louis de Broglieâ€"
physicien et penseur, pp. 16â€"32. Albin Michel, Paris (1953)
Schrödinger, E., Bitbol, M.: Physique quantique et représentation du monde introd. et notes par
Michel Bitbol. Ed. du Seuil, Paris (1992)
Schweber, S.S.: QED and the Men Who Made It : Dyson, Feynman, Schwinger, and Tomonaga.
Princeton University Press, Princeton, NJ (1994)
Schweber, S.S.: Feynman, Richard. In: Heilbron, J.L. (ed.) The Oxford Guide to the History of
Physics and Astronomy, pp. 118â€"120. Oxford University Press, New York (2005)
Siegel, A., Wiener, N.: Theory of measurement in differential-space quantum theory. Phys. Rev.
101(1), 429â€"432 (1956)
Stöltzner, M.: What John von Neumann thought of the Bohm interpretation. In: Greenberger, D.,
Reiter, W.L., Zeilinger, A. (eds.) Epistemological and Experimental Perspectives on Quantum
Mechanics, pp. 257â€"262. Springer, Dordrecht (1999)
74 2 Challenging the Monocracy of the Copenhagen School


Stroke, H.H.: The Physical Reviewâ€"The First Hundred Years: A Selection of Seminal Papers and
Commentaries. American Institute of Physics, New York (1995)
Takabayasi, T.: On the formulation of quantum mechanics associated with classical pictures. Prog.
Theor. Phys. 8(2), 143â€"182 (1952)
Takabayasi, T.: Remarks on the formulation of quantum mechanics with classical pictures and on
relations between linear scalar fields and hydrodynamical fields. Prog. Theor. Phys. 9(3), 187â€"
222 (1953)
Terletsky, I.P.: Problèmes du développement de la théorie quantique. Questions scientifiquesâ€"
Physique, pp. 131â€"146. Les éditions de la nouvelle critique, Paris (1952)
Valentini, A.: Astrophysical and cosmological tests of quantum theory. J. Phys. A Math. Theor. 40
(12), 3285â€"3303 (2007)
Valentini, A.: Inflationary cosmology as a probe of primordial quantum mechanics. Phys. Rev. D
82(6) (2010)
Vals, A.V.: Louis de Broglie et la diffusion de la mécanique quantique en France (1925-1960),
PhD dissertation, Université Claude Bernard Lyon 1 (2012)
Vieira, C.L., Videira, A.A.P.: Carried by history: Cesar Lattes, nuclear emulsions, and the
discovery of the Pi-meson. Phys. Perspect. 16(1), 3â€"36 (2014)
Von Neumann, J.: Mathematical Foundations of Quantum Mechanics. Princeton University Press,
Princeton, NJ (1955)
Wang, J.: American Science in an Age of Anxiety: Scientists, Anticommunism, and the Cold War.
University of North Carolina Press, Chapel Hill, NC (1999)
Whyte, L.L.: The Scope of Quantum-Mechanicsâ€"Discussion. Br. J. Philos. Sci. 9(34), 133â€"134
(1958)
Wiener, N., Siegel, A.: A new form for the statistical postulate of quantum mechanics. Phys. Rev.
91(6), 1551â€"1560 (1953)
Wiener, N., Siegel, A.: The differential-space theory of quantum systems. Il Nuovo Cimento 2
(4 Suppl), 982â€"1003 (1955)
Chapter 3
The Origin of the Everettian Heresy




Abstract In 1956, Hugh Everett, then a PhD student at Princeton, proposed his
“relative state” formulation of quantum mechanics. John Wheeler, who was
Everett’s advisor, recognized the originality and importance of such a proposal,
but he denied that its non-conventional approach to measurement questioned the
orthodox view. Indeed, Wheeler made serious efforts to obtain the blessing of Niels
Bohr for Everett’s ideas. These efforts gave rise to a lively debate with the
Copenhagen group, the existence and content of which have been only recently
disclosed by the discovery of unpublished documents. The analysis of such docu-
ments opens a window on the conceptual background of Everett’s proposal, and
illuminates at the same time some crucial aspects of the Copenhagen view of the
measurement problem. Also, it provides an original insight into the interplay
between philosophical and social factors which underlay the postwar controversies
on the interpretation of quantum mechanics.


3.1 Introduction

The “relative state” formulation of quantum mechanics, put forward by Hugh
Everett III in his doctoral dissertation (Everett 1957a), has become popular as one
of the most heterodox interpretations of quantum mechanics. This is due, in the first
place, to its non-conventional treatment of the measuring process. Remarkably,
however, John A. Wheeler, who was Everett’s advisor at Princeton University and a
dedicated Bohrian, thought that Everett’s proposal was not meant to question the
orthodox approach to the measurement problem.1 Indeed, Wheeler made serious
efforts to obtain Bohr’s blessing for Everett’s ideas. In 1956, when he left Princeton
to spend one semester in Leiden, he sent a draft of Everett’s dissertation to Bohr and


This chapter is a roughly reproduction of Stefano Osnaghi, Fábio Freitas, and Olival Freire Jr,
“The Origin of the Everettian Heresy,” Studies in History and Philosophy of Modern Physics,
40, 97â€"123, 2009. Some references were updated and references and footnotes were adjusted and
minor changes were made in the text in order to adjust to the book’s style. Spelling was kept as in
the original paper. We are grateful to Elsevier for allowing its reproduction. Credits and
acknowledgments are recorded in the original paper.
1
John A. Wheeler to Alexander Stern, 25 May 1956, WP (Series 5â€"Relativity notebook 4, p. 92).

© Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2015 75
O. Freire Junior, The Quantum Dissidents, DOI 10.1007/978-3-662-44662-1_3
76 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


went personally to Copenhagen in order to discuss it with him and his collaborators.
The debate went on in the following months, culminating in a visit paid by Everett
to Bohr in 1959, 2 years after the publication of the dissertation. Notwithstanding
Wheeler’s reiterated efforts, however, the Copenhagen group remained not only
unsympathetic to Everett’s ideas, but also reluctant to attach any relevance to them.
The existence of this early debate on Everett’s ideas has remained unknown until
recently,2 and its content has not been exhaustively analysed so far. More generally,
in spite of the increasing attention that the relative state formulation is receiving
from physicists and philosophers,3 the context of its birth and that of its early
reception have not been thoroughly investigated.4 The purpose of the present paper
is to fill this lacuna. We will analyse Everett’s first manuscripts, as well as the
criticisms raised in Copenhagen and the way Everett replied to them. This analysis
is not meant to solve the problems that beset Everett’s programme, nor to provide
grounds for one particular interpretation of his ideas over the others. Nevertheless,
it can contribute to the clarification of some controversial passages in his published
papers,5 and help to appraise the overall coherence of his project.
There is, however, another reason for which the reconstruction of the early
debate on Everett’s dissertation is valuable, namely that such a reconstruction
sheds light on the role that Bohr played in the controversies over the foundations
of quantum theory in the 1950s. Two issues are involved here.
The first is Bohr’s approach to the measurement problem. This is a rather
controversial (and poorly documented) topic,6 on which the documentary material
that we have uncovered provides interesting insights. We will examine in particular
some letters in which Bohr’s collaborators spell out their view of the problem and
contrast it with the approaches inspired by von Neumann’s theory of measurement.
These letters, together with the replies of Everett and Wheeler, document the
misunderstandings that hindered the comprehension of Bohr’s ideas and made
their epistemological and methodological implications so difficult to grasp for
those who did not belong to the inner circle of his collaborators. It is quite revealing
that even someone like Wheeler, who had worked with Bohr and considered



2
See Freire Jr. (2004), Freire Jr. (2005), and Byrne (2007). See also Freitas (2007). After the
appearance of our paper Osnaghi et al. (2009), other works have dealt with the context of this
debate in Copenhagen over Everett’s thesis, see Byrne (2010) and Everett et al. (2012). For our
review on the latter, see Freire Jr (2014).
3
See Barrett (1999), Butterfield (2002), and references therein. See also Ben-Dov (1990) and
Lehner (1997).
4
Cassinello (1994) contains some historical remarks concerning the origin of Everett’s thesis.
E. B. Shikhovtsev, Biographical sketch of Hugh Everett, III, 2003 Niels Bohr Library, American
Institute of Physics, College Park, MD, Unpublished paper (http://www.hep.upenn.edu/~max/
everett/everettbio.pdf
) provides more information. Both papers, however, overlook the discussions
which took place with the Copenhagen group.
5
See Barrett (1999, Chap. 3).
6
See Teller (1981) and Murdoch (1987).
3.2 Historical Background: The Twilight of the “Copenhagen Monocracy” 77


himself an orthodox Bohrian, seemed not to be aware of the chasm that separated
the epistemological presuppositions of Bohr’s and Everett’s programmes.
This brings us to another important issue involved in our analysis, namely the
historiographical problem of elucidating the rise and fall of what Jammer has
called the “monocracy of the Copenhagen school” (Jammer 1974, p. 250). The
story of Everett’s dissertation can be regarded as a paradigmatic example of how
strong the influence of Bohr was, even in the American context of the 1950s.
However, as we will see, the very factors which ensured the supremacy of the
so-called Copenhagen interpretation harboured the premises of its eventual
decline. As a fine-grained analysis will reveal, such premises were already appar-
ent in the Everett episode.
Section 3.2 outlines briefly the historical context in which Everett’s proposal was
conceived, focusing in particular on the attitude of the physics community towards
Bohr’s ideas in the 1950s. Section 3.3 describes the genesis of Everett’s disserta-
tion, whose content is discussed in Sects. 3.4 and 3.5. Special attention will be paid
to the conceptual background of Everett’s ideas and to their relationship to other
research programmes that were developed in the same period. Section 3.6 provides
a historical reconstruction of the various stages of the debate that opposed Wheeler
and Everett to the Copenhagen group. The conceptual and philosophical content of
the debate is analysed in Sect. 3.7. In Sect. 3.8, after relating the epilogue of the
thesis affair, we focus on the early reception of Everett’s ideas. In order to elucidate
the psychological, social and cultural factors which influenced the discussion in the
1950s, it will also prove enlightening to take into account the subsequent evolution
of Wheeler’s and Everett’s ideas and careers. Section 3.9 summarises our
conclusions.



3.2 Historical Background: The Twilight
of the “Copenhagen Monocracy”

In this section we outline the context in which the relative state formulation
appeared. We focus in particular on Niels Bohr and the so-called “Copenhagen
school”, whose important (and complex) role within such a context needs to be
spelled out before addressing the Everett affair itself.



3.2.1 General Attitude Towards the Foundational Issues
in the US

In the US, which after the Second World War became the central stage of research
in physics in the West, the discussions about the interpretation of quantum
78 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


mechanics had never been very popular.7 A common academic policy was to gather
theoreticians and experimentalists together in order to favour experiments and
concrete applications, rather than abstract speculations (Schweber 1986). This
practical attitude was further increased by the impressive development of physics
between the 1930s and the 1950s, driven on the one hand by the need to apply the
new quantum theory to a wide range of atomic and subatomic phenomena, and on
the other hand by the pursuit of military goals. As pointed out by Kaiser (2002,
pp. 154â€"156), “the pedagogical requirements entailed by the sudden exponential
growth in graduate student numbers during the cold war reinforced a particular
instrumentalist approach to physics.” In this context, “epistemological musings or
the striving for ultimate theoretical foundationsâ€"never a strong interest among
American physicists even before the warâ€"fell beyond the pale for the postwar
generation and their advisors.” A few textbooks, like for example David Bohm’s
Quantum theory (Bohm 1951), discussed some issues of interpretation. However, as
a rule, the textbooks in use in the 1950s (in America as well as elsewhere) did not
reflect much concern at all about the interpretation of the theory (Mehra and
Rechenberg 2001, p. 1194).
A consequence of this attitude was that little attention was paid to Bohr’s
complementarity, which, according to Heilbron (2001), was perceived as an emi-
nently philosophical approach, an especially obscure one indeed.8 Kragh (1999,
p. 211) has observed that “the uncertainty principle was eagerly taken up by several
American physicists [. . .], but they showed almost no interest in Bohrian comple-
mentarity.” According to him: “Most textbook authors, even if sympathetic to
Bohr’s ideas, found it difficult to include and justify a section on complementarity.
Among 43 textbooks on quantum mechanics published between 1928 and 1937,
40 included a treatment of the uncertainty principle; only eight of them mentioned
the complementarity principle.”
Bohr’s epistemological reflections were circulated in papers presented at con-
ferences and published in scientific journals and anthologies. Such publications
were unlikely to have any direct influence on the background of young physicists,
which depended mainly on textbooks.9 In a referee’s report of 1957, Léon
Rosenfeld, who was one of Bohr’s closest collaborators since the 1930s,
complained about this state of affairs: “There is not a single textbook of quantum
mechanics in any language in which the principles of this fundamental discipline
are adequately treated, with proper consideration of the role of measurements to


7
Referring to the attitude of American physicists towards the early debate on the foundations of
quantum mechanics, Cartwright (1987) has observed that “Americans in general had little anxiety
about the metaphysical implications of the quantum theory; and their attitude was entirely rational
given the operationalist-pragmatist-style philosophy that a good many of them shared.” According
to Kragh (1999, p. 211), the “interest in foundational problems among the Americans [. . .] went in
different directions and was on a less grand scale than in Denmark and Germany.” See also Sopka
(1980, pp. 3.67â€"3.69) and Assmus (1992).
8
Chevalley (1997, pp. 598â€"600) and Chevalley (1999).
9
See Kuhn (1970).
3.2 Historical Background: The Twilight of the “Copenhagen Monocracy” 79


define the use of classical concepts in the quantal description.”10 In a letter to Bohr
of the same year, Rosenfeld remarked: “There is great interest in the topic among
chemists and biologists, but there is no book that one can refer them to and that
could protect them from the confusion created by Bohm, Landé, and other dilet-
tantes.” And he concluded: “I will now do my bit here in Manchester by giving a
lecture for chemists and biologists; but nothing can replace the book that you must
write.”11 As is well known, Bohr did not comply.
Even the circumstances that counterbalanced the scarce propensity of American
physicists towards foundational issues ran against the general endorsement of
Bohr’s views. For example, a number of distinguished scholars who had taken
part in the early debate on the significance of quantum mechanics, such as von
Neumann, Wigner and Einstein, moved subsequently to the US. But none of them
were particularly well disposed towards complementarity. Furthermore, in the
1950s, the circumscribed but increasing interest in cosmology and general relativity
boosted a highly speculative field of research, in which American theorists were
faced with the fundamental problem of reconciling quantum mechanics with
gravitation. However, the approach based on complementarity was generally con-
sidered to be unsuited to deal with such a problem.12



3.2.2 Bohr and the Quantum Orthodoxy

The existence of an “orthodox view” of quantum mechanics was generally taken for
granted since the 1930s. However, the meaning of such a label was far from being
univocally determined.13 Several factors contributed to keeping its definition
vague, and by the same token to reinforcing the impression that an orthodox view
did indeed exist. The very term “Copenhagen interpretation”, introduced in the late
1950s to denote the orthodox view,14 was in the first place intended to underpin the
myth of a monolithic “Copenhagen school” acting as the guardian of the quantum

10
In 1957, Rosenfeld was requested to give an opinion about the possible translation of Louis de
Broglie’s La théorie de la mesure en mécanique ondulatoire into English. The quotation is from
the (negative) referee’s report he wrote on that occasion (Léon Rosenfeld. Report on: Louis de
Broglie, La théorie de la mesure en mécanique ondulatoire (Paris: Gauthier-Villars), 1957, RP,
Niels Bohr Archive, Copenhagen, Unpublished paper).
11
Léon Rosenfeld to Niels Bohr, 14 Jan 1957, BSC (reel 31).
12
This is quite apparent from the 1957 papers of Everett and Wheeler (see Sect. 3.4.2). This point
was explicitly discussed by DeWitt in a lecture of 1967 (DeWitt 1968).
13
See Scheibe (1973, p. 9), Beller (1999b, pp. 187â€"188), Camilleri (2009).
14
The term was probably introduced by Heisenberg in his contribution to the volume celebrating
Bohr’s 70th birthday (Pauli 1955). The usage of such a label was criticised by Rosenfeld, because
it implicitly allowed the existence of other interpretations (Freire Jr. 2005, p. 28). Howard (2004)
suggested that Heisenberg had in fact personal reasonsâ€"namely, the wish to break his isolation
after WWIIâ€"for assimilating his own position to that of Bohr, whose ideas on complementarity he
actually never endorsed.
80 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


orthodoxy. Such a myth was to some extent constructed retrospectively to serve the
purposes of the parties involved in the controversies of the 1950s, a period marked
by hidden variables and Marxist materialism.15
Faye (2002) has argued that the label “Copenhagen interpretation” was used “by
people opposing Bohr’s idea of complementarity, to identify what they saw as the
common features behind the Bohrâ€"Heisenberg interpretation as it emerged in the
late 1920s.” It was generally assumed that these “common features” were conveyed
by the “standard” formulation of quantum mechanics, whose most popular and
mathematically sound version was provided by John von Neumann’s
Mathematische Grundlagen der Quantenmechanik. This book, published in 1932,
had several reprints and translations (the English version appeared in 1955). It
provided an axiomatic theory in which some aspects of the presentation given by
Dirac in his The Principles of Quantum Mechanics (1930) received a more rigorous
formulation. Thus, for example, the so-called postulate of projection formalized
Dirac’s idea that, when a system is measured, it “jumps” into an eigenstate of the
measured observable.16
Von Neumann’s formalism can be interpreted in different ways and it is not a
priori incompatible with Bohr’s view. Yet, von Neumann’s presentation may appear
“misleading in several respects” when regarded from a Bohrian standpoint. Thus,
for example, in the abovementioned report, Rosenfeld observed that “v. Neumann’s
book ‘Foundations of Quantum Mechanics’ [. . .], though excellent in other
respects, ha[d] contributed by its unhappy presentation of the question of measure-
ment in quantum theory to create unnecessary confusion and raise spurious prob-
lems.”17 (Rosenfeld, 1957, op. cit.) Indeed, as Kragh puts it, “the ‘measurement
problem’ was not the same for Bohr and von Neumann.”18 The reason why von
Neumann’s formulation was nonetheless routinely associated with the

15
See Pauli (1955), Freire Jr. (2005, p. 28), Howard (2004).
16
Dirac (1958, p. 36). For a discussion see Barrett (1999, pp. 22â€"37).
17
Rosenfeld’s Report contains further considerations about the treatment of measurement in the
textbooks of quantum mechanics: “The nearest to a really good treatment is found in Landau and
Lifschitz’s outstanding treatise: but it is too short and not explicit enough to be a real help to the
student. The only books which are purposely devoted to an exposition of the principles are
v. Neumann’s aforementioned treatise and a little book by Heisenberg: the first is (as stated
above) misleading in several respects, the second is too sketchy and on the subject of measure-
ments it even contains serious errors (however surprising this may appear, the author being one of
the founders of the theory). As to Bohr’s authoritative article, it is in fact only accessible to fully
trained specialists and too difficult to serve as an introduction into this question.” (Rosenfeld,
1957, op. cit.)
18
“Bohr tended to see it as a problem of generalizing the classical framework in order to avoid
contradictions between two mutually incompatible classical concepts, both necessary in the
description of experiments. His solution was complementarity.” In contrast, “to von Neumann,
[. . .] the problem of measurement meant the mathematical problem of proving that the formalism
gave the same predictions for different locations of the ‘cut’ between observer and object” (Kragh
1999, p. 214). In the 1960s this difference in the approach to measurement gave rise to what has
been called the “Princeton school”. This term refers in particular to Eugene Wigner’s view of
measurement; see Home and Whitaker (1992) and Freire Jr. (2007).
3.2 Historical Background: The Twilight of the “Copenhagen Monocracy” 81


“Copenhagen interpretation” is that what people meant by such a term had in most
cases little to do with Bohr’s complementarity.19 This is not too surprising, since
even within the “Copenhagen scholars”, there existed divergent interpretations of
Bohr’s approach.20 We are therefore faced with two questions. First, why was the
existence of a standard view of quantum mechanics taken for granted? And second,
why was such a view so often associated with Bohr?
As for the first question, it must be observed that, in spite of the existence of
important differences, both the intellectual backgrounds and the scientific views of
people like Bohr, Pauli, Heisenberg, Born, and Jordan, who had been working
together on the collective construction of quantum mechanics,21 had several points
in common. All of them endorsed both indeterminism and the assumption of the
corpuscular and discrete nature of atomic phenomena. They also firmly believed in
the completeness of quantum theory and were prepared to dispense with the
isomorphism between the symbolic structures of physics and the pictorial repre-
sentation of microscopic objects. To them, the main issue raised by quantum
mechanics was not one of interpretation, but rather one of epistemology (Heilbron
2001): how must our view of physical knowledge be amended in order to accom-
modate the implications of the discovery of the quantum of action? In this sense,
they were attached to the revolutionary character of quantum mechanics,22 and
were unsympathetic to any attempt to restore such classical ideals like causality and
visualizability in microphysics.
As for the second question, the reason why the standard view of quantum
mechanics was commonly attributed to Bohr (and indeed termed the Copenhagen
interpretation) is undoubtedly related to Bohr’s intellectual charisma and to his role
in the construction of quantum mechanics.23 Bohr’s personal influence upon his
colleagues is legendary and has been exhaustively analysed by Chevalley (1997).
Beller (1999b, pp. 254â€"257) has described Bohr as a “charismatic leader”. “As the
founder of the philosophy of complementarity, Bohr was declared by his followers
to be not merely a great philosopher, but a person of exceptionalâ€"perhaps super-
humanâ€"wisdom, both in science and in life.” Thus, for example, in a recollection

19
“The Copenhagen interpretation [. . .] is a mixed bag, consisting of the errors and misunder-
standings and superficialities of many people. [. . .] Hence, putting your hand into this bag you may
come up with almost anything you want”. Paul Feyerabend, letter to Imre Lakatos, 28 Jan 1968, in
Lakatos et al. (1999, p. 127). Feyerabend is here defending Bohr’s original view against Popper’s
criticisms, and arguing that Popper mispresented Bohr, just as “almost all physicists” did.
20
See Howard (2004), Camilleri (2009), Jacobsen (2007).
21
See Rozental (1967), Heilbron (2001).
22
In a conversation with Everett, which occurred in the 1970s, Charles Misner, who had been
Everett’s roommate at Princeton and a student of Wheeler’s, recalled that, as an undergraduate, he
was “taught by people who had learned quantum mechanics in the 1930s.” He remarked that “to
them, quantum mechanics was really a big philosophical change, and they were shocked by the
whole ideas,” whereas he and Everett “[. . .] felt that well, you know, every new course in physics
you get some new kind of nonsense which seems to make sense a little bit later [. . .].” (Hugh
Everett interviewed by Charles Misner, May 1977, p. 9, EP.)
23
See e.g. Bohr (1949).
82 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


of the 1980s, Wheeler, compared Bohr’s wisdom with that of Confucius and
Buddha, Jesus and Pericles, Erasmus and Lincoln (Wheeler 1985, p. 226). Besides
setting the agenda for the development and comprehension of quantum mechanics,
Bohr and the Institute of Theoretical Physics of Copenhagen, which he had founded
in 1921, provided guidance for a whole generation of physicists, including Heisen-
berg, Pauli, Dirac, Landau, Weisskopf, Wheeler and many others (Rozental 1967;
Bohr et al. 1985). As emphasised by Beller, all those who visited the Institute were
deeply impressed by the experience. However, “while in matters of complemen-
tarity philosophy not directly relevant to research, physicists were willing to repeat
‘Bohr’s Sunday word of worship’, in physics proper they maintained a fruitful
balance between humble reverence and free creativity” (Beller 1999b, p. 257)â€"a
balance similar to that which characterized Wheeler’s attitude in the Everett affair.
During the 1920s and 1930s, the ideas which were to be identified with the
“orthodox view” of quantum mechanics became quite popular. The positivist
flavour of the approach developed by Heisenberg, Jordan, Born and Pauli was not
only in tune with the cultural climate of continental Europe between the two wars,24
but was also well suited to cope with the change of paradigm that atomic phenom-
ena seemed to demand. Bohr’s arguments were generally taken as a warrant that
such an approach was free from inconsistency and could be accommodated in a
coherent conceptual framework, although the acknowledgement of Bohr’s author-
ity implied neither the conscious adhesion to, nor the clear understanding of, his
philosophy (Heilbron 2001). Did this state of affairs give rise to “a somewhat
dictatorial imposition of what was called ‘the Copenhagen dogma’ or ‘orthodox
view’ upon the younger generation of physicists” (Jammer 1974, p. 250) ? To be
sure, the defence of the orthodox ideas by a group of physicists whose outstanding
prestige was unanimously acknowledged was not always carried out according to
the polite rules of an open and rational discussion.25 However, it is likely that both


24
See e.g. Jammer (1966, Sect. 3.4.2), Forman (1971), Brush (1980).
25
This observation does not apply solely to the old guard of the Copenhagen school. “Some of the
most vitriolic comments directed at people who questioned the Copenhagen Doctrine were given
by Rosenfeld. He’s written some papers that have taken the young people who were wanting to
probe a little more deeply to task”. (Bryce S. DeWitt & Cecile M. DeWitt-Morette interviewed by
Kenneth W. Ford, 28 Feb 1995, p. 18, AIP.) Rosenfeld’s attitude is apparent from his letters, some
of which are quoted in the remainder of this paper. In 1972, he wrote for example to Frederik
Belinfante: “Not only [. . .] is it futile to speak of two Copenhagen schools; but it is even wrong to
speak of one Copenhagen school; there has never been any such thing and I hope there will never
be. The only distinction is between physicists who understand quantum mechanics and those who
do not.” Léon Rosenfeld to Frederik J. Belinfante, 22 Jun 1972, RP. Feyerabend argued that the
vagueness of the principles defining the Copenhagen interpretation allowed its defendants “to take
care of objections by development rather than by reformulation”, a procedure whichâ€"he addedâ€"
“serves to create the impression that the correct answer has been there all the time and that it was
overlooked by the critic.” Hence, according to Feyerabend, the attitude of Bohr and his followers
“has very often been one of people who have the task to clear up the misunderstandings of
opponents rather than to admit their own mistakes” (Feyerabend 1964, p. 193, quoted in Home
and Whitaker 1992, pp. 258â€"259). Beller (1999a, p. 191) has described the dialectical strategy of
the Copenhagen scholars as “the rhetoric of finality and inevitability”, arguing that they
3.2 Historical Background: The Twilight of the “Copenhagen Monocracy” 83


the existence of an “orthodox view” and the unsharpness of its definition met the
needs of the majority of the physics community, which was not concerned with the
foundations of quantum mechanics in so far as the theory could be efficiently used
to perform calculations and experiments. Not only did vagueness act as a protective
belt which prevented the users of the theory from being faced too crudely with the
alleged flaws in its foundations, but it also made possible the identification between
the orthodox view and Bohr’s, thereby allowing them to rely on Bohr’s undisputed
authority when adopting such an uncritical attitude.26 As regards the dissenters, the
possibility of contrasting their original proposals with a dominant view could offer
both psychological and rhetorical advantages. Generally, by the label “orthodox”
(or the equivalent “official”, “usual”, etc.), the dissenters meant the instrumentalist
attitude that rejected any attempt to provide a coherent pictorial model of the world
allegedly underlying the quantum phenomena. This was of course a dramatic
simplification of Bohr’s stance. But identifying it with the “orthodox view” allowed
the dissenters to avoid coming to grips with the more sophisticated (and, to many,
obscure) aspects of Bohr’s doctrine.



3.2.3 The Revival of Dissidence and the Measurement
Problem

Notwithstanding some disagreements about the philosophical interpretation of
complementarity (Camilleri 2009), between the 1930s and the end of the 1940s
the “monocracy of the Copenhagen school in the philosophy of quantum mechan-
ics” remained “almost unchallenged” (Jammer 1974, p. 250). Einstein, who was
one of the earliest and most influential critics, did not renew his attacks after the
discussions on the EPR paper in the mid-1930s. Schrödinger dismissed his “wave
interpretation” of 1926, and his analysis focused on the epistemic interpretation of
the state vector which he regarded as the “official” one. Even de Broglie repudiated
his pilot-wave theory and joined the orthodox camp (Jammer 1974, pp. 113â€"114).
In the early 1950s, however, the situation began to change. “The appearance in
1949 of the often quoted Einstein volume edited by Schilpp and Einstein (1949)
which contained Bohr’s debate with Einstein, Einstein’s self-written ‘obituary’ and

“advocated their philosophy of physics not as a possible interpretation but as the only feasible
one.” This attitude was often pointed out by those who, like Einstein, were dissatisfied with the
Bohrâ€"Heisenberg “religion” Albert Einstein to Erwin Schrödinger, 31 May 1928, apud Murdoch
(1987, p. 101); see also Heilbron (2001, pp. 222â€"223). Thus for example, in a paper that appeared
in Physics Today in 1954, Henry Margenau (1954, p. 9) observed that Bohr’s complementarity
“relieved its advocates of the need to bridge a chasm in understanding by declaring that chasm to
be unbridgeable and perennial; it legislated a difficulty into a norm.”
26
In one of his Dublin seminars (1949â€"1955), Schrödinger remarked: “Philosophical consider-
ations about quantum mechanics have gone out of fashion. There is a widespread belief that they
have become gratuitous, that everything is all right in this respect for we have been given the
marvellously soothing word of complementarity [. . .]” (Apud Bitbol 1996a, pp. 212â€"213).
84 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


his candid ‘reply to criticisms’ and which was widely read by philosophizing
physicists contributed considerably to the creation of a more critical atmosphere
toward the complementarity philosophy.”27 In the same period, in his Dublin
seminars, Schrödinger presented his critical reflections on the orthodox view,
which were subsequently developed in a series of papers that appeared in the
1950s. In these papers Schrödinger sharpened his criticisms and sketched a sophis-
ticated philosophical framework (differing substantially from that of 1926) for his
wave interpretation.28
In contradistinction to the previous decades, a number of physicists belonging to
the new generation, whoâ€"to paraphrase John Bellâ€"had not sat at the feet of Bohr,
were sympathetic to such criticisms (Bell 2004, p. 271). The social and cultural
context of fundamental research had undergone deep changes following the WWII.
On one hand, in the West, the intellectual environment resulting from the Ameri-
canization of research was not very favourable to the understanding of Bohr’s ideas,
although for the reasons highlighted in Sect. 3.2.1, this did not immediately produce
a hostile attitude.29 On the other hand, in the Soviet Union, such ideas, which had been
previously tolerated, were accused of promoting idealist trends in science and were
almost banished (Graham 1988). The repercussions of the Soviet polemics were
enhanced by the context of the Cold War. Marxist physicists in the West were
stimulated to take sides with the critics of Bohr’s views. Some of them endorsed either
the “stochastic” or the “statistical” interpretations, which seemed to fit the materialist
framework better than complementarity.30 However, the main challenge to the ortho-
dox view came from David Bohm, a brilliant young physicist and American Marxist.
This challenge was analysed in Chapter 2. In 1952 he proposed a hidden variable theory
in which particles had well-defined (though not entirely determinable) trajectories.
Such a theory challenged a famous no-go theorem stated by von Neumann (which was
supposed to rule out hidden variables) and called into question the need to resort to
complementarity when dealing with atomic phenomena. Bohm’s theory was generally
regarded with scepticism. Yet it gathered some important supporters, including Jean-
Pierre Vigier, Mario Bunge, and Hans Freistadt. De Broglie himself, stimulated by
Bohm’s work, resumed his pilot-wave programme with renewed enthusiasm.31

27
Jammer (1974, p. 250). Einstein’s late objections against the “orthodox view” are discussed in
Howard (1985). See also Paty (1995).
28
See Bitbol (1996a).
29
As late as in 1970, DeWitt (1970, p. 159), in introducing what he called the “’conventional’ or
‘Copenhagen’ interpretation”, observed: “If a poll were conducted among physicists, the majority
would profess membership in the conventionalist camp, just as most Americans would claim to
believe in the Bill of Rights, whether they had ever read it or not.”
30
See Jammer (1974, Chaps. 9 and 10). There were, however, important exceptions, like for
example Rosenfeld and the Soviet physicist Vladimir Fock. About Marxism and quantum
mechanics, see Freire Jr. (2011).
31
For an elementary account of Bohm’s theory, see Barrett (1999). The role played by Bohm’s
Marxist ideas in his search for a new interpretation of quantum mechanics is discussed in Forstner
(2008). For an analysis of the reception of Bohm’s proposal, see Freire Jr. (2005). A survey of the
“causal interpretations” proposed in the early 1950’s can be found in Scheibe (1973, p. 2). See also
Jammer (1974, pp. 287â€"288).
3.2 Historical Background: The Twilight of the “Copenhagen Monocracy” 85


In 1957, some of these alternative views on quantum mechanics were debated at
an international conference held in Bristol. Besides Bohm, Rosenfeld and other
distinguished physicists, a number of philosophersâ€"such as Adolf Grünbaum,
Norwood Hanson, and Paul Feyerabendâ€"attended the meeting and took part in
the discussions.32 Though such discussions were probably not given much impor-
tance in Copenhagen,33 the fact that three of the founding fathers of quantum
mechanics, all of which Nobel Prize winners, had resumed their earlier criticisms
could not go unnoticed.34 As pointed out by Camilleri (2009), “in the context of the
emergence of a new threat from Bohm, de Broglie and Vigier, as well as Soviet
physicists such as Blokhintsev and Alexandrov, the different schools of thought
[which had been involved in the previous decades in the dispute on the true meaning
of complementarity] closed ranks in identifying themselves with Bohrâ€"the canon-
ical authorâ€"whose writings were taken as a direct expression of the ‘authentic’
Copenhagen interpretation.” Indeed, Pauli, Heisenberg, Born and Rosenfeld all
wrote papers to rebut the objections of Schrödinger and other dissenters. Bohm’s
work, in particular, was virulently criticised.35
The controversies in the first half of the 1950s revolved mainly around the
possibility of providing a “causal interpretation” of quantum mechanicsâ€"possibly
“completing” it with “hidden parameters”. In the second half of that decade,
however, the problematic aspects of measurement in quantum physics started to
receive increasing attention. An important part of Heisenberg’s contribution to the
volume celebrating Bohr’s 70th birthday, in which the author presented the Copen-
hagen interpretation and replied to recent criticisms, was dedicated to spelling out
what Heisenberg considered to be the orthodox approach to measurement. Heisen-
berg quoted in particular an assertion by Lajos Janossy to the effect that, since the
“reduction of wave-packets” cannot be deduced from Schrödinger’s equation, there
must be “an inconsistency in the ‘orthodox’ interpretation.”36
The doubts raised by the “reduction of wave-packets” were certainly not new
(they went back to the Fifth Solvay conference of 1927 and had been discussed for
example at an international conference held in Warsaw in 1938, which both von

32
See Körner (1957). Karl Popper, who was not able to attend, sent a written report.
33
Rosenfeld advised Bohr not “to waste his time in reading [the proceedings of the conference]”,
but rather suggested that Petersen might look through them and tell him “about the worse
nonsense” he would find there. (Léon Rosenfeld to Niels Bohr, 21 Oct 1957, BSC, reel 31.)
34
“This comedy of errors [the attempt to develop a “theory of measurement” based on the “causal
interpretation” of quantum mechanics] would have passed unnoticed, as the minor incident in the
course of scientific progress which it actually is, if it had not found powerful support in the person
of L. de Broglie, who is now backing it with all his authority.” (Rosenfeld 1957, op. cit.)
35
See e.g. George (1953), Born (1953), Pauli (1955). As regards the criticisms addressed to Bohm,
see Chap. 2.
36
Heisenberg (1955, p. 23). Such statements are not unusual in the literature of the 1950s.
Schrödinger, for example, repeatedly criticised the collapse of the wave function (Bitbol 1996a,
p. 111): see for instance Schrödinger (1953, pp. 18â€"20). See also Margenau (1958), in which the
objections of de Broglie are discussed (pp. 31â€"32). (Margenau’s own criticisms went back to the
1930s.)
86 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


Neumann and Bohr attended). In the 1930s and 1940s, there had been some
sporadic contributions intended to clarify the puzzling aspects of von Neumann’s
postulate of projection. These contributions included a couple of works which
attributed a crucial role to mental faculties such as volition and consciousness in
the measuring process.37 Far from committing himself to such approaches, Bohr put
much emphasis in his writings on the fact that the physical account of measurement
by no means required a conscious observer.38 While it is likely that such emphasis
reflected the worry that his view could be confused with what the Soviets regarded
as “idealistic vagaries”,39 there is no doubt that it also expressed a deep conviction
of his. The role played by the observer in the epistemological framework of
complementarity was not to be understood in terms of idealistic doctrines, but
rather in connection to a pragmatic analysis of the conditions under which one can
acquire objective knowledge.40 However, for many scholars, denying the subjec-
tivist character of Bohr’s approach amounted to dismissing at once his pragmatic
analysis. Along these lines, Bohr’s functional distinction between object system
and measuring instrument was presented as a crude physical assumption according
to which macroscopic systems behave classically. In other words, according to this
reading, Bohr’s approach just split the physical world into a quantum microcosm
and a classical macrocosm.41
In the second half of the 1950s there was a rise of studies on the measurement
problem,42 from which emerged in particular the “thermodynamic approach”



37
The first was a little book by Fritz London and Edmond Bauer (1939), and the second was a
paper by Carl Friedrich von Weizsäcker (who was a close collaborator and former student of
Heisenberg). See Jammer (1974, pp. 482â€"489).
38
Thus, for example, in a paper of 1958, Bohr (1963, p. 3) stressed that the description of atomic
phenomena has “a perfectly objective character, in the sense that no explicit reference is made to
any individual observer.” It is worth noting that, in 1957, Fock, who had been a prominent and
tenacious advocate of complementarity in the Soviet Union, visited Copenhagen and had a few
conversations on the philosophical significance of quantum mechanics with Bohr. According to
the Soviet commentators, Bohr’s efforts to avoid any “subjectivist” ambiguity in his late writings
were an outgrowth of such conversations (Graham 1988, pp. 311â€"313).
39
See Graham (1988). Heisenberg’s epistemic interpretation of the wave function was often
considered to imply a “subjectivist” view, see Stapp (1994), Howard (2004). Since Heisenberg
was considered to be a member of the “Copenhagen school”, the charge of subjectivism was
sometimes extended to Bohr; Howard (2004) discusses in particular the use of this rhetorical
strategy in Popper’s writings.
40
These aspects are discussed in Sect. 3.7.
41
See e.g. Bell (2004, pp. 188â€"189). A good example is provided by the celebrated course of
theoretical physics of the Soviets Lev Landau and Evgenij Lifshitz (whose first edition in English,
supervised by John Bell, appeared in 1958). Their account of measurement, which was tradition-
ally considered to be quite close to Bohr’s (Bell said that it was perhaps “the nearest to Bohr that
we have”; Ibid, p. 217), postulatedâ€"in Bell’s wordsâ€"that macroscopic systems “spontaneously”
jump into a definite macroscopic configuration which, in the case of a “classical” apparatus,
corresponds to an eigenstate of the “reading” (i.e. a so-called “pointer state”).
42
See Margenau (1963) and references therein.
3.3 The Genesis of Everett’s Thesis 87


developed by Günther Ludwig.43 By treating macroscopic measuring apparatus as
thermodynamic systems, such a programme purported to explain, within the frame-
work of ordinary quantum mechanics, the fact that measurements have definite
outcomes. After Bohr’s death, those of his disciples who were committed to
materialism, like Rosenfeld, saw in such a programme the possibility of providing
a rigorous physical foundation for Bohr’s approach, thereby dispelling the mis-
understandings surrounding the alleged subjectivism of the Copenhagen view.
Thus, when Wigner (1963) took up the banners of the approach which attributed
a role to the observer’s mind, claiming that it fitted the orthodox view of Heisenberg
and von Neumann, Rosenfeld reacted by strongly supporting the theory of mea-
surement that Adriana Daneri, Angelo Loinger and Giovanni Maria Prosperi (1962)
had proposed in the framework of the thermodynamic approach.44



3.3 The Genesis of Everett’s Thesis

3.3.1 Everett at Princeton

Everett enrolled himself at Princeton University in 1953, after obtaining a bachelor’s
degree in chemical engineering at the Catholic University of America in Washington,
where he had shown exceptional mathematical ability.45 In his 1st year Everett took
the course of Quantum Mechanics with Robert Dicke.46 In May 1955 he passed the
general exams and undertook his doctoral research on the “Correlation Interpretation
of Quantum Mechanics” under the supervision of Wheeler.
Wheeler was a prominent figure at Princeton. He had given important contribu-
tions to nuclear physics and had served in the Manhattan project. When he met
Everett, at some moment between 1954 and 1955, he was just beginning to get
involved in the research in cosmology. Wheeler had been acquainted with Bohr
since the mid-1930s, when he had spent some time at the Institute of Theoretical
Physics of Copenhagen with a Rockfeller post-doctoral fellowship (Wheeler 1985,
p. 125). In 1939, Bohr visited Princeton bringing the news of the first observations
of nuclear fission, and they started a collaboration that led to the theory of fission
based on the liquid drop model. They remained friends until Bohr’s death.47 In an
address delivered at Princeton University in 1955, Wheeler described Bohr’s

43
See Jammer (1974, pp. 488â€"490).
44
See Rosenfeld (1965) and the discussion of Sect. 3.7.3. For a detailed analysis of the dispute
between Rosenfeld and Wigner, which went on till the early 1970s, see Chaps. 4 and 5.
45
For Everett’s biography, see Byrne (2010). The information about Everett’s curriculum is taken
from the Princeton alumni file, GAR.
46
From Dicke’s textbook (Dicke and Wittke 1960) we can conjecture that the course paid little
attention to interpretive issues.
47
In 1957, Bohr earned the Atoms for Peace Award. In reply to Wheeler’s congratulations, Bohr
wrote to him: “In these weeks I have with gratitude dwelt with many memories and not least with
our cooperation through the years and your faithful friendship.” (Niels Bohr to John A. Wheeler,
88 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


complementarity as “the most revolutionary philosophical conception of our
day.”48 Therefore his decision of discussing Everett’s ideas with Bohr in person
shows to what extent he must have been impressed by them. Indeed, Wheeler’s
letters prove that he held Everett in high esteem.49
With regard to the origin of Everett’s ideas on quantum mechanics, our main
source is an interview recorded at a party in 1977 (op. cit.). The interview is in fact
an informal discussion with Charles Misner, who had done his PhD in cosmology
under Wheeler in the same years as Everett. According to Everett’s and Misner’s
recollection, the choice of the topic of Everett’s thesis was influenced by the
discussions which they both had with Bohr’s assistant Aage Petersen, who was
then visiting Princeton.50 In the interview,51 Everett remarks that Petersen was the
only one who “took seriously” the issues relating to the foundations of quantum
mechanics, and in his letters to Petersen he repeatedly expresses the desire of
renewing their “always enjoyable arguments.”52
In one of his papers, Everett quotes an address delivered by Einstein (who had
been working at the Institute for Advanced Studies of Princeton since 1933) in the
spring of 1954.53 On that occasion, according to Everett, Einstein had colourfully
expressed his discomfort with the idea that simple acts of observation can bring
about drastic changes in the universe.54 This is a good example of the kind of
atmosphere that Everett could respire at Princeton, even though the emphasis put by




12 Apr 1957, BSC, reel 33). Bohr received the Award at a ceremony which was attended by
President Eisenhower and for which Wheeler delivered an address.
48
Wheeler (1956, p. 374); quoted in Jammer (1974, p. 74).
49
Thus, for example, referring to the necessity to dispel the misunderstandings which could arise
from Everett’s work, Wheeler wrote to him: “This appallingly difficult job I feel you (among very
few in this world) have the ability in thinking and writing to accomplish”. And, alluding to Bohr,
he added: “The combination of qualities, to accept corrections in a humble spirit, but to insist on
the soundness of certain fundamental principles, is one that is rare but indispensable; and you have
it. But it won’t do much good unless you go and fight with the greatest fighter.” (John A. Wheeler
to Hugh Everett, 22 May 1956 [2nd letter], ME.)
50
Everett interview, op. cit., p. 9. Petersen was educated at the University of Copenhagen and
became Bohr’s assistant in 1952. According to Everett, he spent 1 year in Princeton (Hugh Everett
to Max Jammer, 19 Sep 1973, ME). This occurred probably in 1954â€"1955, because Petersen
accompanied Bohr when Bohr visited Princeton in the autumn of 1954 (see Sect. 3.6). (Felicity
Pors, priv. comm., 16 Oct 2007.)
51
Ibid, p.10.
52
Hugh Everett to Aage Petersen, 31 May 1957, WP (Series Iâ€"Box Diâ€"Fermi Award #1â€"
Folder Everett). See also Hugh Everett to Aage Petersen [draft], summer of 1956, ME.
53
Everett (1973, p. 116). Wheeler (1979b, p. 184) recalled: “We persuaded him [Einstein] to give
a seminar to a restricted group. In it the quantum was a central topic.”
54
According to Everett’s recollection, Einstein said that he “could not believe that a mouse could
bring about drastic changes in the universe simply by looking at it”. However, the quotation might
have been reported to Everett by others, since in his 1977 interview (op. cit., p. 4) he did not
remember having attended the seminar.
3.3 The Genesis of Everett’s Thesis 89


Misner on Einstein’s seminar in the interview suggests that such occasions were in
fact rare.55 Princeton hosted some of the most distinguished experts of the founda-
tions of quantum mechanics: John von Neumann, whose textbook was the main
reference of Everett’s work (see Sect. 3.4.1), was at the Institute for Advanced
Studies; and Eugene Wigner was Everett’s professor of Methods of Mathematical
Physics at Princeton University.56 Also, it was at Princeton that, a few years earlier,
David Bohm had worked out his hidden variable theory. Everett did not meet Bohm
personally, since Bohm had to leave Princeton in 1951, as a consequence of
McCarthyism (Olwell 1999; Freire Jr. 2005). However, Everett’s manuscripts
show that he was acquainted with Bohm’s work on hidden variables. Moreover,
Bohm’s textbook of quantum mechanics (which presented the standard formula-
tion, but also discussed some issues of interpretation such as the measurement
problem and the EPR paradox) seems to have been one of Everett’s main sources
for the study of the Copenhagen views on measurement (see Sect. 3.4.2).
It is reasonable to think that, in this context, a critical attitude towards the
orthodox view of quantum mechanics might emerge occasionally in discussions
and seminars, and that non-conventional ideas circulated more freely in Princeton
than elsewhere. The very fact that Wheeler accepted the supervision of a PhD
research like Everett’s shows that he had an open-minded attitude with regard to
such issues.57 Indeed, 15 years earlier Wheeler had been the supervisor of Richard
Feynman, who, in his PhD thesis had set the basis of the path-integral formulation
of quantum mechanics.58 Even though Everett denied having received any external
input for undertaking his work,59 in the interview he and Misner allude to the


55
Everett interview, op. cit., p.4. Wheeler (1979b) reported a few occasions when he and Einstein
discussed issues of fundamental physics. In May 1953, for example, Einstein invited Wheeler and
his students to his home for tea and answered questions about his view of quantum mechanics.
56
Von Neumann and Wigner were not directly involved in the public debate on the interpretation
of quantum mechanics in the 1950s. However, von Neumann’s persistent concern with the
epistemological issues raised by quantum mechanics is borne out by the efforts he devoted to
the revision of the English translation of his book (Freire Jr. 2005, p. 27). See also Rédei and
Stöltzner (2001), and, with regard to von Neumann’s opinion on Bohm’s proposal, (Stöltzner
1999). As for Wigner, his dissatisfaction with Bohr’s complementarity predated his involvement in
the debates of the 1960s (Freire Jr. 2007; Camilleri 2009). Interestingly, in the notes taken by
Wheeler in Copenhagen in 1956 (John A. Wheeler, Notes taken in Copenhagen, 3 May 1956, ME),
Aage Petersen refers to von Neumann’s theory of measurement as “von N[eumann] + Wig[ner]”
“stuff”.
57
In the interview with Everett (op. cit., p. 5), Misner says: “You probably already had these
quantum mechanical ideas and just needed someone to talk to about them and he [Wheeler] was
obviously the kind of person who. . .”
58
Feynman might have read some version of Everett’s dissertation (or might have been informed
about it by Wheeler), since at the beginning of 1957 he already knew the general lines of Everett’s
work (see Sect. 3.6).
59
As we will see in Sects. 3.4 and 3.5, two important sources of inspiration for Everett’s work were
the hidden variable theories on the one hand, and Schrödinger’s “wave interpretation” on the other.
Schrödinger was sent a pre-print of Everett’s paper in 1957, but, in so far as we know, he did not
reply.
90 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


influence that Wheeler’s characteristic approach to theoretical physics might have
exerted on the development of the relative state formulation. Misner says: “He
[Wheeler] was preaching this idea that you ought to just look at the equations and if
there were the fundamentals of physics [. . .] you followed their conclusions and
gave them a serious hearing. He was doing that on these solutions of Einstein’s
equations like Wormholes and Geons”. And Everett replies: “I’ve got to admit that
that is right, and might very well have been totally instrumental in what
happened.”60




Picture 3.1 Bohr converses with group at Princeton. (L-R): Charles W. Misner, Hale F. Trotter of
Kingston, Niels Bohr, Hugh Everett, and David K. Harrison of Belmont, MA. Photograph by Alan
Richards, courtesy AIP Emilio Segre Visual Archives


The analysis of Everett’s early writings does not indicate that his search for an
original approach to quantum mechanics was inspired by issues of cosmology. Yet,
there is little doubt that Wheeler’s interest in Everett’s ideas was enhanced by his
recent involvement in that area of research. This is mostly apparent from the final
version of the dissertation, in the drafting of which Wheeler took an important part.
Therefore, if Everett’s ideas received some attention when they were first put
forward, this might be partly due to the circumstance that, at the time, Princeton
was in the small minority of places in the US at which physicists were interested in
general relativity and cosmology. (As we will see, Bryce DeWitt, who was a friend
of Wheeler’s and the head of the cosmology group of the University of North

60
Everett interview, op. cit., pp. 9â€"10.
3.3 The Genesis of Everett’s Thesis 91


Carolina at Chapel Hill, was to play a crucial role in the diffusion of Everett’s
ideas.)



3.3.2 The Steps Towards the Dissertation

Everett’s dissertation On the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics (Everett 1957a)
was submitted in March 1957. Except for the abstract61 and a few minor stylistic
alterations, the dissertation is identical to the paper published in July 1957 in the
Reviews of Modern Physics, with the title “Relative State” Formulation of Quan-
tum Mechanics (1957b). It is a rather small manuscript (36 pages), which was
written in the winter of 1956â€"1957. In an introductory note, Everett mentions “an
earlier less condensed draft of the present work, dated January 1956”, which he says
“was circulated to several physicists” (Everett 1957a, p. 1). There is good evidence
that the longer draft “circulated to several physicists”, whose title was Wave
Mechanics Without Probability,62 was very similar, if not identical, to a paper of
137 pages published many years later (in 1973) as The Theory of the Universal
Wave Function.63 Henceforth we will refer to this paper as the “long thesis”.64
The documentary material that will be discussed in the following sections
indicates that the manuscript that was read in Copenhagen (Wave Mechanics
Without Probability) was the second version of the thesis.65 This does not


61
See Barrett (1999, p. 65).
62
See Alexander Stern to John A. Wheeler, 20 May 1956, ME; Wheeler, Notes, 1956, op. cit; Hip
J. Groenewold to Hugh Everett and John A. Wheeler, 11 Apr 1957, ME.
63
The paper was published in a collective volume edited by DeWitt and Graham (DeWitt
et al. 1973). There is a letter from Everett to Jean-Marc Lévy-Leblond (15 Nov 1977, EP)
which seems to support the hypothesis that the title of the original manuscript was indeed changed
in the process of publication.
64
A copy of the long thesis was sent to Copenhagen in April 1956, and a second one seems to have
followed a few weeks later (Everett to Petersen [draft], 1956, op. cit.).We were unable to locate
either. However, a draft of the long thesis is deposited in the EP archive (Hugh Everett, 1956,
Wave Mechanics Without Probability, EP (Box 1, Series II, Folder 1), Niels Bohr Library,
American Institute of Physics, College Park, MD, Unpublished paper; hereafter Everett, 1956).
It contains some handwritten corrections which were incorporated in the paper published in 1973.
The EP manuscript lacks the cover (hence we can only guess its title). However, a cover with the
title Wave Mechanics Without Probability, which might have belonged to the EP manuscript, was
unearthed by Peter Byrne among the papers in possession of Everett’s son (Everett 2012 [1955a]).
If the EP manuscript is the one that Everett sent to DeWitt in 1971 (after removing the cover, in
which there appeared a title that Wheeler found inappropriate; John A.Wheeler to Niels Bohr,
24 Apr 1956, BSC, reel 34; also in WP, Series I, Box Boh-Bu, Folder Bohr, N. #2), this would
explain why the title of the version published in DeWitt, Everett et al. (1973) differed from the
original. Almost all of the unpublished documents concerning the origin and reception of Everett’s
thesis are now published in Everett et al. (2012).
65
See John A. Wheeler to Hugh Everett, 22 May 1956 [1st letter], WP (Box Di-Fermi #2, Folder
Everett);Wheeler to Bohr, 24 Apr 1956, op. cit.; John A.Wheeler to Allen Shenstone, 28 May
92 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


necessarily imply that a first structured version, differing substantially from the
long thesis, actually existed.66 Nevertheless, the hypothesis that the bulk of the long
thesis had already been worked out early in 1955 is supported by the analysis of
both the original manuscript and a few unpublished papers.67 Besides a small paper
entitled Objective vs Subjective probability (Everett 2012 [1955a]),68 which out-
lines the “Wigner’s friend”-type argument that forms the core of Everett’s critique
of the standard formulation in the long thesis,69 the archives contain two manu-
scripts which were probably written in the summer of 1955 (see Sect. 3.6). One of
them, Quantitative Measure of Correlation (Everett 2012 [1955b]), summarises the
mathematical results of the second chapter of the long thesis (on correlation
theory).70 The other (Everett 2012 [1955c]) is a short paper (9 pages) whose title
Probability in Wave Mechanics suggests a close relationship with the second
version of the thesis. Indeed, this paper expounds all the relevant results concerning
the interpretation of quantum mechanics that one finds in the long thesis.71 Even
though the presentation is made in a non-technical language devoid of formulas, it
seems unlikely that Everett had reached all his conclusions without relying on a




1956, WP (Box Di-Fermi #2, Folder Everett); Groenewold to Everett & Wheeeler, op. cit.; Aage
Petersen to Hugh Everett, 28 May 1956, ME.
66
The archives contain no document that may correspond to such a first version. However, the
recent discovery of some folders containing Everett’s personal papers (Byrne 2007; Everett
et al. 2012) may hopefully provide further insight into the very first steps of Everett’s doctoral
research.
67
For example, as pointed out by DeWitt (DeWitt interview, op. cit., p. 6), the first draft of the last
chapter of the long thesis was probably written prior to Einstein’s death (April 1955), since
Einstein is referred to as if he were still alive (Everett 1973, p. 112). Admittedly, the long thesis
contains references to three books published in 1955, one of which (von Neumann’s Mathematical
foundations) is also extensively quoted. Yet in the original manuscript of the long thesis deposited
in the EP archive [(Everett 1956), “Wave mechanics without probability” [?]. EP (Box1, Series II,
Folder 1)], the quotations from von Neumann’s book appear to have been added later. Moreover,
the reference to a paper that appeared in an issue of the Supplemento al Nuovo Cimento printed on
22 November 1955 lacks the volume and page number (they were added in the version published
in 1973), which suggests that Everett read the pre-print.
68
Everett (1955a), “Objective vs subjective probability.” EP (Box 1, Folder 6). Printed in Everett
(2012 [1955a]).
69
The opening sentence of this manuscript (“Since the root of the controversy over the interpre-
tation of the formalism of quantum mechanics lies in the interpretation of the probabilities given
by the formalism, we must devote some time to discussing these interpretations”; Everett, 1955a)
suggests that it wasâ€" or was intended to beâ€"part of a larger work. Indeed, the structure of the
paper resembles that of the introduction of the long thesis, although the projection postulate is not
given the same central place. Moreover, in this early manuscript, Everett’s own proposal is not
mentioned.
70
Everett (1955b). “Quantitative measure of correlation.” EP (Box 1, Folder 6).
71
Everett (1955c). “Probability in wave mechanics.” EP (Box 1, Folder 6). In particular, the
“emergence” of objects from correlations is discussed by means of an example which is
reproduced almost literally on p. 86 of the long thesis.
3.4 The Reasons for Everett’s Discontent 93


formal analysis. Therefore, by the summer of 1955, Everett had probably already
outlined both the mathematical and the conceptual framework of his approach.72 In
the light of this reconstruction, one can understand why Everett, who we know had
continued to work “madly” on the draft to be sent to Copenhagen until Wheeler’s
departure to Europe in April 1956,73 in later recollections always stated that the
long thesis had been written in 1955.74
Here is a tentative chronology of the thesis versions and of the related papers:
(1a)Objective vs Subjective probability, short manuscript (first half of 1955).
(1b)Quantitative Measure of Correlation, short manuscript (summer 1955).
(1c)Probability in Wave Mechanics, short manuscript (summer 1955).
(2) Wave Mechanics Without Probability, second version of the dissertation (the
long thesis) (winter 1955â€"1956), published as The Theory of the Universal
Wave Function (1973).
(3) On the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics, final dissertation (winter 1956â€"
1957), published as “Relative State” Formulation of Quantum Mechanics
(July 1957).



3.4 The Reasons for Everett’s Discontent

3.4.1 Standard Formulation

Everett’s proposal stems from his dissatisfaction with von Neumann’s formulation
of quantum mechanicsâ€"“the more common (at least in this country) form of
quantum theory”, as he says in a letter to Petersen.75 Both of Everett’s published
papers contain explicit references to von Neumann’s Mathematical Foundations,
whose English translation appeared in 1955, exactly when Everett’s ideas were
taking shape.76 A central assumption in Everett’s understanding of the standard


72
Interestingly, in (Everett, 1956, op. cit.), the chapter on Observation, which forms the core of
Everett’s proposal, appears to have been imported from an earlier (and arguably shorter) manu-
script (witness the old numbering of pages which appears in the upper margin).
73
Nancy Gore Everett, Diary, entry of 28 Mar 1956, ME (Peter Byrne, priv. comm.). Nancy was
Everett’s wife.
74
Everett interview, op. cit., p. 6; Hugh Everett to Jean-Marc Lévy-Leblond, 15 Nov 1977, EP;
Everett to Raub, 1980, op. cit.; Hugh Everett to Bill Harvey, 20 Jun 1977, EP, Series I-8.
According to the recollection of Everett’s wife, who typed the manuscript (Everett interview,
op. cit., p. 6), the thesis was written in the winter of 1954â€"1955 (Nancy Gore Everett, Calendar of
events, EP, Box 1, Folder 1). (But this information could simply be inaccurate: the manuscript that
Nancy Everett had in mind might actually be the second version, which was written in the winter of
1955â€"1956.)
75
Everett to Petersen, 1957, op. cit.
76
Everett probably had a working knowledge of German, and might have read von Neumann’s
book in the original.
94 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


formulation is that the state vector mirrors the physical state of a system (i.e. its
putative objective properties) (Everett 1973, p. 63). Based on this hypothesis, von
Neumann’s account of observation can be regarded as involving a physical process
in which the state of the observed system undergoes in general an acausal transition
(from a superposition of eigenstates of the measured observable to the specific
eigenstate corresponding to the observed value).77 Such a process, whose outcomes
can be statistically predicted using the Born rule, is considered to be responsible for
the probabilistic features of quantum phenomena.78 Unlike other critics of the
postulate of projection,79 therefore, Everett does not regard the collapse of the
wave function as a formal trick, which the epistemic construal of the state vector
requires in view of the intrinsic indeterminism of the quantum phenomena. Rather,
he believes that in the standard formulation, the collapse of the wave function is
what prescribes the probabilities of the various possible outcomes (Everett 1957b,
p. 142). According to him, therefore, the postulate of projection instantiates a
particular interpretation of quantum indeterminism, namely that of “objective
chance”. Although there are no grounds for endorsing or rejecting such an inter-
pretation a priori, Everett contends that the odd implications of the projection
postulate compel us to look for an alternative in which the probabilistic features
of quantum mechanics can be understood in terms of “subjective chance”.80
What Everett finds disturbing in the projection postulate is, first of all, the
artificial way in which it splits the dynamics of the theory. It appears to be “a
‘magic’ process in which something quite drastic [occurs] (collapse of the wave
function), while in all other times systems [are] assumed to obey perfectly natural
continuous laws’”.81 The ad hoc nature of the projection postulate is borne out by
the fact that, being designed to account for idealized observations, it is unsuited to
deal with realistic models of the measurement interaction (Everett 1973, pp. 100â€"
103). More generally, if one tries to understand measurements as just a physical
interaction occurring between measuring apparatus and systems, the theory
“leaves entirely unknown” which interactions are to be regarded as measure-
ments.82 Everett illustrates the consequences of this situation by means of a


77
This reading of von Neumann has been thoroughly criticised by Becker (2004). The way to
understand the postulate of projection changes depending on one’s interpretation of the state
vector. The interpretation that Everett seems to take as the “conventional” one is not inconsistent
with that which seems to underlie some statements made by “orthodox” scholars. See, for example,
Dirac’s assertion that “the theory describes the state of the world at any given moment by a wave
function” (Institut International de Physique Solvay 1928; Bacciagaluppi and Valentini 2009). See
Bitbol (2000, pp. 72â€"83) for a discussion.
78
In a letter of 1973 to Max Jammer (op. cit.), Everett identifies the “probability interpretation of
quantum mechanics” with the assertion that “somehow the measuring process [is] ‘magic’ and
subject to a separate axiom governing the collapse of the wave function.”
79
See e.g. Bohm (1952), Margenau (1958), Schrödinger (1953), Schrödinger (1958).
80
Everett (2012 [1955a]).
81
Everett to Jammer, 1973, op. cit.
82
Everett (1955a, p. 4), in Everett (2012 [1955a]).
3.4 The Reasons for Everett’s Discontent 95


Wigner’s-friend-type argument (see Sect. 3.3.2), from which he infers that a
consistent application of the projection postulate within the standard theory implies
the commitment to solipsism, i.e. to the hypothesis that there is only one observer in
the universe who is responsible for the “collapse” of the state of observed sys-
tems.83 Everett sees basically two ways to avoid this conclusion. Either one denies
that measurement interactions fall into the domain of applicability of microphysics,
or one postulates that the quantum description is simply incomplete, and must be
supplemented with hidden parameters that can also characterise measurements.
Both these solutions are at variance with the idea that the state vectors provide a
complete model of the world, an idea to which Everett is strongly committed.



3.4.2 Dualistic Approach

The first way to avoid the alleged paradoxes of the standard formulation is to
assume that “not every physical system possesses a state function, i.e. that even
in principle quantum mechanics cannot describe the process of measurement
itself.” Everett considers this option “somewhat repugnant, since it leads to an
artificial dichotomy of the universe into ordinary phenomena, and measure-
ments.”84 In the long thesis he gives a further reason for rejecting this view, namely
that it “does violence to the so-called principle of psycho-parallelism” stated by von
Neumann.85



83
The argument, which came subsequently to be known as the “Wigner’s friend” paradox,
appeared in a paper of Wigner’s dated 1961. Given the resemblance between Wigner’s and
Everett’s formulation, one may wonder whether Wigner picked up the argument from Everett’s
thesis, which he might have read. (However, of course, the converse might also be true, i.e. Everett
might have been inspired by discussions with Wigner.) In a paper of 1958, Schrödinger (1958,
pp. 168â€"169) alludes to the same argument: “But jokes apart, I shall not waste the time by tritely
ridiculing the attitude that the state-vector (or wave function) undergoes an abrupt change, when
‘I’ choose to inspect a registering tape. (Another person does not inspect it, hence for him no
change occurs.) The orthodox school wards off such insulting smiles by calling us to order: would
we at last take notice of the fact that according to them the wave function does not indicate the state
of the physical object but its relation to the subject; this relation depends on the knowledge the
subject has acquired, which may differ for different subjects, and so must the wave function.” This
ironical presentation of the problem suggests that, had Schrödinger read the pre-print of Everett’s
paper that he was sent by Wheeler, he would have found Everett’s arguments quite naı̈ve.
Nevertheless, Schrödinger was opposed to the epistemic interpretation of the state vector and he
believed, like Everett, that “the Kopenhagen epistemology [. . .] leads to the physics of solipsism.”
(Ibid.)
84
Everett (1955a, p. 3). In Everett (2012 [1955a]).
85
Everett (1973, p. 7). The principle was stated by Von Neumann (1955, p. 418) in the following
terms: “[. . .] it must be possible so to describe the extra-physical process of the subjective
perception as if it were in reality in the physical worldâ€"i.e. to assign its parts equivalent physical
processes in the objective environment, in ordinary space.”
96 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


In the introduction of the long thesis, Everett makes a distinction between this
view and Bohr’s. After outlining the former approach together with other possible
solutions, he says: “We have omitted one of the foremost interpretations of quan-
tum theory, namely the position of Niels Bohr” (Everett 1973, p. 8). He discusses
the latter in the conclusion, but then one gets the impression that, in Everett’s eyes,
the Copenhagen interpretation (which is the label he uses to denote what he takes to
be Bohr’s approach86) is closely related to the dualistic view presented earlier.87
The criticisms he addresses to the Copenhagen interpretation in the long thesis
(Everett 1973, p. 111) are summarised and developed in a letter to Petersen of May
1957, in which he says that, while his paper of 1957 addresses “mostly” von
Neumann’s formulation, he finds Bohr’s approach “even more unsatisfactory”,
although “on quite different grounds.”88 The main objections appearing in the letter
of 1957 are similar to those raised in the long thesis of 1955â€"1956. (Incidentally,
this shows that Everett had not changed his mind-notwithstanding the fact that, for
reasons on which we will return, his criticisms do not appear in the final version of
the dissertation.) What Everett finds “irritating” in the Copenhagen interpretation is
on the one hand the “complete reliance on classical physics from the outset (which
precludes even in principle any deduction at all of classical physics from quantum
mechanics, as well as any adequate study of measurement processes)”, and, on the
other hand, the “strange duality of adhering to a ‘reality’ concept for macroscopic
physics and denying the same for the microcosm.”89
In the letter to Petersen, Everett develops his critique, pointing out other alleged
deficiencies of the Copenhagen approach:
You talk of the massiveness of macrosystems allowing one to neglect further quantum
effects (in discussions of breaking the measuring chain), but never give any justification for
this flatly asserted dogma. Is it an independent postulate? It most certainly does not follow
from wave mechanics [. . .]. In fact, by the very formulation of your viewpoint you are




86
Everett found the term “Copenhagen interpretation” in the above mentioned book edited by
Pauli (1955), which is cited in the long thesis.
87
The introduction and the conclusion of the long thesis were arguably written at different times.
The first and third “interpretations” outlined in the conclusion are explicitly put into correspon-
dence with the first and fourth “alternatives” appearing in the introduction (solipsism and hidden
variables respectively). Everett avoids emphasising the correspondence between the second
interpretation (Copenhagen) and the second alternative (dualistic view), but it is quite clear that
he sees a link between them.
88
Everett to Petersen, 1957, op. cit.
89
Ibid. It is instructive to recall the discussion about the “relationship between Quantum and
Classical concepts” which Everett found in Bohm’s textbook. In his presentation of the orthodox
view, Bohm said that “in order to obtain a means of interpreting the wave function, we must [. . .]
at the outset postulate a classical level in terms of which the definite results of a measurement can
be realized.” He also asserted that “classical concepts cannot be regarded as limiting forms of
quantum concepts”, and that “without an appeal to a classical level, quantum theory would have no
meaning” (Bohm 1951, pp. 624â€"626).
3.4 The Reasons for Everett’s Discontent 97

totally incapable of any justification and must make it an independent postulateâ€"that
macrosystems are relatively immune to quantum effects.
You vigorously state that when apparatus can be used as measuring apparatus then one
cannot simultaneously give consideration to quantum effectsâ€"but proceed blithly to apply
[the uncertainty relations] to such devices, tacitly admitting quantum effects.90

Furthermore, Everett claims that while the Copenhagen interpretation takes “the
fundamental irreversibility of the measuring process” to be what “allows the
destruction of phase relations and make possible the probability interpretation of
quantum mechanics”, “there is nowhere to be found any consistent explanation of
this ‘irreversibility’.” And he concludes: “Another independent postulate?”
In the light of these criticisms one may find surprising Everett’s assertion, stated
elsewhere, that the Copenhagen interpretation is “undoubtedly safe from contra-
diction” (Everett 1973, p. 111). Indeed, Everett is prepared to concede that the
Copenhagen interpretation avoids inconsistency, but he believes that this is
achieved at the cost of endorsing a strongly dualistic approach. Such an approach
is at odds with the task of providing a coherent and all-inclusive model of the world,
which is, for Everett, the very goal of physics. Hence, the Copenhagen interpreta-
tion is to him “hopelessly incomplete.”91
The final version of the dissertation, in which Everett criticises what he calls the
“external observation formulation”, contains a remark which can be interpreted as a
further objection to the Copenhagen interpretation. As we will see, the label
“external observation formulation” denotes a dualistic approach in which the
state reduction is brought about by an “external” observer that cannot in principle
be described by the formalism. Such a view is clearly reminiscent of the one that
Everett associated with the Copenhagen interpretation, and this association is
indeed made explicit by Wheeler (1957, p. 151). The question of whether the
pragmatic aspects of Bohr’s view, and in particular his functional distinction
between measuring apparatus and object system, can really be expressed in the
dualistic terms of the external observation formulation is postponed to Sect. 3.7.
Certainly Wheeler and Everett thought that they could, and interpreted Bohr’s
remarks on the necessity to frame the quantum predictions in a well-defined
experimental context as implying that von Neumann’s measurement chain needed
to be “cut” into two parts, one of which could not be described by quantum
mechanics. This view, they argued, led to critical problems “in the case of a closed
universe”, since then “there is no place to stand outside the system to observe
it. There is nothing outside it to produce transitions from one state to another”
(Everett 1957b, p. 142). The external observation formulation appears thus unsuited
to providing a description of the whole universe; and this, in turn, precludes any
possibility of a synthesis with general relativity.92

90
Everett to Petersen, 1957, op. cit.
91
Hugh Everett to Bryce S. DeWitt, 31 May 1957, courtesy of Eugene Shikhovtsev.
92
Interestingly, such an objection is not mentioned in Everett’s letter to Petersen, though the letter
was written after the paper. This suggests that this objection reflected in fact a concern of
Wheeler’s.
98 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


3.4.3 Hidden Variables

From the manuscript Objective vs Subjective Probability, it is clear that at first
Everett regarded hidden variable theories as a promising approach to overcome the
paradoxes of the standard formulation. In later writings, he still acknowledges their
“great theoretical importance” and undisputable appeal, but he emphasises that they
are unnecessarily “cumbersome and artificial” as compared to his own proposal.93
Bell has pointed out some structural analogies between Everett’s and the hidden
variable approaches.94 Indeed the conceptions of physical theories which underlie
the two approaches are closely related to each other, and so are the strategies
adopted to fit the quantum indeterminism into them. Like the hidden variable
theorists, Everett held that theories must supply an exhaustive model of the
world, including observers and measurement interactions,95 although, unlike
them, he believed that the state vectors alone can provide such a model. Everett
claimed that the indeterministic features of quantum phenomena only appear within
subjective experience. According to him, this point of view was similar to that
adopted by the advocates of hidden variables, for whom “the probabilities occurring
in quantum mechanics are not objective” since “they correspond to our ignorance of
some hidden parameters.”96 However, Everett’s proposal did not stem from an
aprioristic commitment to determinism.
From my point of view there is no preference for deterministic or indeterministic theories. It
is quite conceivable that an adequate stochastic interpretation could be developed [. . .]
where the fundamental processes of nature are pictured as stochastic processes whether or
not they are undergoing observation. I only object to mixed systems where the character
changes with mystical acts of observation.97

In the long thesis, following Schrödinger (1952), Everett nonetheless criticised
the stochastic interpretations because of their “desire to have a theory founded upon
particles”, while it seems “much easier to understand particle aspects from a wave
picture [. . .] than it is to understand wave aspects [. . .] from a particle picture”
(Everett 1973, p. 114).
More generally, Everett seemed to agree with Schrödinger that “the demand for
a non-subjective description is inevitable, of course without prejudice whether it be
deterministic or otherwise” (Schrödinger 1958, p. 162). If Everett is so concerned
with probability (think of the titles of his earliest manuscripts) this is because, for
him, probabilities arise within the conventional formulation as a consequence of


93
Everett (1973, p. 113); Everett to DeWitt, 1957, op. cit.
94
Bell (2004, pp. 93â€"99) made a comparison between Everett’s approach and de Broglie’s pilot
wave theory. See also Barrett (1999, Chap. 5). This point is discussed by DeWitt in a letter sent to
Wheeler and Everett in 1957. (Bryce S. DeWitt to John A. Wheeler & Hugh Everett, 7 May 1957,
WP, Series Iâ€"Box Diâ€"Fermi Award #1â€"Folder Everett).
95
See e.g. Körner (1957, p. 61).
96
Everett (1955a, p. 4), in Everett (2012 [1955a]).
97
Everett to DeWitt, 1957, op. cit.
3.5 Everett’s Project 99


state reduction, and state reduction requires in turn the intervention of an external
observer, thereby undermining the very possibility of an objective description.



3.5 Everett’s Project

3.5.1 A Unitary Model of the World

Everett outlines his conception of theories in an appendix of the long thesis. The
relationship between such a conception and his formulation of quantum mechanics
is discussed in a letter to DeWitt, some passages of which are quoted in a note added
in proof to the paper published in 1957.
To me, any physical theory is a logical construct (model), consisting of symbols and rules
for their manipulation, some of whose elements are associated with elements of the
perceived world.98

The “perceived world” or “world of experience” is to be understood as “the
sense perceptions of the individual, or the ‘real world’â€"depending upon one’s
choice in epistemology.” As to his choice, Everett is quite reticent. His theory deals
ultimately with the content of the observers’ memories. However, he proposes to
identify the “subjective knowledge (i.e. perceptions)” of the observers with “some
objective properties (states)” of theirs (Everett 1973, p. 63).
Remarkably, all throughout Everett’s writings, the terms “real” and “reality”
(as well as “actual”, “branching process”, “branches”) appear systematically in
quotes. Indeed, Everett emphasises that the meaning of terms such as “reality”
ought to be understood on the basis of their usage in scientific practice.99
When one is using a theory, one naturally pretends that the constructs of the theory are
“real” or “exist”. If the theory is highly successful (i.e. correctly predicts the sense
perceptions of the user of the theory) then the confidence in the theory is built up and its
constructs tend to be identified with “elements of the real physical world”. This is however
a purely psychological matter. No mental construct (and this goes for everyday, prescien-
tific conceptions about the nature of things, objects, etc. as well as elements of formal
theories) should ever be regarded as more “real” than any others. We simply have more
confidence in some than others.100

In the long thesis, the point is illustrated by the following example:
The constructs of classical physics are just as much fictions of our minds as those of any
other theory we simply have a great deal more confidence in them. It must be deemed a
mistake, therefore, to attribute any more “reality” here than elsewhere. (Everett 1973,
p. 134)



98
Everett to DeWitt, 1957, op. cit.
99
See for example Everett (1973, p. 116).
100
Everett to DeWitt, 1957, op. cit.
100 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


Everett’s attitude shows some analogy with Schrödinger’s “methodological
realism” or “quasi-realism”, in which any naı̈ve metaphysical commitment is
explicitly rejected.101 Although Everett holds that the primary purpose of theoret-
ical physics is to build useful models, he does not bother about their ontological
status, since, he says, models “serve for a time and are replaced as they are
outworn” (Everett 1973, p. 111). This attitude is also apparent in Everett’s critique
of Bohr’s doctrine of classical concepts (which we shall discuss in detail in
Sect. 3.7). Far from attributing any special status to classical concepts, Everett
urged their replacement by quantum ones. This position was not based on ontolog-
ical considerations. Rather, Everett thought that since all concepts serve to deal
with a reality-in-quotes, there is no reason to stick to a particular set of concepts:
our concepts can evolve just as our models of “reality” do.102
The “conceptual model of the universe” that Everett proposes “postulates only
the existence of the universal wave function which obeys a linear wave equation”
(Everett 1973, p. 117). In such a theory, “one can regard the state functions
themselves as the fundamental entities, and one can even consider the state function
of the whole universe.”103 In one of the manuscripts of 1955, Everett put it as
follows: “The physical ‘reality’ is assumed to be the wave function of the whole
universe itself.”104 In the long thesis, comparing his programme to the existing
interpretations of quantum mechanics, Everett explicitly refers to a paper in which
Schrödinger contrasts the continuous description provided by the wave function
with the “quantum jumps” of the “current probability view”.105 Indeed, in
Schrödinger’s writings of this period, one can easily find passages which are
amazingly in tune with Everett’s views:
[. . .] at the present stage and as long as the state vector plays the role it does it must be taken
to represent ‘the real world in space and time’, it ought not to be sublimed into a probability
function for the purpose of making forecasts [. . .] changing abruptly when somebody
(who?) cares to inspect a photograph or a registering tape. (Schrödinger 1958, p. 169)

What Everett has in mind when he talks of “model” is an “objective description”
of “reality”. Such a description must leave no room for mental entities and
processes which exceed the boundaries of quantum physics.106 In accordance
with von Neumann’s principle of psycho physical parallelism, which Everett
interprets as implying that an observer (including their perceptions) is completely
characterised by her/his physical state, the observers and their mental states must be
described by a state vector. The universal wave function includes therefore an
exhaustive model of all existing observers and of their interactions with the


101
See Bitbol (1998, pp. 182â€"184).
102
For a comparison with the debate that Schrödinger had with Bohr on this issue, see Murdoch
(1987, p. 101), Bitbol (1996a, pp. 22â€"23).
103
Ibid, p.9.
104
Everett (1955c, p. 9), in Everett (2012 [1955c]).
105
The paper cited by Everett (1973, p. 115) is Schrödinger (1952).
106
This is explicitly stated in a letter of 1980 (Everett to Raub, 1980, op. cit).
3.5 Everett’s Project 101


observed systems. This is perhaps why Everett contends that, unlike the conven-
tional formulation, his theory “sets the framework for its interpretation”.107 In the
methodological appendix of the long thesis, Everett says that each theory must
contain an “interpretive part”, i.e. “rules which put some of the elements of the
formal part into correspondence with the perceived world” (Everett 1973, p. 133).
Thus one might possibly argue that the universal wave function “sets the framework
for its interpretation” because it is isomorphic to the “world” perceived by all
observers (inasmuch as it mirrors the properties of the observers’ brains which
correspond to their “subjective perceptions”).108 From Everett’s standpoint, the
same cannot be said of the conventional formulation, in which “pure wave mechan-
ics” must be supplemented with the postulate of projection if one wants to put the
symbolism (which, in general, describes a system by means of a superposition of
“absolute” states) into correspondence with the “perceived world” (in which the
system is described by a single element of the superposition).109
Everett is committed to an ideal of unity, simplicity and completeness.110 The
structural features of his theory reflect this commitment. Firstly, there is no dualism
in the dynamics: the projection postulate is relinquished and the universal wave
function evolves according to a continuous and deterministic process. Secondly,
this simplification is purportedly achieved without introducing supplementary
“artificial” variables (see Sect. 3.4.3).



3.5.2 Objective Description and Correlations

While Everett’s motives, goals and assumptions are similar to those of other critics
of the conventional formulation of quantum mechanics, his strategy to make a
descriptive interpretation of the theoretical symbolism viable is completely origi-
nal. The cornerstone of this strategy is what Everett names “the fundamental
principle of the relativity of states”. Suppose that the universal wave function is
expanded as a linear combination of the vectors of some basis. According to the
principle of the relativity of states, if, in a given component of this expansion, a
system is represented by the eigenvector of an observable A corresponding to the
eigenvalue ai, then the system can be said to have the property “A ¼ ai” (i.e. to be in
the corresponding state), but this assertion is true only relative to the properties that



107
Everett (1957b, p. 142). See also Wheeler (1957, p. 152).
108
To be sure, this point of view is quite problematic. Its meaning and implications are analysed in
the following subsections.
109
This reasoning assumes that, in the conventional formulation, there is a straightforward link
between state vectors and physical states. As we have seen, this assumption was part of Everett’s
reading of von Neumann’s formulation.
110
“We have a strong desire to construct a single all-embracing theory which would be applicable
to the entire universe.” (Ibid, p. 135).
102 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


the other systems “have” in the same component of the expansion (i.e. to their state
in that component).
On one hand, in virtue of the principle of the relativity of states, the state vectors
need no longer to undergo an abrupt, acausal change in order to provide a consistent
description of the properties which measurements are supposed to reveal.
From the viewpoint of the theory, all elements of a superposition (all “branches”) are
“actual”, none any more “real” than another. It is completely unnecessary to suppose that
after an observation somehow one element of the final superposition is selected to be
awarded with a mysterious quality called “reality” and the others condemned to oblivion.
We can be more charitable and allow the others to coexistâ€"they won’t cause any trouble
anyway because all the separate elements of the superposition (“branches”) individually
obey the wave equation with complete indifference to the presence or absence (“actuality”
or not) of the other elements.111

On the other hand, properties are now intrinsically “relative”:
All statements about a subsystem [. . .] become relative statements, i.e. statements about the
subsystem relative to a prescribed state for the remainder. (Everett 1973, p. 118)

In this way Everett thinks that he has managed to construe the quantum theory as
an “objective description”, although of course the description is objective not in the
sense that it captures the “actual value” of each observable, but because it provides
a symbolic structure which connects any possible value of a given observable to a
particular state of the whole universe (which includes a specific state of every
conceivable observer).112 What quantum mechanics describes are the correlations
occurring in nature.113
Everett argues that, in this framework, even objects should be understood in
terms of correlations, no matter whether their size is atomic or macroscopic:
[If we] consider a large number of interacting particles [. . .], throughout the course of time
the position amplitude of any single particle spreads out farther and farther, approaching
uniformity over the whole universe, while at the same time, due to the interactions, strong
correlations will be built up, so that we might say that the particles have coalesced to form a
solid object. That is, even though the position amplitude of any single particle would be
“smeared out” over a vast region, if we consider a “cross section” of the total wave function


111
Everett to DeWitt, 1957, op. cit.
112
In this case too, it is interesting to compare Everett’s position to Schrödinger’s. Commenting on
our “yearning for a complete description of the material world in space and time”, Schrödinger
(1958, p. 169) remarked: “[. . .] It ought to be possible, so we believe, to form in our mind of the
physical object an idea (Vorstellung) that contains in some way everything that could be observed
in some way or other by any observer, and not only the record of what has been observed
simultaneously in a particular case.”
113
Everett’s mathematical work on correlations was probably undertaken independently of his
reflection on quantum mechanics. Indeed, the chapter of the long thesis dedicated to correlation
theory contains a lot of mathematical details that are not essential to the remainder. The chapter on
correlation theory was not reproduced in the final dissertation. However, it gave rise to a paper
(Everett 1955b), in Everett (2012 [1955b]), which remained unpublished (albeit Wheeler consid-
ered it “practically ready” for submission; John A. Wheeler to Hugh Everett, 21 Sep 1955, EP
(Box 1, Folder 9)).
3.5 Everett’s Project 103

for which one particle has a definite position, then we immediately find all the rest of the
particles nearby, forming our solid object.114

As an example, Everett analyses the formation of a hydrogen atom in a box
containing a proton and an electron. He concludes that:
What we mean by the statement, “a hydrogen atom has formed in the box”, is just that this
correlation has taken placeâ€"a correlation which insures that the relative configuration for
the electron, for a definite proton position, conforms to the customary ground state
configuration. (Everett 1973, p. 86)

This example is also discussed in the manuscript Probability in Wave Mechanics
of 1955, in which one finds the same emphasis on correlations, though the notion of
“relative state” is not yet explicitly stated there. More generally, Everett claims that
“all [physical] laws are correlation laws”.115 These passages help us to understand
how Everett can claim that his “universal wave function model” is complete,
notwithstanding the fact that it contains no information about which branch repre-
sents “actuality”. Indeed, from Everett’s point of view, such a question is not one
that can or must be answered by physics, for the simple reason that it cannot be
formulated in terms of correlations. In 1957, Everett wrote to Norbert Wiener:
You also raise the question of what it means to say that a fact or a group of facts is actually
realized. Now I realize that this question poses a serious difficulty for the conventional
formulation of quantum mechanics, and was the main motives for my reformulation. The
difficulty is removed in the new formulation, however, since it is quite unnecessary in this
theory ever to say anything like “Case A is actually realized.”116

Thus Everett can consistently hold that his model provides a complete descrip-
tion of “reality”. There remains a crucial problem, however, to be solved “investigat
[ing] the internal correlations in the universal wave function” (Everett 1973,
p. 118), namely, how to put this description into correspondence with the correla-
tions that we observe. As we will now see, for Everett even this problem can be
settled without singling out a unique “actual” branch.



3.5.3 Subjective Experience and Probabilities

How does Everett’s theory account for the “perceptions” of a typical observer
engaged in experimental activity?
For this purpose it is necessary to formulate abstract models for observers that can be
treated within the theory itself as physical systems, to consider isolated systems containing
such model observers in interaction with other subsystems, to deduce changes that occur in
an observer as a consequence of interaction with surrounding subsystems, and to interpret
the changes in the familiar language of experience. (Everett 1957b, p. 142)


114
Everett (1955c, p. 6), in Everett (2012 [1955c]).
115
See Everett (1973, pp. 118, 137).
116
Hugh Everett to Norbert Wiener, 31 May 1957, ME.
104 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


More specifically, it must be shown that the memory contents of a typical
observer described by Everett’s theory are consistent with the qualitative and
quantitative features that are commonly ascribed to the results of the observations
carried out in atomic physics: the “appearance of the collapse” (i.e. the invariance
of the result when a measurement is immediately repeated, and the consistency of
the results recorded by different observers who measure the same observable) on
the one hand, and the statistical distributions predicted by the Born rule for
ensembles of measurements carried out on identical systems on the other.
In accordance with the principles of the relativity of states and psychophysical
parallelism, these features of empirical data must in the first place be expressed in
terms of correlations between memory states of the observer. For example, the
repeatability requirement will be expressed by the following proposition (R):
Consider an observer O who, after measuring some observable, has immediately
repeated the measurement. If r1 and r2 are the values recorded by O’s memory as
the results of the two observations, then r1 ¼ r2. We note that the correlation
between subsequent measurement outcomes has been reduced to “some present
properties” of the observer’s memory which can be identified “with features of the
past experience”. The idea behind this move is that
in order to make deductions about the past experience of an observer it is sufficient to
deduce the present contents of the memory as it appears within the mathematical model.
(Everett 1973, p. 144)

Secondly, one must be able to deduce, from the model provided by the universal
wave function at a given instant, that (R) has probability 1 of being true. Everett
assumes that this second condition is fulfilled if the set of the branches in which the
state of O’s memory contradicts (R) has vanishing measure in the Hilbert space. As
for the measure to be used, Everett proposes, on the basis of a plausibility argument
that he finds compelling, a function which is analogous to the probability function
appearing in the Born rule. This choice enables Everett to claim that, in the case in
which O has performed the same measurement upon an infinite collection of
identical systems, the statistical results predicted by the conventional theory are
recovered (since they correspond to the statistical distribution recorded by all
memory sequences “except for a set [y] of measure zero”). Assuming that “the
actions of the [observer] at a given instant can be regarded as a function of the
memory contents only”, this is supposed to demonstrate why we use standard
quantum mechanics to predict experimental results (Everett 1973, pp. 148, 144).
We have so far considered the empirical domain of atomic physics. By the same
type of argument, Everett also claims that “the classical appearance of the macro-
scopic world to us can be explained in the wave theory.” In quantum mechanics, the
general state of a system of macroscopic objects does not ascribe any nearly definite
positions and momenta to the individual bodies. Yet, such a state can “at any instant
be analyzed into a superposition of states each of which does represent the bodies
with fairly well defined positions and momenta.” Hence if one considers the result
of an observation performed upon a system of macroscopic bodies in a general
state, the observer
3.5 Everett’s Project 105

will not see the objects as ‘smeared out’ over large regions of space [. . .] but will himself
simply become correlated with the systemâ€"after the observation the composite system of
objects + observer will be in a superposition of states, each element of which describes an
observer who has perceived that the objects have nearly definite positions and momenta,
and for whom the relative system state is a quasi-classical state [. . .], and furthermore to
whom the system will appear to behave according to classical mechanics if his observation
is continued. (Everett 1973, pp. 89â€"90)

Based on the foregoing arguments, Everett maintains that his theory can account
for both classical determinism and quantum indeterminism in terms of “subjective
experience”. In particular, he believes that he has shown “how pure wave mechan-
ics, without any initial probability assertions, can lead to these notions on a
subjective level, as appearances to observers.”117 Hence, he claims that, whereas
in the conventional formulation the “probabilistic features are postulated in
advance instead of being derived from the theory itself”, in the relative state
formulation
the statistical assertions of the usual interpretation do not have the status of independent
hypothesis, but are deducible (in the present sense) from the pure wave mechanics that
starts completely free of statistical postulates. (Everett 1957b, p. 149)

In the last two decades, several commentators, e.g. Barrett (1999) and Kent
(1990), have pointed out that Everett’s argument is wanting. There is perhaps no
need of a statistical postulate in order to “interpret” each branch of the universal
wave function individually, i.e. to state which occurrences in the “perceived world”
that particular branch describes. Yet, the theory provides us with infinite branches,
and this is the formal structure from which we have to extract empirical informa-
tion. Here we need what Everett calls the “interpretive part” of the theory. As a
matter of fact, Everett does use an interpretive rule in his deduction, which is
similar to that of classical statistical mechanics, although logically weaker. Unlike
the measure of the set of trajectories in the phase space of statistical mechanics, the
measure of the set of branches is not straightforwardly interpreted as a statistical
weight for empirical statements. Nevertheless, such an interpretation is indeed
assumed in the limiting case: true statements are those which hold for all but a
set of branches of measure zero. Everett himself asserts that “the situation here is
fully analogous to that of classical statistical mechanics” and develops the analogy
in detail. The very constraints from which Everett derives the mathematical func-
tion to be used as a measure in the Hilbert space reflect in his eyes “the only choice
which makes possible any reasonable statistical deductions at all”, just as “the
choice of Lebesgue measure on the phase space can be justified by the fact that it is
the only choice for which the ‘conservation of probability’ holds” (Everett 1973,
pp. 147â€"149).118 In his assessment of 1957, Wheeler makes a quick allusion to

117
Everett (1973, p. 78); see also p. 142.
118
For example, the additivity requirement, which plays a crucial role in the deduction, is so
chosen as “to have a requirement analogous to the ‘conservation of probability’.” (Ibid.) In his
letter to Max Jammer (op. cit.), Everett insisted that his “deduction of the probability interpreta-
tion” was “just as ‘rigorous’ as any of the deductions of classical statistical mechanics, since in
106 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


Laplace’s universe. From a pencilled note in the margin of a letter, we learn that the
analogy he saw between Everett’s and Laplace’s theories was in fact quite deep and
general. “In Laplace description,” he says, “we don’t know what’s going to happen
tomorrow morning, but we have a scheme within which it fits.” And he adds: “How
to do the same in qm description of nature.”119
It is unlikely that Everett would have endorsed a postulate stating the interpre-
tive rule his argument seems to rest on. One often gets the impression that he
believed that the rule simply followed from an adequate interpretation of branches.
But the few passages that are explicitly intended to clarify the controversial aspects
of such an interpretation, either in published papers or in private correspondence,
can hardly be said to shed any light on the issue (Barrett 1999, pp. 86â€"90). In the last
decades, the attempts to provide a consistent interpretation of branches have given
rise to a growing family of disparate approaches, ranging from many-worlds and
many-minds to consistent histories and relational interpretations. For almost all
these approaches it is important to define the ontological status of branchesâ€"a
problem that Everett systematically avoids, talking at most of a language difficulty
in connection to the “splitting” of the observer state when a measurement is
performed (Everett 1973, p. 68). In the light of Everett’s pragmatic conception of
reality, the question of whether his pictorial language is to be understood literally or
metaphorically may appear immaterial. Yet, among the 1955 manuscripts, there is a
paper (Everett 1955c, in Everett (2012 [1955c])) in which Everett seems to take
rather seriously the “splitting” process and its possible effects as seen “from
within”. In that paper he says for example that, after a measurement, “the observer
himself has split into a number of observers, each of which sees a definite result of
the measurement.”120 Or that the price to be paid in order to have a complete theory
“is the abandonment of the concept of the uniqueness of the observer, with its
somewhat disconcerting philosophical implications.”121 He also draws a detailed
analogy with the case of a splitting amoeba. On this passage, Wheeler, who read the
manuscript, annotated: “This analogy seems to me quite capable of misleading
readers in what is a very subtle point. Suggest omission.” And elsewhere: “Split?
Better words needed.” While acknowledging the value of the paper, Wheeler wrote
to Everett that it had to be reformulated in order to avoid “mystical misinterpretations




both areas the deductions can be shown to depend upon an ‘a priori’ choice of a measure on the
space.” And he continued: “What is unique about the choice of measure and why it is forced upon
one is that in both cases it is the only measure that satisfies a law of conservation of probability
through the equations of motion. Thus, logically, in both classical statistical mechanics and in
quantum mechanics, the only possible statistical statements depend upon the existence of a unique
measure which obeys this conservation principle.”
119
Stern to Wheeler (1956, op. cit).
120
Everett (1955c, p. 5), in Everett (2012 [1955c]).
121
Ibid, p. 8. In a note of 1956, Everett wrote: “Statistical ensemble of observers is, within the
context of the theory, a real, in distinction to a virtual, ensemble!” (Notes on Stern’s letter, 1956,
ME).
3.6 Striving for Copenhagen’s Imprimatur 107


by too many unskilled readers.”122 From these remarks, it would seem that Wheeler
considered the references to branches and splitting as a matter of form, rather than
one of substance. Certainly, however, he was aware that Everett’s pictorial phrasing
might not only be confusing, but might also conceal some real shortcoming. In
replying to the claim of the Copenhagen group that there was no relationship at all
between “Everett’s system” and “physics as we do it”, Wheeler said:
No, because Everett traces out a correspondence between the ‘correlations’ in his model
universe on the one hand, and the on the other hand what we observe when we go about
making measurements. [. . .] Has the nature of the correspondence been made clear [. . .]?
Far from it.123




3.6 Striving for Copenhagen’s Imprimatur

At the beginning of the fall term of 1955, Everett submitted Quantitative Measure
of Correlation and another paper (probably Probability in Wave Mechanics) to
Wheeler. In his response, after approving the former, Wheeler observed: “As for the
2nd one, I am frankly bashful about showing it to Bohr in its present form, valuable
and important as I consider it to be.”124 Remarkably, the reference to Bohr comes
without any introductory comment. Since it must have been quite unusual for a
Princeton student to have his drafts read by Bohr in person, this suggests that the
possibility of sending the paper to Copenhagen had already been discussed. When
exactly we do not know. In October 1954, Bohr had visited Princeton, and we know
that he met Everett.125 But it is unlikely that any serious discussion between them
took place on that occasion. The project to get Bohr involved in the assessment of
Everett’s thesis could have originated from Wheeler. The aforementioned note
shows that Wheeler was impressed by Everett’s qualities and ideas since the
beginning (see Sect. 3.3.2). Furthermore, as we shall see, although Wheeler
endorsed Bohr’s doctrine, he was puzzled by some aspects of it, and probably
saw Everett’s proposal as an opportunity to sound Bohr out about the necessity to
“generalize” the orthodox view.
In 1956, Wheeler was invited by the university of Leiden to hold the Lorentz
Chair for one semester. Before leaving in April, he received from Everett a bound
copy of Wave Mechanics Without Probability, which he mailed to Copenhagen




122
This remark is contained in a note that Wheeler sent to Everett in September 1955 (Wheeler to
Everett, 1955, op. cit.). That Wheeler was indeed referring to Probability in Wave Mechanics is
actually only a conjecture, though a plausible one.
123
Wheeler to Stern, 1956, op. cit.
124
Wheeler to Everett, 1955, op. cit.
125
There is a photograph, which appeared in a local journal, portraying Bohr holding a discussion
with a group of students, and Everett is among them. See Picture 3.1.
108 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


soon after his arrival in Leiden.126 In the letter accompanying the manuscript,
Wheeler appears quite cautious. “The title itself,” he says, “[. . .] like so many
ideas in it, need further analysis and rephrasing.”127 A few days later, Wheeler went
to Copenhagen in order to discuss the draft with Bohr and Petersen. Shortly after
returning to Leiden, he wrote to Everett:
We had three long and strong discussions about it. [. . .] Stating conclusions briefly, your
beautiful wave function formalism of course remains unshaken; but all of us feel that the
real issue is the words that are to be attached to the quantities of the formalism. We feel that
complete misinterpretation of what physics is about will result unless the words that go with
the formalism are drastically revised.

Wheeler also added that Bohr had promised to write to him about Everett’s work
and that “he was arranging [. . .] for Stern to give [. . .] a seminar report on
[Everett’s] thesis, so it could be thoroughly reviewed before he wrote.”128 The
same day, Wheeler forwarded to Everett the notes that he had taken during the
discussion with Petersen (when he was with Bohr, he said, he wrote “almost
never”129), together with a second letter in which he outlined his plan of action.
In this letter, besides insisting on the necessity of removing any possible source of
misunderstanding (though this was going to take “a lot of heavy arguments with a
practical tough minded man like Bohr”), Wheeler tried to make clear what he
considered to be the main issue at stake:
I don’t think, because I don’t make out Bohr’s case well, that it isn’t strong or convincing:
that the words you use in talking about things in your formalism have nothing to do with
words + concepts of everyday physics; that one will give rise to a complete misunderstand-
ing of what is going on to use the same words.130

After some time, Wheeler, who had not received any news from Bohr, wrote to
Stern. Stern answered that he had indeed given a seminar on Everett’s paper, and
added that “Prof. Bohr was kind enough to make a few introductory remarks and
open the discussion.” The outcome of this discussion was a merciless criticism of
Everett’s “erudite, but inconclusive and indefinite paper.”
In my opinion, there are some notions of Everett’s that seem to lack meaningful content, as,
for example, his universal wave function. Moreover he employs the concept of observer to
mean different things at different times [. . .].



126
Wheeler to Everett, 1956 [I], op. cit.
127
John A. Wheeler to Niels Bohr, 24 Apr 1956, BSC (reel 34). This letter contains a passage
(in which Wheeler refers to the “second draft of the thesis of Everett”) that seems to confirm that
Bohr already knew about Everett, and that the first version of the thesis had already been
mentioned to him. That Petersen was acquainted with Everett’s former writings is suggested by
a passage of a letter, in which, besides other things, he says: “I also had the opportunity to read the
new draft of your thesis.” (Aage Petersen to Hugh Everett, 28 May 1956, ME; our emphasis).
128
Wheeler to Everett, 1956 [I], op. cit. Alexander Stern was an American researcher then at the
Institute of Theoretical Physics of Copenhagen.
129
Wheeler to Everett, 1956 [II], op. cit.
130
Ibid.
3.6 Striving for Copenhagen’s Imprimatur 109

I do not follow him when he claims that, according to his theory, one can view the
accepted probabilistic interpretation of quantum theory as representing subjective appear-
ances of observers.
But, to my mind, the basic shortcoming in his method of approach [. . .] is his lack of an
adequate understanding of the measuring process.
His claim that process I [the Schrödinger equation] and process II [the collapse of the
wave function] are inconsistent when one treats the apparatus system and the atomic object
system under observation as a single composite system and if one allows for more than one
observer is, to my mind, not tenable.131

Wheeler’s reply is a long and detailed defence of Everett’s proposal, which aims
to dispel the impression that Everett’s purpose was to criticise the orthodox
approach. In the preamble of his letter, Wheeler reassured Stern about his own
intentions:
I do not in any way question the self consistency and correctness of the present quantum
mechanical formalism [. . .]. On the contrary, I have vigorously supported and expect to
support in the future the current and inescapable approach to the measurement problem. To
be sure, Everett may have felt some questions on this point in the past, but I do not.

About Everett, Wheeler observed that
[. . .] this very fine and able and independently thinking young man has gradually come to
accept the present approach to the measurement problem as correct and self consistent,
despite a few traces that remain in the present thesis, draft of a past dubious attitude.132

(Of this alleged conversion there is no trace in Everett’s writings; see
Sect. 3.4.2.) Although Wheeler believed that “the concept of ‘universal wave
function’” was indeed “an illuminating and satisfactory way to present the content
of quantum theory”, he was prepared to “recognise that there are many places in
Everett’s presentation that are open to heavy objection, and still more that are
subject to misinterpretation.” He added that “to make the whole discussion consis-
tent at every point” he would “make sure that Everett [had] the benefit of a number
of weeks in Copenhagen.” The importance that Wheeler attached to this plan is also
apparent from his previous letters to Everett:
I told Bohr I’d arrange to pay [. . .] half your minimum rate steamship fare New York to
Copenhagen; I think there’s an appreciable chance Bohr would take care of the other half,
according to what he said. He would welcome very much a several weeks’ visit from you to
thrash this out. You ought not to go of course except when he signifies to you that you are
picking a time when he can spend a lot of time with you. Unless and until you have fought
out the issues of interpretation one by one with Bohr, I won’t feel happy about the
conclusions to be drawn from a piece of work as far reaching as yours. Please go (and
see me too each way if you can!).

To this request, Wheeler added the following remark: “So in a way your thesis is
all done; in another way, the hardest part of the work is just beginning”. And he



131
Stern to Wheeler 1956, op. cit.
132
Wheeler to Stern, 1956, op. cit.
110 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


concluded: “How soon can you come?”133 This letter was dictated by phone or telex
in order to reach Everett as soon as possible, and, as previously mentioned, it was
followed by another sent the same day. In the second letter, Wheeler reiterated his
plea and argued that Everett’s qualities would not have done much good unless he
went and fought “with the greatest fighter” (in which case, he pledged to go to
Copenhagen during part of Everett’s time there “if that might help”). Wheeler also
said that in his annual letter of assessment to the National Science Foundation
Fellowship Board (which sponsored Everett’s studies), he had urged the need for
Everett to go to Copenhagen “with this sentence: ‘I feel Everett’s very original
work is destined to become widely known, and it ought to have the bugs ironed out
of it before it is published rather than after!’”134 In the same period, Wheeler wrote
to Bohr, arguing that Everett should “discuss the issue with [him] directly and arrive
at a set of words to describe his formalism that would make sense and be free from
misunderstandings for this purpose.”135 Wheeler’s strategy is outlined in a letter to
Allen Shenstone, the chairman of the Physics Department of Princeton University:
After a first review in Copenhagen of Everett’s Thesis in its present only partly satisfactory
second draft, I have urged him to come and struggle it out in person with Bohr for a few
weeks. I would like to see the thesis reach a form where it will be accepted for publication
in the Danish Academy. I think his very original ideas are going to receive wide discussion.
[. . .] Since the strongest present opposition to some parts of it comes from Bohr, I feel that
acceptance in the Danish Academy would be the best public proof of having passed the
necessary tests. Because of my feeling of the importance of this mutual agreement before
publication, I am contributing $260 towards Everett’s travel out of my very small Elemen-
tary Particle Research Fund.136

The project of having Everett’s work published by the Royal Danish Academy of
Sciences had already been mentioned to Everett in the two letters of May 22nd:
I also feel that the Danish Academy and under Bohr’s auspices is the best possible plan for
you to publish your work: a full length presentation, going to a wide audience.137

When Everett got the news from Wheeler, he phoned him. Following their
conversation, Wheeler cabled to Bohr:
Everett now Princeton phone asking confer with you hopes fly almost immediately but must
return in midjune you cable him if convenient my great hope thesis suitable Danish
academy publication after revision have answered Stern regards.138




133
Wheeler to Everett, 1956 [I], op. cit.
134
Wheeler to Everett, 1956 [II], op. cit.
135
John A. Wheeler to Niels Bohr, 24 May 1956, BSC (reel 33).
136
John A. Wheeler to Allen G. Shenstone, 28 May 1956, WP (Series Iâ€"Box Diâ€"Fermi Award
#1â€"Folder Everett).
137
Wheeler to Everett, 1956 [II], op. cit. In the other letter of the same day, he says “I would like to
feel happier than I do with the final product; then I would like to see it published in the Danish
Academy in fullâ€"that’s the perfect place for it.” (Wheeler to Everett, 1956 [I], op. cit.)
138
John A. Wheeler to Niels Bohr, Cable, 26 May 1956, BSC (reel 33).
3.6 Striving for Copenhagen’s Imprimatur 111


Shortly afterwards, Everett received a cable from Copenhagen, in which some
reservations about this plan were expressed.139 The cable was followed by a letter
which Petersen wrote after consulting with Wheeler. In the letter, Petersen assured
Everett that Bohr would have very much liked to discuss his ideas with him, but he
added that a period of 2 or 3 months was in their opinion necessary to “come to the
bottom of the problems.”140 Since he had in the meantime returned Everett’s
dissertation to Wheeler (with a note enclosed explaining that Bohr had been too
busy to send comments “on the question discussed in the thesis”, but hoped to write
to him in more detail “about the status of observers in the complementary mode of
description”141), Petersen requested Everett to send a new copy. He also suggested
that “as a background of [his] criticism”, Everett should give “a thorough treatment
of the attitude behind the complementary mode of description” and state as clearly
as possible “the points where he [thought] that this approach [was] insufficient.”142
In the middle of June, Everett was expected to start a job at the Weapon Systems
Evaluation Group of the Pentagon in Arlington, which was incompatible with the
conditions laid out by Bohr for the visit to Copenhagen. Even though Everett had
not excluded the possibility of being allowed to leave in the fall, the project was
eventually abandoned.143
Wheeler came back from Europe at the end of September 1956. By that time,
Everett had passed his final examination and left Princeton for Arlington.144
However, it took 6 more months for the thesis to be finally submitted (it was
defended in April 1957 and graded “very good”145). Bohr and his collaborators
(including Rosenfeld and Hip Groenewold,146 who had not attended Stern’s sem-
inar, but had read the manuscript) were “warmly thanked” in a note “for the useful
objections” (Everett 1957a, p.1). An obvious question is why the thesis, whose
second version had been achieved in the 1st months of 1956, was submitted only
1 year later. We know from a letter of Wheeler’s that, for administrative reasons
related to military service, Everett wished to remain registered at Princeton


139
Aage Petersen to Hugh Everett, 28 May 1956, ME.
140
Petersen to Everett, 1956, op. cit.
141
Aage Petersen to John A. Wheeler, 26 May 1956, BSC (reel 33).
142
Petersen to Everett, 1956, op. cit. To this suggestion, Everett replied: “[. . .] while I am doing it
you might do the same for my work.” (Everett to Petersen [draft], 1956, op. cit.) Everett agreed to
send a new copy of the thesis and remarked: “Judging from Stearn’s [sic] letter to Wheeler, which
was forwarded to me, there has not been a copy in Copenhagen long enough for anyone to have
read it thoroughly, a situation which this copy may rectify. I believe that a number of mis-
understandings will evaporate when it has been read more carefully (say 2 or 3 times).”
143
Petersen to Everett, 1956, op. cit.; Everett to Petersen [draft], 1956, op. cit.
144
Wheeler to Shenstone, 1956, op. cit.; Petersen to Everett, 1956, op. cit. Everett to Petersen
[draft], 1956, op. cit., Nancy Everett’s calendar of events, op. cit.
145
GAR.
146
Groenewold had been at the University of Groningen since 1951 (he became professor in
1955). He had made his doctorate at the university of Utrecht under the supervision of Rosenfeld,
with a dissertation entitled On the Principles of Elementary Quantum Mechanics.
112 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


University at least until 1956.147 In the course of 1956, as we have seen, he moved
to the Pentagon, where he was no longer in danger of being drafted, but probably
had little time to devote to the thesis.148 Besides these practical reasons, however, it
is likely that the revision of the second version in the light of the objections raised in
Copenhagen took a good deal of time. In his autobiography, Wheeler remembers
that he worked with Everett “long hours at night in [his] office to revise the draft”
(Wheeler and Ford 1998, p. 268). In an interview with Kenneth Ford, DeWitt
reported Wheeler’s recollection more colourfully, saying that Wheeler told him
many years later that “he sat down beside Everett and told him precisely what to
write.”149 Elsewhere, DeWitt expressed the belief that “Wheeler felt that the
Uhrwerk [the long thesis] might offend his hero Bohr.”150 Wheeler explains in
his autobiography that “his real intent was to make [Everett’s] thesis more digest-
ible to his other committee members” (Wheeler and Ford 1998, p. 268). Bohr and
the debate with the Copenhagen group are not mentioned.151 Yet, there is little
doubt that the revision also aimed at making Everett’s ideas “more digestible”, or at
least more comprehensible, to Bohr.
The external observation formulation, with which Everett contrasts his approach
in the final version of his thesis, is associated, if only obliquely, with Bohr’s viewâ€"
which was not the case for the “conventional formulation” that Everett criticised in
the long thesis. At the same time, the emphasis is no longer on the alleged
shortcomings of the orthodox view, but on the limitations which seem to restrict
its domain of applicability. In his assessment, Wheeler is careful to stress that
Bohr’s view provides a consistent interpretation of the conventional theory. He
points out that the “‘external observation’ formulation of quantum mechanics has
the great merit that it is dualistic” (Wheeler 1957, p. 151)â€"which is a remarkably
gentle way of saying that it “splits the world in two” (Wheeler and Ford 1998,
p. 269). We know that Everett regarded this “artificial dichotomy” as “a philosophic
monstrosity” (see Sect. 3.5.2),152 but Wheeler himself, in his autobiography, refers
to it as “a difficulty that still deeply troubles me and many others” (Wheeler and
Ford 1998, p. 269). Wheeler’s cautiousness is jokingly pointed out by DeWitt in a
letter of 1967:




147
Wheeler to Everett, 1956, op. cit. In the interview with Misner (op. cit., p. 6), Everett himself
alludes to the risk of being enlisted in the army upon finishing his studies, and this circumstance is
confirmed by DeWitt (Bryce S. DeWitt to Eugene Shikhovtsev, [w/d], courtesy of Eugene
Shikhovtsev).
148
Petersen to Everett, 1956, op. cit. Everett to Petersen [draft], 1956, op. cit., Nancy Everett’s
calendar of events, op. cit.; DeWitt to Shikhovtsev, [w/d], op. cit.
149
DeWitt interview, op. cit., p. 6.
150
DeWitt to Shikhovtsev, [w/d], op. cit.
151
Nor are the discussions with Bohr mentioned in Wheeler’s interviews deposited in the archives
of the American Institute of Physics.
152
Everett (1955a, p. 3), in Everett (2012 [1955a]); Everett to DeWitt, 1957, op. cit.
3.6 Striving for Copenhagen’s Imprimatur 113

[. . .] I can only say ‘Good Old John!’. It always amused me to read your Assessment of
Everett’s theory [. . .] how highly you praised Bohr, when the whole purpose of the theory
was to undermine the stand he had for so long taken!”153

In 1956, writing to Stern, Wheeler had been unequivocal: “Everett’s thesis is not
meant to question the present approach to the measurement problem, but to accept it
and generalize it.”154 Indeed, in the introduction and in the conclusion of the paper
of 1957, the relative state formulation is not presented as an alternative to the
orthodox approach, but rather as a new theory which generalizes it.
The aim is not to deny or contradict the conventional formulation of quantum theory, which
has demonstrated its usefulness in an overwhelming variety of problems, but rather to
supply a new more general and complete formulation, from which the conventional
interpretation can be deduced. (Everett 1957b, p. 141)

Everett’s dissertation was published in the Reviews of Modern Physics, within a
collection of papers “prepared in connection with the Conference on the Role of
Gravitation in Physics” held at Chapel Hill in January of 1957. Everett did not
attend the conference. Yet, his ideas were mentioned in the discussions,155 and his
paper was submitted by Wheeler to DeWitt, who was the editor in charge for the
section of the July issue of the Reviews containing conference papers.156 The paper
was published together with a “companion piece” written by Wheeler, since,
notwithstanding the thorough revision, Wheeler was not yet completely satisfied
and feared the possible misunderstandings (Wheeler and Ford 1998, p. 268). In his
assessment, Wheeler discussed some aspects of Bohr’s epistemological analysis
explicitly, showing how they could be reformulated in the framework of Everett’s
theory. These were certainly not the optimum publishing conditions for Everett’s
work to receive the wider recognition that Wheeler had originally hoped for.
Pre-prints were nonetheless sent to many distinguished physicists, including
Schrödinger, van Hove, Oppenheimer, Dyson, Yang, Wiener, Wightman, Wigner,
and Margenau, besides of course Bohr and his collaborators.157
The responses of DeWitt, Wiener and Margenau were quite favourable158
Groenewold sent a long letter, in which he said that although he found the new
draft much improved compared to that he had borrowed 1 year earlier in

153
Bryce S. DeWitt to John A. Wheeler, 20 Apr 1967. WP (Series Iâ€"Box Co-De Folder DeWitt).
DeWitt refers to Wheeler (1957) (see below).
154
Wheeler to Stern, 1956, op. cit.
155
For example, Feynman, who attended the conference, made some critical remarks on “the
concept of a ‘universal wave function’.” (This fact was brought to our attention by H. Dieter Zeh,
who saw the report of the proceedings of the conference deposited in the Wright Air Development
Center, Ohio.). This report is now published in DeWitt-Morette and Rickles (2011).
156
DeWitt to Shikhovtsev, [w/d], op. cit.
157
John A. Wheeler, Note, 10 Mar 1957, WP (Series Iâ€"Box Diâ€"Fermi Award #1â€"Folder
Everett).
158
DeWitt to Wheeler, 1957, op. cit.; Wiener to Wheeler and Everett, 1957, op. cit.; Henry
Margenau to John A. Wheeler & Hugh Everett, 8 Apr 1957, WP (Series Iâ€"Box Diâ€"Fermi
Award #1â€"Folder Everett).
114 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


Copenhagen, “with regard to the fundamental physical and epistemological
aspects” he “still profoundly disagree[d].”159 Once more, Bohr answered that,
although he had no time to write down his comments, he would have asked Petersen
to report their discussions. His only remark was that the argumentation contained
“some confusion as regards the observational problem.”160 Perhaps he had in mind
this “confusion” when, 2 months later, he wrote to Wheeler that he was preparing a
new collection of his papers on the epistemological problems in quantum physics
(Atomic Physics and Human Knowledge was to appear the following year) and that
he hoped that, “in spite of all present divergences”, this would “help to appreciate
the clarification of our position in this field of experience”, which, according to his
conviction, had been obtained.161
Petersen’s letter followed indeed, as Bohr had promised. It rejected Everett’s
approach as a whole, defending the Copenhagen approach to measurement and
pointing out Everett’s alleged misunderstandings. In his answer, besides spelling
out his criticisms of Bohr’s approach (see Sect. 3.4.2), Everett mentioned the
possibility of being “sent to Europe in the fall on business”, in which case he
“could probably take a few weeks off and come to Copenhagen.”162 But something
hindered this second attempt. The meeting between Everett and Bohr that Wheeler
had longed for eventually occurred 2 years later, in March 1959. During the 6 weeks
he spent in Copenhagen, Everett met Bohr, but, according to the recollections of his
wife, no real discussion on Everett’s ideas took place.163 In Everett’s interview, the
comments on his visit to Copenhagen are lost in background noise, and we are left
with only a few fragments (“that was a hell. . .doomed from the beginning”), which
are however quite telling.164 A much more explicit account is contained in a letter
written by Rosenfeld (who had moved to Copenhagen in 1958) many years later165:
With regard to Everett neither I nor even Niels Bohr could have any patience with him,
when he visited us in Copenhagen more than 12 years ago in order to sell the hopelessly



159
Groenewold to Everett and Wheeler, 1957, op. cit.
160
Bohr to Wheeler, 12 April 1957, op. cit.
161
Niels Bohr to John A. Wheeler, 6 Aug 1957, BSC (reel 33).
162
Everett to Petersen, 1957, op. cit.
163
Nancy Everett recalled that “during our visit [. . .] Niels Bohr was in his 80s and not prone to
serious discussion of any new (strange) upstart theory.” Nancy Gore Everett to Frank Tipler,
10 Oct 1983, EP (Box 1, Folder 9). (Bohr was actually 73.) Wheeler gave a similar account in a
letter to Max Jammer (19 Mar 1972, WP, Series Iâ€"Box Iâ€"Jasonâ€"Folder Jammer).
164
Everett interview, op. cit., p.8
165
Rosenfeld to Belinfante, 22 Jun 1972, op. cit. In a letter of 1971, Rosenfeld congratulated John
Bell for having succeeded in giving “an air of respectability” to “Everett’s damned nonsense”.
(Léon Rosenfeld to John S. Bell, 30 Nov 1971. RP.) (Rosenfeld referred to a talk given by Bell at
an international conference held at the Pennsylvania State University, in which Bell had presented
Everett’s theory as a “refurbishing of the idea of preestablished harmony”.) Rosenfeld’s words
should of course be placed in the context of the 1970s (see Sect. 3.8). We are thankful to Anja
Jacobsen for having brought the correspondence of Rosenfeld with Belinfante and Bell to our
attention.
3.7 The Issues at Stake in the Debate 115

wrong ideas he had been encouraged, most unwisely, by Wheeler to develop. He was
undescribably stupid and could not understand the simplest things in quantum mechanics.



3.7 The Issues at Stake in the Debate

The fact that Wheeler was persuaded that Everett’s ideas might obtain Bohr’s
approval is puzzling. It shows that we should not confine an analysis of the
discussions about Everett’s proposal to overt disagreements. We must address in
the first place the misunderstandings surrounding the Copenhagen view, as well as
its inherent ambiguities.



3.7.1 Symbolism

To the Copenhagen group, Everett’s formulation of quantum mechanics appeared
as a “symbolic limbo” having no thread of connectivity with concrete experimental
practice.166 Everett’s interpretation of the wave function seemed to them quite
confusing and unjustified, since it endowed the predictive symbols of the conven-
tional theory with a descriptive connotation which they were not meant to have.167
In his letter of 1956, Stern wrote:
Then there is the concept of state in quantum theory. An elementary system does not come
with a “ready-made” state. It does not possess a state in the sense of classical physics.168

A similar remark was made by Petersen in his discussion with Wheeler:
Ψ does not pertain to a phys[ical] system in the same way as a dynamical variable. [. . .] Ψ
fu[nction] for elec[tron] doesn’t have sense until we get something like a prob[ability] dist
[ribution] of spots.
So, Q.M. formalism no well defined appli[cation] without exp[erimental]
arrangement.169




166
Stern to Wheeler, 1956, op. cit. Stern is referring here to “Heisenberg’s recent attempt at a
theory of elementary particles”, which he compares to Everett’s proposal.
167
“[. . .] The entire formalism is to be considered as a tool for deriving predictions, of definite or
statistical character, as regards information obtainable under experimental conditions described in
classical terms and specified by means of parameters entering into the algebraic or differential
equations of which the matrices or the wave-functions, respectively, are solutions. These symbols
themselves, as is indicated already by the use of imaginary numbers, are not susceptible to pictorial
interpretation.” (Bohr 1948, p. 314). Everett outlines Bohr’s instrumentalist conception of formal-
ism in the long thesis (1973, p. 110). See Stapp (1972) for a discussion.
168
Stern to Wheeler, 1956, op. cit.
169
Wheeler, Notes, 1956, op. cit. When he read this sentence, Everett scrawled in the margin:
“Nonsense!”.
116 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


Indeed, as Groenewold pointed out in 1957, one could figure out an accurate
theory of atomic phenomena involving no wave functions at all:
All physical observable quantities may ultimately be expressed in statistical relations
between results of various measurements. These relations may be expressed [. . .] without
wave functions (or more general statistical operators).170

In his reply to Stern, Wheeler addressed such objections:
Why in the world talk of a wave function under such conditions for it in no way measures
up to the role of the wave function in the customary formulation, that we accept without
question?
(a) Nothing prevents one from considering a wave function and its time evolution in
abstracto; that is, without ever talking about the equipment which originally prepared the
system in that state, or even mentioning the many alternative pieces of apparatus that might
be used to study that state. (b) A state function as used in this sense has absolutely nothing
to do with the state function as used in the customary discussion of the measurement
problem, for now no means of external observation are admitted to the discussion.

This was a “new physical theory”, stemming from “Everett’s free volition.”
Again and again Wheeler stresses the same point:
The greatest possible confusion will result if the mathematical quantities in Everett’s
theory, such as the wave function, are thought of as having the purpose that the wave
function fulfills in the customary formulation.

And referring to the link between Everett’s model and the phenomena:
The very meaning of the word “consequences” has to be defined within the framework of
the theory itself, not by applying to Everett’s concept of wave function epistemological
considerations that refer to ‘wave function’ in the completely different of the usual
formalism.171

Of course, the idea that the state vectors provide a “complete model for our
world”, rather than “expressing the probabilities for the occurrence of individual
events observable under well-defined experimental conditions”,172 could hardly
appear attractive to Bohr, rooted as it was in a conception of theories that he
regarded as a vestige of the classical way of thought. In Bohr’s eyes, Everett’s
attempt to avoid any reflection about the use of concepts in physics, by taking the
wave function “as the basic physical entity without a priori interpretation”, could
not produce “a further clarification of the foundations of quantum mechanics.”173
Scientific knowledge, for him, was no less concerned with words than it was with
the mathematical symbolism (see Sect. 3.7.4). This point was stressed by Bohr in
his discussions with Wheeler, who, as we have seen in Sect. 3.6, after his journey to
Copenhagen wrote to Everett that the words that went with the formalism had to be


170
Groenewold to Everett and Wheeler, 1957, op. cit.
171
Wheeler to Stern, 1956, op. cit.
172
The quotations are from Wheeler to Stern, 1956, op. cit., and (Bohr 1948, p. 314) respectively.
173
Everett (1957b, p. 142), and Aage Petersen to Hugh Everett, 24 Apr 1957, WP (Series Iâ€"Box
Diâ€"Fermi Award #1â€"Folder Everett).
3.7 The Issues at Stake in the Debate 117


drastically revised in order to avoid “complete misinterpretation of what physics is
about.”174 Even though Wheeler’s phrasing seems to call more for the improvement
of Everett’s prose than for a reflection on the use of concepts, there is little doubt
that what Bohr actually wanted to emphasise was the general fact that “one can no
more exclude meaning and understanding from physics than one can substitute
servomechanisms for physicists.”175



3.7.2 Relativity

Both Everett and Bohr considered it an important lesson to be learnt from quantum
mechanics that physical systems could not be endowed with properties “in the
absolute”. Yet Everett thought that his relative state formulation was the only way
to take the fundamental relativity of properties into account without introducing
either subjective or dualistic features in physics. As we have seen, this solution did
not put into question the assumption that there must be a correspondence between
the state vector of a system and its “objective properties”. Bohr’s complementarity
instead dispensed with the idea that measurements reveal (and state vectors
describe) properties which are defined independently of the experimental context.
In quantum mechanics, the attribution of properties to a system is consistent with
the empirical data only in so far as the observations are confined to a given set of
“compatible” observables, i.e. to certain experimental contexts. Therefore, from a
Bohrian point of view, the fact that state vectors do work as a meta-contextual
predictive tool prevents us from interpreting them as descriptions of the putative
properties of a system. Accordingly, the state vector attributed to a system acquires
a physical meaning only when it has been related to the eigenvalues of some
observable and to the operations through which the observable is measured.176 As
Petersen put it:
Only a coord[inate] sys[tem] can give a vector a meaning. Have to know Ψ plus exp
[erimental] apparatus to make predictions.177



174
Wheeler to Everett, 1956 [I], op. cit. In his notes (op. cit.), Wheeler reports that Petersen,
recalling that Everett blamed Bohr for his “conservative” attitude, retorted: “Bohr would say
Everett much too class[ical], not in math but in recognize new features. Just as in past formalisms,
the whole problem the tough one was to find the right words to express the content of the
formalism in acceptable form.”
175
Stern to Wheeler, 1956, op. cit. See Sect. 3.7.4 for further discussion.
176
For Bohr, what is relative (to a given experimental context) is not the property itself, but rather
the very possibility of attributing a given property to a system. For a discussion see (Murdoch
1987, Chap. 7). It is telling that, in his epistemological writings, Bohr preferred the term
“behaviour” to that of “property” (Ibid, p. 135). The meta-contextual connotation that the notion
of “property” has in ordinary language must have appeared confusing to Bohr when applied to
atomic systems.
177
Wheeler, Notes, 1956, op. cit.
118 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


Bohr himself repeatedly made this point in his lectures and correspondence,
emphasising the analogy with the situation encountered in special relativity.178 As
pointed out by DeWitt, however, also Everett’s theory could be put into correspon-
dence with Einstein’s approach, although of course for different reasons:
The conventional interpretation of the formalism of quantum mechanics in terms of an
“external” observer seems to me similar to Lorentz’s original version (and interpretation) of
relativity theory, in which the Lorentz-Fitzgerald contraction was introduced ad hoc.
Everett’s removal of the “external” observer may be viewed as analogous to Einstein’s
denial of the existence of any privileged inertial frame.179

Everett’s theory can be regarded as an attempt to “objectify” the relational
aspects of Bohr’s approach. The “relativity to the context” implied by Bohr’s
pragmatic view of formalism is replaced by the “relativity of states”, which results
in correlations that can be entirely represented within the symbolic model of the
universe. As we know, the main motive for this move was to neutralise the alleged
subjectivist implications of the projection postulate. In the relative state formula-
tion, after a measurement, there is no outcome that is more “actual” than the other a
priori possible outcomes: all outcomes are “actual” relative to some state of the
universe, and this is supposed to eliminate the need to resort to a “magic process”
that projects the state vector onto the subspace corresponding to the specific
property allegedly revealed by the measurement. However, no “magic process” is
required in Bohr’s approach either. For Bohr, state vectors are merely predictive
symbols that serve to anticipate the results obtained in a well-defined context: if the
context undergoes an “objective” change, as it does after a result has been recorded,
so does the state vector to be used for predicting the results of further observations.
This point was emphasised by Groenewold:
Now one can introduce the statistical operator, which just represents in a very efficient way
all the information which already has been obtained and which may be used to calculate the
conditional probability (with respect to this information) of other information which still
may be obtained or used. Thus also the statistical operator is conditional and depends on the
standpoint from which the system is described. It is relative like the coordinate frame in
relativity theory. It seems to me that this conditional character has been overlooked in your
papers (as well as in many others).180



178
See e.g. Murdoch (1987, pp. 145â€"146).
179
DeWitt to Everett and Wheeler, 1957, op. cit.
180
Hip Groenewold to Hugh Everett and John A. Wheeler, 11 Apr 1957, WP (Series Iâ€"Box Diâ€"
Fermi Award #1â€"Folder Everett). For a discussion see (Teller 1981). In the light of these
considerations, and in spite of the differences emphasised by both parties in the debate, one
could be tempted to point out some connections between Bohr’s and Everett’s approaches. On the
one hand, by taking into account Everett’s emphasis on correlations, one might argue that Bohr’s
interpretation of the state vector requires no projection postulate at all. On the other hand, Bohr’s
notion of complementarity might be helpful in interpreting Everett’s principle of the relativity of
states. According to such a principle, the properties possessed by a system at a given instant
depend critically on the basis chosen to expand the universal wave function; see Barrett (1999).
One may assume the existence of some “internal” mechanism which selects a preferred basis. But
as long as this is not done, the arbitrary choice of the preferred basis that determines which sort of
3.7 The Issues at Stake in the Debate 119


3.7.3 Irreversibility

For the Copenhagen group, the main shortcoming of Everett’s theory was that it
failed to recognize the fundamental role of irreversibility in physics. Stern wrote to
Wheeler:
Everett does not seem to appreciate the FUNDAMENTALLY irreversible character and the
FINALITY of a macroscopic measurement. One cannot follow through, nor can one trace
to the interaction between the apparatus and the atomic system under observation. It is not
an “uncontrollable interaction”, a phrase often used in the literature. Rather, it is an
INDEFINABLE interaction. Such a connotation would be more in accord with the fact of
the irreversibility, the wholeness of the quantum phenomenon as embodied in the exper-
imental arrangement.181

Likewise, in his letter of 1957, after pointing out the necessity of cutting off the
“measuring chain”, Groenewold remarked:
But it is extremely fundamental that this cutoff is made after the measuring result has been
recorded in a permanent way, so that it no longer can be essentially changed if it is observed
on its turn (i.e. if the chain is set forth). This recording has to be more or less irreversible
and can only take place in a macrophysical (recording) system. This macrophysical
character of the later part of the measuring chain is decisive for the measuring process. I
do not think that it can be left out of consideration in its description. It does not seem to act
an essential part in your considerations.182

From Everett’s standpoint, such objections were completely misguided.183
[. . .] one of the fundamental motivations of the paper is the question of how can it be that
mac[roscopic] measurements are “irreversible”, the answer to which is contained in my
theory (see remarks chap. V), but is a serious lacuna in the other theory.

Indeed, as we have seen in Sect. 3.4.2, the way in which the Copenhagen group
accounted for the irreversibility of the measurement process was for Everett highly
unsatisfactory and mysterious. In Bohr’s writings, the fundamental role of irrevers-
ibility in physics was often stressed. But, according to Everett, little was said about
the origin of this “magic irreversibility”.
The arguments put forward by the Copenhagen group about this and other
aspects of measurement involved (and sometimes mixed up) two different levels
of reflection. The first and more fundamental level implied a pragmatic-transcen-
dental argument to the effect that irreversibility is a constitutive feature of mea-
surement, and that it cannot be ensured unless the description of the results is
framed within the representation of ordinary “objective” experience. The second


(relative) properties are attributed to a system (for instance, a definite value for position, but not for
momentum) looks very much like the Bohrian choice between “complementary” contexts. For a
discussion see (Bitbol 1998, pp. 286â€"293).
181
Stern to Wheeler, 1956, op. cit.
182
Groenewold to Everett and Wheeler, 1957, op. cit.
183
They indicated “rather clearly” that his critics had “had insufficient time to read” his work. This
and the following quotations are taken from Everett’s notes on Stern’s letter, 1956, ME.
120 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


level implied a physical explanation of irreversibility connecting irreversibility
with the “reduction” of the state vector, and the reduction of the state vector with
the macroscopic nature of the measuring apparatus. Assuming that quantum
mechanics should also apply to the macroscopic domain, the former (pragmatic)
argument raised a problem of consistency, which the latter (physical) argument was
designed to settle.184
A detailed analysis of the issue of irreversibility in connection with Everett’s
work can be found in the correspondence that Rosenfeld had with Belinfante in
1972. It is worth quoting some passages from these letters, with the caveat that they
were written many years after Everett’s dissertation. The context was then heavily
influenced by the controversies of the 1960s, in which Bohr, who died in 1962, took
no part. Rosenfeld, who, as he says himself, was doing his best to pull Belinfante
out of the pitfall in which he had been precipitated by the reading of Everett,185
wrote to him:
. . . I do not think you are right to go on and say that one could do without reducing the state
vector, which means physically without carrying the measurement to its completion by
recording a permanent mark of its result. You should leave such a heresy to Everett.186

In his letters, Rosenfeld explained that the reason why there is “no choice
whatsoever about the necessity of applying the [state] reduction” is that “the
reduction rule is nothing else than a formal way of expressing the idealized result
of the registration”: without it “the phenomenon is not well defined.”187 He also
stressed that the “reduction rule” did not require an ad hoc postulate: it could be
deduced (in principle) from thermodynamic considerations that applied to macro-
scopic systems. Since the registration is necessary, and since it requires state
reduction, which can only be established for macroscopic systems, Rosenfeld
concluded that nobody “can avoid committing himself to accepting the necessity
of macroscopic measuring instruments.”188 Indeed, as we have seen (Sect. 2.3), in
the early 1960s Rosenfeld supported, against Wigner, the theory of measurement
proposed by Daneri, Loinger and Prosperi (1962). In his opinion, such a theory
provided a rigorous framework for Bohr’s ideas.189 In the 1950s, however, the
Copenhagen group did not oppose Everett’s objections with anything like a theory
of measurement, but merely with a collection of generic statements.


184
See Murdoch (1987, pp. 112â€"118). See also Sect. 3.7.5.
185
Léon Rosenfeld to Frederik J. Belinfante, 24 Aug 1972, RP.
186
Rosenfeld to Belinfante, 22 Jun 1972, op. cit.
187
Léon Rosenfeld to Frederik J. Belinfante, 24 Jul 1972. RP.
188
Ibid.
189
“Now, the crux of the problem which worries Wigner so much is that the reduction rule appears
to be in contradistinction with the time evolution described by Schrödinger’s equation. The
answer, which was of course well known to Bohr, but has been made formally clear by the Italians
[Daneri, Loinger and Prosperi], is that the reduction rule is not an independent axiom, but
essentially a thermodynamic effect, and accordingly, only valid to the thermodynamic approxi-
mation.” Rosenfeld to Belinfante, 24 July 1972, op. cit.
3.7 The Issues at Stake in the Debate 121


3.7.4 Words

In Bohr’s view, the mathematical symbols employed in physics have a meaning
only inasmuch as they refer to well-defined measurements. Therefore, the mean-
ingful use of a theory presupposes that one can define unambiguously the experi-
mental setup, in which the measurements are performed, as well as their possible
outcomes.190 This point was made by Petersen during the discussions of 1956:
[. . .] Math can never be used in phys[ics] until have words. [. . .] What mean by physics is
what can both be expressed unambig[uously] in ordinary language. Spots on plate have
meaning but not in Everettâ€"he talks of correlations but can never build that up by Ψ fun
[ctions].191

Stern stressed the same idea in his letter:
Our formalism must be in terms of possible or idealized experiments whose interpretations
thereby involves [sic] the use of concepts intimately connected with our own sphere of
experience which we choose to call reality. The epistemological nature of our experiments
and the objective nature of the abstract mathematical formalism TOGETHER form the
body and spirit of science.

He also illustrated this point by means of an example taken from biology:
To trace the schizophrenic phenomenon from the basic molecular level to the observational
level of its psychological symptomatic manifestations is an aspect of the observation
problem. It cannot be traced in the detail of a space-time description.192

This example is meant to show that physical theories establish correlations
between facts of our experience, the “definition” of which does not involve the
mathematical constructs of those very theories. Such a remark generalized a typical
Copenhagen assertion, which Groenewold summarised as follows:
Because all observable quantities may ultimately be expressed in statistical relations
between measuring results and the latter are represented by essentially macrophysical
recordings, the former ones may ultimately be expressed in macrophysical language.
That does of course not mean that the formalism, which serves as a tool for calculating
these statistical relations could also be expressed in macrophysical language. On the
contrary in this field the macrophysical language is liable to loose its original more or
less unambiguous meaning.193

Besides highlighting the importance of “classical” concepts (i.e. concepts used
in ordinary language and classical physics) for describing the experimental context
in which atomic phenomena are observed, Bohr also insisted on the need to use
such concepts for providing a pictorial description of the phenomena themselves. In
both cases Bohr assumed that an account based on classical concepts automatically
fulfilled the conditions for an objective description. In the former case, as we have

190
See e.g. Stapp (1972).
191
Wheeler, Notes, 1956, op. cit.
192
Stern to Wheeler, 1956, op. cit.
193
Groenewold to Wheeler and Everett, 1957, op. cit.
122 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


seen, such conditions were related to the requirements of communicability and
repeatability which are constitutive of experimental practice. In the latter case, they
were related to the objectification of phenomena allegedly required by the very
concept of observation.194 This twofold argument is summarised by Petersen in his
letter of 1957:
There can on [Bohr’s] view be no special observational problem in quantum mechanics in
accordance with the fact that the very idea of observation belongs to the frame of classical
concepts. The aim of [Bohr’s] analysis is only to make explicit what the formalism implies
about the application of the elementary physical concepts. The requirement that these
concepts are indispensable for an unambiguous account of the observations is met without
further assumptions [. . .].195

As we have pointed out in the discussion about irreversibility, the Copenhagen
scientists did not always clearly distinguish the various levels involved in Bohr’s
argumentâ€"the level of language, that of the conditions for the possibility of
physics, and that of the content of physical knowledge. This is even more true for
Bohr’s critics. Everett’s reading of Bohr’s argument, for example, was that
[in the Copenhagen interpretation] the deduction of classical phenomena from quantum
theory is impossible simply because no meaningful statements can be made without
preexisting classical apparatus to serve as a reference frame.196

Here Bohr’s transcendental reasoning, according to which the formulation of a
physical problem presupposes the specification of the corresponding experimental
conditions (“apparatus”), and hence requires a suitable conceptual framework, is
presented as a physical assumption about the existence of a macroscopic world
(“phenomena”) governed by classical mechanics. That Everett understood Bohr’s
argument as a postulate implying “that macrosystems are relatively immune to
quantum effects” is confirmed by the main criticism that he addressed to the
Copenhagen interpretation, namely that it “[adhered] to a ‘reality’ concept [. . .]
on the classical level but [renounced] the same in the quantum domain.”197 Unsur-
prisingly, Everett regarded such a “postulate” with no sympathy at all (“epistemo-
logically garbage”, he annotated on Groenewold’s letter). For him, Bohr’s
conception of formalism, as well as his insistence on the primitive role of classical
concepts, imposed arbitrary limits upon the scope of quantum mechanics. Everett
contrasted this dogmatic position with the pragmatic view that he advocated with
regard to “the constructs of classical physics” (see Sect. 3.5.1), and he claimed that,
by showing that classical physics can be derived from quantum theory, one could in
fact replace “classical” concepts by “quantum” ones. In his reply to Petersen, after
pointing out that he did not think that his viewpoint could be dismissed “as simply a
misunderstanding of Bohr’s position”, Everett formulated it as follows:


194
See Bitbol (1996b, pp. 256â€"269) for a critical analysis.
195
Petersen to Everett, 1957, op. cit.
196
Everett (1973, p. 111). Everett regarded this position as “conservative”.
197
Everett to Petersen, 1957, op. cit. See Sect. 3.4.2.
3.7 The Issues at Stake in the Debate 123

The basing of quantum mechanics upon classical physics was a necessary provisional step,
but now [. . .] the time has come to proceed to something more fundamental. There is a good
analogy in mathematics. The complex numbers were first introduced only in terms of the
real numbers. However, with sufficient experience and familiarity with their properties, it
became possible and indeed more natural to define them first in their own right without
reference to the reals. I would suggest that the time has come to do the same for quantum
theoryâ€"to treat it in its own right as a fundamental theory without any dependence on
classical physics, and to derive classical physics from it. While it is true that initially the
classical concepts were required for its formulation, we now have sufficient familiarity to
formulate it without classical physics, as in the case of the complex numbers.

Everett concluded this passage by observing: “I’m sure that you will recognize
this as Bohr’s own example turned against him”.198 Indeed, from Wheeler’s notes,
we know that, during their discussions, Petersen had made the following example:
Bohr (ac[cording] to A[age] P[etersen]) need non rel[ativistic] way to live self into rel
[ativistic] worldâ€"have to sep[arate] between space [and] timeâ€"consider watch; entrance
into Complex n[umbers] only via real n[numbers]; hence entrance into rel via non rel.199

Of course, from a Bohrian standpoint, Everett’s hope to derive from the theory
the conceptual framework presupposed by physics was an illusion, since one could
not even make sense of the theory without relying on a well-defined experimental
practice. As Rosenfeld put it in 1959:
Everett’s work [. . .] suffers from the fundamental misunderstanding which affects all the
attempts at ‘axiomatizing’ any part of physics. The ‘axiomatizers’ do not realize that every
physical theory must necessarily make use of concepts which cannot, in principle, be
further analysed, since they describe the relationship between the physical system which
is the object of study and the means of observation by which we study it: these concepts are
those by which we give information about the experimental arrangement, enabling anyone
(in principle) to repeat the experiment. It is clear that in the last resort we must here appeal
to common experience as a basis for common understanding. To try (as Everett does) to
include the experimental arrangement into theoretical formalism is perfectly hopeless,
since this can only shift, but never remove, this essential use of unanalysed concepts
which alone makes the theory intelligible and communicable.200

With similar arguments in mind, in 1957 Petersen wrote to Everett:
Of course, I am aware that from the point of view of your model-philosophy most of these
remarks are besides the point. However, to my mind this philosophy is not suited for
approaching the measuring problem. I would not like to make it a universal principle that
ordinary language is indispensable for definition or communication of physical experience,


198
Ibid. See also Wheeler (1957, p. 151).
199
Wheeler, Notes, 1956, op. cit. Bohr often remarked that the use of imaginary numbers in
quantum theory prevents one from interpreting the quantum formalism “as an extension of our
power of visualization” (Bohr 1998, p. 86). Also, he liked to mention the discovery of irrational
numbers as an example of how concrete problems (e.g. measuring the diagonal of the square) may
lead us to extending the use of ordinary concepts (in the example: rational numbers) (Petersen
1985, pp. 301â€"302).
200
Léon Rosenfeld to Saul Bergmann, 21 Dec 1959, RP. The letter answered the request for “an
opinion about Everett’s point of view on the presentation of the principles of quantum mechanics”
formulated by Saul M. Bergmann of the Boston Laboratory for Electronics.
124 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy

but for the elucidation of the measuring problem [. . .] the correspondence approach has
been quite successful.201

During the discussions in Copenhagen, Wheeler came to realise that, if Everett’s
“model philosophy” intended to do away with Bohr’s prescriptions about the use of
classical concepts, it had to show (without relying on Bohr’s pragmatic-
transcendental argument) that the general conditions which make experimental
activity possible are indeed fulfilled in the world described by the theory.202 In
the words of one of Everett’s epigones, the theory was demanded to explain “why
the sentient beings we know [. . .] have the particular concepts they do for
describing their world” (Vaidman 2002). According to Wheeler, one could thus
show that Everett’s theory “does not require for its formulation any reference to
classical concepts” and is “conceptually self-contained” (Wheeler 1957, pp. 151â€"
152). Along these lines, in his discussions with Petersen, Wheeler had sketched an
argument according to which, since human practices (including communication and
experimentation) are an outgrowth of (the complex physical processes underlying)
biological selection, they could be expected to be described by some process
occurring within Everett’s “model universe”: “Thinking, experimentation and
communicationâ€"or psychophysical duplicates thereofâ€"are all taken by Everett
as going on within the model universe.”.203 He wrote to Everett:
Aage Petersen [. . .] had a tendency to insist that small interaction, small e2/
hc, was essential
for a world in which one could use normal words. On the contrary, I argued that the world
came firstâ€"it could have small or large e2/ hc, but grant only complex systems, and
evolution, and you have systems that must find a way to communicate with each other to
give mutual assistance in the struggle for existence; in the struggle for survival words would
necessarily be invented to deal with a large e2/ hc. You don’t first give a list of words and
then ask what systems are compatible with them; instead, the system comes first, and the
words second.204

Wheeler’s argument was developed in his letter to Stern, in which he concluded:
The kind of physics that occurs does not adjust itself to the available words; the words
evolve in accordance with the kind of physics that goes on.205

In the assessment of 1957, we find almost the same sentence. Yet, there is an
interesting semantic shift, due to the fact that the term “words”, which in the letter
stands essentially for “concepts”, is replaced by “terminology”, and the verb
“evolve”, which in the letter is clearly related to the evolutionary argument that
immediately precedes it, becomes “adjust”. Formulated that way, the statement no
longer alludes so strongly to a physical explanation of the fact that physicists use

201
Petersen to Everett, 1957, op. cit.
202
In his paper of 1957 (pp. 151â€"152), Wheeler says: “The results of the measurements can be
spelled out in classical language. Is not such ‘language’ a prerequisite for comparing the mea-
surements made by different observing systems?”.
203
Wheeler to Stern, 1956, op. cit.
204
Wheeler, Notes, 1956, op. cit.
205
Wheeler to Stern, 1956, op. cit.
3.7 The Issues at Stake in the Debate 125


certain concepts. We can only conjecture that the objections of the Copenhagen
group played some role in this reformulation. However, there is no doubt that the
idea of providing a naturalized account of the conditions that make physics possible
was in contrast to Bohr’s doctrine. This is testified by a lapidary remark in
Wheeler’s notes: “Language second. Very contrary to Bohr, say A[age] P
[etersen].”206



3.7.5 Observers

In the 1950s, the Copenhagen group seems to have regarded the idea of developing
a “quantum theory of measurement” (which would apply to measuring devices) as a
possible source of confusion. For example, in the above mentioned report of 1957
(see Sect. 3.2.2), Rosenfeld argued:
Bohr’s considerations were never intended to give a ‘theory of measurement in quantum
theory’, and to describe them in this way is misleading, since a proper theory of measure-
ment would be the same in classical and quantal physics, the peculiar features of measure-
ments on quantal systems arising not from the measuring process as such, but from the
limitations imposed upon the use of classical concepts in quantum theory. By wrongly
shifting the emphasis on the measuring process, one obscures the true significance of the
argument and runs into difficulties, which have their source not in the actual situation, but
merely in the inadequacy of the point of view from which one attempts to describe it. This
error of method has its origin in v. Neumann’s book ‘Foundations of Quantum Mechanics’
[. . .].

In the report, Rosenfeld made some sarcastic remarks on the efforts made by a
group of physicists “to develop their own ‘theory of measurement’ in opposition to
what they believed to be the ‘orthodox’ theory of measurement, as presented by
v. Neumann.” According to Rosenfeld, these “reformers [. . .] involved themselves
in a double misunderstanding, criticizing a distorted and largely irrelevant render-
ing of Bohr’s argument by v. Neumann, and trying to replace it by a ‘theory’ of their
own, based on quite untenable assumptions.”207




206
Wheeler, Notes, 1956, op. cit. See Petersen (1985). For a thorough analysis of the philosophical
background of Bohr’s doctrine of concepts, see Chevalley (1994). See also Faye (1991),
Murdoch (1987).
207
Rosenfeld, 1957, op. cit. Rosenfeld is here alluding to David Bohm and other “young physi-
cists, who, misled partly by v. Neumann’s ideas, partly by preconceived philosophical opinions,
were unable to understand the real problems underlying the formulation of quantum theory, and
[. . .] undertook to reform quantum theory according to their own liking, and to develop, as they put
it, a ‘causal interpretation’ of this theory.” However, since the report was written in 1957, it is
likely that Everett’s work had some role in exacerbating Rosenfeld’s irritation.
126 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


In the notes he took in Copenhagen, Wheeler reports these words of Petersen:
Von N[eumann] + Wig[ner] all nonsense; their stuff beside the point; [. . .]Von N[eumann]
+ Wig[ner]â€"mess up by including [the] meas[uring] tool in [the observed] system. [. . .]
Silly to say apparatus has Ψ-function.208

Also, Petersen insisted that, when considering the “paradox outlined by Everett”,
one must keep in mind the “distinction between Bohr way & the two postulate way
to do q[uantum] mech[anics]”. It should be stressed, however, that “Bohr way” did
not rule out the possibility of treating observers quantum-mechanically.209 Nothing
prevents one from providing a model of the physical process which is supposed to
correspond to a measurement. Yet the symbols appearing in such a model acquire a
meaning only when one states the set of measurements that can be performed upon
the compound system S + O (where S and O are the physical systems which
represent the “object-system” and the “apparatus”, respectively). In other words,
any formal model presupposes an observer who can perform the experimental
operations and interpret the possible outcomes in accordance with a given concep-
tual and pragmatic framework. As Groenewold put it:
. . . the observer [. . .] not only “observes” the object system, but also describes it with some
theory and “interprets” if you like. . . .I do not see how your automatical observer included
in the described combined system also could be used for describing the activities of reading
the recorded measuring result and of assigning statistical operators to the object system on
the ground of the obtained information.210

The “transcendental” role that the observer (or the apparatus) plays within the
instrumentalist view of formalism is taken into account by Bohr’s functional
distinction between the apparatus qua physical system and the same qua measuring
instrument.211 As Petersen pointed out in his discussion with Wheeler, “QM
description of measuring tool prevents its use as a meas[uring] tool.”212 In a letter
to Everett, Petersen developed this point:
I do not understand what you mean by quantized observers. Obviously, one can treat any
interaction quantum-mechanically, including the interaction between an electron and a
photographic plate, but when utilized as an “observer” the definition of the “state” (posi-
tion) of the plate excludes considerations of quantum effects. It seems to me that as far as


208
Wheeler, Notes, 1956, op. cit.
209
See Bohr (1939). In that paper, Bohr asserted: “In the system to which the quantum mechanical
formalism is applied, it is of course possible to include any intermediate auxiliary agency
employed in the measuring process.” (Bohr 1998, p. 104). In one of the above mentioned letters,
referring to Wigner’s allusions to a special role played by consciousness in the measuring process,
Rosenfeld asserted that the opinion according to which the “recording process is not entirely
describable by quantum mechanics” was “simply wrong”. (Rosenfeld to Belinfante, 24 Jul 1972,
op. cit.).
210
Groenewold to Everett and Wheeler, 1957, op. cit. The term “super-observer”, which Wheeler
uses in his paper of 1957 (p. 152), is possibly reminiscent of some analogous remark made during
the discussions in Copenhagen.
211
See Murdoch (1987, Chap. 5).
212
Wheeler, Notes, 1956, op. cit.
3.7 The Issues at Stake in the Debate 127

your treatment of many-body systems is consistent with the proper use of the formalism it
has nothing to do with the measuring problem.213

Nonetheless, the existence of two “complementary” ways of conceiving the
apparatus raised an issue of consistency:
On one hand the combined object and measuring systems are considered from the micro-
physical quantum mechanical point of view. So far one could not even speak of measure-
ment. On the other hand the later part of the measuring chain and in particular the recording
system is regarded from the macrophysical classical point of view. A satisfactory theory of
measurement has to relate these two aspects to each other.214

A solution to this consistency problem is sketched by Rosenfeld in his letter of
1959:
The fact, emphasized by Everett, that it is actually possible to set up a wave-function for the
experimental apparatus and Hamiltonian for the interaction between system and apparatus
is perfectly trivial, but also terribly treacherous; in fact, it did mislead Everett to the
conception that it might be possible to describe apparatus + atomic object as a closed
system. This, however, is an illusion: the formalism used to achieve this must of necessity
contain parameters such as external fields, masses, etc. which are precisely the represen-
tatives of the uneliminable residues of unanalysed concepts.215

A similar remark had been made by Petersen in 1957:
There is no arbitrary distinction between the use of classical concepts and the formalism
since the large mass of the apparatus compared with that of the individual atomic object
permits that neglect of quantum effects which is demanded for the account of the exper-
imental arrangement.216

With some reason, Everett found this and similar physical explanations loosely
formulated and unconvincing. And since he thought that the conclusions reached by
Bohr on the basis of his reflection on the preconditions of physics must ultimately
be justified by some physical arguments, this led him to conclude that Bohr’s
doctrine rested in fact on a “flatly asserted dogma” (see Sect. 3.4.2). Indeed, as
we have seen, rendering Bohr’s analysis superfluous by exhibiting a self-consistent
physical model of the world (including observers) was one of the main goals of the
final version of Everett’s dissertation. This reflected a concern that Wheeler had
already expressed in 1956, when he wrote to Bohr:
But I am more concerned with your reaction to the more fundamental question, whether
there is any escape from a formalism like Everett’s when one wants to deal with a situation
where several observers are at work, and wants to include the observers themselves in the
system that is to receive mathematical analysis.217




213
Petersen to Everett, 1957, op. cit.
214
Groenewold to Everett and Wheeler, 1957, op. cit.
215
Rosenfeld to Bergmann, 1959, op. cit.
216
Petersen to Everett, 1957, op. cit.
217
John A. Wheeler to Niels Bohr, 24 Apr 1956, BSC (reel 34).
128 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


From Stern’s letter we know that the idea of providing a naturalized account of
the “emergence” of the pragmatic framework presupposed by the instrumentalist
interpretation of formalism had been cautiously put forward by Wheeler in a letter
of the same year:
In your letter you ask, “Do we need mathematical models, like those of game theory, that
will include the observers, in order to put across to the mathematically minded what is
meant by these ideas?” (I take it you mean complementarity and other ideas of quantum
theory “as distinct from the mere formalism.”)218

In the 1957 paper, this proposal was contrasted with the external observation
formulation. In such a formulation, the idea that the very possibility of linking the
symbolic structure to experience presupposes a pragmatic framework is replaced by
a postulate implying that “the ‘measuring chain’ has to be cut off” and that some
physical system has to be left out of the mathematical description whenever an
observation takes place.219 The foregoing analysis should have made clear that
Bohr’s hostility towards Wheeler’s programme was not due to his commitment to
such a postulate. Indeed, Petersen wrote to Everett: “I don’t think that you can find
anything in Bohr’s papers which conforms with what you call the external obser-
vation interpretation.”220 What made little sense for Bohr was the attempt to restore
what Pauli called the “ideal of the detached observer”,221 by postulating an “inde-
pendent reality” and assuming that physics must describe it. To him, taking this
approach was overlooking the analysis of the very conditions which make it
possible for an observer engaged in the investigation of experience to describe
atomic phenomena objectively.222

218
Stern to Wheeler, 1956, op. cit. The letter quoted by Stern is now lost.
219
The quotation is from the letter of Groenewold to Wheeler and Everett (op. cit.). The “external
observation” reading of Bohr’s approach was arguably based on his frequent remarks emphasising
“the necessity of describing entirely on classical lines all ultimate measuring instruments which
define the external conditions of the phenomenon, and therefore of keeping them outside the
system for the treatment of which the quantum of action is to be taken essentially into account.”
(Bohr 1998, p. 107).
220
Petersen to Everett, 1957, op. cit.
221
Wolfgang Pauli to Niels Bohr, 15 Feb 1955 (Pauli et al. 1994, p. 43). Pauli uses this expression
to denote Einstein’s view. Hooker (1991, p. 507) has described such a view as one in which the
objectivity of the physical description depends on its ability “to put [us] into the models as objects
in such a way as to take [us] out of the picture as subjects.”
222
Accordingly, Bohr’s idea of completeness, like that of objectivity, had little to do with the
possibility of providing an all-encompassing model of the universe, including observers. What
counted, instead, was the ability to answer all the possible questions that can be concretely framed
in an experimental context. As Hooker (1991, p. 507) puts it: “To be Bohr-objective is to achieve
simultaneously both an empirically adequate, exhaustive and symbolically unified description of
the phenomena we can produce and an accurate portrayal of the conditions under which such
phenomena are accessible to us.” Hence “Bohr-objectivity cannot consist in removing the knowing
subject from the representation of realityâ€"precisely to the contrary.” From Bohr’s point of view,
the “restrictions” that the instrumentalist interpretation of formalism allegedly imposed upon the
scope of quantum theory did not deprived us of any portion of physical knowledge. On the
contrary, they were (in a Kantian sense) constitutive of knowledge. For an analysis of the Kantian
3.8 Epilogue 129




Picture 3.2 Citations of Everett’s 1957 paper, from 1957 to 2014â€"Source of the data: Web of
Science




3.8 Epilogue

Contrary to Wheeler’s hopes, after obtaining his PhD, Everett continued to collab-
orate with the Pentagon and did not return to academic research.223 In 1962 he was
invited to present the relative-state formulation at a conference on the foundations
of quantum mechanics held at the Xavier University of Cincinnati, before an
audience including Furry, Wigner, Dirac, Aharanov, Rosen, and Podolsky
(a short account of the conference appeared in Physics Today224). But except for
this and other sporadic signs of interest, the impact of Everett’s work was




aspects of Bohr’s philosophy see for example (Honner 1987; Murdoch 1987; Faye 1991; Kaiser
1992; Chevalley 1994).
223
See Wheeler to Everett, 1956 [I], op. cit.; (Byrne 2010).
224
Werner (1964). At the conference, Everett was invited to outline his approach, which he did,
insisting particularly on the “deduction” of the standard probabilistic interpretation. In reply to
questions about the status of branches, Everett examined the case in which an observer performs a
sequence of measurements on an ensemble of identical systems. In this case, he argued, each
“element” of the resulting superposition of states “contains the observer as having recorded a
particular definite sequence of results of observation”. He concluded that any such element can be
identified as “what we think of as an experience”, and that “it is tenable to assert that all the
elements simultaneously coexist.” To the remark of Podolsky: “It looks like we would have a
non-denumerable infinity of worlds”, Everett answered: “Yes.” (Proceedings of the Conference on
the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics, Xavier University, Cincinnati, 1962; deposited at the
American Institute of Physics.)
130 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


modest.225 DeWitt has reported that when Max Jammer interviewed him for his
book on the history of quantum mechanics, in 1969, he did not know anything about
Everett. “This,” he glossed, “was an example of how totally the physics community
was ignoring him.”226
DeWitt had no sympathy for the Copenhagen interpretation, and he was struck by
Everett’s ideas when, in 1957, he read the draft of the dissertation that Wheeler sent
him.227 On that occasion he wrote a long and detailed commentary, raising objections to
which Everett replied in a way that he found convincing.228 At the end of the 1960s, in
the new climate surrounding the studies on the foundations of quantum mechanics,229
DeWitt, who “felt that Everett had been given a raw deal” resolved “to rectify this
situation”.230 DeWitt’s interest in Everett’s ideas was at least partly due to the role that
they could play in the framework of his own research programme on quantum grav-
ity.231 In 1967, he presented the “Everettâ€"Wheeler interpretation (EWI)” at the Battelle
Rencontres,232 and 3 years later he lectured on it at the International School of Physics
“Enrico Fermi”, in the framework of a course on the foundations of quantum physics
organised by Bernard d’Espagnat. In 1970 Physics Today published a paper in which
DeWitt contrasted his many-worlds version of the EWI with both the Copenhagen
interpretation and the mentalistic approach advocated by Wigner. The paper gave rise to
a lively debate, which marked the beginning of the “rediscovery” of Everett’s work.
Everett took no part in that debate. In 1971, he consented to the publication of
the long version of the thesis in a small book edited by DeWitt and his student Neill
Graham “with the proviso that [he] would not have to devote any effort to editing,
proof reading, etc.”233 In 1977, Wheeler, who was then at the University of Texas in
Austin, invited Everett for a conference. There Everett met DeWitt for the first and


225
Shikhovtsev (2003) mentions in particular an invitation by Wheeler to give a seminar at
Princeton in 1959. Everett’s paper was cited in the philosophical works of Margenau (1963),
Shimony (1963), and Petersen (1968). It was not cited in the famous papers on the measurement
problem that Wigner wrote in that period (Wigner 1961, 1963). In 1963, referring to Everett in a
letter, Wigner observed: “The state vector, as he imagines it, does not convey any information to
anyone, and I don’t see what its role is in the framework of science as we understand it.” (Eugene
Wigner to Abner Shimony, 24 May 1963, WigP (Box 94, Folder 1). The limited impact of
Everett’s work is discussed by Freire Jr. (2004) based on the statistics of the citations that it
received in the decade that followed the publication. See also Picture 3.2.
226
DeWitt interview, op. cit, p. 7.
227
“I read it and I was stunned, I was shocked.” (DeWitt interview, op. cit., p. 7). However, for a
more detailed analysis of DeWitt’s ideas, see Hartz (2013).
228
Everett to DeWitt, 1957; op. cit.; DeWitt interview, op. cit., p. 7.
229
See Freire Jr. (2004).
230
DeWitt to Shikhovtsev, [w/d], op. cit.; Bryce S. DeWitt to Olival Freire, pers. comm.,
29 Jun 2002.
231
The paper in which DeWitt presented the famous Wheelerâ€"DeWitt equation relies on Everett’s
approach in order to provide an interpretive framework for “the state functional of the actual
universe” (DeWitt 1967).
232
DeWitt (1968).
233
Hugh Everett to Bill Harvey, 20 Jun 1977, EP (Series Iâ€"8). The book was published in 1973.
3.8 Epilogue 131


last time.234 Everett’s ideas sparked the interest of some of Wheeler’s students who
attended the conference. David Deutsch, who was among them, has reported that
Everett appeared quite sympathetic to the many-worlds interpretation.235 However,
answering a letter of that year in which he was explicitly asked if he advocated such
an interpretation, Everett said laconically: “I certainly approve of the way Bryce
DeWitt presented my theory, since without his efforts it would never have been
presented at all.”236 And referring in another letter to the title of DeWitt’s and
Graham’s book, The Many-Worlds Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics, he said:
“This of course was not my title as I was pleased to have the paper published in any
form anyone chose to do it in!” And he added: “I, in effect, had washed my hands of
the whole affair in 1956.”237 Indeed, Everett made little effort to promote and
develop his ideas, and showed himself reluctant to go beyond generic comments in
private correspondence either.238
There are some hints that Wheeler’s attitude after the publication of Everett’s
dissertation was not very supportive.239 As we have seen, Wheeler’s admiration for
Bohr did not prevent him from attaching great importance to Everett’s unorthodox
ideas, and from believing that it was indeed possible to get “his great master” and
his young student to agree.240 Consequently, the reception of Everett’s work in
Copenhagen must have left him rather disappointed. In his interview, DeWitt
recalled that when the EWI was brought to the knowledge of the wider public by
his own paper in Physics Today, Wheeler “promptly disowned Everett.” DeWitt
added that he asked Wheeler why he did not “accept Everett more”, but never got a
satisfactory answer from him.241 The circumstance pointed out by DeWitt is
confirmed by the incipit of a letter which Everett received in 1977 from Jean-
Marc Lévy-Leblond:




234
DeWitt interview, op. cit., p. 15.
235
Shikhovtsev (2003).
236
Everett to Harvey, 1977, op. cit.
237
Everett to Lévy-Leblond, 1977, op. cit.
238
DeWitt asserted many years later: “Everett always took the attitudeâ€"and I got this from
Charlie Misner as wellâ€"that he was not really strongly committed to this.” (DeWitt interview,
op. cit., p. 15.) DeWitt confirmed this opinion in a recent letter, arguing that Everett “was
lackadaisical and couldn’t care less if other physicists would accept his views.” (DeWitt to
Shikhovtsev, [w/d], op. cit.) It is likely that the reception of his ideas in Copenhagen diminished
Everett’s original enthusiasm. In any case, even in his last years, Everett maintained that the
relative state formulation was the “simplest” and the “only completely coherent approach” “to
come to grips with the paradoxes of the measurement process”, and that the alternative proposals
were “highly tortured and unnatural” and “by far more artificial and unsatisfactory.” Everett to
Jammer, 1973, op. cit.; Everett to Raub, 1980, op. cit.
239
For instance, in a paper about cosmology of 1962, in which he mentioned the “so-called
‘universal wave function’”, Wheeler (1962) cited his own assessment, but not Everett’s paper.
240
Everett interview, op. cit., p. 8.
241
DeWitt interview, op. cit., p. 7; DeWitt to Shikovtsev, [w/d], op. cit.
132 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy

Dear Dr. Everett,
I obtained your address through the kindness of Prof. Wheeler,who suggested that I
directly ask your opinion on what I believe to be a crucial question concerning the ‘Everett
& no-longer-Wheeler’ (if I understood correctly!) interpretation of Qu. Mech.242

Everett himself alludes to Wheeler’s ambiguity in a letter of 1980:
Dr. Wheeler’s position on these matters has never been completely clear to me (perhaps not
to John either). He is, of course, heavily influenced by Bohr’s position (he was a student of
Bohr) which essentially regards the entire formalism as merely a calculating device, and
does not worry any further about “reality”. It is equally clear that, at least sometimes, he
wonders very much about that mysterious process, “the collapse of the wave function”. The
last time we discussed such subjects at a meeting in Austin several years ago he was even
wondering if somehow human consciousness was a distinguished process and played some
sort of critical role in the laws of physics.243

As is apparent from this passage, Wheeler’s attitude towards Everett’s work was
not as clear-cut as described by DeWitt. Everett reported an anecdote according to
which, during the meeting in Austin, Wheeler told him that he mostly believed his
interpretation, but reserved Tuesdays once a month to disbelieve it.244 In 1977,
being requested to give an opinion on a paper dealing with the EWI, Wheeler
answered that he “still [felt] it[was] one of the most important contributions made to
quantum mechanics in recent decades”. He added nonetheless that he had “diffi-
culty subscribing to it today.” As he had done with Lévy-Leblond, he asked the
author to “change the reference from Everettâ€"Wheeler to Everett interpretation”.245
(A copy of the letter was forwarded to Everett, who scrawled on the term “diffi-
culty”: “Only on Tuesday”!) To be sure, Wheeler continued to pay attention to
Everett’s ideas, and never gave up the hope to work with him again.246 The papers
he published in the 1970s and 1980s reflect his effort to reach a satisfactory
understanding and an appropriate generalization of the Copenhagen view. From




242
Jean-Marc Lévy-Leblond to Hugh Everett, 17 Aug 197[7], EP. In a lecture reported in the
proceedings of the School “Enrico Fermi” of 1977, Wheeler says: “Imaginative Everett’s thesis is,
and instructive, we agree. We once subscribed to it. In retrospect, however, it looks like the wrong
track” (Wheeler 1979a, p. 396).
243
Everett to Raub, 1980, op. cit. Wheeler’s temporary interest for Wigner-like approaches
coincided with his efforts to clarify the question as to whether Bohr’s views did involve any
reference to consciousness [see Wheeler’s letters to Aage Bohr in Freire Jr. (2007) and Chapter 4,
this book. See also Wheeler and Zurek (1983, p. 207) and Wheeler (1981)].
244
Everett interview, op. cit., p. 8.
245
John A. Wheeler to Paul Benioff, 7 Jul 1977; and 7 Sep 1977, EP.
246
According to DeWitt, “one of the very first things he did when he arrived [at the University of
Texas] was actually to invite and pay for Everett to come.” (DeWitt interview, op. cit., p. 15.)
Furthermore, according to Shikhovtsev (2003), Wheeler planned to bring Everett back to theoret-
ical physics in the framework of a project which aimed to create a working group devoted to the
quantum theory of measurement at the Institute for Theoretical Physics in Santa Barbara, but the
whole project was eventually abandoned.
3.8 Epilogue 133


such papers, it is apparent that the time elapsed since the discussions of 1956 had
not erased his doubts, and that Everett’s work had not completely lost its appeal for
him.247


Concluding Remarks
The epilogue of the Everett affair seems to support the idea that as late as in
the 1950s the Copenhagen school still exerted a decisive influence, which
could go as far as undermining the career of a brilliant physicist in the
US. The interpretive model of the “dictatorial imposition” (Jammer 1974,
p. 250) is nonetheless too crude to account for all the aspects of the Everett
episode. Indeed, our analysis suggests that the mechanisms which ensured the
supremacy of the Copenhagen view (and led to its decline a few years after
Bohr’s death, in the new climate of which Everett was a forerunner) were
actually subtler than they are habitually depicted to be (Howard 2004).
Urged by Wheeler (who was a dedicated Bohrian, but did not belong to the
inner circle of Bohr’s collaborators), the Copenhagen scientists did not refuse
to debate the non-conventional proposal of Wheeler’s pupil. Admittedly, the
objections raised in Copenhagen were very general, and they resulted only
partly from a rigorous appraisal of the merits and shortcomings of Everett’s
work. But this reflected the fact that what bothered Bohr was not so much the
technical aspects of Everett’s project as the very concept of physical knowl-
edge which underlay it. The existence of such a chasm in the very premises of
Everett’s and Bohr’s interpretations of the quantum formalism was manifestly
not apparent to Wheeler. He was one of the very few “missionaries of the
Copenhagen Spirit” (Heilbron 2001) in America, but his understanding of
some aspects of the Bohrian gospel was neither firm nor unequivocal. This
explains at once his doubts on the Copenhagen approach to measurement, and
his belief that these doubts could be solved without abandoning the frame-
work of Bohr’s view. The discussions that Wheeler had with the Copenhagen
group were pretty frank, and, notwithstanding his caution, he did not hesitate
to put forward arguments which could sound heretical. When it became clear
that they were given no importance whatsoever in Copenhagen, he curbed his

(continued)


247
Wheeler’s idea of a “participatory universe” (Wheeler and Zurek 1983, pp. 182â€"183) can be
said to have inspired a number of attempts to “go beyond” Bohr’s view of measurement along the
lines of the relative state formulation [see e.g. Omnès (1992), Rovelli (1996), Zurek (1998)]. In
some of these approaches, the explicit inclusion of the observer in the quantum description of the
universe is supposed to enable one to dismiss the postulate of projection; see Barrett (1999).
Furthermore, in order to demonstrate the “emergence of a classical world from a quantum
universe” (a definitely Everettian idea), the advocates of such approaches have sometimes put
forward evolutionary arguments reminiscent of those sketched by Wheeler in the discussion with
the Copenhagen group; see Vaidman (2002) for a list of references, and Bitbol (1996b, pp. 414â€"
418) for a discussion.
134 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy



enthusiasm for Everett’s ideas. But his veneration for Bohr could not remove
the tension between his firm belief that Bohr’s approach provided indeed a
deep insight into quantum physics and the feeling that it missed something
crucial, and had to be amended. That this situation was a source of inner
trouble for him is suggested by his wavering attitude in the 1970s, as well by
his reluctance to mention the events of 1956 in later recollections.
We can contrast this attitude with that of Everett, who never bothered too
much about the relationship between his ideas and the Copenhagen view.
Everett was an exponent of the new American generation growing up in an
intellectual and scientific context which had little to do with that of the
German-speaking Europe between the two wars: his attitude prefigures that
of many physicists and philosophers of the 1960s, for whom Bohr came to
represent a positivism out of date. Everett pointed out what he considered to
be the limitations of Bohr’s approach and straightforwardly ascribed them to
Bohr’s dogmatic and conservative stance. There was no effort on his part to
reach a deeper understanding of the philosophical background of comple-
mentarity, and no hesitation to seek a formulation of quantum mechanics in
which Bohr’s reflections on the nature of scientific knowledge could be
simply bypassed.


References

Assmus, A.: The Americanization of molecular physics. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci. 23, 1â€"34
(1992)
Bacciagaluppi, G., Valentini, A.: Quantum Theory at the Crossroads: Reconsidering the 1927
Solvay Conference. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (2009)
Barrett, J.A.: The Quantum Mechanics of Minds and Worlds. Oxford University Press, Oxford
(1999)
Becker, L.: That von Neumann did not believe in a physical collapse. Br. J. Philos. Sci. 55(1), 121â€"
135 (2004)
Bell, J.S.: Speakable and Unspeakable in Quantum Mechanics: Collected Papers on Quantum
Philosophy. With an Introduction by Alain Aspect. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge
(2004)
Beller, M.: Quantum Dialogueâ€"The Making of a Revolution. The University of Chicago Press,
Chicago (1999a)
Beller, M.: Jocular Commemorations the Copenhagen Spirit. Osiris 14, 252â€"273 (1999b)
Ben-Dov, Y.: Everetts Theory and the many-worlds interpretation. Am. J. Phys. 58(9), 829â€"832
(1990)
Bitbol, M.: Schrödinger’s Philosophy of Quantum Mechanics. Kluwer Academic Publishers,
Dordrecht (1996a)
Bitbol, M.: Mécanique Quantique - Une Introduction Philosophique. Flammarion, Paris (1996b)
Bitbol, M.: L’ Aveuglante Proximité Du Réelâ€"Anti-Réalisme Et Quasi-Réalisme En Physique.
Flammarion, Paris (1998)
Bitbol, M.: Physique et Philosophie de l’Esprit. Flammarion, Paris (2000)
Bohm, D.: Quantum Theory. Prentice-Hall, New York (1951)
References 135

Bohm, D.: A suggested interpretation of the quantum theory in terms of hidden variablesâ€"I &
II. Phys. Rev. 85(2), 166â€"179 (1952). 180â€"193
Bohr, N.: The causality problem in atomic physics. The New Theories of Physics, pp. 11â€"45.
International Institute of Intellectual Cooperation, Paris (1939) (Reprintedin: Bohr, N. (ed.)
Causality and complementarity: supplementary papers. In: Faye, J., Folse, H. (eds.) The
Philosophical Writings of Niels Bohr, vol. 14, pp. 94â€"121. Ox Bow Press, Wooldbridge, CT
(1998). Page numbers refer to the reprint.)
Bohr, N.: On the notions of causality and complementarity. Dialectica 2, 312â€"319 (1948)
Bohr, N.: Discussion with Einstein on epistemological problems in atomic physics. In: Schilpp,
P.A. (ed.) Albert Einsteinâ€"Philosopherâ€"Scientist, pp. 199â€"242. The Library of the Living
Philosophers, Evanston (1949)
Bohr, N.: Essays, 1958-1962, on Atomic Physics and Human Knowledge. Interscience Publishers,
New York (1963)
Bohr, N.: Causality and Complementarity: Supplementary Papers. In: Bohr, N., Faye, J., Folse,
H.J. (eds.) The Philosophical Writings of Niels Bohr. Ox Bow Press, Woodbridge, CT (1998)
Bohr, N., French, A.P., Kennedy, P.J.: Niels Bohr: A Centenary Volume. Harvard University
Press, Cambridge, MA (1985)
Born, M.: The interpretation of quantum mechanics. Br. J. Philos. Sci. IV(14), 95â€"106 (1953)
Brush, S.G.: The chimerical cat: philosophy of quantum mechanics in historical perspective. Soc.
Stud. Sci. 10(4), 393â€"447 (1980)
Butterfield, J.N.: Some worlds of quantum theory. In: Russell, R., Polkinghorne, J. (eds.) Quantum
Mechanics. Scientific Perspectives on Divine Action, vol. 5, pp. 111â€"140. Vatican Observatory
Publications, Vatican City (2002)
Byrne, P.: The many worlds of Hugh Everett. Sci. Am. 297(6), 98â€"105 (2007)
Byrne, P.: The Many Worlds of Hugh Everett III: Multiple Universes, Mutual Assured Destruc-
tion, and the Meltdown of a Nuclear Family. Oxford University Press, New York (2010)
Camilleri, K.: Constructing the myth of the Copenhagen interpretation. Perspect. Sci. 17(1), 26â€"57
(2009)
Cartwright, N.: Philosophical problems of quantum theory: the response of American physicists.
In: Krüger, L., Gigerenzer, G., Morgan, M.S. (eds.) The Probabilistic Revolution, vol. 2, pp.
407â€"435. MIT Press, Cambridge, MA (1987)
Cassinello, A.: La interpretación de los muchos universos de la mecánica cuántica. Apuntes
históricos. Arbor - Ciencia Pensamiento y Cultura 148(584), 47â€"68 (1994)
Chevalley, C.: Niels Bohr and contemporary philosophy. In: Faye, J., Folse, H.J. (eds.) Boston
Studies in the Philosophy of Science, pp. 33â€"55. Kluwer Academic, Dordrecht (1994)
Chevalley, C.: Mythe et philosophie: la construction de “Niels Bohr” dans la doxographie. Physis,
Rivista Internazionale di Storia della Scienza 34(3), 569â€"603 (1997)
Chevalley, C.: Why do we find Bohr obscure? In: Greenberger, D., Reiter, W.L., Zeilinger,
A. (eds.) Epistemological and Experimental Perspectives on Quantum Mechanics, pp. 59â€"
73. Springer, Dordrecht (1999)
Daneri, A., Loinger, A., Prosperi, G.M: Quantum theory of measurement and ergodicity condi-
tions. Nucl. Phys. 33, 297â€"319 (1962) (Reprinted in: Wheeler, J.A., Zurek, W.H. (eds.)
Quantum Theory and Measurement, pp. 657â€"679. Princeton University Press, Princeton (1983)
DeWitt, B.S.: Quantum theory of gravity. I. Canonical theory. Phys. Rev. 160(5), 1113â€"1148
(1967)
DeWitt, B.: The Everettâ€"Wheeler interpretation of quantum mechanics. In: DeWitt, C.M.,
Wheeler, J.A. (eds.) Battelle Rencontres 1967. Lectures in Mathematics and Physics,
pp. 318â€"332. W.A. Benjamin, New York (1968)
DeWitt, B.S.: Quantum mechanics and reality. Phys. Today 23(9), 155â€"165 (1970)
DeWitt, B.S., Everett, H., Graham, N.: The Many-Worlds Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics:
A Fundamental Exposition. Princeton University Press, Princeton, NJ (1973)
DeWitt-Morette, C., Rickles, D. (eds.): The Role of Gravitation in Physics: Report from the 1957
Chapel Hill Conference. Edition Open Access, Berlin (2011)
136 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


Dicke, R.H., Wittke, J.P.: Introduction to Quantum Mechanics. Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA
(1960)
Dirac, P.A.M.: The Principles of Quantum Mechanics. Clarendon Press, Oxford (1958)
Everett, H.: On the foundations of quantum mechanics. PhD dissertation, Princeton University
(1957a)
Everett, H.: Relative state formulation of quantum mechanics. Rev. Mod. Phys. 29(3), 454â€"462
(1957b) [Reprinted in: Wheeler, J.A., Zurek, W.H. (eds.), Quantum Theory and Measurement
(pp. 315â€"323). Princeton University Press, Princeton (1983). Page numbers refer to the reprint]
Everett, H.: The theory of the universal wave function. In: DeWitt, B.S., Graham, N. (eds.) The
Many-Worlds Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics, pp. 3â€"140. Princeton University Press,
Princeton, NJ (1973)
Everett, H.: Objective vs subjective probability. In: Everett, H., Barrett, J.A., Byrne, P. (eds.) The
Everett Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics: Collected Works 1955-1980 with Commentary,
pp. 57â€"60. Princeton University Press, Princeton (2012[1955a])
Everett, H.: Quantitative measure of correlation. In: Everett, H., Barrett, J.A., Byrne, P. (eds.) The
Everett Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics: Collected Works 1955-1980 with Commentary,
pp. 61â€"63. Princeton University Press, Princeton (2012[1955b])
Everett, H. (2012 [1955c]). Probability in Wave Mechanics. In: Everett, H., Barrett, J.A., Byrne,
P. (eds.) The Everett Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics: Collected Works 1955-1980 with
Commentary, pp. 64â€"70. Princeton University Press, Princeton
Everett, H., Barrett, J.A., Byrne, P.: The Everett Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics: Collected
Works 1955-1980 with Commentary. Princeton University Press, Princeton (2012)
Faye, J.: Niels Bohr: His Heritage and Legacy: An Anti-Realist View of Quantum Mechanics.
Kluwer Academic, Dordrecht (1991)
Faye, J.: Copenhagen interpretation of quantum mechanics. In: Zalta, E.N. (ed.) The Stanford
Encyclopedia of Philosophy (Summer 2002 edition). Stanford (2002), Available online: http://
plato.stanford.edu/archives/sum2002/entries/qm-copenhagen/
Feyerabend, P.K.: Problems of microphysics. In: Colodny, R.G. (ed.) Frontiers of Science and
Philosophy, pp. 189â€"283. George Allen, London (1964)
Forman, P.: “Weimar Culture, Causality, and Quantum Theory, 1918-1927: Adaptation by
German Physicists and Mathematicians to a Hostile Intellectual Environment (1971)
[Reprinted in Forman, P. et al. (eds.) Weimar Culture and Quantum Mechanics: Selected
Papers by Paul Forman and Contemporary Perspectives on the Forman Thesis, 2011].” Hist.
Stud. Phys. Sci. 3, 1â€"115
Forstner, C.: The early history of David Bohm’s quantum mechanics through the perspective of
Ludwik Fleck’s thought-collectives. Minerva 46(2), 215â€"229 (2008)
Freire Jr., O.: The historical roots of “foundations of quantum mechanics” as a field of research
(1950â€"1970). Found. Phys. 34(11), 1741â€"1760 (2004)
Freire Jr., O.: Science and exile: David Bohm, the cold war, and a new interpretation of quantum
mechanics. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci. 36(1), 1â€"34 (2005)
Freire Jr., O.: Orthodoxy and heterodoxy in the research on the foundations of quantum physics:
E.P. Wigner’s case. In: Santos, B.d.S. (ed.) Cognitive Justice in a Global World: Prudent
Knowledges for a Decent Life, pp. 203â€"224. Lexington Books, Lanham, MD (2007)
Freire Jr., O.: “On the connections between the dialectical materialism and the controversy on the
quanta.” Jahrbuch Für Europäihce Wissenschaftskulturâ€"Yearbook of the European Culture of
Science 6, 195â€"210 (2011)
Freire Jr, O.: “Book review: Hugh Everett III. The Everett interpretation of quantum mechanicsâ€"
collected works 1955â€"1980 with commentary, Barrett, J.A., Byrne, P. (eds.)” Stud. Hist.
Philos. Mod. Phys. 46, 263â€"264 (2014)
Freitas, F.: Os estados relativos de Hugh Everett III: Uma analise historica e conceitual. Master
dissertation, Universidade Federal da Bahia (2007)
George, A.: Louis de Broglie, physicien et penseur. Albin Michel, Paris (1953)
References 137

Graham, L.R.: The Soviet reaction to Bohr’s quantum mechanics. In: Feshbach, H., Matsui, T.,
Oleson, A. (eds.) Niels Bohr and the World: Proceedings of the Niels Bohr Centennial
Symposium, pp. 305â€"317. Harwood Academic, New York (1988)
Hartz, T.: As heterodoxias qu^anticas e o olhar do historiador: uma história dos usos dos
argumentos de Niels Bohr acerca da medição de campos qu^anticos (1930â€"1970). PhD disser-
tation, Universidade Federal da Bahia and Universidade Estadual de Feira de Santana (2013)
Heilbron, J.: The earliest missionaries of the Copenhagen spirit. In: Galison, P., Gordin, M.,
Kaiser, D. (eds.) Science and Societyâ€"The History of Modern Physical Science in the
Twentieth Century, vol. 4, pp. 295â€"330. Routledge, New York (2001)
Heisenberg, W.: The development of the interpretation of the quantum theory. In: Pauli, W. (ed.)
Niels Bohr and the Development of Physics; Essays Dedicated to Niels Bohr on the Occasion
of his Seventieth Birthday, pp. 12â€"29. McGraw-Hill, New York (1955)
Home, D., Whitaker, M.A.B.: Ensemble interpretations of quantum-mechanicsâ€"a modern per-
spective. Phys. Rep. Rev. Sect. Phys. Lett. 210(4), 223â€"317 (1992)
Honner, J.: The Description of Nature: Niels Bohr and the Philosophy of Quantum Physics. Oxford
University Press, Oxford (1987)
Hooker, C.A.: Projection, physical intelligibility, objectivity and completenessâ€"the divergent
ideals of Bohr and Einstein. Br. J. Philos. Sci. 42(4), 491â€"511 (1991)
Howard, D.: Einstein on locality and separability. Stud. Hist. Phil. Sci. 16(3), 171â€"201 (1985)
Howard, D.: Who invented the “Copenhagen interpretation”? A study in mythology. Philos. Sci.
71, 669â€"682 (2004)
Institut International de Physique Solvay: Electrons et photonsâ€"Rapports et discussions du
Cinquième Conseil de Physique tenu à Bruxelles du 24 au 29 octobre 1927. Gauthier-Villars,
Paris (1928) [English translation in Bacciagaluppi and Valentini 2009]
Jacobsen, A.: Léon Rosenfeld’s Marxist defense of complementarity. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci.
37(Supplement), 3â€"34 (2007)
Jammer, M.: The Conceptual Development of Quantum Mechanics. McGraw-Hill, New York
(1966)
Jammer, M.: The Philosophy of Quantum Mechanicsâ€"The Interpretations of Quantum Mechanics
in Historical Perspective. Wiley, New York (1974)
Kaiser, D.: More roots of complementarityâ€"kantian aspects and influences. Stud. Hist. Phil. Sci.
23(2), 213â€"239 (1992)
Kaiser, D.: Cold War requisitions, scientific manpower, and the production of American physicists
after World War II. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci. 33, 131â€"159 (2002)
Kent, A.: Against many-world interpretation. Int. J. Mod. Phys. A5, 1745â€"1762 (1990). An
updated version is available online: http://arxiv.org/abs/gr-qc/9703089S
Körner, S.: Observation and Interpretationâ€"A Symposium of Philosophers and Physicists.
Butterworths, London (1957)
Kragh, H.: Quantum Generations: A History of Physics in the Twentieth Century. Princeton
University Press, Princeton, NJ (1999)
Kuhn, T.S.: The Structure of Scientific Revolutions. The University of Chicago Press, Chicago
(1970)
Lakatos, I., Feyerabend, P., Motterlini, M.: For and Against Method: Including Lakatos’s Lectures
on Scientific Method and the Lakatos-Feyerabend Correspondence. University of Chicago
Press, Chicago (1999)
Lehner, C. (1997). Quantum Mechanics and Reality: An Interpretation of Everett’s Theory. PhD
dissertation, Stanford University
London, F., Bauer, E.: La théorie de l’observation en mécanique quantique, pp. 217â€"259.
Hermann, Paris (1939) [English translation in Wheeler & Zurek 1983]
Margenau, H.: Advantages and disadvantages of various interpretations of the quantum theory.
Phys. Today 7(10), 6â€"13 (1954)
Margenau, H.: Philosophical problems concerning the meaning of measurement in physics. Philos.
Sci. 25(1), 23â€"33 (1958)
138 3 The Origin of the Everettian Heresy


Margenau, H.: Measurement and quantum statesâ€"I & II. Philos. Sci. 30, 1â€"16 (1963). 138â€"157
Mehra, J., Rechenberg, H.: The Historical Development of Quantum Theory, vol. 6(Part 2).
Springer, New York (2001)
Murdoch, D.: Niels Bohr’s Philosophy of Physics. Cambridge Cambridgeshire; Cambridge Uni-
versity Press, New York (1987)
Olwell, R.: Physical isolation and marginalization in physicsâ€"David Bohm’s cold war exile. ISIS
90, 738â€"756 (1999)
Omnès, R.: Consistent interpretations of quantum-mechanics. Rev. Mod. Phys. 64(2), 339â€"382
(1992)
Osnaghi, S., Freitas, F., Freire Jr., O.: The origin of the Everettian heresy. Stud. Hist. Philos. Mod.
Phys. 40(2), 97â€"123 (2009)
Paty, M.: The nature of Einsteins objections to the copenhagen interpretation of quantum-
mechanics. Found. Phys. 25(1), 183â€"204 (1995)
Pauli, W.: Niels Bohr and the Development of Physics; Essays Dedicated to Niels Bohr on the
Occasion of His Seventieth Birthday. McGraw-Hill, New York (1955)
Pauli, W., Enz, C.P., Meyenn, K.V.: Writings on Physics and Philosophy. Springer, Berlin (1994)
Petersen, A.: Quantum Physics and the Philosophical Tradition. Belfer Graduate School of
Science, Yeshiva University, New York (1968)
Petersen, A.: The philosophy of Niels Bohr. In: French, A.P., Kennedy, P.J. (eds.) Niels Bohr, A
Centenary Volume, pp. 299â€"310. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, MA (1985)
Rédei, M., Stöltzner, M.: John von Neumann and the Foundations of Quantum Physics. Kluwer
Academic, Dordrecht (2001)
Rosenfeld, L.: Measuring process in quantum mechanics. Suppl. Prog. Theor. Phys. 222â€"231
(1965)
Rovelli, C.: Relational quantum mechanics. Int. J. Theor. Phys. 35(8), 1637â€"1678 (1996)
Rozental, S.: Niels Bohr; His Life and Work as Seen by His Friends and Colleagues. Wiley,
Amsterdam (1967)
Scheibe, E.: The Logical Analysis of Quantum Mechanics. Pergamon, Oxford (1973)
Schilpp, P.A., Einstein, A.: Albert Einstein, Philosopher-Scientist. Library of Living Philosophers,
Evanston, IL (1949)
Schrödinger, E.: Are there quantum jumps? I and II. Br. J. Philos. Sci. 3, 109â€"123 (1952). 233â€"242
Schrödinger, E.: The meaning of wave mechanics. In: George, A. (ed.) Louis de Broglieâ€"
Physicien et Penseur, pp. 16â€"32. Albin Michel, Paris (1953)
Schrödinger, E.: Might perhaps energy be a merely statistical concept. Nuovo Cimento 9(1), 162â€"
170 (1958)
Schweber, S.S.: The empiricist temper regnantâ€"theoretical physics in the United-States 1920-
1950. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci. 17, 55â€"98 (1986)
Shimony, A.: Role of observer in quantum theory. Am. J. Phys. 31(10), 755â€"773 (1963)
Sopka, K.R.: Quantum Physics in America, 1920-1935. Arno Press, New York (1980)
Stapp, H.P.: Copenhagen interpretation. Am. J. Phys. 40(8), 1098â€"1116 (1972)
Stapp, H.P.: Quantum theory and the place of mind in nature. In: Faye, J., Folse, H. (eds.) Niels
Bohr and contemporary philosophy. Boston studies in the philosophy of science, pp. 245â€"252.
Kluwer, Dordrecht (1994)
Stöltzner, M.: What John von Neumann thought of the Bohm interpretation. In: Greenberger, D.,
Reiter, W.L., Zeilinger, A. (eds.) Epistemological and Experimental Perspectives on Quantum
Mechanics, pp. 257â€"262. Springer, Dordrecht (1999)
Teller, P.: The projection postulate and Bohr’s interpretation of quantum mechanics. In: Asquith,
P., Giere, R. (eds.) PSA 1980: Proceedings o fthe 1980 Biennial Meeting of the Philosophy of
Science Association, vol. 2, pp. 201â€"223. Michigan State University, East Lansing (1981)
Vaidman, L.: The many-worlds interpretation of quantum mechanics. In: Zalta, E.N. (ed.) The
Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy. Stanford (2002). Available online: http://plato.stanford.
edu/archives/sum2002/entries/qm-manyworlds
References 139

Von Neumann, J.: Mathematical Foundations of Quantum Mechanics. Princeton University Press,
Princeton, NJ (1955)
Werner, F.G.: The foundations of quantum mechanics. Phys. Today 17(1), 53 (1964)
Wheeler, J.A.: A septet of sibylsâ€"aids in the search for truth. Am. Sci. 44(4), 360â€"377 (1956)
Wheeler, J.A.: Assessment of Everett’s relative state formulation of quantum theory. Rev. Mod.
Phys. 29(3), 463â€"465 (1957). Reprinted in: Wheeler, J.A., Zurek, W.H. (eds.) Quantum theory
and measurement, pp. 324â€"325 Princeton University Press, Princeton (1983). Page numbers
refer to the reprint
Wheeler, J.A.: The Universe in the light of general relativity. Monist 47, 40â€"76 (1962)
Wheeler, J.A.: Frontiers of time. In: Toraldo di Francia, G. (ed.) Problems in the Foundations of
Physics. Proceedings of the International School of Physics E. Fermi, pp. 395â€"497. North
Holland, Dordrecht (1979a). Partially reprinted in: Wheeler, J.A., Zurek, W.H. (eds.) Quantum
theory and measurement, pp. 182â€"213. Princeton University Press, Princeton (1983)
Wheeler, J.A.: Mercer street and other memories. In: Tauber, G.E. (ed.) Albert Einstein’s Theory
Of General Relativity, pp. 182â€"184. Crown, New York (1979b)
Wheeler, J.A.: Not consciousness but the distinction between the probe and the probed as central to
the elemental quantum act of observation. In: Jahn, R.G. (ed.) The Role of Consciousness in the
Physical World, pp. 87â€"111. Westview, Boulder (1981)
Wheeler, J.A.: Physics in Copenhagen in 1934 and 1935. In: French, A.P., Kennedy, P.J. (eds.)
Niels Bohr: A Centenary Volume, pp. 221â€"226. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, MA
(1985)
Wheeler, J.A., Ford, K.W.: Geons, Black Holes, and Quantum Foam: A Life in Physics. Norton,
New York (1998)
Wheeler, J.A., Zurek, W.H.: Quantum Theory and Measurement. Princeton University Press,
Princeton, NJ (1983)
Wigner, E.: Remarks on the mind-body question. In: Good, I.J. (ed.) The Scientist Speculates: An
Anthology of Partly-Baked Ideas, pp. 284â€"302. Heinemann, London (1961). Reprinted in
Wheeler, J.A., Zurek, W.H. (eds.) Quantum Theory and Measurement, pp. 168â€"181. Princeton
University Press, Princeton (1983)
Wigner, E.P.: Problem of measurement. Am. J. Phys. 31(1), 6â€"15 (1963)
Zurek, W.H.: Decoherence, einselection and the existential interpretation (the rough guide).
Philos. Trans. R. Soc. A Math. Phys. Eng. Sci. 356(1743), 1793â€"1821 (1998)
Chapter 4
The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy,
Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case



Abstract From the 1950s awareness of the existence of a problem with measure-
ment in quantum theory grew among physicists. Framed in von Neumann’s terms, it
concerns the two kinds of evolution of the quantum states. In the early 1960s the
debate on measurement was further stirred up by Eugene Wigner and by Léon
Rosenfeld. Wigner held that the mind may be responsible for measurement. He also
supported a number of younger physicists who began to tackle the measurement
problem, such as Abner Shimony and Michael Yanase. Rosenfeld presented the
results from the Italian physicists Adriana Daneri, Angelo Loinger, and Giovanni
Prosperi as the crowning of Bohr’s complementarity. The Italians had suggested
that measurements should be understood as thermodynamic amplifications in the
measurement device after it interacts with the quantum system, in line with a hint
from Bohr that measurement implies irreversibility. Rosenfeld and Wigner
embraced the conflict with a number of papers crossing the Atlantic criticizing
each other. In addition to the quantum controversy their background fuelled the
controversy, with Wigner supporting the US in the atomic race and Rosenfeld a
Marxist. As a result of the battle, the Copenhagen monocracy was broken. Physi-
cists began to speak of the Copenhagen school and the Princeton school as two
variants of orthodoxy in quantum mechanics.




4.1 Introduction1

Dealing with Eugene Wigner’s ideas on the measurement procedure in quantum
physics and unearthing the controversy that pitted him against supporters of the
interpretation of complementarity, I will show how Wigner and his followers
contributed to the defeat of a seemingly unshakeable consensus. Indeed, as a result
of the quarrel between Wigner and Léon Rosenfeld, with a number of papers


1
This Chapter is an enlarged version of my “Orthodoxy and Heterodoxy in the Research
on the Foundations of Quantum Physics: E.P. Wigner’s Case”, published in Boaventura de
Sousa Santos (Org.). Cognitive Justice in a Global World: Prudent Knowledges for a Decent
Life. Lanham, MD, USA: Lexington Books, p. 203â€"224, 2007.

© Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2015 141
O. Freire Junior, The Quantum Dissidents, DOI 10.1007/978-3-662-44662-1_4
142 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


crossing the Atlantic criticizing each other, the Copenhagen monocracy was bro-
ken. Physicists began to speak of the Copenhagen school and the Princeton school
as two variants of orthodoxy in quantum mechanics. In addition to the quantum
controversy their ideological background fuelled the controversy, with Wigner
supporting the US in the atomic race and Rosenfeld a Marxist. Ironically, although
Wigner intended to defend what seemed to him to be orthodoxy, he himself
ultimately became heterodox.
Wigner’s conjectures on the role of consciousness in physical phenomena were
not fruitful and were discarded, and today they form part of the history of physics
rather than physics proper. However, his ideas and actions left an indelible mark on
the physics of the second half of the twentieth century. The current wide use of the
term quantum measurement problem, which indicates the existence of such a
problem, is largely due to Wigner, who was one of the first to use it. This is our
main interest insofar as it is related to the vicissitudes suffered by the foundations of
quantum physics until it became a regular field of research in physics. Wigner
formulated his ideas in opposition to the “Copenhagen monocracy,”â€"paraphrasing
the historian Max Jammerâ€"which still had a stronghold on the interpretation of
quantum physics in the 1960s. He stressed the unsolved status of the measurement
problem, effectively defended his ideas, and supported those who were willing to
investigate the foundations of quantum physics.2 He thus contributed to the creation
of a new field of research in physics, that of the foundations of quantum physics,
which attributed a higher scientific status to the old controversy on the interpreta-
tions and foundations of this theory. This new field has had to deal with important
theoretical, experimental, and philosophical issues with significant repercussions in
recent decades.
In addition to being of interest to the history of the quantum controversy,
Wigner’s case is of general interest for the history of physics. The way in which
he dealt with controversies in science and with young scientists involved in such
controversies has a reach which goes far beyond the case of the quanta. Further-
more, the current varying opinions about his contribution to the measurement
problem in quantum physics may lead us to reflect about anachronism in history
of science and the obstacles it puts in the way of a better public image of science.



4.2 Measurement Problem Before Wigner

What would be later called the “quantum measurement problem” was present,
albeit implicit, from the inception of quantum theory in around 1927. The problem
may be summarized as follows: The evolution of the state describing a quantum


2
Jammer’s (1974, p. 250) words were: “In the early 1950s the almost unchallenged monocracy of
the Copenhagen school in the philosophy of quantum mechanics began to be disputed in the
West.”
4.2 Measurement Problem Before Wigner 143


system, let us say, the electron’s spin projection in a given direction, is ruled by
Schrödinger’s equation. This means that the two possible states, spin “up” and spin
“down,” are expressed in the quantum states and are preserved while time evolves.
If one measures this electron spin, one will discover it to be either up or down. How
did it happen that a state which contains a superposition of two possibilities became
just one? Physicists first christened this evolution the “reduction of the wave-
packet,” an expression which is reminiscent of the wave formulation of quantum
theory. A more sophisticated analysis of this process was suggested by Niels Bohr,
assuming that measurements require macroscopic devices and appealing to the
complementarity view suggested by himself. Bohr suggested that such devices
had to be treated within the framework established by classical physics, not because
one could not treat them from a quantum point of view, but because they had to be
treated classically so that measurement results could be compared to those of other
researchers. As communication is a requirement to attain objectivity, and commu-
nication requires ordinary language refined by concepts from classical physics (e.g.,
concepts indicated by words such as “work,” “force,” etc.), the classical treatment
of measurement devices is a condition for preserving objectivity in scientific
research.3
The other major solution to the measurement problem was suggested by John
von Neumann as part of his work to lay rigorous mathematical foundations for the
mathematical formalism of quantum physics. He began to work on this subject just
after the elaboration of the mathematical formalism of the quantum theory, around
1925â€"1927, which was the time of completion of quantum physics. In 1927 he
wrote a trilogy of papers which would be the basis for his book Mathematische
Grundlagen der Quantenmechanik, published in 1932.4 Considering that the “trans-
formation theory,” formulated by Dirac and independent contributions by Pascual
Jordan and Fritz London, were the “definitive form” of quantum mechanics, von
Neumann departed from it due to its lack of mathematical rigor. According to him,
in the opening of his 1932 book, “it should be emphasized that the correct structure
need not consist in a mathematical refinement and explanation of the Dirac method,
but rather that it requires a procedure differing from the very beginning, namely, the
reliance on the Hilbert theory of operators” (Von Neumann 1955, p. ix). Von
Neumann not only based his presentation on the mathematical structure of Hilbert
vector spaces and Hermitian operators, but also extended it beyond its “classical
limits.” From then on, matrix mechanics, wave mechanics, and transformation
theory should be considered as manifestations of Hilbert space vectors. Von
Neumann’s and Jordan’s work has been dissected by historians Anthony Duncan
and Michael Janssen, who argued, “So, rather than following the Jordan-Dirac


3
For the purposes of this text, I would like to emphasize that Bohr’s complementarity treats
measurement devices according to classical physics, not according to quantum physics. For a
standard, comprehensive description of complementarity, see Bohr’s (1949) report of his discus-
sions with Einstein.
4
For von Neumann’s biographies, see Macrae (1992) and Heims (1980).
144 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


approach and looking for ways to mend its mathematical shortcomings, von
Neumann, as indicated in the passage from his 1932 book quoted above, adopted
an entirely new approach. He generalized Hilbert’s spectral theory of operators to
provide a formalism for quantum mechanics that is very different from the one
proposed by Jordan and Dirac” (Duncan and Janssen 2013, p. 194).5 In the search
for the consistency of his mathematical scheme von Neumann used it to deal with
measurement in quantum physics and he diverged from Bohr’s solution. The
milestone in von Neumann’s treatment of measurement was the introduction of a
distinction between two kinds of time evolution of quantum states. The first one,
“discontinuous, non-causal and instantaneously acting experiments or measure-
ments,” occurs during the measurement processes. The second one, “continuous
and causal,” is governed by the Schrödinger equation. In addition, von Neumann
treated measuring devices quantum mechanically, instead of treating them classi-
cally as suggested by Bohr. This choice leads to the transfer of the singular
superposition of quantum states from the system under scrutiny to the combination
of system and measuring apparatus. In mathematical terms, this transfer is
represented by the inner product between the two Hilbert vectors, one related to
the system and the other related to the measurement device. As no such measure-
ment device described by such a bizarre superposition has been seen, it raises the
questions: how, where, and when does this superposition become a vector with just
one component, which is an eigenstate of the physical property of interest? After
all, what we obtain after measurements is related to vectors and probabilities rather
than to superposition of vectors. Von Neumann solved the problem appealing to the
distinction between the two kinds of evolution of quantum states and the role of the
cognizant subject, that is, the individual observer. He recalled the general episte-
mological view that in any measurement there ultimately is a moment in which “we
must say: and this is perceived by the observer,” and framed his answer in the
requirement of the psycho-physical parallelism, which means “it must be possible
so to describe the extra-physical process of the subjective perception as if it were in
reality in the physical world,” i.e., “to assign to its parts equivalent physical
processes in the objective environment, in ordinary space” (Von Neumann 1955,
p. 419). It should be noted that at that moment von Neumann remarked that Bohr
had been the first to link this dual description (two kinds of evolution) to the
psycho-physical parallelism (Von Neumann 1955, p. 420 footnote 207), thus
diluting the implicit different in their approaches to the measurement issues in
quantum physics.6


5
On Hilbert’s and von Neumann’s early axiomatic activity in the field of quantum mechanics, see
Lacki (2000) and references therein.
6
That von Neumann appealed to the psycho-physical parallelism and refrained from attributing a
physical role for the mind in the quantum measurement processes has not been acknowledged by
some commentators. For an example of this misreading, see Jammer (1974, pp. 480â€"482). The
psycho-physical parallelism was articulated by Gustav Theodor Fechner as part of the debates on
the mind-body issue in the second half of the nineteenth century. According to Heidelberger, it was
seen “as compatible with science and science’s materialistic inclination, without necessitating
4.2 Measurement Problem Before Wigner 145


In the 1930s, therefore, there was no awareness of the differences between Bohr
and von Neumann as regards measurements in quantum mechanics. As late as 1955,
in the preface to the English translation he himself had revised, von Neumann
dedicated a paragraph to setting forth his criticisms towards attempts to complete
quantum physics with “hidden variables,” which was an indirect reference to
Bohm’s 1952 work. However, he did not waste time contrasting his and Bohr’s
approach to measurement in quantum theory (Von Neumann 1955, p. x). Von
Neumann’s work imposed itself as the rigorous mathematical presentation of
quantum physics but contemporary criticism with the publication of his work did
not exploit the distinctions between his and Bohr’s approach. This had been the case
with the two now well-known Gedankenexperiments created by Einstein and
Schrödinger in 1935, the EPR experiment and Schrödinger’s cat, respectively.7
We will see the EPR experiment in more detail in Chap. 6. As for Schrödinger’s cat
experiment, we deal with it here as it is more closely related to the measurement
problem and to the paradox of Wigner’s friend. It appeared in a paper in which the
Austrian physicist, motivated by the publication of the EPR paper, raised the stakes
against what he called the “reigning doctrine” of blurred reality. As he suggested,
imagine a device, a steel chamber in which there is an atomic sample with a 50 %
probability of decaying after a certain time. If the atoms decay they will trigger a
Geiger counter and this will trigger a hammer that will hit and break a bottle storing
a lethal gas. In addition there is a cat inside the chamber. Schrödinger argued that
quantum physics will describe the whole setting as a superposition of dead and live
cats, that is, quantum theory does not say that the cat is either alive or dead.
However, as the cat is in fact not in a suspended state, Schrödinger concludes,
quantum theory is incomplete as it is unable to say if the cat is dead or alive
(Schrödinger 1983).8
In the twilight of the European interwar period two events highlighted the
measurement issues and Bohr’s and von Neumann’s approaches, but it was too
late for immediate consequences of these events. In 1939, Fritz London and
Edmond Bauer wrote a concise essay attempting to explain von Neumann’s theory
of measurement for not highly mathematically-skilled readers. Fritz London, one of
the creators of quantum chemistry, was then fully dedicated to the study of
superconductivity and superfluidity, which were seen by him as the exemplary
quantum macroscopic phenomena. He had arrived in Paris in 1936 escaping Nazi
Germany three years earlier. London and Bauer were more emphatic than von


recourse to crude materialism.” On its origins, its German-speaking cultural background, includ-
ing its influence on physicists such as Einstein, Bohr, and von Neumann, see Heidelberger (2003).
7
Einstein et al. (1935) and Schrödinger (1983).
8
According to Schrödinger’s (1983, p. 157) own conclusions, “It is typical of these cases that an
indeterminacy originally restricted to the atomic domain becomes transformed into macroscopic
indeterminacy, which can then be resolved by direct observation. That prevents us from so naively
accepting as valid a ‘blurred model’ for representing reality. In itself it would not embody anything
unclear or contradictory. There is a difference between a shaky or out-of-focus photograph and a
snapshot of clouds and fog banks.”
146 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


Neumann about the role of consciousness in quantum measurement. As commented
by London’s biographer, “von Neumann did not include the consciousness of the
observer in the measuring chain. The novelty of the London-Bauer treatment was
the explicit claim that the reduction of the wave function was the result of the
conscious activity of the human mind” (Gavroglu 1995, p. 171). Through quantum
formalism, after coupling an apparatus and an object, they noticed that “a coupling,
even with a measuring device, is not yet a measurement,” and went on to draw the
bold conclusion: “a measurement is achieved only when the position of the pointer
has been observed. [. . .] We note the essential role played by the consciousness of
the observer in this transition from a mixture to a pure case” (London and Bauer
1939, p. 41, their emphasis). To make it more explicit they coupled three systems:
object x, apparatus y, and observer z, and noted that the quantum description
(superposition of pure states) would remain unchanged, except for the description
from the point of view of the observer. According to them:
The observer has a completely different impression. For him it is only the object x and the
apparatus y that belong to the external world, to what he calls ‘objectivity.’ By contrast he
has with himself relations of a very special character. He possesses a characteristic and quite
familiar faculty which we can call the ‘faculty of introspection.’ He can keep track from
moment to moment of his own state. By virtue of this ‘immanent knowledge’ he attributes
to himself the right to create his own objectivityâ€"that is, to cut the chain of statistical
correlations [. . .] by declaring ‘I am in [this] state.” (London and Bauer 1939, p. 42, their
emphasis)9

London and Bauer were fully aware of the implications of this step and dedicated
one section of their work to the “scientific community and objectivity,” arguing that
such an appeal to the consciousness would not lead to solipsism. They maintained
that the quantum case was, in these circumstances, related to the problem of the
“determination of the necessary and sufficient conditions for an object of thought to
possess objectivity and to be an object of science,” which was an important
philosophical problem discussed by philosophers such as Malebranche, Leibniz,
Bolzano, and, more recently, Husserl and Cassirer (London and Bauer 1939,
pp. 50â€"51). At the time, London and Bauer’s approach to the measurement problem
was not considered to be subjectivist and the book had a laudatory preface by the
physicist Paul Langevin, who was a paragon of French rationalism with a realistic
view and materialistic inclinations (Bensaude-Vincent 1987; Freire Jr. 1993).10
However, as we will see, it was only in the 1960s, in Wigner’s hands that the
boldness of their statements would be revived.
In 1938, the Institut International de Coopération Intellectuelle (IICI 1939) held
the conference Les nouvelles théories de la physique in Warsaw which Bohr and


9
For this English translation of London and Bauer’s original paper, which was in French, see
Wheeler and Zurek (1983).
10
To trace London and Bauer’s philosophical concerns with quantum physics is not easy,
according to Gavroglu (1995, p. 175), as they never wrote anything else, before or after this
book, on the philosophical aspects of quantum physics. On London’s influence from both
philosophy and psychology; see Gavroglu (1995, p. 179).
4.2 Measurement Problem Before Wigner 147


von Neumann attended. Bohr presented a report on the quantum theory, which was
followed by a short presentation by von Neumann (Institut international de
coopération intellectuelle 1939, pp. 11â€"48). The proceedings of the conference
were published with the transcription of the debates following the presentations.
Some of the differences which would flourish later, mainly by commentators of
Bohr and von Neumann, were recorded in a very subtle manner. Von Neumann
presented his proof against the existence of additional variables in quantum
mechanics and his works on the new kind of logic he thought quantum mechanics
would require. Bohr praised the mathematical skills presented by von Neumann but
remarked that the same aspects had been covered by him in a simpler way. On the
need for a new logic for quantum physics, Bohr stated that he had preferred to stick
to the logical forms of everyday life. Von Neumann emphasized the arbitrary
distinction between the observer and the system implying that the former could
be treated through quantum mechanics while Bohr noted that the distinction
between phenomenon and observer is naturally set when the everyday language
necessary to describe experiments is adopted. Finally, H. Kramers (Institut inter-
national de coopération intellectuelle 1939, p. 102) suggested a difference between
Bohr’s more physical approach, and von Neumann’s rather mathematical one,
which was criticized by von Neumann and accepted by Bohr.11
In the 1950s there was a growing interest in the measurement process in quantum
physics, mainly in the German-speaking world of physics. Slowly, Bohr’s view on
the non-eliminable role of the classic concepts began to be articulated as a physical
insight, not only a philosophical approach. It took the form of the assumption of the
need for macroscopic devices for the measurement processes and the role of
irreversible thermodynamic amplification in such devices. The first hint came
from Pascual Jordan (1949), one of the creators of matrix mechanics, with Heisen-
berg and Max Born, who suggested that macroscopicity and irreversibility should
be taken as essential features of measurements in quantum theory. The idea was
further developed by Gunther Ludwig (1953), who maintained that the transitions
from the quantum description of microscopic bodies to the description of macro-
scopic measurement devices could have their physics explained. As we know the
former are described by a superposition of eigenstates while the latter are not. He
suggested taking into account that after the interaction between the microscopic
body and the measurement device a thermodynamic amplification of the signal in
the latter would happen, from where the irreversibility of quantum measurements
comes. Amplification here means, according to Jordan (1949, p. 271), “an ava-
lanche process set off by the microphysical object of investigation.” For Ludwig
measurement was over as a thermodynamically irreversible process in the




11
For a survey of other contributions on the quantum measurement process between the 1920s and
the early 1960s, see Jammer (1974, pp. 470â€"521).
148 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


macroscopic device. Later on, the Italian physicists (Daneri et al. 1962) would be
more precise as for them the measurement device was considered a macroscopic
body in a thermodynamic metastable state. It was triggered by small perturbations
coming from the interaction with the microsystem being measured. Then the
measurement device would evolve towards a thermodynamic stable state. Ludwig’s
and Jordan’s approaches implied that collapses of wave packets, the first kind of
evolution of the quantum states, were a thermodynamic effect and that quantum
mechanics was not applicable to macroscopic bodies. Thermodynamic amplifica-
tion as a programmatic idea was supported by the philosopher Paul Feyerabend and
the physicist H.J. Groenewold and criticized by the physicist G. Süssmann at the
Colston Symposium in Bristol 1957, the first meeting after World War II to resume
the debate on the foundations of quantum physics (Körner 1957, pp. 121â€"147).
Süssmann argued along the lines of von Neumann’s measurement treatment, which
implied considering the discontinuous and non-causal evolution of the quantum
stateâ€"the quantum jumpâ€"an independent assumption in the mathematical for-
malism of quantum theory. As we will see, the work by the Italians Daneri, Loinger,
and Prosperi is a mathematical development of Jordan’s and Ludwig’s program-
matic ideas. However, while scholars may find cues in Bohr’s writings on the role
of irreversibility and macroscopicity in quantum measurements there was no clear-
cut endorsement of this by the Danish physicist. Therefore the physicists who got
involved in dealing with the quantum measurement processes in the 1950s were
aware of the different approaches to the problem but there was no heated dispute
between Bohr’s and von Neumann’s partisans on this issue. Rather, there was a fair
and friendly debate among physicists and philosophers featuring Ludwig,
Feyerabend, and Süssmann, among others. Moreover, even referring to quantum
measurement as a problem was not common in the 1950s. Feyerabend (1957), for
instance, while aligned with the conceptual ideas of the role played by irreversibil-
ity and macroscopic bodies in quantum measurements, was at variance with what
he realized as Bohr’s instrumentalistic philosophical ideas and pleaded for a
“realistic interpretation of the formalism of quantum mechanics” (Körner 1957,
p. 129). A brief inspection of the proceedings of the Colston Symposium (Körner
1957) would reveal the contrast between the calm debate on the measurement
problem and the heated one on the causal interpretation. In addition, the very
term “quantum measurement problem” was not yet used. Feyerabend (1957)
spoke “on the quantum-theory of measurement” and Süssmann (1957) presented
“an analysis of measurement.”
Von Neumann died in 1957 and Bohr in 1962. In the 1960s, it would be up to
other physicists to perpetuate the cleavage in the quantum measurement treatment.
4.3 Enter Wigner 149




Picture 4.1 Casual portrait of Eugene Wigner (1902â€"1995) taken at a meeting in Lindau. AIP
Emilio Segre Visual Archives, Segre Collection




4.3 Enter Wigner

Complementarity had faced great challenges coming from outside the circle of the
founding fathers of quantum mechanics, as we saw in Chaps. 2 and 3 while
analyzing David Bohm’s and Hugh Everett’s stories. Now, another major challenge
came from within. Eugene P. Wigner was born in 1902 in Budapest, where he
graduated in chemical engineering. Early on, at his Lutheran high school, he met
John von Neumann and became his friend and an admirer forever.12 After a stay in

12
Wigner considered von Neumann’s mathematical work on the foundations of quantum mechan-
ics “more important than any of these inventions [computing machine and implosion bomb].” See
150 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


Berlin, Wigner together with von Neumann emigrated to the United States in order
to jointly develop a mathematical physics program at Princeton in the 1930s. In the
early 1960s, Wigner’s prestige was approaching its zenith. He was recognized early
on for his use of the theory of groups in quantum mechanics and recognition
increased with his contributions to nuclear physics, including his participation in
the Manhattan Project (Mehra 1993).13
From the late thirties, Wigner began to play a role beyond physics proper,
motivated by the military implications of recent discoveries in nuclear physics.
He and his Hungarian colleague Leo Szilard suggested that Albert Einstein write
the famous letter to President Roosevelt calling for the development of the U.S.’s
nuclear program (Doncel et al. 1984). For the many roles he played in the Manhat-
tan Project, he was consequently awarded the title of “the founder of nuclear
engineering” (Weinberg 2002). After the war, Wigner’s involvement with defense
matters did not wane. In the late fifties, he was one of the “Princeton three,” along
with John Archibald Wheeler and Oskar Morgenstern, who urged the American
government to build an enormous national laboratory dedicated to defense research,
an initiative that failed but eventually led to the setting up of JASON, a group of
academic physicists who advised the U.S. Department of Defense on defense
matters.14 Wigner assumed responsibility for promoting the role of civil defense
in the Cold War context and even built a nuclear fallout shelter in his own home.15
In the early 1960s Wigner decided to intensify his public involvement beyond
physics, publishing papers on the philosophy of science and dealing with the
measurement problem of quantum mechanics. This central issue in the foundations
of quantum physics would be of interest not only to physicists but to other
audiences as well, particularly philosophers. As we shall see, Wigner believed
that the measurement problem was part of the philosophy of physics, which in
turn he saw as an integral part of physics itself, a view that many of his colleagues
did not share. It should be noted that from the 1930s, working with von Neumann,
Wigner was interested in and contributed to measurement issues in quantum
mechanics (Shimony 1997). In the early 1950s he resumed the subject showing


E.P. Wigner, interviewed by W. Aspray, 04 Dec 1984, American Institute of Physics, College
Park, MD.
13
There is no professional biography on Wigner. His recollections are in Wigner and Szanton
(1992). Hargittai (2006) drew from the same source to describe a biographical picture of the
Hungarian-born physicists Theodore von Kármán, Leo Szilard, Eugene P. Wigner, John von
Neumann, and Edward Teller. A concise biographical note is Westfall (2008). In another bio-
graphical note it was said that “Wigner’s deep interest in the foundations of quantum mechanics,
especially the quantum theory of measurement, persisted longer than any of his other interests”
(Seitz et al. 1998). The relationship between Wigner and Michael Polanyi is exploited in Nye
(2011); on their discussions on epistemology, see Jha (2011).
14
On the “Princeton three”, see Aaserud (1995). On Jason, see Finkbeiner (2006) and
Moore (2008).
15
Trenton Evening Times, 6 November 1961: “Princeton Scientist Who Did Work On Atom Bomb
Has Own Shelter”. See Eugene Wigner Papers [hereafter WigP], Box 97, Folder 1, Manuscripts
Division, Department of Rare Books and Special Collections, Princeton University Library.
4.3 Enter Wigner 151


how quantum formalism exhibits limitations of measurability (Wigner 1952). In the
same year, with G. Wick and A. Wightman, they further extended such limitations
introducing the concept of a superselection rule. None of these papers, however,
were as influential as his 1960s works.16
Between 1961 and 1963, Wigner published the two papers that would become
the centerpieces of his views on the foundations of quantum mechanics. He
revisited the distinction first emphasized by von Neumann between two kinds of
evolution of quantum states. Additionally, but still following von Neumann, he
treated measuring devices quantum mechanically, instead of treating them classi-
cally as suggested by Bohr. The latter choice leads, as we have seen, to the transfer
of the singular superposition of quantum states from the system under scrutiny to
the combination: system plus the measuring apparatuses. After all, what we get
after measurements is related to vectors and probabilities rather than to superposi-
tion of vectors. Wigner emphasized this point and arrived at the same conclusion as
London and Bauer’s: in order to eliminate this superposition one needs to admit that
the analysis of quantum measurement leads eventually to the role of the observer’s
introspection, i.e., when the information enters the mind of the observer.
Conjecturing that the mind plays an essential role in the description of quantum
measurements was one of Wigner’s distinctive features when approaching the
measurement problem. According to him, “when the province of physical theory
was extended to encompass microscopic phenomena, through the creation of
quantum mechanics, the concept of consciousness came to the fore again: it was
not possible to formulate the laws of quantum mechanics in a fully consistent way
without reference to the consciousness.”17 He presented his arguments in two steps.
The first, and less incisive, was that the quantum state changes every time the
observer obtains new information from observations. While in classical mechanics
you also have to observe to obtain the initial conditions and establish the classic
state, when you get them and solve the equations of motion, the new information is
no longer relevant to change the state. In the second step, he strengthened his case,
presenting an idealized experiment in order to demonstrate the difference between
quantum descriptions of measurements with and without human observers. Nowa-
days the argument related to Wigner’s idealized experiment is known as “Wigner’s
friend” (Wigner 1961).18 Wigner suggests you observe an object quantum
described by a linear combination of two states, helped by a friend. Your friend
observes the object, hence to him/her it is in one of the two states and no longer in a


16
For a technical presentation of Wigner’s papers on quantum measurements, see Shimony (1997)
and G. Emch, “Annotation,” in (Wigner 1995, pp. 1â€"28).
17
Wigner (1961), cited from (Wigner 1995, p. 248).
18
Indeed Hugh Everett was the first to write the argument we now call “Wigner’s friend,” in the
long version of his doctoral thesis. To get his PhD degree in 1957, he submitted an abridged
version of the dissertation, without this argument. The full dissertation only was published in 1973.
However, it is uncertain who was the first to conceive this argument as Everett interacted with
Wigner at Princeton in the mid-1950s. See Chap. 3; Osnaghi et al. (2009, pp. 104â€"105) and Everett
et al. (2012, pp. 14, 29â€"32).
152 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


linear combination of the two. Before s/he tells you the result of the observation,
there will be a conflict between your description of the object (linear combination of
the two states) and that given by your friend (one of the two states). Accepting your
quantum description as the right one, you must admit that your “friend was in a state
of suspended animation before he answered” your question. This is a paradoxical
conclusion. So for Wigner quantum theory is unable to embrace measurements or it
does not produce consistent results if human observers are included in the quantum
description. Thus, if quantum theory is to encompass not only inanimate bodies, but
also life and mind, it needs to be modified, and Wigner suggested looking explicitly
for a non-linear equation of motion.19 This was indeed the originality of Wigner’s
approach in these papers as, in fact, he was suggesting a true research program: to
acknowledge the existence of a measurement problem and to solve it changing the
standard quantum physics mathematical formalism. For Wigner this was necessary
in order to include life and mind in the scope of physical theories.20 As for lexicon,
Wigner was, as far as I know, to title a paper considering the quantum measurement
issue as a “problem” (Wigner 1963).
Furthermore, Wigner’s arguments entailed a more sociological and historical
issue: to define the orthodox interpretation of quantum mechanics, and to identify
its protagonists. Introducing himself as a supporter of the orthodox, standard view
of quantum mechanics, he wrote: “The standard view is an outgrowth of
Heisenberg’s paper in which the uncertainty relation was first formulated. The
far-reaching implications of the consequences of Heisenberg’s ideas were first
fully appreciated, I believe, by von Neumann, but many others arrived indepen-
dently at conclusions similar to this. There is a very nice little book, by London and
Bauer, which summarizes quite completely what I shall call the orthodox view”
(Wigner 1963). Bohr’s paper on complementarity is only referred to in a footnote.
In Wigner’s account, therefore, Bohr and complementarity occupy a behind the
scenes role in the quantum story, and Heisenberg and von Neumann become its
chief protagonists. Historians of science know the role played by the creation of
disciplinary histories. These are “attempts to create discrete and unified histories of
scientific disciplines, complete with founding fathers, fundamental innovations and


19
In his 1961 paper, he wrote a section under the heading “Non-linearity of Equations as Indicators
of Life.” Later, Wigner (1995[1973]) kept the same stance: “it seems unlikely [. . .] that the
superposition principle applies in full force to beings with consciousness. If it does not, or if the
linearity of the equations of motion should be invalid for systems in which life plays a significant
role, the determinants of such systems may play the role which proponents of the hidden variable
theories attribute to such variables. All proofs of the unreasonable nature of hidden variables are
based on the linearity of the equations.”
20
Wigner’s conjecture about the role of mind in quantum physics was strongly intertwined with
his metaphysical and epistemological beliefs. He kept a dualistic view about mind and matter and
maintained the former was primary. He criticized mechanistic approaches to the question of life
because, for him, the phenomenon of consciousness entreats us to admit the existence of biotonic
laws, that is, laws of nature not contained in the laws of physics (Wigner 1995[1972], 1997a, b). I
will not, however, extend my analysis of his broader philosophical views here. For a discussion on
such issues, see (Esfeld 1999). Thanks to Ron Anderson for bringing this paper to my attention.
4.3 Enter Wigner 153


so forth” (Christie 1990, p. 11). One may think of Wigner’s account as the disciplinary
history of the research on the foundations of quantum theory. I think he had broader
aims and interpret this excerpt as a dispute over the intellectual heritage of the
founding fathers of quantum mechanics. Wigner wrote this text after von Neumann’s
and Bohr’s deaths, and while scientists and historians in the U.S. were involved in one
of the largest projects ever to collect and store records which were significant in the
creation and evolution of a scientific theory and which would come to be known as the
Archives for the History of Quantum Physics (Kuhn 1967).
Wigner’s papers drew both support and opposition. Abner Shimony, who had a
PhD from Yale in Philosophy and was doing his second PhD, this time in Physics at
Princeton under the supervision of Wigner, was very impressed by it: “I found your
paper on the mind-body problem extremely stimulating. It is one of the few
treatments of the problem which considers the mind-body relationship to be a
legitimate subject for scientific investigation, without achieving this scientific status
for the problem by reducing it to behavioristic or materialistic considerations.”21
M. Satosi Watanabe (1910â€"1993), a Japanese physicist, who had studied in Europe
with de Broglie and Heisenberg and was interested in foundational issues and
information, also reacted very favorably to Wigner’s suggestion about the role of
consciousness in physical processes. We find in their correspondence hints regard-
ing the subsequent opposition to Wigner’s ideas from Rosenfeld. Rosenfeld’s
Marxist motivation can also be traced here. Apparently, Wigner had underestimated
the ideological backdrop of the quantum controversy. He wrote to Watanabe, “Do
you know of any political background that has come into the open in these
discussions? I am under the happy impression that we can keep the discussion
on these subjects free from politics and am not aware of anyone having brought in
any doctrine into the argument.” Watanabe’s reply was premonitory of the
Wigner-Rosenfeld dispute: “. . . I have indeed had quite a few experiences myself
of being exposed to shameless attacks by Marxists in Japan for what they call my
bourgeois idealism. In spite of the fact that Marxism is not a mechanical material-
ism, they are dead against giving any kind of independent reality to consciousness.
There are Marxists who are quite broad-minded (like Prof. Rosenfeld) in many
respects, but they usually become quite emotional when the topic touches upon
their basic dogmas. (I was rather disappointed by the partisan emotion which
tainted Prof. Rosenfeld’s paper on Statistical Mechanics which was published in
Poland. Even a broadminded Marxist like Prof. Rosenfeld acts like this.”)22


21
Letter from Abner Shimony to Wigner, May 1, 1961. WigP, Box 94, folder 1. Shimony would
always defend that the mind, or cognitive faculties, should be investigated in relation with the
quantum measurement problem. “A possibility that seems to me largely to have been neglected in
the literature on the measurement problem [. . .] is that the locus of reduction is the macromole-
cules of the sensory and cognitive faculties.” He conducted experiments on the subject (Hall
et al. 1977) and maintains that quantum mechanics may bridge the gap between psychology and
natural sciences (Shimony 1993, pp. 74 and 319).
22
Wigner to Watanabe, 30 Aug 1961; Watanabe to Wigner, 15 Dec 1961; WigP, Box 63, folder
12, and box 71, folder 1, respectively.
154 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case




Picture 4.2 Léon Rosenfeld (1904â€"1974). AIP Emilio Segre Visual Archives


It was up to Rosenfeld to oppose Wigner in defense of complementarity.
Rosenfeld had been Bohr’s assistant since the 1930s, and a physicist who was
very sensitive to epistemological matters.23 Rosenfeld and Wigner had, however,
quite different stands on a number of issues. Politically, Wigner was very conser-
vativeâ€"he was a follower of the Republican Party and was supportive of
U.S. foreign policy to the point of receiving a telegram from President Richard
Nixon thanking him for his support in the Vietnam War effort.24 In contrast,
Rosenfeld had been engaged in Marxist philosophy since the thirties. Rosenfeld’s
Marxism was closer to Western Marxism than it was to Soviet Marxism, to use
terms introduced by Perry Anderson (1976) in order to make sense of Marxist
trends in the twentieth century.25 In the late 1940s and 1950s Rosenfeld participated
actively in organizations and movements, such as the “World Federation of Scien-
tific Workers,” “Science for Peace,” and the “Manchester University Socialist
Society.” His political record led him to doubt whether he would be granted a
visa to visit the U.S., in Cold War times.26 To preserve what seemed to him to be a
dialectical feature of complementarity, Rosenfeld criticized both the Soviet and

23
On Rosenfeld, see his comprehensive biography by Anja Jacobsen (2012) and his collected
papers on epistemology (Rosenfeld et al. 1979).
24
R. Nixon to Wigner, 22 Jun 22, 1970: “Encouragement is always gratifying, but I particularly
appreciated your very thoughtful letter and I want you to know how pleased I was to hear from you.
Your support for our policies toward Southeast Asia means a great deal to America’s fighting men,
and needless to say, it means a great deal to me.” WigP, Box 97, folder 3.
25
Anderson’s distinction is driven to label those Marxist intellectuals, such as Lukacs, Korsch,
Bloch, and Adorno, who kept their distance from the Soviet Marxism and the Western Communist
parties related to it. Anderson’s categories are not trivial since Antonio Gramsci, the leader
of Italian Communism, is considered for his works part of Western Marxism. Roughly used,
however, they are useful for understanding Rosenfeld’s Marxism.
26
See letters to L. Rosenfeld, from J.A. Wheeler [March 27, 1952]; R.E. Marshak [September
24, 1954], and A. Roberts [December 22, 1955]. Léon Rosenfeld Papers, Niels Bohr Archive,
Copenhagen [Hereafter RP].
4.3 Enter Wigner 155


Marxist physicists, like D. Blokhintsev and D. Bohm, who were themselves critics
of complementarity, and physicists like Heisenberg, who leaned towards idealism,
as we have discussed in Chap. 2. So, for a number of reasonsâ€"political, ideolog-
ical, and philosophicalâ€"Rosenfeld could not accept a view like Wigner’s which
assigned a central role to the mind in physical phenomena.
Wigner and Rosenfeld also displayed significant differences in their approach to
the measurement problem, which could also be referred to as different scientific
styles. For Wigner, following von Neumann, dissecting the mathematical formal-
ism of quantum physics in order to exhibit its axiomatic structure was a necessary
step in grasping the theory’s full implications. That is not to say that for Wigner
axiomatic theories were necessary for all research in physics, because in other
fields, nuclear physics for instance, his approach was phenomenological.27 But
Rosenfeld, possibly following Bohr, always emphasized his distrust of the reach
of any axiomatic treatment of physical theories, or, at least, his distrust in von
Neumann’s axiomatic approach to quantum mechanics. Even before his dispute
with Wigner, Rosenfeld had written: “the ‘axiomatizers’ do not realize that every
physical theory must necessarily make use of concepts which cannot, in principle,
be further analyzed, since they describe the relationship between the physical
systems which is the object of study and the means of observation by which we
study it: these concepts are those by which we give information about the exper-
imental arrangement, enabling anyone (in principle) to repeat the experiment. It is
clear that in the last resort we must here appeal to common experience as a basis for
common understanding.”28 A little earlier, in a report on quantum theory textbooks
requested by a publisher, he had been more explicit in his distance from von
Neumann’s approach: “v. Neumann’s book ‘Foundations of Quantum Mechanics’
[. . .], though excellent in other respects, ha[d] contributed by its unhappy presen-
tation of the question of measurement in quantum theory to create unnecessary
confusion and raise spurious problems.”29 Last but not least, Rosenfeld maintained
that complementarity was the great epistemological lesson of quantum theory, and
for this reason, he could not accept Wigner’s position according to which Bohr’s
complementarity played no role in the orthodox interpretation of quantum theory.




27
I am thankful to Sam Schweber for his discussion on this issue. Commenting on the founding
fathers of quantum mechanics, Schweber (1996) wrote: “Wigner stands out by being, on the one
hand, the theorist who had perhaps the greatest affinity to pure mathematics and, on the other,
probably the most phenomenologically inclined among them.” For Wigner’s insertion in the
mathematical physics tradition, see Schweber (2014).
28
L. Rosenfeld to Saul M. Bergmann, December 21st, 1959. RP. The subject of the letter concerns
Everett’s approach to quantum physics. Emphases are in the original.
29
L. Rosenfeld. “Report on: Louis de Broglie, La théorie de la mesure en mécanique ondulatoire
(Paris: Gauthier-Villars),” 1957, RP.
156 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


4.4 The Heated Dispute: Wigner Versus Rosenfeld
and the Italians

Rosenfeld’s strategy for criticizing Wigner’s view was to give strong praise to
certain work, by writing, “these misunderstandings [i.e. that the translation of
Bohr’s argument into the formal language of the theory should present
unrecognized difficulties], which go back to the deficiencies in von Neumann’s
axiomatic treatment, have only recently been completely removed by the very
thorough and elegant discussion of the measuring process in quantum mechanics
carried out by Daneri, Loinger and Prosperi” (Rosenfeld 1965). This paper had been
published in Nuclear Forces, a journal edited by Léon Rosenfeld. These Italian
physicists had used the ergodic theorem, which states that under certain conditions
the time average of a function equals its space average, to explain quantum
measurements as a thermodynamic amplification of a signal triggered by the
interaction between quantum systems and measurement devices (Daneri
et al. 1962). Indeed, the Italian physicists had quantum mechanically treated both
the system and the interaction between the system and the measurement device, but,
after the interaction ended, they considered the measurement device as evolving
according to classical statistical physics, which was compatible with Bohr’s
requirement that the measurement devices should be considered classical bodies.30
The Italian paper came from a research tradition devoted to applying the ergodic
theorem to problems in statistical mechanics and quantum theory and was inspired
by the Italian theoretical physicist Piero Caldirola.31 What had been a rather
technical issue in the quantum measurement problem became a controversial
issue due to its conjunction with Rosenfeld’s praise, which raised the stakes of
the paper. If Rosenfeld’s point of view about the reach of the Italian work were
accepted, Wigner’s claims would be considered ungrounded. The dispute lasted
throughout the second half of the 1960s and it was marked by bitter arguments,
even though it dealt with rather technical content, i.e., to determine whether the
Italian work was a rigorous solution or just an approximation.
Wigner was particularly upset by the Italian physicists’ subsequent paper. In this
paper they (Daneri et al. 1966) cited Wigner, Shimony, Moldauer, Yanase, and
Jauch’s analyses of the measurement problem, stating that “none of them gives new
substantial contributions to the subject; therefore we shall not discuss them in
detail, but we shall limit ourselves to the sketchy comments reported in footnotes”
(Daneri et al. 1966, pp. 120â€"121). In fact, this was a paper that in some places
dedicated more room to footnotes (roughly 80 %) than to the main text itself. In
addition, Daneri, Loinger, and Prosperi drew the lines of the battle as they criticized
Wigner, Shimony, Moldauer, Yanase, and Jauch’s analyses for no “new substantial
contributions” and aligned their paper with Bohr, Jordan, and Ludwig’s approaches


30
For a more detailed discussion of Daneri, Loinger, and Prosperi’s paper, see Chap. 5.
31
See Chap. 5 and Pessoa Jr. et al. (2008).
4.4 The Heated Dispute: Wigner Versus Rosenfeld and the Italians 157


to the quantum measurement problem, as well as counting on Rosenfeld as their
main cheerleader (Daneri et al. 1966, p. 120).
Wigner’s reaction was to write to Josef M. Jauch suggesting a common response,
together with Yanase, Wigner’s former student. Jauch was at that time leading what
would be later known as the Geneva school dedicated to the axiomatic foundations
of quantum physics.32 Wigner acknowledged that he was particularly irritated not
by the attack on him but by its significance for young researchers like Abner
Shimony and Michael Yanase, his former doctoral students. Thus he wrote,
I just finished reading the article of Daneri Loinger and Prosperi in the July issue of Nuovo
Cimento and am really a bit irritated by it. First of all, it is not good taste to say about a set
of articles that they do not make substantial contributions to a subject. Needless to say, I am
less concerned about myself than about other people who are much younger than I am and
whose future careers such statements may hurt.33

Wigner also told Jauch of his disagreement with Rosenfeld’s support of the
paper by the Italian physicists. While referring to macroscopic systems with states
not described by classical mechanics, he was probably thinking of phenomena such
as superconductivity and superfluidity, which had been studied just through the use
of quantum mechanics. Wigner wrote to Jauch,
I am also saddened by Rosenfeld’s endorsement of the article which, after all, considers it
axiomatic that macroscopic systems have only states which can be described by classical
mechanics. This is, of course, in conflict with quantum mechanics, but this is never
mentioned in the article except by the explicit agreement with the work of Ludwig, who
is entirely explicit on this subject.34

The letter to Jauch was a typical maneuver in search of allies, as Wigner was not
in complete agreement with Jauch, notwithstanding the fact that the latter was
trying to refine von Neumann’s mathematical treatment. Jauch did not agree with
Wigner’s conjecture on the role of mind in the measurement process and believed
that the changes he himself had introduced in von Neumann’s treatment had
transformed the difference between the two kinds of evolution of the state vector
into a pseudo-problem. According to him,
It is shown that the two ways of the change of state vectors can be understood without
introducing von Neumann’s ‘ultimate observer’ and without abandoning the linear law of
the time evolution of states. Consciousness or even the macroscopic nature of the measur-
ing device is not an essential requirement for a measurement. (Jauch 1964, p. 293)

The maneuver was acknowledged by Wigner in a letter to Shimony, “enclosed is
a preliminary manuscript of an article which attempts a reconciliation of the views
of Jauch and ourselves. It is a response to what I consider to be a rather intemperate
criticism by Daneri, Loinger and Prosperi.”35 Looking for allies, Wigner went so far


32
For references to the Geneva school, see Arthur (1981).
33
Wigner to Jauch, 06 September 1966. WigP, Box 94, folder 7.
34
Ibid.
35
Wigner to Shimony, 16 Dec 1966. WigP, Box 71, folder 3.
158 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


as to accept a suggestion from Shimony and propose that Jauch include in their joint
paper a favorable citation of a paper by David Bohm and Jeffrey Bub. However,
Jauch could not accept this because in his own work with Constantin Piron, whose
doctoral thesis had been co-supervised by Ernst Stueckelberg and himself, he was
trying to reinforce von Neumann’s proof against hidden variables (Jauch and Piron
1963), while Bohm and Bub’s work was an open criticism to this approach. 36
The joint paper by Jauch, Wigner, and Yanase (1967) was a piece exhibiting
both conceptual precision and diplomatic skills. After an explanation of the mea-
surement problem, following von Neumann’s standard presentation of measure-
ment in quantum physics, they went on to address the criticisms voiced by Daneri,
Loinger, Prosperi, and Rosenfeld. Instead of merely rebutting them, Jauch, Wigner,
and Yanase acknowledged the paper by the Italian physicists as “a useful contri-
bution to the theory of measurement” insofar as they showed that certain macro-
scopic bodies used as measurement devices can evade the quantum superposition of
states. In addition, the Italian physicists had acknowledged that microscopic sys-
tems play only the role of triggering the thermodynamic amplification in the
measurement processes while the amplification happens exclusively in the macro-
scopic device after the interaction with the microscopic systems. However, Wigner,
Jauch, and Yanase pointed out that not all measurements follow the scheme of a
microscopic system triggering a thermodynamic amplification in the measurement
system. They used as counter-example the case of “negative-result measurements”
which had already been suggested by Mauritius Renninger.37 Finally, they looked
for a common ground with the work of the Italian physicists noting that both
Jauch’s macrostates and the Italian classical states of the macroscopic apparatus
do not obey the Schrödinger equation in their evolution, thus both of them may be
considered “steps in the direction of a generalization of the quantum-mechanical
description of physical systems” (Jauch et al. 1967 on 151).
Afterwards, Rosenfeld (1968) and Loinger (1968) replied to Jauch, Wigner, and
Yanase’s paper, however, the next round did not take place in papers published in
journals. Instead, Wigner waited for a special gathering, the 1970 Varenna summer
school dedicated to the foundations of quantum mechanics, to have a live debate, as
we shall see. It can be said that the very existence of this school reflected the
changing mood among physicists concerning the status of research on foundations

36
The suggestion is in Shimony to Wigner, 1 Jan 1967. WigP, Box 83, folder 7. Shimony’s
suggestion was to cite (Bohm and Bub 1966a). Jauch’s reaction was: “the second major point
which I should modify refers to your remarks on Bohm and Bub. This concerns me perhaps more
directly because their second paper (Bohm and Bub 1966b) is entitled as a ‘refutation’ of the paper
by Piron and myself [. . .] but what concerns me more in connection with the problem on
measurement is that the model which they propose in the first paper has absolutely no predictive
value.” Wigner then accepted Jauch’s restrictions. Jauch to Wigner, 13 Oct 1966, Wigner to Jauch,
25 Oct 1966, WigP, Box 71, folder 3. On Bub’s work as a doctoral student of Bohm, see Chap. 2.
37
For a review on negative-result measurement, both theory and experiments, since Epstein and
Renninger, see Whitaker (2000). For the relationships between Renninger’s negative-result mea-
surements, the paper by Jauch, Wigner, and Yanase, and the work of the physicist Klaus Tausk, see
Chap. 5.
4.4 The Heated Dispute: Wigner Versus Rosenfeld and the Italians 159


of quantum theory (Freire Jr. 2003a). In addition to these shifting intellectual
trends, we must remember that Rosenfeld was not in an easy position during this
dispute. In 1952, as mentioned in Chap. 2, he had derided David Bohm, the leader
of the first round of dissent, labeling him a “tourist” or a “dilettante” in the field of
the foundations of quantum mechanics,38 but he could not deal with the 1963 Nobel
Prize winner, Eugene Wigner, in the same way.
The Varenna courses, organized by the Italian Society of Physics, had been held
regularly since 1953 in the summer in Varenna on Lake Como. The 1970 course
was dedicated to the theme “Foundations of Quantum Mechanics” following a
suggestion from Franco Selleri supported by Toraldo di Francia, then the president
of the society. The motivation and background for holding such a course will be
discussed in Chap. 6. For the moment however, we need a few pieces of information
from it. The course was held under the direction of Bernard d’Espagnat. There were
84 participants, and its proceedings (d’Espagnat 1971) reveal a diversified spectrum
of subjects, such as measurement, hidden variables and non-locality, and interpre-
tations. People from different perspectives about the quantum issues, such as
Wigner, Jauch, Shimony, d’Espagnat, Bell, de Broglie, Prosperi, Selleri, and
Bohm were invited. d’Espagnat suggested some diplomatic rules to be followed
in the invitation letter so as to guarantee a peaceful and creative atmosphere in
which to discuss scientific controversies.39 As remarked by the historian Anja
Jacobsen, Rosenfeld’s biographer, Rosenfeld was invited to speak about the mea-
surability of quantum fields and accepted. However, after reading the invitation
letter and the list of speakers, he withdrew and sent Jørgen Kalckar, a younger
physicist from the Niels Bohr Institute, in his place. Indeed, through this maneuver
Rosenfeld avoided endorsing an event he was against the very existence of. In
addition, Rosenfeld’s retraction reflected the ongoing battle between Wigner,
Bohm, and Jauch, on the one hand, and himself, on the other hand. This was
expressed in his refusal letter with the following words: “Wigner’s talk [in a recent
event in Trieste] convinced me that no dialogue is possible and, furthermore, that he
is not looking for it. As for Bohm, I just say that I am tired with his last words; and
you know what I think of Jauch’s axiomatic prestidigitations.”40 According to
Jacobsen, “d’Espagnat regretted Rosenfeld’s decision” but denied “that the direction
the meeting had taken was pointing at Rosenfeld any way” (Jacobsen 2012, pp. 307â€"
308). As a matter of fact, the intellectual climate concerning the foundations of
quantum mechanics was one of far more openness than in the 1950s and early


38
Rosenfeld (1953, p. 56) and letter from L. Rosenfeld to N. Bohr, 14 Jan 1957. Archives for the
History of Quantum Physics, American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, PA (AHQP, hereaf-
ter), Bohr Scientific Correspondence, reel 31. For the context, see Chap. 2.
39
These diplomatic rules will be presented in Chap. 6. They were previously analyzed in (Freire
Jr. 2003a, 2004).
40
“L’exposé de Wigner m’a convaincu qu’aucun dialogue n’était possible, et que d’ailleurs il ne le
souhaitait nullement; quant à Bohm, je dirais seulement que ses preÌ‚ches des derniers jours me
fatiguent; et vous savez ce que je pense des prestidigitations axiomatiques de Jauch.” Rosenfeld to
d’Espagnat, 23 December 1969, RP.
160 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


1960s and Rosenfeld’s refusal to attend also reflected the decline of his influence
among the physics milieu interested in the foundations of quantum physics.
The dispute involving Wigner, Rosenfeld, Jauch, Yanase, and the Italian phys-
icists Daneri, Loinger, and Prosperi eventually ended at the Varenna summer
school, which Wigner succeeded in transforming into an agreement on the need
for a research program on quantum measurement processes. Wigner gave the
keynote talk at Varenna (d’Espagnat 1971, pp. 1â€"19), and Prosperi spoke about
“macroscopic physics and the problem of measurement in quantum mechanics,” in
a section dedicated to “Measurement and basic concepts” (d’Espagnat 1971,
pp. 97â€"122). An informal discussion between Wigner and Prosperi ensued from
these lectures. Assisted by Shimony and d’Espagnat,41 Wigner reconstructed his
arguments and had them published (d’Espagnat 1971, pp. 122â€"126). It is worth
taking a detailed look at Wigner’s conclusions because we can discern in them two
distinctive features of Wigner’s approach to the foundations of quantum physics:
his diplomatic and open-minded attitudes, and his consideration of the philosophy
of physics as part of physics. He divided his conclusions into two, the first related to
“the philosophical problem,” and the second about “questions of physical theory.”
He explained that the main issue at the center of both Prosperi’s and of his own
concerns was related to the knowledge of the “reason for the statistical, that is
probabilistic, nature of the laws of quantum-mechanical theory.” In other words,
how can one understand that quantum predictions are not “uniquely given by the
inputs” even though equations of quantum and classical physics are deterministic?
He suggested one might answer this question in different ways, and cleverly framed
Prosperi’s and his own responses on the same side. This type of answer implies that
“the possible reason for the probabilistic nature of quantum theory’s conclusions
concerning the outcomes of measurements is that the theory cannot completely
describe the process of measurement, that some part of the process is not subject to
the equations of quantum mechanics.” The difference between Wigner’s and
Prosperi’s views resided in “the area to which quantum mechanics is inapplicable.”
For Prosperi, probability is necessary for the translation of the quantum-mechanical
description into the classic description because this translation is not unique.
Wigner says that for him and von Neumann quantum mechanics does not “apply
to the functioning of the mind” as “the conscious content of the mind is not uniquely
given by its state vector.” Finally, arguing on more scientific grounds, Wigner
remarked that Prosperi and collaborators were using phrases such as “macroscopic
variables” and “macroscopic objects” without giving a precise definition of these
terms. He remembered examples of phenomena with macroscopic bodies but which


41
“I received a letter from d’Espagnat telling me about your suggestion that the discussion
between Prosperi and myself be included in the Proceedings of our conference in Varenna.”
Wigner to Shimony, 09 Oct 1970; Wigner to Shimony, 21 Jan 1971, Box 1, Folder 07-B, Shimony
to Wigner, 02 Feb 1971, Box 1, Folder 7, Abner Shimony Papers (AS hereafter), Archives of
Scientific Philosophy, Special Collections Department, University of Pittsburgh. “It would indeed
be a service to people interested in foundations of quantum mechanics for you to reconstruct your
discussion with Prosperi.” Shimony to Wigner, [w/d 1971], WigP, Box 72, folder 2.
4.5 The Orthodoxy Splits 161


exhibit quantum features, such as permanent currents in superconductorsâ€"super-
conductivityâ€"and spontaneous magnetization in different directions, besides the
observable difference between dextro and levorotatory sugar, which is based on a
quantum relation of microscopic phases. In his conclusion, Wigner once more
looked for areas of agreement between the two physicists and presented a proposal
for a genuine research program. His point of departure was that Prosperi’s premises
could not be rigorously formulated (at least not at that time) and their formulation
would entail a significant modification of the theory current at that time. Then,
Wigner argued, the convergence resided in the conclusion, common to Prosperi and
Wigner’s views, namely “the inapplicability of quantum mechanics to some part of
the measurement process has to be postulated or admitted.” Surely, Wigner had
been postulating this for some time, and he was asking Prosperi to admit it. If
Rosenfeld had been present at the Varenna school, one might suppose that he would
have not accepted Wigner’s suggestion because for him, according to Bohr’s views,
concepts such as “macroscopic variables” or “macroscopic bodies” should be
admitted without previous definitions since one gains nothing when trying to
axiomatize, or to define all theoretical terms. As close as his views were to
Bohr’s, Prosperi thought differently and did not insist on the thesis maintained by
Daneri, Loinger, and himself. This thesis had implied that their work should be seen
as an accomplishment of quantum theory. He did not publish any additional reports
on his own arguments and returned from Varenna to Milan convinced that the
measurement problem was still unsolved.42



4.5 The Orthodoxy Splits

It is important to consider how Wigner’s contemporaries interpreted his dispute
with Rosenfeld and the Italian physicists. The dispute was seen as evidence of the
existence of a controversy on the foundations of quantum physics. Thus, Otto
R. Frisch, in a colloquium held in 1968, said: “I understand that at present there
exists a controversy, roughly speaking between a group of people which includes
Wigner as the best known person and another group centered on Milan in Italy, and
that these two have different views on how this reduction happens” (Frisch 1971,
p. 14). For the first time in the literature, the name “Princeton school” was used to
differentiate Wigner’s views from the Copenhagen school. According to Ballentine
(1970, p. 360), there were “several versions of the Copenhagen interpretation” and,
“although both claim orthodoxy, there now seems to be a difference of upholds
between what may be called the Copenhagen school represented by Rosenfeld, and
the Princeton school represented by Wigner.”43 Since then, the labeling


42
G. Prosperi, July 3, 2003, Milan, interviewed by the author.
43
Neither Wigner nor Rosenfeld, however, held Ballentine’s views in high esteem. “Ballentine,
whom I had the honour to meet at your old place, Vancouver, last April, looked to me as a
162 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


Copenhagen and Princeton schools has become widely used in the literature (Home
and Whitaker 1992; Leggett 1987). The monocracy of the Copenhagen school, a
term used by Max Jammer, was thus broken, from the inside. I do not want to say
that Wigner was the sole driving force in breaking that monocracy. Other factors
also contributed to changing physicists’ attitudes to research in foundations of
quantum mechanics, but I will not discuss them here as they will be dealt with in
the following chapters. What I am saying is that Wigner made a major contribution
in this direction, which is not always recognized today.



4.6 Wigner’s Style of Intellectual Leadership

The portrait of Wigner as simply a controversial actor in the creation of the field of
foundations of quantum mechanics is not completely fair. He engaged in a variety
of activities and had a kind of non-dogmatic but highly influential leadership style.
He put together a group of students to work on the subject, including Abner
Shimony, who had a PhD in Physics with a dissertation on the foundations of
statistical mechanics, and Michael Yanase, a Jesuit priest whose dissertation dealt
with the measurement problem. We have already seen how he mobilized Yanase to
join the debate with the Italians. Shimony (1993, p. xii) provides a very impressive
testimony of the role Wigner played in his career: “I am most deeply grateful to
Eugene Wigner, [who] encouraged my later work on foundations of quantum
mechanics. The preponderance of the physics community at that time accepted
some variant of the Copenhagen interpretation of quantum mechanics and believed
that satisfactory solutions had already been given to the measurement problem, the
problem of Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen, and other conceptual difficulties. My deci-
sion to devote much research effort to these problems would have been emotionally
more difficult without Wigner’s authority as one of the great pioneers and masters
of quantum mechanics.” The bulk of the correspondence exchanged between
Shimony and Wigner on philosophical matters suggests that Wigner also benefited
from this intellectual relationship because in fact Shimony acted informally as
Wigner’s assistant on philosophical matters.44
Wigner was also supportive of senior physicists working on topics of founda-
tions of quantum physics, such as Bernard d’Espagnat, Henry Margenau, and John

rejuvenation of Everett himself, just as bumptious and probably no less stupid. I was giving a
general lecture [. . .] and at the end Ballentine came to me and said, ‘I am very embarrassed
because I expected that I would strongly disagree with you and I find what you said is in agreement
with my views’”, Rosenfeld to F. J. Belinfante, 22 June 1972, RP. “Did you see Ballentine’s article
in the Rev. Mod. Phys.? It does show how difficult the communication is between physicists and
philosophers, and how much more the latter believe in the meaningful nature of words which we
consider ill defined. We do need people like yourself to establish a modicum of mutual under-
standing.” Wigner to Shimony, 21 January 1970, AS, Box 1, Folder 07-B.
44
Most of this correspondence, of meaningful philosophical value, is deposited at the Eugene
W. Papers (WigP) and Abner Shimony Papers (AS).
4.6 Wigner’s Style of Intellectual Leadership 163


Archibald Wheeler. Bernard d’Espagnat was already a senior-level high-energy
physicist when in the 1960s he decided to resume a project begun in his younger
days, to philosophize on the problems of contemporary physics.45 D’Espagnat
found in Wigner a dialoguer, even if he did not completely share his views, and
in Rosenfeld an ironic and bitter critic, albeit friendly, when he accepted some of
Wigner’s positions. As early as 1964, d’Espagnat criticized Jauch for his idea that
mixture and pure state are in the same “equivalence class,” and supported Wigner:
“This is a matter into which I always took a great interest and I found your article in
AJP very illuminating.” Later, Rosenfeld praised d’Espagnat’s book (1965), but not
the paper in which d’Espagnat (1966) suggested a generalization of Wigner’s point
of view, according to which “the framework of the orthodox theory of (ideal)
measurements” means that these cannot as a rule be described by means of linear
quantum mechanical laws. In February 1966, d’Espagnat wrote to Rosenfeld, “I am
thankful [. . .] because you had the kindness of approving my book.” Four months
later, Rosenfeld wrote (8 July 1966), “your last work ‘Two Remarks on the Theory
of Measurement’ seems to indicate you need reinvigorate yourself in the pure air of
Copenhagen [d’Espagnat had been there in 1954, and had received an invitation to
return from Rosenfeld, in January 1966]. There is nothing as such to heal you from
this Wignerite crisis you seem to be suffering from, which I hope is a light one.”46
Unlike d’Espagnat, Margenau was a seasoned veteran in the field of foundations
of physics as he had been criticizing the complementarity view since the 1930s. In
the early 1960s, he welcomed Wigner’s analysis of quantum measurement, which
motivated him to resume his own ideas and to present them in a clearer and more
concise way:47
I have read your illuminating paper in the American Journal of Physics. This, together with
thoughts about other materials from your pen and further recent publications, has prompted
me to put together what I consider a simple and consistent theory of measurement [. . .]. I
believe I have not made sufficiently clear in the past what I regard as important, for I really
think that my basic concepts do not differ from your version.

They engaged in a published debate with Hillary Putnam over the conceptual
structure of quantum mechanics and planned to write a book together, but this
project was never seriously initiated.48 In the late 1960s, Wigner accepted


45
Bernard d’Espagnat, interviewed by the author, Paris, 26 Oct 2011, Center for History of
Physics, American Institute of Physics, College Park, MD.
46
“Je tiens à vous remercier pour [. . .] l’approbation que vous avez la gentilesse d’y exprimer à
l’égard de mon livre,” d’Espagnat to Wigner, 18 Feb 1964, WigP, Box 94, Folder 1. D’Espagnat to
Rosenfeld, 26 Feb 1966. “Votre dernier travail ‘Two Remarks on the Theory of Measurement’
semble indiquer que vous avez besoin de vous retremper dans l’air pur de Copenhague, [. . .] Il n’y
a rien de tel comme cure de cette wignérite dont vous paraissez subir une atteinte, que j’espère
légère,” Rosenfeld to d’Espagnat, 8 July 1966, RP.
47
Margenau to Wigner, 21 Jan 21, 1963. Henry Margenau Papers [MP hereafter], Manuscripts and
Archives, Yale University Library, box 1, folder 12.
48
See Margenau and Wigner (1962). On the debate with Putnam, see Santos and Pessoa Jr. (2011).
For the book they planned, as suggested by Wigner, see the letter from Margenau to Wigner, 4 Oct
4, 1974 (WigP, box 56, folder 13); idem, 26 Dec 1974 (WigP, box 72, folder 3); and the letter from
164 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


Margenau’s invitation to be a member of the editorial board of a new journal,
Foundations of Physics, designed to foster research of “disciplined speculations
suggestive of new basic approaches in physics,”49 including those concerning the
foundations of quantum mechanics. Wigner not only accepted this invitation but
assumed the editorial responsibilities of the journal, suggesting papers and influenc-
ing the choice of editor who would replace Margenau upon retirement.50




Picture 4.3 (L-R): John Wheeler, Eugene Wigner. AIP Emilio Segre Visual Archives, Wheeler
Collection




Wigner to Margenau, 28 Dec 28, 1974 (MP, box 1, folder 12). Later, however, Wigner apparently
did not follow Margenau’s admission of extrasensory perception and remained skeptical about
Margenau’s essays on blending science and religion. See letter from Margenau to Wigner, 27 May
1988; and Wigner’s to Margenau, 30 June 1988 (WigP, box 56, folder 13). Documents from
Margenau’s views on extrasensory perception are in WigP (box 56, folder 13), and MP (box
1, folder 6).
49
See Foundations of Physics, 1970, 1, “editorial preface.”
50
Letter from Wigner to Robert Ubell, 24 Sep 1974, WigP, box 72, folder 3.
4.6 Wigner’s Style of Intellectual Leadership 165


A final example, and perhaps the most significant example of Wigner’s influence
on certain contemporaries, is John Archibald Wheeler, a physicist who was
well known for his insights, both sound and speculative, in fields as diverse as
cosmology and quantum physics. The two men were very close not only in science,
but also in political matters and in defense-related research. As we have seen,
Wigner and Wheeler were two of the “Princeton three” who were involved at the
outset in the JASON project. In foundations of quantum mechanics, however,
Wheeler’s views were very close to Bohr’s, but Wigner was so influential that by
the mid-1970s he had began to doubt what Bohr’s real opinion was on the role of
consciousness in the quantum measurement process. Haunted by this doubt, he
wrote the following to Niels Bohr’s son, Aage Bohr:
I have the impression, perhaps mistaken, that your father at one time thought that for the
making of an observation it only took in the end an irreversible account of amplification;
but that later on he changed his position to something closer to the idea that no observation
is an observation unless and until it enters the consciousness. However, I am not able to find
anything to document this supposed change of view and my understanding of the history
may be quite wrong.51

On receiving no response from the younger Bohr, he asked a friend who was in
Copenhagen, John Hopfield, to answer a list of some questions after consulting
Aage Bohr. This included the following item: “Niels Bohr did change position from
(a) ‘Measurement requires irreversible act of amplification’ to (b) something closer
to Wigner’s ‘a measurement is not a measurement until the result has entered the
consciousness’ YES ___; NO ___; QUESTION ILL DEFINED ___.” This time,
however, it did not take long for Aage Bohr to send a reply corroborating the
accuracy of Rosenfeld’s interpretation of Niels Bohr’s views. Aage Bohr wrote:
[. . .] our reactions can be deduced from the answers to the questionnaire which you have
formulated so cleverly that no evasion is possible. Let me just add that it is quite true that
my father strongly emphasized that for an unambiguous description it is essential to include
the detection device in the definition of a quantum phenomenon and even advocated that
one reserved the word ‘phenomenon’ for processes that are ‘closed’ in this sense. However,
I do not think he meant this to imply that the act of observation need have any effect on the
processes which generated the phenomenon in question.52

It is worth concluding these comments about Wigner’s style of intellectual
influence with a remark about a characteristic that the reader has surely noted,
namely, the non-dogmatic manner in which he dealt with subjects related to the
foundations of quantum mechanics. Shimony was well situated to demonstrate this
because his point of view on the role of the mind in quantum mechanics, different as
it was from Wigner’s, did not impinge on their close collaboration.53 According to

51
Wheeler to Aage Bohr, 25 Feb 1977; John Wheeler Papers, Series V, Notebook October 1976â€"
April 1977, American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, PA.
52
Wheeler to John Hopfield, 2 May 1977; Aage Bohr to Wheeler, 16 May 1977. Ibid.
53
In his first published paper on the foundations of quantum mechanics, Shimony (1963) analyzed
these two proposals for interpreting the quantum state evolution during measurements: von
Neumann’s and Bohr’s approaches. His point of view on the former was that “although this
166 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


Shimony (2004, p. 60), one of the salient features of Wigner’s contribution to the
measurement problems in quantum mechanics was “freedom from dogmatism,
open-mindedness towards new ideas, [. . .] and in general an exploratory attitude
regarding the frontiers of physics, other sciences, and of philosophy.” Still,
according to Shimony, “consequently, it is a historical error and a misunderstanding
of his work, to speak of ‘The Wigner solution to the measurement problem’ without
attention to his exploratory attitude.”
One last example is related to Wigner’s reaction to the approach suggested by
H. Dieter Zeh (1970). This approach was critical both of Wigner’s and of the Italian
physicists’ approach because both admitted the validity of Schrödinger’s equation
to describe the measurement devices, and according to Zeh, measurement devices
are not closed systems to which such an equation could be applied. While Zeh had
difficulty publishing his paper elsewhere, Wigner, upon receiving a preprint version
of Zeh’s paper, supported its publication in the first volume of Foundations of
Physics and opened his Varenna keynote talk with six possible solutions to the
measurement problem, Zeh’s solution being the last. According to Zeh, a prelim-
inary version (in German) of this paper had been rejected by several journals in
1967, “the usual answer being that ‘quantum theory does not apply to macroscopic
objects,’” a kind of answer based on Bohr’s and Rosenfeld’s point of view.54
Comparing Wigner’s and Rosenfeld’s styles as far as foundational issues are
concerned, it may be said that Wigner intentionally supported a wide debate on the
foundations of quantum mechanics, while Rosenfeld only unintentionally contrib-
uted to the opening of such a debate as he found there were no problems to be
solved in these foundations.


Epilogue and Conclusion: Orthodoxy Becomes Heterodoxy
After the clash with Wigner, Rosenfeld continued working on the measure-
ment processes in quantum theory. Privately, he acknowledged that the work
of the Italian physicists had shortcomings concerning its expressions, as he
wrote to F.J. Belinfante in the early 1970s.55
I agree with your mild criticism of the Italian physicists whose method is, as you say,
not entirely rigorous and also rather complicated. In fact this was the motivation for
me to give the simplified and I think also more strictly correct exposition of their
argument, which you quote.

(continued)


interpretation appears to be free from inconsistencies, it is not supported by psychological
evidence and it is difficult to reconcile with the inter-subjective agreement of several independent
observers.”
54
Wigner to Margenau [editor of Foundations of Physics], 31 March 1970, “I am really very glad
that Zeh’s paper was accepted.” MP, box 1, folder 12. Zeh (1970) thanks Wigner for his support of
his paper. For more information about the refusal of this paper, see Freire Jr. (2009, p. 281) and
Chap. 8.
55
L. Rosenfeld to F.J. Belinfante, 22 June 1972, RP.
4.6 Wigner’s Style of Intellectual Leadership 167



Still in the early 1970s he began a collaboration with the Belgian physical
chemist Ilya Prigogine and his colleague Claude George to better formulate
the macroscopic character of the measurement devices from the physical
point of view (George et al. 1972). They did not use the ergodic argument
used by the Italian physicists. Instead they used the kinetic approach of
statistical mechanics to deal with the time evolution of large atomic systems.
According to Rosenfeld’s biographer, Anja Jacobsen (2012, p. 312), in doing
so “Rosenfeld’s interpretation of the measurement process therefore appears
to have deviated from Bohr’s since Bohr had maintained that macroscopic
things such as measuring devices should be described classically.” This
approach did not get a wider audience. However, macroscopicity would
later become relevant in the studies on the processes called decoherence.
Indeed coupling between quantum systems and their environments would be
the key concept behind decoherence and one may roughly associate such
environments to the macroscopic features of measurement devices. While
decoherence did not solve the measurement problem (Pessoa Jr. 1998), it
constituted a step towards its understanding thus vindicating, to a certain
extent, some aspects of Rosenfeld’s approach to quantum measurement
processes.
Coming back to Wigner, let us conclude with three remarks: on Wigner’s
self-awareness of the role he played in the foundations of quantum mechan-
ics; on the success of his ideas and action; and on a very different question,
anachronism in the history of science. Shimony had the insight to record
Wigner’s feelings about the attitudinal changes he underwent. These changes
may also help us understand changes in the Zeitgeist of physicists in the 1960s
and early 1970s with respect to the foundations of quantum mechanics. By
attempting to defend what he considered to be the “quantum orthodoxy,” he
in fact helped to legitimize heterodoxy on this subject, and he himself became
a dissident. In Shimony’s (1997, p. 412) words: “Wigner recognized with
some relish a similarity between the ‘heterodox’ view that quantum mechan-
ics is only approximate in the physical world and the ‘orthodox’ view that a
reduction of the wave packet occurs only when there is a registration upon the
consciousness of an observer.” Shimony concluded, citing Wigner: “Both
points of view come to the conclusion that the validity of quantum mechan-
ics’ linear laws is limited.”
During the 1970s, the community working on the foundations of quantum
mechanics was mainly occupied with another subject, Bell’s inequalities and
their experimental tests. Wigner was not as interested in this subject as in
measurement problems, but he continued to play an active role until his
intellectual vigor began to fade. However, physicists continued to work on
the measurement problem research program and in the 1980s and 1990s it
matured into the decoherence approach with its first experimental results in

(continued)
168 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case



the middle of the 1990s. Where Wigner saw a role for the mind in quantum
measurements, the current trend is to look for an exchange of information
between the experimental devices and the environment (Zurek 1991; Haroche
1998). Wigner followed such developments and recanted both from his stance
on the role of mind in quantum measurements and from the defense of a
non-linear change in Schrödinger’s equation. He stated that, as suggested by
D. Zeh, macroscopic systems cannot be isolated from outside effects;
according to his words “this shows that the probabilistic phenomenon enters
not only when a living being observes, as I believed some time ago, but
already if any macroscopic system plays a role” (Wigner 1995[1983],
p. 136).56 Wigner had already become more skeptical of the non-linear
proposal. As he wrote to Shimony, in 1977, “there is only one point of
‘Abner’s views’ with which I do not agree. It is the implication that all is
needed is to make the equations of motion nonlinear. I believe that much
more fundamental changes will be necessaryâ€"as they were when a descrip-
tion of electromagnetism was introduced or when microscopic physics, that is
quantum mechanics, was created.”57 Today, Wigner’s conjecture about the
role of the mind in the quantum measurement process is no longer part of
physics, but rather part of the history of physics. Nevertheless, the question
persists and from time to time physicists devote some time to building
technical arguments against it (Brandt 2002). In contrast, Wigner’s research
programâ€"to understand from a physical point of view what quantum mea-
surement isâ€"has flourished and is part of physics; indeed it remains an open
question in the foundations of quantum mechanics. Furthermore, in order to
create this subfield of physics, foundations of quantum physics, it was
necessary to break what Jammer called the “Copenhagen monocracy.” As
stated by the French physicist Alain Aspect (2004), a leader in the field of
foundations of quantum physics and not at all a critic of the complementarity
view, “questioning the ‘orthodox’ views, including the famous Copenhagen
interpretation, might lead to an improved understanding of the quantum
mechanics formalism, even though that formalism remained impeccably
accurate.” Wigner made major contributions to achieving this goal. As a
token of recognition for his contributions, the “first comprehensive meeting
on the [foundations of quantum theory] to be held in the United States” was
dedicated to Eugene P. Wigner (Greenberger 1986, p. xiii).58

(continued)

56
I am thankful to Frederik Santos for discussions about Wigner’s withdrawal concerning the role
of mind and non-linearity in quantum physics; see his dissertation (Santos 2010, pp. 53â€"57).
Wigner’s recantation is also noted by Michael Nauenberg (2007, p. 1614).
57
Eugene Wigner to Abner Shimony, 12 Oct 1977, WigP, Box 83, folder 7.
58
Incidentally, the homage speech to Wigner, given by Arthur Wightman (1986), is, as far as I
know, the sole account of Schrödinger’s cat experiment from the perspective of cats.
4.6 Wigner’s Style of Intellectual Leadership 169



Current accounts of Wigner’s contributions to the understanding of the
foundations of quantum physics involve distinct perspectives. We have just
seen statements from people who valued his contributions highly. Let us now
examine opposing perspectives. Indeed, some contemporary physicists fail to
appreciate Wigner’s insight into the role of the mind in the measurement
problem of quantum theory. They read Wigner’s work neglecting to take into
account the role he played in the context of the 1960s. The first version of this
paper (Freire Jr. 2003b) appeared in a volume organized by the sociologist
Boaventura de Sousa Santos as part of a late battle of the science wars which
plagued culture and science in the 1990s. The paper was motivated by a
question formulated by the Portuguese physicist António M. Baptista as part
of his criticisms towards Santos. Baptista (2002, pp. 63â€"74) asked where a
serious physicist had said consciousness plays a role in measurements. He had
also written that Wigner speculated outside the boundaries of the natural
sciences. Baptista was not alone in this. Earlier, the Physics Nobel Prize
winner Murray Gell-Mann (1994, p. 155) had written: “. . . many sensible,
even brilliant commentators have written about the alleged importance of
human consciousness in the measurement process. Is it really so important?”
As we can conclude from this chapter, deprecating Wigner’s contribution
to the foundations of quantum mechanics constitutes an anachronistic reading
of events. It is a reading based on the current state of art of the problems and it
is a misreading of what actually happened at that time, the 1960s. A reference
to consciousness was a legitimate issue in the emergence of the quantum
measurement problem as a problem in physics. Furthermore, through his
ideas and action Wigner was instrumental in enhancing physicists’ awareness
of the foundational issues in quantum physics. Judging any historically
significant work by contemporary standards constitutes an anachronism and
anachronism does not facilitate our understanding of how science really
works as it gives rise to a distortion in the practice of science. It produces
distorted images of an idealized science.59
One of the aims of the study of the history of science is to rectify
anachronistic perceptions of science because, according to Lucien Febvre
(1982), historians should prevent the sin of all sinsâ€"the unforgivable sin,
anachronism. Historians know, however, that there is a tension implied.
According to Marc Bloch and Lucien Febvre, the creators of new

(continued)


59
At the time Santos invited me to participate in the book he was organizing, I thought the intrinsic
historic worth of Wigner’s case would be enough to justify its inclusion in a book organized to
criticize the hubris of contemporary scientism and to suggest, instead, the role of prudent
knowledge for a decent life, which was the theme of Santos’ book (2003). Parts of the book in
Portuguese were later translated into English; see Santos (2007) and Freire Jr. (2007). For
Baptista’s replica, see Baptista (2004, pp. 88â€"95).
170 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case



perspectives for the historical disciplines, historians should ask questions
about the past, and these questions may be provoked by contemporary
questions. Thus, still according to Febvre, the metaphor of sin for anachro-
nism should be further extended to its ultimate limits; as the original sin,
anachronism may be a source of knowledge (Dumoulin 1986).60


References

Aaserud, F.: Sputnik and the Princeton 3â€"the national-security laboratory that was not to be. Hist.
Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci. 25, 185â€"239 (1995)
Anderson, P.: Considerations on Western Marxism. NLB, London (1976)
Arthur, R.T.W.: Quantum-mechanics, a half century laterâ€"Lopes, JL, Paty, M. Philos. Sci. 48(1),
156â€"161 (1981)
Aspect, A.: Introduction. In: Bell, J.S. (ed.) Speakable and Unspeakable in Quantum Mechanics.
Cambridge University Press, New York (2004)
Ballentine, L.E.: Statistical interpretation of quantum mechanics. Rev. Mod. Phys. 42(4), 358â€"381
(1970)
Baptista, A.M.: O discurso pós-moderno contra a cieÌ‚nciaâ€"obscurantismo e irresponsabilidade,
2nd edn. Lisboa, Gradiva (2002)
Baptista, A.M.: Crı́tica da razão ausente. Gradiva, Lisboa (2004)
Bensaude-Vincent, B.: Langevin 1872â€"1946 science et vigilance. Belin, Paris (1987)
Bloch, M.: The Historian’s Craft. Vintage Books, New York (1953)
Bohm, D., Bub, J.: A proposed solution of measurement problem in quantum mechanics by a
hidden variable theory. Rev. Mod. Phys. 38(3), 453â€"469 (1966a)
Bohm, D., Bub, J.: A refutation of proof by Jauch and Piron that hidden variables can be excluded
in quantum mechanics. Rev. Mod. Phys. 38(3), 470â€"475 (1966b)
Bohr, N.: Discussion with Einstein on epistemological problems in atomic physics. In: Schilpp,
P.A. (ed.) Albert Einsteinâ€"Philosopherâ€"Scientist, pp. 199â€"242. The Library of the Living
Philosophers, Evanston (1949)
Brandt, H.E.: Deconstructing Wigner’s density matrix concerning the mind-body question. Found.
Phys. Lett. 15(3), 287â€"292 (2002)
Christie, J.R.R.: The development of the historiography of science. In: Olby, R.C., Cantor, G.N.,
Christie, J.R.R. (eds.) Companion to the History of Modern Science, pp. 5â€"22. Routledge,
London (1990)
D’Espagnat, B.: Two remarks on the theory of measurement. Suppl. al Nuovo Cimento 1, 828â€"838
(1966)


60
There is further significance in quoting Marc Bloch as there are some parallelisms between
Bloch’s and Santos’ intellectual démarches. In “A Discourse on the Sciences,” Boaventura de
Sousa Santos (2001) took into account what seemed to him to be lessons from the natural sciences
in order to reflect on the changing paradigms of social sciences. Marc Bloch (1953), in a beautiful
but unfinished essay about the historian’s craft, written sometime before being killed by the Nazis
on June 16, 1944, on the order of Klaus Barbie, affirmed that our mental environment was not the
same anymore. Quantum physics, relativity theory, and the kinetic theory of gases soundly
changed the ideas we had formed about science, making it more flexible, he wrote. Bloch added
that we were then better prepared to admit that historical knowledge, even without Euclidian
proofs or immutable laws of repetition, could nevertheless aim to be named scientific. For an
analogous argument, see Gaddis (2002).
References 171

d’Espagnat, B.: Foundations of Quantum Mechanicsâ€"Proceedings of the International School of
Physics “Enrico Fermi”. Academic, New York (1971)
Daneri, A., Prosperi, G.M., Loinger, A.: Quantum theory of measurement and ergodicity condi-
tions. Nucl. Phys. 33(2), 297â€"319 (1962) [reprinted in Wheeler, J.A., Zurek, W.H. (eds.)
Quantum Theory and Measurement, pp. 1657â€"1679. Princeton University Press (1983)]
Daneri, A., Loinger, A., Prosperi, G.M.: Further remarks on relations between statistical mechan-
ics and quantum theory of measurement. Nuovo Cimento B 44(1), 119â€"128 (1966)
Doncel, M.G., Michel, L., Six, J.: Interview de Eugene P. Wigner sur sa vie scientifique. Arch Int
Hist Sci 34(112), 177â€"217 (1984)
Dumoulin, O.: Anachronisme. Dictionnaire des sciences historiques, pp. 34â€"35. A. Burguière (ed).
Presses Universitaires de France, Paris (1986)
Duncan, A., Janssen, M.: (Never) Mind your p’s and q’s: Von Neumann versus Jordan on the
foundations of quantum theory. Eur Phys J H 38(2), 175â€"259 (2013)
Einstein, A., Podolsky, B., Rosen, N.: Can quantum-mechanical description of physical reality be
considered complete? Phys. Rev. 47, 777â€"780 (1935)
Esfeld, M.: Wigner’s view of physical reality. Stud. Hist. Philos. Mod. Phys. 30(1), 145â€"154
(1999)
Everett, H., Barrett, J.A., Byrne, P.: The Everett interpretation of quantum mechanics : collected
works 1955-1980 with commentary. Princeton University Press, Princeton (2012)
Febvre, L.P.V.: The problem of unbelief in the sixteenth century, the religion of Rabelais. Harvard
University Press, Cambridge, MA (1982)
Feyerabend, P.K.: On the quantum-theory of measurement. In: Körner, S. (ed.) Observation and
Interpretation in Physics, pp. 121â€"130. Butterworths Scientific Publications, Dover, NY (1957)
Finkbeiner, A.: The Jasons: The Secret History of Science’s Postwar Elite. Viking, New York
(2006)
Freire Jr., O.: L’interprétation de la mécanique quantique selon Paul Langevin. La Pensée 292,
117â€"134 (1993)
Freire Jr., O.: A story without an ending: the quantum physics controversy 1950-1970. Sci. Educ.
12(5â€"6), 573â€"586 (2003a)
Freire Jr., O.: O debate sobre a imagem da cieÌ‚nciaâ€"a propósito das ideias e da ação de E. P.
Wigner. Conhecimento Prudente para uma vida Decenteâ€"‘Um Discurso sobre as CieÌ‚ncias’
revisitado. B. S. Santos. Porto, Edições Afrontamento, pp 481â€"506 (2003b)
Freire Jr., O.: The historical roots of “foundations of quantum mechanics” as a field of research
(1950â€"1970). Found. Phys. 34(11), 1741â€"1760 (2004)
Freire Jr., O.: Orthodoxy and heterodoxy in the research on the foundations of quantum physics:
E.P. Wigner’s case. In: Santos, B.d.S. (ed) Cognitive Justice in a Global World: Prudent
Knowledges for a Decent Life, pp. 203â€"224. Lexington Books, Lanham, MD (2007)
Freire Jr., O.: Quantum dissidents: research on the foundations of quantum mechanics circa 1970.
Stud. Hist. Philos. Mod. Phys. 40(4), 280â€"289 (2009)
Frisch, O.R., Frisch, O.R.: The conceptual problem of quantum theory from the experimentalist’s
point of view. In: Bastin, T. (ed.) Quantum Theory and Beyondâ€"Essays and Discussions
Arising From a Colloquium, pp. 13â€"21. Cambridge University Press, London (1971)
Gaddis, J.L.: The Landscape of History: How Historians Map the Past. Oxford University Press,
New York (2002)
Gavroglu, K.: Fritz London a Scientific Biography. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge
(1995)
Gell-Mann, M.: The Quark and the Jaguar: Adventures in the Simple and the Complex.
W.H. Freeman, New York (1994)
George, C., Rosenfeld, L., Prigogine, I.: Macroscopic level of quantum-mechanics. Nature 240
(5375), 25â€"27 (1972)
Greenberger, D. (ed.): New techniques and ideas in quantum measurement theory, vol. 480.
Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, New York (1986)
172 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


Hall, J., Kim, C., Mcelroy, B., Shimony, A.: Wave-packet reduction as a medium of communi-
cation. Found. Phys. 7(9â€"10), 759â€"767 (1977)
Hargittai, I.: The Martians of Science: Five Physicists Who Changed the Twentieth Century.
Oxford UniversityPress, Oxford, New York (2006)
Haroche, S.: Entanglement, decoherence and the quantum/classical boundary. Phys. Today 51(7),
36â€"42 (1998)
Heidelberger, M.: The Mind-body problem in the origin of logical empiricism: Herbert Feigl and
psychophysical parallelism. In: Parrini, P., Salmon, M.H., Salmon, W.C. (eds.) Logical
Empiricism: Historical and Contemporary Perspectives, pp. 233â€"262. University of Pittsburgh
Press, Pittsburgh, PA (2003)
Heims, S.J.: John Von Neumann and Norbert Wiener: From Mathematics to the Technologies of
Life and Death. MIT Press, Cambridge, MA (1980)
Home, D., Whitaker, M.A.B.: Ensemble interpretations of quantum-mechanicsâ€"a modern per-
spective. Phys Rep Rev Sect Phys Lett 210(4), 223â€"317 (1992)
Institut international de coopération intellectuelle: Les Nouvelles théories de la physique. I.I.C.I,
Paris (1939). Varsovie, 30 mai-3 juin 1938
Jacobsen, A.: Léon Rosenfeldâ€"Physics, Philosophy, and Politics in the Twentieth Century. World
Scientific, Singapore (2012)
Jammer, M.: The Philosophy of Quantum Mechanicsâ€"The Interpretations of Quantum Mechanics
in Historical Perspective. Wiley, New York (1974)
Jauch, J.M.: Problem of Measurement in Quantum Mechanics. Helv Phys Acta 37(4â€"5), 293â€"316
(1964)
Jauch, J.M., Piron, C.: Can hidden variables be excluded in quantum mechanics. Helv Phys Acta
36(7), 827â€"837 (1963)
Jauch, J.M., Wigner, E.P., Yanase, M.M.: Some comments concerning measurements in quantum
mechanics. Nuovo Cimento B 48(1), 144â€"151 (1967)
Jha, S.: Wigner’s “Polanyian” epistemology and the measurement problem: the Wigner-Polanyi
dialog on tacit knowledge. Phys. Perspect. 13(3), 329â€"358 (2011)
Jordan, P.: On the process of measurement in quantum mechanics. Philos. Sci. 16, 269â€"278 (1949)
Körner, S.: Observation and interpretationâ€"a symposium of philosophers and physicists.
Butterworths, London (1957)
Kuhn, T.S.: Sources for history of quantum physics; an inventory and report [by] Thomas S. Kuhn
[and others]. American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia (1967)
Lacki, J.: The early axiomatizations of quantum mechanics: Jordan, Von Neumann and the
continuation of Hilbert’s program. Arch. Hist. Exact Sci. 54(4), 279â€"318 (2000)
Leggett, A.J.: Reflections on the quantum measurement paradox. In: Hiley, B., Peat, D. (eds.)
Quantum implicationsâ€"essays in honour of David Bohm, pp. 85â€"104. Routledge, London
(1987)
Loinger, A.: Comments on a recent paper concerning quantum theory of measurement. Nucl. Phys.
A A108(2), 245â€"249 (1968)
London, F., Bauer, E.: La théorie de l’observation en mécanique quantique. Hermann, Paris
(1939). English translation in Wheeler & Zurek 1983, pp. 217â€"259
Ludwig, G.: Der Messprozess. Zeitschrift Fur Physik 135(5), 483â€"511 (1953)
Macrae, N.: John von Neumann. Pantheon Books, New York (1992)
Margenau, H., Wigner, E.P.: Comments on Putnam commentsâ€"discussion. Philos. Sci. 29(3),
292â€"293 (1962)
Mehra, J., Wigner, E.P.: A biographical sketch. In: Wigner, P. (ed.) The Collected Works of
Eugene Paul Wigner, Part A, pp. 3â€"14. Springer, Berlin (1993)
Moore, K.: Disrupting Science: Social Movements, American Scientists, and the Politics of the
Military, 1945-1975. Princeton University Press, Princeton (2008)
Nauenberg, M.: Critique of “quantum enigma: physics encounters consciousness”. Found. Phys.
37, 1612â€"1627 (2007)
References 173

Nye, M.J.: Michael Polanyi and His Generation: Origins of the Social Construction of Science.
The University of Chicago Press, Chicago, London (2011)
Osnaghi, S., Freitas, F., Freire Jr., O.: The origin of the Everettian heresy. Stud. Hist. Philos. Mod.
Phys. 40(2), 97â€"123 (2009)
Pessoa Jr., O.: Can the decoherence approach help to solve the measurement problem? Synthese
113, 323â€"346 (1998)
Pessoa Jr., O., Freire Jr., O., De Greiff, A.: The Tausk controversy on the foundations of quantum
mechanics: physics, philosophy and politics. Phys. Perspect. 10(2), 138â€"162 (2008)
Rosenfeld, L. (1953). L’évidence de la complementarité. In: George, A. (ed.) Louis de Broglieâ€"
physicien et penseur, pp. 43â€"65. Editions Albin Michel, Paris [A slightly modified English
version of this paper is Strife about complementarity, Science progress, 163 (1953),
1393â€"1410, reprinted in Robert Cohen and John Stachel (eds.). Selected papers of Léon
Rosenfeld (Dordrecht, D. Reidel, 1979)
Rosenfeld, L.: Measuring process in quantum mechanics. Suppl. Prog. Theor. Phys., 222â€"231
(1965)
Rosenfeld, L.: Questions of method in consistency problem of quantum mechanics. Nucl. Phys. A
A108(2), 241â€"244 (1968)
Rosenfeld, L., Cohen, R.S., Stachel, J.J.: Selected Papers of Léon Rosenfeld. D. Reidel Publishing
Company, Dordrecht (1979)
Santos, B.S.: Um discurso sobre as ciências, 12th edn. Afrontamento, Porto (2001)
Santos, B.S. (ed.): Conhecimento Prudente para uma Vida Decenteâ€"‘Um Discurso sobre as
CieÌ‚ncias’ revisitado. Edições Afrontamento, Porto (2003)
Santos, B.S.: Cognitive Justice in a Global World: Prudent Knowledges for a Decent Life.
Lexington Books, Lanham, MD (2007)
Santos, F.M.: Na fronteira entre a Ciência e a Filosofia: Reflexões Filosóficas de Eugene Wigner.
Master Dissertation, Universidade Federal da Bahia (2010)
Santos, F.M., Pessoa Jr., O.: Delineando o Problema da Medição na Mec^anica Qu^antica: o debate
de E. P. Wigner e H. Margenau versus H. Putnam. Scientiae Studia 9, 625â€"644 (2011)
Schrödinger, E.: The present situation in quantum mechanics. In: Wheeler, J.A., Zurek,
W.H. (eds.) Quantum Theory and Measurement, pp. 152â€"167. Princeton University Press,
Princeton, NJ (1983). Original publication in Naturwissenchaften 123, 807â€"812, 823â€"828,
844â€"849, 1935
Schweber, S.S.: Wigner’s vast output: four of the eight planned volumes. Physics Today October,
pp. 65â€"66 (1996)
Schweber, S.S.: Writing the biography of Hans Bethe: contextual history and Paul Forman. Phys.
Perspect. 6, 179â€"217 (2014)
Seitz, F., Vogt, E., Weinberg, A.: Eugene Paul Wigner. Biogr. Mem. Natl Acad. Sci. 74, 364â€"388
(1998)
Shimony, A.: Role of observer in quantum theory. Am. J. Phys. 31(10), 755â€"773 (1963)
Shimony, A.: Search for a Naturalistic World View. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge
(1993). 2 vols
Shimony, A.: Wigner on Foundations of Quantum Mechanics. The Collected Works of Eugene
Paul Wigner, Part Aâ€"Vol III, Particles and Fields; Foundations of Quantum Mechanics.
Springer, Berlin (1997)
Shimony, A.: Wigner’s contributions to the quantum theory of measurement. Acta Phys. Hung. B
20, 59â€"72 (2004)
Süssmann, G.: An analysis of measurement. In: Körner, S. (ed.) Observation and Interpretation: A
Symposium of Philosophers and Physicists, pp. 131â€"147. Butterworths, London (1957)
Von Neumann, J.: Mathematical Foundations of Quantum Mechanics. Princeton University Press,
Princeton, NJ (1955)
Weinberg, A.M.: Eugene Wigner, nuclear engineer. Phys. Today 55(10), 42â€"46 (2002)
Westfall, C.: Wigner, Eugene Paul. In: Koertge, N. (ed.) New Dictionary of Scientific Biography.
8, pp. 293â€"297. Thomson Gale, New York (2008)
174 4 The Monocracy is Broken: Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy, and Wigner’s Case


Wheeler, J.A., Zurek, W.H.: Quantum Theory and Measurement. Princeton University Press,
Princeton, NJ (1983)
Whitaker, M.A.B.: Theory and experiment in the foundations of quantum theory. Prog Quantum
Electron 24, 1â€"106 (2000)
Wightman, A.: E.P. Wigner: an introduction. In: Greenberger, D. (ed.) New techniques and ideas
in quantum theory measurement. The New York Academy of Sciences, New York (1986). xvâ€"
xvii
Wigner, E.P.: Die Messung Quantenmechanischer Operatoren. Zeitschrift Fur Physik 133(1-2),
101â€"108 (1952). Reprinted in Wigner (1995, pp. 1147â€"1154)
Wigner, E.P.: Remarks on the mind-body question. In: Good, I.J. (ed.) The Scientist Speculates:
An Anthology of Partly-Baked Ideas, pp. 284â€"302. Heinemann, London (1961). Reprinted in
Wheeler, J.A., Zurek, W.H. (eds.) Quantum Theory and Measurement, pp. 168â€"181. Princeton
University Press, Princeton (1983)
Wigner, E.P.: Problem of measurement. Am. J. Phys. 31(1), 6â€"15 (1963)
Wigner, E.P.: Philosophical Reflections and Syntheses. Springer, Berlin (1995)
Wigner, E.P.: The Probability of the Existence of a Self-Reproducing Unit. The Collected Works
of E. P. Wigner, Part A â€" Vol III. Springer, Berlin (1997a)
Wigner, E.P.: Are We Machines? The Collected Works of E.P. Wigner, Part Aâ€"Vol III. Springer,
Berlin (1997b)
Wigner, E.P.: The place of consciousness in modern physics. In: Wigner, E.P. (ed.) Philosophilcal
Reflections and Syntheses, pp. 261â€"267. Springer, Berlin (1995[1972])
Wigner, E.P: Epistemological perspective on quantum theory. In: Wigner, E.P. (ed) Philosophical
Reflections and Syntheses, pp. 55â€"71. Springer, Berlin (1995[1973])
Wigner, E.P.: The limitations of determinism. In: Wigner, E.P. (ed.) Philosophical Reflections and
Syntheses, pp. 133â€"138. Springer, Berlin (1995[1983])
Wigner, E.P., Szanton, A.: The Recollections of Eugene P. Wigner as Told to Andrew Szanton.
Plenum, New York (1992)
Zeh, H.D.: On the interpretations of measurement in quantum theory. Found. Phys. 1, 69â€"76
(1970). Reprinted in Wheeler and Zurek, Quantum Theory and Measurement, pp. 342â€"349
Zurek, W.H.: Decoherence and the Transition from Quantum to Classical. Phys. Today 44(10),
36â€"44 (1991)
Chapter 5
The Tausk Controversy on the Foundations
of Quantum Mechanics: Physics, Philosophy,
and Politics


Abstract In 1966 the Brazilian physicist Klaus Tausk (1927-2012) circulated a
preprint from the International Centre for Theoretical Physics in Trieste, Italy,
criticizing Adriana Daneri, Angelo Loinger,and Giovanni Maria Prosperi’s theory
of 1962 on the measurement problem in quantum mechanics. A heated controversy
ensued between two opposing camps within the orthodox interpretation of quantum
theory, represented by Léon Rosenfeld and Eugene P. Wigner. The controversy
went well beyond the strictly scientific issues, however, reflecting philosophical
and political commitments within the context of the Cold War, the relationship
between science in developed and Third World countries, the importance of social
skills, and personal idiosyncrasies.


5.1 Introduction

Klaus Stefan Tausk was born in Graz, Austria, on April 11, 1927, and emigrated as
a youth with his Jewish parents to São Paulo, Brazil, in 1938. He is virtually
unknown among physicists and historians of physics today, although he was one
of the protagonists in a controversy that helped to establish the field of the
foundations of quantum mechanics: In 1966, while working as a doctoral student
at the International Centre for Theoretical Physics (ICTP) in Trieste, Italy, he
circulated a preprint (Tausk 1966), based upon some original arguments, in which
he criticized a paper that Adriana Daneri, Angelo Loinger, and Giovanni Maria
Prosperi had published in 1962 (Daneri et al. 1962). The ensuing heated contro-
versy went well beyond strictly scientific issues, with a number of prominent
theoretical physicists, including Léon Rosenfeld, David Bohm, Josef Maria
Jauch, Eugene P. Wigner, and John S. Bell taking sides in it. Tausk’s work was
eventually neglected and ultimately forgotten, even by those who used it to advance
their own interpretations of quantum mechanics. Tausk’s failure to be recognized
for his achievement, in our view, can be attributed to his careless and aggressive


This chapter is based on the paper with the same title, co-authored by Osvaldo Pessoa Jr., Olival
Freire Jr., and Alexis De Greiff, Physics in Perspective 10 (2008) 138â€"162. The original text had
its format fitted to the editorial guidelines for this book. References were updated.
Acknowledgements are in the original paper.

© Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2015 175
O. Freire Junior, The Quantum Dissidents, DOI 10.1007/978-3-662-44662-1_5
176 5 The Tausk Controversy on the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics: Physics. . .


style of writing and to his inadequate social skills in communicating his ideas. It
also was conditioned by the circumstances surrounding the ongoing debate on the
foundations of quantum mechanics, in particular, the lack of respect for this field in
the eyes of most physicists at the time, and by the controversial reputation of the
ICTP owing to its questionable publication policy. The historian and philosopher of
science Ernan McMullin has emphasized that scientific controversies involve much
more than logical problems concerning hypotheses and evidence; they are social
conflicts involving personality traits and other historical contingencies.1 The Tausk
controversy took place within the context of particular scientific, historical, philo-
sophical, and political circumstances: The foundations of quantum mechanics had
become controversial among physicists for a number of reasons, including the
issues raised by the Bohr-Einstein debate of 1935, by Soviet criticisms of Bohr’s
principle of complementarity in the 1950s, and especially by David Bohm’s “causal
interpretation” of quantum mechanics of 1952 (Bohm 1952), which offered a
deterministic picture based upon “hidden variables,”2 an interpretation that was
set within the political context of the Cold War, as he have discussed in Chap. 2.
This impinged upon the Tausk controversy, as we shall see, but it also was affected
by a different kind of politics, one that reflected attitudes of physicists working in
scientific centers in developed countries toward those working in Third World
countries, a tension that was mediated by the concrete institutional setting of the
ICTP in Trieste, Italy.



5.2 Scientific Background

Tausk’s preprint focused on the “measurement problem,” one of the central prob-
lems in the foundations of quantum mechanics.3 Setting aside the more heterodox
proposals such as Bohm’s causal interpretation of 1952 and Hugh Everett’s relative-
state interpretation of 1957,4 by the late 1950s there were two orthodox points of
view that divided theoretical physicists on the measurement problem.
On one side were physicists such as John von Neumann, Georg Süssmann, Josef
Maria Jauch,5 and Eugene P. Wigner, who described the measurement apparatus


1
McMullin (1987, pp. 51â€"54 and 59â€"61). See also “Controversies,” Science in Context 11
(2) (1998), 147â€"325, and Collins and Pinch (1993).
2
See Cushing (1994, pp. 42â€"75).
3
Jammer (1974, pp. 470â€"521) and d’Espagnat (1989, pp. 159â€"229).
4
Bohm (1952) and Everett (1957).
5
Jauch was born in Lucerne, Switzerland, on September 20, 1914, received his Diplom at the
Federal Institute of Technology (Eidgenössische Technische Hochschule) in Zurich in 1938, and
his PhD degree in theoretical physics at the University of Minnesota in 1939. He then returned to
Zurich as an Assistant in theoretical physics (1940â€"1942), but then left again for the United States,
where he was an Instructor and Assistant Professor of Physics at Princeton University (1942â€"
1945), a research physicist at Bell Telephone Laboratories (1945â€"1946), and Associate and Full
5.2 Scientific Background 177


used in quantum-mechanical experiments in an exact way (that is, without approx-
imations) as a quantum system. Sometimes called the “Princeton school,”6 they
applied the Schrödinger equation (or another equivalent equation describing a
unitary state evolution) to the composite system consisting of apparatus and
quantum object, and concluded that such a description is insufficient to account
for all aspects of the measurement processâ€"a formal result that was an example of
what became known as an “impossibility proof,” which von Neumann first derived
in 1932,7 and which served to justify his “projection postulate” describing the
discrete change of state as an indeterministic process that accompanies a measure-
ment. The projection postulate thus was regarded as an independent principle, to be
added to the five fundamental axioms (or six, if one considers indistinguishable
particles) of nonrelativistic quantum mechanics (d’Espagnat 1989, pp. 14â€"29). The
impossibility proof, as reformulated by Wigner (1963), prohibited the reduction of
the projection postulate to the other fundamental axioms.
On the other side of the postwar debate were physicists such as Niels Bohr,
Pascual Jordan, Günther Ludwig, Paul Feyerabend, H.S. Green, Adriana Daneri,
Angelo Loinger, Giovanni Maria Prosperi, and Léon Rosenfeld, who argued that
the measurement process can be described adequately by a statistical mechanics of
quantum processes, which would amount to a thermodynamic approach. These
physicists were closely allied to the orthodox Copenhagen interpretation and its
central concept of complementarity,8 but they proposed to modify it by introducing
certain approximations in the limit of large numbers. Some, such as Jordan (1949),
clearly pointed out the statistical hypothesis that was being used and proposed to
simply substitute it for the projection postulate. Others, such as Daneri, Loinger,
and Prosperi in 1962, argued that the approximations involved no fundamental
physical principle, so the projection postulate could be eliminated and reduced to
the other fundamental axioms. This clashed with the impossibility proof and stirred
up the debate on the measurement problem, beginning with the papers that
Feyerabend and Süssmann presented at the Colson Research Society Symposium
at the University of Bristol, England, in 1957.9
The postwar thermodynamic approach arose as an “objectivist” alternative to the
“idealistic” views that were widespread in the 1930s. Bohr clearly reflected this
change when he stressed in 1958 that a measurement could be made in the absence
of a conscious observer, “based on registrations obtained by means of suitable
amplification devices with irreversible functioning....”10 The idea was that a

Professor of Physics at the University of Iowa (1946â€"1959) before returning to his home country
permanently in 1960 as Professor of Physics at the University of Geneva.
6
Ballentine (1970, p. 360). See a more extensive discussion on these two fields about the
measurement processes in quantum mechanics in Chap. 4.
7
Von Neumann (1932, pp. 157â€"173); English translation in Von Neumann (1955).
8
Jammer (1974, pp. 86â€"107 and 197â€"211).
9
P.K. Feyerabend, “On the quantum-theory of measurement,” and G. Süssmann, “An analysis of
measurement,” in Körner (1957, pp. 121â€"130 and 131â€"136).
10
Niels Bohr, “Unity of Knowledge,” in Bohr (1958, pp. 67â€"82, quote on p. 73).
178 5 The Tausk Controversy on the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics: Physics. . .


measurement is an objective thermodynamic process. The problem that was left
open was how to describe mathematically, in the most satisfactory way, the
irreversible amplification process that leads from a microscopic event to a macro-
scopic registration.
Daneri, Loinger, and Prosperi (hereafter DLP), who were working in the Milan
section of the Italian Istituto Nazionale di Fisica Nucleare, published the most
ambitious theory of the thermodynamic-amplification approach in 1962 in the
journal Nuclear Physics edited by Léon Rosenfeld (Daneri et al. 1962).11 They
divided the measurement process into two stages. First, the microscopic quantum
object interacts with the apparatus as prepared in a “metastable” state, which
produces a nonequilibrium state. Second, amplification takes place, which involves
certain restrictions known as “ergodicity conditions” and which, as defined by Léon
van Hove (1959), were weaker than those used earlier. They guaranteed that the
system would return to equilibrium, according to the expected behavior of the
measurement apparatus, in the limit of an infinite amount of time. Rosenfeld
approved of DLP’s theory, emphasizing the importance of the second, amplification
stage.12
DLP’s theory was the culmination of a series of investigations that Milanese and
Pavian theoretical physicists, such as Loinger, Prosperi, Pietro Bocchieri, and
Antonio Scotti, had undertaken since the end of the 1950s on the ergodic hypothesis
and its applications in statistical mechanics and quantum mechanics. Specifically,
their search for a more realist solution to the measurement problem, in opposition to
von Neumann’s, was inspired by the Italian theoretical physicist Piero Caldirola,
who helped to popularize DLP’s theory in 1965, which subsequently was widely
cited in the literature.13
The thermodynamic approach gradually declined in importance, however, for
two main reasons. First, Wigner’s arguments of 1963, which as noted above were
based upon the impossibility proof, undermined it (Wigner 1963). Second, Tausk’s
argument of 1966, as well as Jauch, Wigner, and Mutsuo M. Yanase’s of 1967,
which were based upon “negative-result measurements,” as had been discussed by
physicist Mauritius Renninger at the University of Marburg, Germany, in 1960,
also undermined it.14 Consider the following example. Imagine an experiment in
which a quantum-mechanical object (we will call it a “particle” but will not require
it to have a well-defined position) strikes with equal probability one of two
detectors placed in paths A and B. Now suppose that the detector in path A is
removed and the particle is sent to the apparatus. If after a certain time the observer
sees no signal at the detector in path B (assuming that the detectors are perfectly


11
Reprinted in Wheeler and Zurek (1983).
12
Rosenfeld (1965, pp. 225, 230); reprinted in Rosenfeld et al. (1979, pp. 536â€"546, especially
pp. 539â€"540 and 545).
13
Caldirola (1965) and Garuccio and Leone (2002, pp. 66â€"68 and 78â€"90). Until January 2014,
DLP’s paper was cited 180 times in the literature; see the ISI Web of Science.
14
Tausk (1966), Jauch et al. (1967, pp. 150â€"151) and Renninger (1960).
5.3 Tausk in Trieste 179


efficient), the observer then would conclude that the particle traveled along path A,
which amounts to a state reduction or collapse. No amplification occurred, how-
ever, which clearly shows that amplification is not a necessary condition for state
reduction or collapse (although in practice it might be a sufficient condition).
Although Tausk’s 1966 argument, which was based upon such negative-result
measurements, was seen by many as a knock-out argument against DLP’s theory
following Jauch, Wigner, and Yanase’s paper of 1967, Loinger defended it in 1968,
showing that it did not require amplification (Loinger 1968). Their formalism
required only that a coupling had to exist between quantum object and detector, a
situation that Robert H. Dicke clarified much later, in 1981 (Dicke 1981).



5.3 Tausk in Trieste

Tausk studied physics at the University of São Paulo, Brazil, from 1947 to 1951,
and later worked there on cosmic-ray experiments with the Czech physicist Kurt
Sitte in 1953â€"1954.15 He also became acquainted with David Bohm, who worked
there from October 1951 to January 1955, although Tausk later claimed that he was
not influenced by Bohm’s causal interpretation, because he did not have an ade-
quate understanding of quantum mechanics at the time.16 Tausk then interrupted his
studies for a few years, beginning graduate research in 1958, which included a year
in Hamburg (1959â€"1960) to work with Harry Lehman on quantum-field theory.
Tausk also met Georg Süssmann in Hamburg, who was on a visit from Frankfurt,
and who was doing significant work on measurement theory in quantum mechanics
(Süssmann 1958).
Returning to São Paulo in 1962, Tausk read a paper of 1960 by Hitoshi Wakita
on the measurement problem in quantum mechanics (Wakita 1960), which stimu-
lated his interest in the subject, and he also came across Renninger’s paper of 1960
on negative-result measurements. Renninger had used the thought experiment
noted above to criticize the Copenhagen interpretation of quantum mechanics,
denying that every measurement produces an uncontrollable disturbance on the
observed object (Renninger 1960).17 Tausk too then began to question the Copen-
hagen interpretation and to work on the measurement problem.


15
On Tausk and Sitte work on cosmic-rays, see Andrade (2004). Sitte was born in Reichenberg,
Bohemia (Liberec, Czechoslovakia) on December 1, 1910, and received his PhD degree in physics
at the German University of Prague in 1933. As a non-Jew but outspoken left-wing anti-Nazi, he
was arrested in Prague immediately after the German invasion of Czechoslovakia in March 1939,
was imprisoned in the Dachau and Buchenwald concentration camps, and was liberated in April
1945. After the war, he had appointments at the Universities of Edinburgh and Manchester (1946â€"
1948) and at Syracuse University (1948â€"953) before accepting a visiting professorship at the
University of São Paulo, Brazil (1953â€"1954) and subsequently an appointment at the Technion in
Haifa, Israel. Later he was imprisoned in Israel convicted of espionage favoring the USSR.
16
Osvaldo Pessoa Jr., interviews of Klaus S. Tausk, 1991 and 1999. On Bohm, see Chap. 2.
17
For a discussion of Renninger’s work, see Jammer (1974, pp. 495â€"496).
180 5 The Tausk Controversy on the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics: Physics. . .


In 1965 Tausk wrote to Abdus Salam, Director of the International Centre for
Theoretical Physics (ICTP), in Trieste, Italy, presenting himself as a doctoral
student of the renowned Brazilian theoretical physicist Mario Schönberg, and
received a scholarship to work at the ICTP. The ICTP had been created in June
1963 as a division of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) with the
support of UNESCO.18
The ICTP was in a delicate situation at the time, because it had been created over
the opposition of India, the Soviet Union, the United States, and most of the
developed countries. The Swedish physicist Sigvard Eklund, Director of the
IAEA, was a friend of Rosenfeld, who during the negotiations to create the ICTP
had proposed that it be located in Copenhagen, not Trieste. Rosenfeld and his
Danish colleagues felt that the IAEA should support regional institutions such as
NORDITA in Copenhagen, because they were skeptical about supporting a center
for theoretical physics in Trieste whose goal was to create a scientific elite in Third
World countries.19
Tausk spent just over a year at the ICTP in Trieste, from the middle of 1965 until
the end of September 1966. He had applied to the ICTP to carry out research on
quantum-field theory, but he actually continued his studies on the measurement
problem. Toward the end of his stay, he finished writing a paper entitled “Relation
of Measurement with Ergodicity, Macroscopic Systems, Information and Conser-
vation Laws” (Tausk 1966), in which he criticized the aforementioned paper by
Daneri et al. (1962), as well as the orthodox Copenhagen interpretation of quantum
mechanics, especially the version of it that Werner Heisenberg had published in
1958 (Heisenberg 1958, pp. 44â€"58). He also criticized the preprint of a new paper
by the Italian trio that circulated in February 1966 (Daneri et al. 1966). Tausk wrote
his paper as a thesis to be submitted to the International Advanced School of
Physics, a division of the ICTP under the directorship of Luciano Fonda.20 It
began to circulate among physicists in August 1966.
As a scientist working at the ICTP, Tausk had the right to request that his paper
be typed and fifty copies printed, without any refereeing, as an internal report of the
ICTP. Contrary to the usual procedure, however, Tausk added an official ICTP
cover to each copy of the report. He soon apologized to Rosenfeld for this breach in
procedure, blaming it on his “ignorance of the regulations, a series of misunder-
standings and to the absence of part of the staff from the Centre at the time....”21
Tausk distributed his report as a preprint to a number of theoretical physicists,
including Süssmann in Frankfurt, Germany; the Argentinian Daniele Amati, who


18
United Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cultural Organization.
19
Nordisk Institut for Teoretisk Fysik (NORDITA). On the creation of the ICTP, see
Greiff (2002).
20
On Tausk’s research proposal, see Luciano Fonda, “Report [to Salam] on the Fellows of the
Centre,” February 10, 1967, D.1713, International Advanced School of Physics, ICTP, Trieste.
21
Klaus Tausk to Rosenfeld, 10 Oct 1966, Léon Rosenfeld Papers (RP hereafter), Niels Bohr
Archive, Copenhagen.
5.4 Loinger’s and Rosenfeld’s Attacks 181


had studied a few years in Rio de Janeiro and now worked in Trieste; the
South African Jeffrey Bub, who had received his PhD degree under Bohm at
Birkbeck College, University of London, in 1966 and now was a Research Spe-
cialist at the University of Minnesota in Minneapolis; and the French Marxist Jean-
Pierre Vigier in Paris, whom Tausk had met in São Paulo in 1954 while Vigier was
working with Bohm there. Tausk encountered Vigier again in Trieste, who
extended an offer to Tausk to work with him and Louis de Broglie on the measure-
ment problem at the Institut Henri Poincaré in Paris.
Tausk also sent a copy of his preprint to Loinger, who was now at the University
of Pavia, and one also came into the hands of Rosenfeld at NORDITA in Copen-
hagen. In 1965 Rosenfeld had written a paper explicitly defending DLP’s theory
(Rosenfeld 1965), which Tausk also had criticized. Loinger and Rosenfeld now not
only disagreed with Tausk’s preprint, they were enraged by it.
Daneri, Loinger, and Prosperi (DLP) had considered their work to be “an
indispensable completion and a natural crowning of the basic structure of present-
day quantum mechanics,” being “firmly convinced that further progresses in this
field of research will consist essentially in refinements” of their approach (Daneri
et al. 1966, p. 127). Note the rhetorical aspect of their immodest claims. Tausk,
however, now declared that, contrary to DLP’s claims, “no connection between
ergodicity and reduction of state has been established,” and he pointed to a class of
measurements, Renninger’s negative-result measurements, “for which ergodicity
considerations are obviously irrelevant.” Tausk bluntly concluded: “Recent claims
by the same authors . . . and L. Rosenfeld . . ., which hold this attempt to be of
fundamental importance, are thereby contradicted” (Tausk 1966, abstract). We
comment further on Tausk’s arguments and style of writing in the Appendix.



5.4 Loinger’s and Rosenfeld’s Attacks

Loinger was the first to react to Tausk’s preprint. On September 9, 1966, he wrote
an open letter to Gilberto Bernardini,22 President of the Società Italiana di Fisica
(SIF), requesting that it be published in the Bollettino della S.I.F. In it Loinger
deplored the increasing number of worthless preprints that were being sent out from
various institutions (implying especially the ICTP in Trieste), and were then being
submitted for publication to Il Nuovo Cimento, the official journal of the SIF. To
combat this pernicious practice, Loinger offered two suggestions: First, Il Nuovo
Cimento should publish the title, author, and institution of all papers it rejected for
publication, thus forcing irresponsible institutions to control the quantity of worth-
less papers they released for publication. Second, the SIF should institute an annual



22
Angelo Loinger [in Italian] to President of the Società Italiana di Fisica, Pavia, 9 Sept 9, 1966,
Klaus S. Tausk Personal Archive, São Paulo (KST, hereafter).
182 5 The Tausk Controversy on the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics: Physics. . .


“antiprize” (antipremio) for the worst preprint written in Italyâ€"and the preprint
that should be selected for the first antiprize, lest it “escape,” was Tausk’s!
Loinger’s attack thus was directed not only at Tausk’s preprint, but also at the
entire ICTP in Trieste. A couple of weeks later, on September 22, 1966, Loinger
also sent an open letter to the widely circulated Italian magazine L’Europeo,
questioning the financial support that the Italian government was providing to the
ICTP, and criticizing the doubtful rigorousness of the papers emanating from it. His
view here was a common one among European and American physicists. In fact,
the absence of internal control over papers being written at the ICTP was inten-
tional: Abdus Salam, its Director, wanted to maximize the publication opportunities
of scientists from Third World countries.23
On September 20, 1966, Rosenfeld wrote a letter to Salam, calling Salam’s
attention to Tausk’s preprint. Rosenfeld began by implicitly but clearly questioning
the publication policy of the ICTP:
From the inexhaustible flow of preprints from your Institute I picked out the other day one
with the somewhat bombastic title “Relation of Measurement with Ergodicity, Macro-
scopic Systems, Information and Conservation Laws” by a certain K.S. Tausk.24

That opening sentence, coming from a leading theoretical physicist who earlier
had questioned locating the ICTP in Trieste, certainly appears to have been an
attempt to intimidate Salam, who was constantly striving to demonstrate that the
ICTP was worthy of support on the basis of its scientific merits. But Rosenfeld went
much further, declaring that Tausk’s preprint
is such incredible thrash [sic] that I hardly could believe my eyes when I read it. I feel that I
ought to write you about it in the event that (as I hope) this masterpiece has just escaped
your attention.... The author is, I suppose, very young and inexperienced; one good turn you
could do him, since you presumably know him better than I do, would be to represent that
before blandly assuming that the trivialities which fill his paper could have been overlooked
by such people as Niels Bohr and Heisenberg, he might perhaps reflect that he could be the
one who misses the point.25

Note again Rosenfeld’s inference that there was a lack of control at the ICTP
over the preprints that were being sent out under its banner.
Salam replied to Rosenfeld 1 week later, saying “I wish to tender to you my
sincerest apologies for Mr. Tausk’s paper which reached you.”26 He explained the
ICTP’s rules governing the distribution of preprints, and how Tausk had managed
to put an ICTP cover on his internal report.
Mr. Tausk is a special pupil of Mario Schönberg in Brazil. I have not had a chance to see
him yet. He is due to leave us at the end of this month to join the Vigier group in Paris. I



23
A. Loinger, “Scienza e quattrini,” L’Europeo 39 (September 22, 1966), 3. De Greiff (2001,
Chap. 6).
24
Rosenfeld to Salam, Copenhagen, 20 Sep 20 1966, KST.
25
Ibid.
26
Salam to Rosenfeld,Trieste, 26 Sep 1966, RP.
5.5 Bohm’s, Jauch’s, and Fonda’s Defenses of Tausk 183

would request you that you may consider this episode as part of the old battles and in no
case an expression of opinion from the Centre here.27

These “old battles” were the earlier battles over the interpretation of quantum
mechanics. Rosenfeld was appeased, writing to Salam one week later:
Since, however, this is clearly a case of lack of foresight with no evil intent on his [Tausk’s]
part, I think one ought not be too severe with him and rather dismiss the whole matter
without more ado. I am glad to know (for the centre’s sake) that Tausk’s paper will not
receive more publicity from the centre, but I have no illusions about what the Vigier group
is going to do with it. However, this is another story.28

Rosenfeld had succeeded in neutralizing Salam. Tausk no longer would be
supported by the Director of the ICTP, the institution where he had written his
preprint and from which he had circulated it. Thus began Tausk’s isolation from the
community of theoretical physicists.



5.5 Bohm’s, Jauch’s, and Fonda’s Defenses of Tausk

Meanwhile, Luciano Fonda, Director of the International Advanced School of
Physics, a division of the ICTP, had written to two experts on the foundations of
quantum mechanics, David Bohm at Birkbeck College, University of London, and
Josef Maria Jauch at the University of Geneva, asking them for their opinions of
Tausk’s preprint. Bohm responded in a short handwritten letter on September
26, 1966, also sending copies to Salam, Tausk, and Paolo Budini, Deputy Director
of the ICTP, saying: “I have read Dr. Tausk’s paper, and I feel that what he writes is
correct. I myself would suggest that he should publish his paper as a short article.”29
A week later Bohm also wrote a three-page typed letter to Tausk, clarifying “the
confusion between the individual and the ensemble, which is contained in the
argument of DLP.”30 Given Bohm’s heterodox position on the foundations of
quantum mechanics, however, it is not clear whether his support was helpful or
unhelpful to Tausk. In any case, his opinion perhaps did not carry much weight
among most quantum theorists at the time.
Jauch responded to Fonda on October 4, 1966, declaring that a “criticism of the
paper by Daneri et al. is certainly most useful,” and agreeing with Tausk’s conclu-
sion that “no connection between ergodic properties of the measuring apparatus and
the reduction of state has been established by DLP.”31 Jauch noted, however, that
certain statements in Tausk’s paper were unclear and a few arguments badly

27
Ibid.
28
Rosenfeld to Salam, Copenhagen, 4 Oct 1966, RP.
29
Bohm to Fonda, with copies to Salam, Budini, and Tausk, London, 26 Sep 1966, KST.
30
Bohm to Tausk, London, 1 Oct 1966, KST.
31
Jauch to Fonda, Geneva, 4 Oct 1966, RP; the conclusion Jauch quoted was from Tausk (1966,
p. 22).
184 5 The Tausk Controversy on the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics: Physics. . .


constructed, and he complained that Tausk had failed to cite earlier work, in
particular Wigner’s (1963) and Jauch’s (1964) papers.32 “In conclusion, I should
say that a paper in this form would not be permitted to leave my institute. In [sic] the
other hand a criticism of Daneri et al. is necessary and could be made in a more
objective and dignified way on several grounds.”33
Meanwhile, Tausk had spoken to Salam, who showed him Rosenfeld’s letter of
October 4, 1966. Six days later, Tausk wrote directly to Rosenfeld, assuming
responsibility for having broken the ICTP’s publication rules, but then adding:
Fortunately for my reputation your opinion about my paper is not universal among those
who have given serious thought to the problem of measurement: Prof. David Bohm thinks
that what I wrote is correct, and he advised me to publish it. Prof. Louis de Broglie has sent
me one of his books with the inscription “avec l’homage de l’auteur” in acknowledgment of
this paper. A letter from Prof. G. Süssmann contains the following: “I have read your paper
with great interest. What you have said about DLPI and about Rosenfeld’s commentary
seems to me to be completely evident.”34

In view of Bohm’s and Jauch’s letters to Fonda, Daniele Amati, Paolo Budini,
and Fonda wrote an open letter on behalf of the International Advanced School of
Physics of the ICTP to the Società Italiana di Fisica (SIF), arguing that it would be
a mistake for the SIF to establish an antiprize for the worst paper published in Il
Nuovo Cimento because
it could easily be the cause or the effect of personal issues. For example, the work of Tausk,
indicated by Loinger as worthy of the year’s antiprize, contains a severe criticism of a paper
by Loinger himself, coauthored by Daneri and Prosperi.35

They then summarized Bohm’s and Jauch’s opinions of Tausk’s preprint, which
prompted an immediate and angry response from Loinger in Pavia, who wrote to
the President of the SIF on October 20 regarding their “stupefying open letter,” and
concluded that “if Bohm and Jauch have really declared, with respect to the
aforementioned masterpiece, what Amati, Budini, and Fonda claim, then they lost
an excellent opportunity to remain silent.”36
Three days earlier, on October 17, Fonda had written to Tausk:
I have received the answer from Jauch and I see that he agrees with you on your criticism to
Loinger’s paper. I have agreed with professor Budini that your paper will be supported by
the Advanced School of Physics; however, in that case we want you to take into account the


32
The missing citations were Wigner (1963) and Jauch (1964).
33
Jauch to Fonda, 4 Oct 1966, ibid.
34
The Roman numeral I in DLPI denotes Daneri, Loinger, and Prosperi’s first paper (1962) in
contrast to their second paper of 1966. Tausk to Rosenfeld, 10 Oct 1966, RP. Tausk is quoting
Georg Süssmann [in German] to Tausk, Frankfurt, 16 Sep 1966, KST. Süssmann’s original
German is: “Ihre Arbeit habe ich mit grossem Interesse gelesen.Was Sie zu DPLI und zu
Rosenfelds Kommentar sagen, leuchtet mir durchaus ein.” We are grateful to Ernst Hamburger
for the translation of the German letters and texts for us.
35
Daniele Amati, Paolo Budini, and Luciano Fonda in Italian to President of the Società Italiana di
Fisica,Trieste, 11 Oct 1966, RP.
36
Angelo Loinger [in Italian] to President of the Società Italiana di Fisica, Pavia, 20 Oct 1966, RP.
5.6 Further Developments 185

suggestions and criticism of professor Jauch to your manuscript. Once you have revised
your manuscript, please send it to me and I will forward it to the journal you prefer.37

Tausk later claimed that he never received a copy of Jauch’s letter of October 4 to
Fonda.38 He never revised his manuscript and did not return it to the International
Advanced School of Physics to be forwarded for publication. He claimed that he did
submit an article on his work to the American Journal of Physics, but that its editor
had received negative reports from two referees and hence had declined to publish it.




Picture 5.1 Klaus Tausk (1927â€"2012)




5.6 Further Developments

Tausk did not know that Daniele Amati had sent his preprint to the Northern Irish
theoretical physicist John Stewart Bell at CERN39 in Geneva, and that Bell also had
received reprints of Loinger’s papers. Bell commented to Loinger on his and his
colleagues’ work in a letter of October 26, 1966:
It appears to me that ergodicity is relevant in showing the approximate absence of
interference phenomena with macroscopically different states. But I think that nobody
doubted this, and so am unable to attach fundamental importance to the formal discussion.
This feature of large systems is for me about as relevant to the question of principle as is, for
example, apparent macroscopic irreversibility to the question of reversibility of the funda-
mental Hamiltonian.... I am unable to accept all the details of Tausk as justified criticism of
your paper. But I think his main points are right, and his general position sound.40


37
Fonda to Tausk, Trieste, 17 Oct 1966, KST.
38
Tausk’s interviews with O. Pessoa, and Jauch to Fonda, 4 Oct 1966, RP.
39
Conseil Européen pour la Recherche de Nucléaire
40
Bell to Loinger, Geneva, 26 Oct 1966, RP.
186 5 The Tausk Controversy on the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics: Physics. . .


Loinger replied immediately and harshly: “Dear Prof. Bell, I think that you have
not understood the essence of the problem of quantal measurement. Yours sin-
cerely, A. Loinger.”41 By this time, of course, owing to the groundbreaking papers
that Bell had published two years earlier, he was becoming known as the most
profound theoretical physicist working on the foundations of quantum physics.42
In the meantime, Jeffrey Bub also had received a letter from Loinger criticizing
some aspects of a paper that he and Bohm had published in 1966 (Bohm and Bub
1966) and, in his reply to Loinger, Bub had reproduced a number of Tausk’s ideas.
Thus, when Bub acknowledged the receipt of Tausk’s preprint on November
15, 1966, he told Tausk that it had “clarified several points which I had not understood
properly before.”43 In fact, Bub was the only person ever to cite Tausk’s preprint in
the literatureâ€"in an article of 1968 in which he criticized DLP’s theory of measure-
ment, declaring that, “Certain aspects of the following analysis have been influenced
by a critical article on the D-L-P theory by K.S. Tausk. . .” (Bub 1968, p. 505, n. 10).
Jauch, Wigner, and Yanase thoroughly criticized DLP’s theory in a paper they
submitted for publication in late November 1966 (Jauch et al. 1967). They noted that
DLP did not address the problem of negative-result measurements, but in this connection
they did not mention Tausk, the first theoretical physicist to make this criticism. Jauch, as
noted above, had become aware of Tausk’s criticism when he reviewed Tausk’s preprint,
and had informed Wigner of it in a letter of September 16, 1966, saying:
I should perhaps mention that there has recently appeared an internal report from Trieste
(ICTP internal Report 14/1966) written by K.S. Tausk which criticizes the paper by Daneri
et al. rather severely. This paper contains some interesting points which should perhaps also
be discussed in our paper.44

Wigner never mentioned Tausk’s preprint in subsequent letters to Jauch. Further,
Wigner wrote the first draft of their joint paper with Yanase, while Jauch made the
final modifications to it.45 Jauch therefore should at least have introduced a citation
to Tausk’s preprint, which was known to him but not to Wigner and Yanase, but he
did not do so. Franco Selleri at the University of Bari, Italy (to whom we shall return
below) later commented caustically: “This is a further example (I had some myself)
of how some well known physicists are eager of appropriating contributions coming
from authors when they judge it safe to do so.”46



41
Loinger to Bell, Pavia, 31 Oct 1966, RP.
42
The papers are Bell (1964) and Bell (1966), reprinted in Bell (2004).
43
Bub to Tausk, Minneapolis, 15 Nov 1966, KST.
44
Jauch to Wigner, 16 Sep 1966, Eugene P. Wigner Papers, Manuscripts Division, Department of
Rare Books and Special Collections, Princeton University Library, Box 71, Folder 3.
45
Wigner to Jauch, 6 Sep 6, 5 Oct, 25 Oct 1966, Wigner Papers, ibid., Box 94, Folder 7; Wigner to
Jauch, 22 Nov 1966, ibid., Box 71, Folder 3; Jauch to Wigner, 13 Oct 1966, ibid., Box 71, Folder 3;
and Jauch to Wigner, 16 Sep 1966, Box 71, Folder 3, ibid.
46
Franco Selleri, “Comments on the Thesis ‘A Medida na Mec^anica Qu^antica’ by K.S. Tausk,”
1972, 2 pp. KST.
5.7 Return to Brazil 187


It may be that Jauch and Wigner, the two senior authors of their joint paper with
Yanase, failed to cite Tausk’s preprint because of his vaguely unfavorable image in
the eyes of some European theoretical physicists, who pictured him as an unqual-
ified Third World physicist, a polemist who criticized the orthodox interpretation of
quantum mechanics without understanding it and, moreover, sympathized with the
views of the French Marxist Vigier and his group in Paris. Perhaps Jauch and
Wigner also did not want to align themselves and their work with criticisms that had
been advanced in one of the numerous ICTP preprints, especially in one that had
been written by a virtually unknown theoretical physicist.



5.7 Return to Brazil

After leaving the ICTP in Trieste, Tausk spent some time in his hometown of Graz,
Austria, and then returned to São Paulo, Brazil, to finish his PhD thesis. His
advisor, Mario Schönberg, was extremely angry with him owing to the “scandal”
he had precipitated in Europe. Schönberg and Rosenfeld were old friends; both
were experts on cosmic-ray physics, and both were Marxists who were involved in
international peace movements. Schönberg also was a close friend of the Milanese
physicist Piero Caldirola, whom he had met in Rome in 1938.47 Schönberg evi-
dently heard what his student Tausk had done at the ICTP from Rosenfeld, Salam,
Caldirola, or someone elseâ€"and was greatly distressed and embarrassed by it.
Working alone, Tausk finished a draft of his thesis in 1967, writing it in
Portuguese. In addition to the material in his controversial preprint, Tausk included
a chapter in which he showed (possibly for the first time) that nonlocality in
correlated systems cannot be used to transmit signals. Sometime later that year,
in a first discussion of his work before an advisory committee (equivalent to a
qualifying examination) whose members included Schönberg and the other Brazil-
ian physicists AntoÌ‚nio Piza and Yogiro Hama, Schönberg severely criticized
Tausk’s work. The committee concluded that Tausk’s thesis could not be defended
as it was; Tausk would have to rewrite certain parts of it.48
Tausk did, and a few months later in 1967 defended his thesis (Tausk 1967),
which turned out to be another traumatic experience for him. His advisor,
Schönberg, refused to attend his defense because, according to Tausk, Schönberg
would not talk to him. Tausk’s thesis examination board, which included the
important Brazilian theoretical physicist Jorge Swieca at the University of São
Paulo, who was highly critical of Tausk’s work, almost flunked him. The only


47
Caldirola (1984, p. 228) wrote in a Festschrift to Schönberg, “the author never forgot the
precious advices received from Mario at the beginning of his scientific career in 1938 at Roma
University.” For a biographical note on Schönberg, see Fernandes et al. (2008). Schönberg’s
scientific papers are in Schönberg and Hamburger (2009), Schönberg and Hamburger (2013).
48
Tausk’s interviews with O. Pessoa.
188 5 The Tausk Controversy on the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics: Physics. . .


Brazilian physicist who read and approved of Tausk’s work, according to Tausk,49
was the renowned experimental physicist Cesare Lattes at the new University of
Campinas, who telephoned Tausk after his defense, asking Tausk to send him a
copy of his thesis, which Lattes read overnight after he received it and then
telephoned his approval of it. Lattes’s favorable judgment, however, probably did
not greatly influence the opinion of other Brazilian physicists.
Five years later, in 1972, Franco Selleri at the University of Bari, who was then
deeply involved in examining the foundations of quantum theory, visited the
University of São Paulo on the invitation of the theoretical physicist Henrique
Fleming. While there, Selleri wrote a review of Tausk’s thesis whose tone was
similar to Bohm’s and Jauch’s: Selleri pointed out certain misunderstandings of
Tausk, but overall he was sympathetic to Tausk’s views. Thus, he noted that there
were four weak points in Tausk’s thesis but also eight original contributions in it,
concluding that:
Tausk’s thesis was very interesting reading and many physicists could no doubt benefit
from it, once the philosophical ambiguities are cleared up. With more self-criticism Tausk
probably will be able to contribute significantly to the understanding of the structure of the
physical world.50



5.8 Tausk’s Preprint and the Rosenfeld-Wigner Dispute

Loinger’s and Rosenfeld’s angry reactions to Tausk’s preprint cannot be fully
understood unless we consider the dispute on the measurement problem in which
they were involved at the time. Thus, the thermodynamic-amplification program for
solving the measurement problem, which had arisen in the 1950s and early 1960s,
reached its most developed form in DLP’s theory. Rosenfeld supported their theory,
but a few other theoretical physicists criticized it, especially Wigner, who followed
von Neumann’s approach, describing the measurement apparatus plus quantum
object as a quantum-mechanical closed system, and suggesting that human con-
sciousness plays an ineluctable role in the reduction of the wave packet.51
As we have seen in Chap. 4, in response to Wigner’s and other criticisms,
Daneri, Loiner, and Prosperi published a second paper in 1966, raising the temper-
ature of the controversy by declaring that Wigner, Abner Shimony, P.A. Moldauer,
Yanase, Jauch, and others had not made “new substantial contributions to the
subject [the measurement problem]” (Daneri et al. 1966, p. 120). Their paper,
which Tausk criticized in his preprint, also upset Wigner, who wrote to Jauch on
September 6, 1966:




49
Ibid.
50
Selleri, “Comments on the Thesis”, op. cit.
51
Wigner (1963, p. 7). For Wigner’s reaction to the DLP’s papers, see also Chap. 4.
5.8 Tausk’s Preprint and the Rosenfeld-Wigner Dispute 189

I just finished reading the article of Daneri Loinger and Prosperi in the July issue of Nuovo
Cimento and am really a bit irritated by it. First of all, it is not good taste to say about a set
of articles that they do not make substantial contributions to a subject. Needless to say, I am
less concerned about myself than about other people who are much younger than I am and
whose future careers such statements may hurt.... I am also saddened by Rosenfeld’s
endorsement of the article which, after all, considers it axiomatic that macroscopic systems
have only states which can be described by classical mechanics. This is, of course, in
conflict with quantum mechanics. . . 52

Wigner, in particular, was concerned that the future careers of Shimony and
Yanase, his former doctoral students at Princeton University, might be damaged by
DLP’s attack. Three months later, on December 1, 1966, Jauch, Wigner, and
Yanase (now at Sophia University in Tokyo) submitted their detailed response to
Il Nuovo Cimento for publication (Jauch et al. 1967).
The Austrian-English experimental physicist Otto Robert Frisch called attention
to this dispute in his opening lecture at a meeting on the foundations of quantum
theory in 1968:
I understand that at present there exists a controversy, roughly speaking between a group of
people which includes Wigner as the best known person and another group centred on
Milan in Italy [DLP], and that these two have different views on how this reduction [of the
wave packet during a measurement] happens. (Frisch 1971, p. 14)

The alignment of Wigner on one side of the dispute and of Rosenfeld on the
other reflected their different intellectual heritages on the foundation and interpre-
tation of quantum theory, with Wigner defending von Neumann’s point of view and
Rosenfeld Bohr’s, Wigner stressing the axiomatization of quantum mechanics and
Rosenfeld a more phenomenological approach. Their dispute, however, also
reflected their divergent philosophical and political commitments, Wigner being a
right-wing idealist who supported the American-Soviet arms race, and Rosenfeld
being a left-wing Marxist who supported nuclear disarmament.53 This division
among American and European quantum theorists was common at the time. That
it affected the controversy precipitated by Tausk’s preprint is clearly indicated in a
letter that Frisch wrote to Hugo Tausk, who was both Frisch’s cousin and Klaus’s
father, on September 16, 1967:
I have occupied myself a few times with Tausk’s work, but I am not a theoretician and
could not follow it. The questions which he addresses (essentially the question of the reality
of the external world) seems to me very interesting. The orthodox Copenhagen interpreta-
tion says that physics does not deal with things but with measurements. That tastes like
idealism, and is therefore rejected by the communists. Vice versa also applies, since anyone
here in the West who doubts the orthodox interpretationâ€"even for objective reasonsâ€"is
suspect of communism. All this with the complexities and meaninglessness of a religious
war, complete with converts: the greatest defender of the orthodoxy is a communist
[Rosenfeld], and many in the opposition are fully bourgeoise....54



52
Wigner to Jauch, 6 Sep 1966, op. cit.
53
On their political commitments, see Chap. 4; on Rosenfeld’s beliefs, see Jacobsen (2012).
54
Frisch [in German] to Hugo Tausk, Geneva, September 16, 1967, KST.
190 5 The Tausk Controversy on the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics: Physics. . .


Klaus Tausk became embroiled in this dispute, perhaps without being fully
aware of it, when he distributed his preprint in August 1966, thus aligning himself
with Wigner and Jauch, the most prominent critics of Rosenfeld and of Daneri,
Loinger, and Prosperi. At the same time, the Wigner-Rosenfeld dispute actually
seems to have contributed to the acceptance of work on the foundations of quantum
mechanics as a legitimate field of research.55 Ironically, Tausk thus helped to
legitimize a field of research in physics in which he himself could no longer
participate actively as a protagonist.


Conclusions
Tausk’s promising research career on the foundations of quantum mechanics
was cut short. He had made a bad name for himself in this field in Europe, and
its study was considered to be unimportant in Brazil. In fact, this field gained
general respect in Europe and America and other developed countries only in
the 1970s (Freire Jr. 2004, 2009). Tausk received no support from his thesis
advisor Schönberg, and consequently was unable to revise his 1966 preprint
and 1967 thesis for publication. His somewhat aggressive, arrogant, or in
Jauch’s words not very “dignified” style of writing contributed to his negative
image, suggesting that psychological factors can be significant in the accep-
tance of scientific concepts.
Tausk applied for and was granted a second scholarship from the Brazilian
Conselho Nacional de Pesquisa (CNPq) to work with Jean-Pierre Vigier in
Paris in 1968,56 but he was unable to do much work owing to the strikes and
political turmoil there at the time. Returning to Brazil, he pursued an
unimpressive career at the University of São Paulo, concentrating on his
classes (he created a course on Groups and Tensors) and publishing very
little. He became something of a folkloric figure in the Physics Institute, but
did not gain much sympathy owing to his difficult personality. Further, in
defense of his work, he could present only a few letters from individuals and
the book that Louis de Broglie had inscribed to him. These documents, some
of which were written by theoretical physicists like David Bohm who

(continued)


55
See Freire Jr. (2004) and Chap. 4.
56
Conselho Nacional de Pesquisa Process number 0208/67, Arquivos do CNPq, Museu de
Astronomia, Rio de Janeiro. In justifying the award of the scholarship, Tausk gave Mario
Schönberg, José Goldenberg, and Hans Joos as his references. He also attached Bub’s letter to
him of November 15, 1966 and a letter of invitation to him of July 28, 1966, from Vigier in Paris,
where he planned to study elementary particles within Vigier’s approach, specifically to “analyze
the possibility of unifying the external dynamical symmetry of Elementary Particles with its
internal symmetry, by introducing the De Sitter space.” Tausk’s request was supported favorably
by José Goldenberg, who commented on Tausk’s work in Trieste: “This work of his on the
measurement theory in quantum mechanics attracted considerable interest and, because of it, he
was invited by Prof. Vigier for a period of work in Paris.”
5.8 Tausk’s Preprint and the Rosenfeld-Wigner Dispute 191



themselves were considered to be heterodox, were insufficient to gain support
for the work of a young and unknown physicist. Tausk’s tragedy was not that
he got involved in a significant controversy on the interpretation of quantum
mechanics, but that his work was forgotten.
Tausk thus was a kind of antihero in modern physics. He had original
insights that were incorporated into the emerging field of the foundations of
physics, since his 1966 preprint was read by physicists who came to play
significant roles in this field. But he came from a Third World country,
entered physics relatively late in life, chose a field of research of low scientific
prestige at the time, made a few errors in his preprint, alienated his thesis
advisor, was unable to publish his work in refereed journals, and had a
difficult personality. Physicists have to learn how to write papers in an
appropriate format, language, and degree of physical and mathematical detail
to be accepted by others working in the field. Tausk lacked this ability. Salam,
Director of the ICTP in Trieste, and Tausk’s thesis advisor Schönberg,
aligned themselves with Rosenfeld, turning Tausk into a scientific orphan.
Attacking well-known scientists can lead to professional suicide.
A vital part of a physicist’s training involves the development of social
skills necessary to succeed in advancing his or her arguments and career.
These include taking gossip into account,57 adopting an appropriate tone in a
controversy, recognizing the right moment in which to intervene, and, most
importantly, judicially choosing allies and rebuffing enemies. Tausk’s career
thus reveals a great deal about how competing scientists and their research
programs interact, how philosophical and political commitments influence
their scientific views, and how severe the difficulties are for someone doing
science at the scientific periphery.
The Tausk controversy also reveals much about the kind of tacit knowl-
edge scientists learn during their education and training. Young scientists can
be wasted if they are not taught how to conduct themselves in scientific
controversies, which is an art that goes well beyond reason and logic. The
Tausk controversy exposes the risks and consequences of trying to participate
in a scientific controversy in the absence of proper training and guidance. One
value of the history of science is that it can be useful in showing young
scientists the extent to which science is a social practice.
Salam’s remark about the controversy that Tausk had precipitated, that one
should “consider this episode as part of the old battles,”58 displays this social
dimension and suggests an analogy between scientific controversies and
military warfare. Both have winners and losers, but one may lose a battle

(continued)


57
See Traweek (1988, pp. 121â€"122)
58
Salam to Rosenfeld, 26 Sep 1966, op. cit.
192 5 The Tausk Controversy on the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics: Physics. . .



while winning the war. In the debates over the interpretation of quantum
mechanics, some like Niels Bohr won battles and some like David Bohm lost
battles, but Bohm persevered in his hidden-variables program and in the end
won some battles, or at least left his mark on the battlefield. There also,
however, are those who lose a battle and then surrender. That seems to have
been what Tausk did.


Appendix: Summary of Tausk’s Arguments

Tausk’s arguments against Daneri, Loinger, and Prosperi’s (DLP’s) theory may be
summarized as follows:
DLP’s Theory Deals Only with the Statistical Case Tausk presents the reduction or
projection postulate for an individual, “pure” case, and contrasts it with a statistical
version, which he calls the “weak reduction postulate.” He then argues that what
DLP derive in their paper is not the projection postulate in the pure case, but in the
statistical case (Tausk 1966, p. 4). If so, then the “measurement problem” is not
solved, and DLP’s theory fails. Bohm accepted this argument in his letter to Tausk
of October 1, 1966 (op. cit.), and Bub developed it in his paper of 1968 (Bub 1968).
DLP’s Analysis Is Circular Tausk argues that DLP’s description of measurement
as occurring in two stages is circular. His argument, however, seems to follow from
an incorrect reading of DLP’s theory, which Jauch said was one of the “many
details with which I disagree.”59
The Ergodic Hypothesis Plays No Role in DLP’s Theory Tausk (1966, p. 20)
suggests that the use of the ergodic hypothesis in DLP’s theory plays only a “purely
psychological role,” a view that is based upon some sort of misunderstanding.
Negative-Result Measurements Refute DLP’s Theory This argument, which we
have examined above, is correct in that it shows that amplification is not necessary
for state reduction. However, as we noted, contrary to what one might expect, the
existence of negative-result measurements does not refute DLP’s theory, which, as
Loinger (1968, pp. 246â€"248) argued, does not explicitly mention amplification. In
any case, after Tausk presents his argument, he gives an example of his not very
elegant style of writing that contributed to the negative reception of his preprint,
declaring that: “To our mind, this argument shows that all attempts to fulfil [sic] the
program of DLPI belong to the realm of wishful thinking or, occasionally, of just
wishing” (Tausk 1966, p. 23).
Tausk made three additional points in his 1966 preprint and in his 1967 doctoral
thesis, as follows:


59
Jauch to Fonda, 4 Oct 1966, op. cit.
References 193


The Conservation of Angular Momentum Paradox In Sect. 5 of his preprint and in
his thesis,60 Tausk raises an apparent paradox concerning the angular momentum of
an atom that passes through a Stern-Gerlach apparatus. Assuming that before
detection the component of its angular momentum along the line joining the two
magnets is zero, immediately after detection it is nonzero, either “up” or “down,”
depending upon which of the two detectors is triggered. Tausk asks how this
apparent violation of conservation of angular momentum can be explained. A few
years later, however, he realized that it could be explained by assuming that angular
momentum is transferred to the Stern-Gerlach magnets.61
Critique of Heisenberg’s Epistemic Conception of Reduction In his book, Physics
and Philosophy of 1958, Heisenberg (1958, pp. 54â€"55) claimed that state reduction
expresses nothing more than an increase of our knowledge of a quantum-
mechanical system. Tausk (1966, p. 32) criticizes this view and suggests that
quantum mechanics requires a completely new foundation.
No-Signaling Theorem In his doctoral thesis, Tausk proved that an ensemble of
two correlated particles, I and II, prepared in the same composite state, can never be
used to transmit information at a speed greater than the speed of light (Tausk 1967,
pp. 29â€"31). This probably is the first time that a physicist proved this rather simple
result, which is known in the literature as a no-signaling theorem and is attributed to
Philippe Eberhard (1978, on 416â€"417).
Finally, it is curious that Tausk continues by analyzing the famous Einstein-
Podolsky-Rosen paper of 1935 (Einstein et al. 1935), stating that they do not make
use of the reduction postulate. That is incorrect: they do make explicit use of it. This
illustrates both some of the shortcomings of Tausk’s work and, because this error
remained in his thesis even after he defended it, shows that the Brazilian commu-
nity of physicists was still not well prepared to understand and discuss such
philosophical subtleties as we have noted above on the foundations of quantum
mechanics.



References

Andrade, A. M. R.: Os raios cósmicos entre a ciência e as relações internacionais. Ciência, Polı́tica
e relações internacionais ensaios sobre Paulo Carneiro. M. C. Maio. Rio de Janeiro, Editora
Fiocruz: 215-242 (2004)
Ballentine, L.E.: Statistical interpretation of quantum mechanics. Rev. Mod. Phys. 42(4), 358â€"381
(1970)
Bell, J.S.: On the Einstein Podolsky Rosen paradox. Physics 1, 195â€"200 (1964)
Bell, J.S.: On problem of hidden variables in quantum mechanics. Rev. Mod. Phys. 38(3),
447 (1966)



60
Tausk (1966) and Tausk (1967).
61
Tausk’s interviews with Pessoa, op. cit.
194 5 The Tausk Controversy on the Foundations of Quantum Mechanics: Physics. . .


Bell, J.S.: Speakable and Unspeakable in Quantum Mechanics: Collected Papers on Quantum
Philosophy. With an Introduction by Alain Aspect. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge
(2004)
Bohm, D.: A suggested interpretation of the quantum theory in terms of hidden variablesâ€"I &
II. Phys. Rev. 85(2), 166â€"179 (1952). 180â€"193
Bohm, D., Bub, J.: A proposed solution of measurement problem in quantum mechanics by a
hidden variable theory. Rev. Mod. Phys. 38(3), 453â€"469 (1966)
Bohr, N.: Atomic Physics and Human Knowledge. Wiley, New York (1958)
Bub, J.: Daneri-Loinger-Prosperi quantum theory of measurement. Nuovo Cimento B 57(2), 503â€"
520 (1968)
Caldirola, P.: Teoria della misurazione e teoremi ergodici nella meccanica quantistica. G. Fis. 6,
228â€"237 (1965)
Caldirola, P.: A geometrical model of point electron. Revista Brasileira de Fı́sica Volume especial
- 70 anos de Mário Schönberg, 228â€"260 (1984)
Collins, H.M., Pinch, T.J.: The Golem: What Everyone Should Know About Science. Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge (1993)
Cushing, J.: Quantum Mechanicsâ€"Historical Contingency and the Copenhagen Hegemony. The
University of Chicago Press, Chicago (1994)
Daneri, A., Prosperi, G.M., Loinger, A.: Quantum theory of measurement and ergodicity condi-
tions. Nucl. Phys. 33(2), 297â€"319 (1962). reprinted in J. A. Wheeler and W. H. Zurek, ed.,
Quantum Theory and Measurement, Princeton University Press, 1983, pp. 1657â€"1679
Daneri, A., Loinger, A., Prosperi, G.M.: Further remarks on relations between statistical mechan-
ics and quantum theory of measurement. Nuovo Cimento B 44(1), 119â€"128 (1966)
De Greiff, A.: The International Centre for Theoretical Physics, 1960â€"1979: Ideology and Practice
in a United Nations Institution for Scientific Cooperation and Third World Development. PhD
dissertation, Imperial College of Science, Technology and Medicine, London (2001)
d’Espagnat, B.: Conceptual Foundations of Quantum Mechanics, 2nd edn. Addison-Wesley,
Redwood City, CA (1989). 1st ed 1971
Dicke, R.H.: Interaction-free quantum measurementsâ€"a paradox. Am. J. Phys. 49(10), 925â€"930
(1981)
Eberhard, P.H.: Bell’s theorem and different concepts of locality. Nuovo Cimento B 46(2), 392â€"
419 (1978)
Einstein, A., Podolsky, B., Rosen, N.: Can quantum-mechanical description of physical reality be
considered complete? Phys. Rev. 47, 777â€"780 (1935)
Everett, H.: Relative state formulation of quantum mechanics. Rev. Mod. Phys. 29(3), 454â€"462
(1957). Reprinted in: J. A. Wheeler & W. H. Zurek (Eds.), Quantum theory and measurement
(pp. 315â€"323). Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1983. Page numbers refer to the reprint
Fernandes, N.C., Cattani, M., Ventura, I., Ueta, K., Salinas, S.R.: Mário Schönberg on his 70th
Birthday. Revista Brasileira de Fisica Volume especial - 70 anos de Mário Schönberg, Vâ€"VI
(2008)
Freire Jr., O.: The historical roots of “foundations of quantum mechanics” as a field of research
(1950â€"1970). Found. Phys. 34(11), 1741â€"1760 (2004)
Freire Jr., O.: Quantum dissidents: research on the foundations of quantum mechanics circa 1970.
Stud. Hist. Philos. Mod. Phys. 40(4), 280â€"289 (2009)
Frisch, O.R.: The conceptual problem of quantum theory from the experimentalist’s point of view.
In: Bastin, T. (ed.) Quantum Theory and Beyondâ€"Essays and Discussions Arising From a
Colloquium, pp. 13â€"21. Cambridge University Press, London (1971)
Garuccio, A., Leone, M.: La fisica teorica tra Milano e Pavia (1945â€"1965). Per una storia della
Fisica Italiana 1945â€"1965.I. Fı́sica della matéria, fisica teorica, insegnamento della Fisica
G. Giuliani. La Goliardica Pavese, Pavia, 35â€"80 (2002)
Greiff, A.D.: The tale of two peripheries: the creation of the International Centre for Theoretical
Physics in Trieste. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci. 33(1), 33â€"59 (2002)
References 195

Heisenberg, W.: Physics and Philosophy; The Revolution in Modern Science. Harper, New York
(1958)
Jacobsen, A.: Léon Rosenfeldâ€"Physics, Philosophy, and Politics in the Twentieth Century. World
Scientific, Singapore (2012)
Jammer, M.: The Philosophy of Quantum Mechanicsâ€"The Interpretations of Quantum Mechanics
in Historical Perspective. Wiley, New York (1974)
Jauch, J.M.: Problem of measurement in quantum mechanics. Helv. Phys. Acta 37(4â€"5), 293â€"316
(1964)
Jauch, J.M., Wigner, E.P., Yanase, M.M.: Some comments concerning measurements in quantum
mechanics. Nuovo Cimento B 48(1), 144â€"151 (1967)
Jordan, P.: On the process of measurement in quantum mechanics. Philos. Sci. 16, 269â€"278 (1949)
Körner, S.: Observation and interpretationâ€"a symposium of philosophers and physicists.
Butterworths, London (1957)
Loinger, A.: Comments on a recent paper concerning quantum theory of measurement. Nucl. Phys.
A A108(2), 245â€"249 (1968)
McMullin, E.: Scientific controversy and its termination. In: Engelhardt, H.T., Caplan, A.L. (eds.)
Scientific Controversies: Case Studies in the Resolution and Closure of Disputes in Science and
Technology, pp. 49â€"91. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1987)
Renninger, M.: Messungen ohne storung des messobjekts. Zeitschrift Fur Physik 158(4), 417â€"421
(1960)
Rosenfeld, L.: Measuring process in quantum mechanics. Suppl. Prog. Theor. Phys.: 222â€"231
(1965)
Rosenfeld, L., Cohen, R.S., Stachel, J.J.: Selected Papers of Léon Rosenfeld. D Reidel Publishing
Company, Dordrecht, Holland (1979)
Schönberg, M., Hamburger, A.I.: Obra Cientı́fica de Mario Schönbergâ€"Volume 1â€"1936â€"1948.
EDUSP, São Paulo (2009)
Schönberg, M., Hamburger, A.I.: Obra Cientı́fica de Mario Schönbergâ€"Volume 2â€"1949â€"1987.
EDUSP, São Paulo (2013)
Süssmann, G.: Über den Meßvorgang. Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften, Mathematisch-
Naturwissenschaftliche Klasse, Abhandlungen Neue Folge 88, 3â€"41 (1958)
Tausk, K.S.: Relation of measurement with ergodicity, macroscopic systems, information and
conservation laws. ICTP Intern. Rep. 14, 34 (1966)
Tausk, K.S.: A Medida na Mec^anica Qu^antica. PhD dissertation, Universidade de São Paulo
(1967)
Traweek, S.: Beamtimes and Lifetimes : The World of High Energy Physicists. Harvard Univer-
sity Press, Cambridge, MA (1988)
van Hove, L.: The ergodic behavior of quantum many-body systems. Physica 25, 268â€"276 (1959)
Von Neumann, J.: Mathematische Grundlagen der Quantenmechanik. Julius Springer, Berlin
(1932)
Von Neumann, J.: Mathematical Foundations of Quantum Mechanics. Princeton University Press,
Princeton, NJ (1955)
Wakita, H.: Measurement in quantum mechanics. Prog. Theor. Phys. 23, 32â€"40 (1960)
Wheeler, J.A., Zurek, W.H.: Quantum Theory and Measurement. Princeton University Press,
Princeton, NJ (1983)
Wigner, E.P.: Problem of measurement. Am. J. Phys. 31(1), 6â€"15 (1963)
Chapter 6
“From the Streets into Academia”: Political
Activism and the Reconfiguration of Physics
Around 1970


Abstract The political and cultural unrest of the late 1960s influenced the debate
on quantum physics by helping those who wanted to push research on foundations
from the margins to mainstream physics. The Italian Physical Society was at risk to
split apart due to political dissensions in the universities, and the president at the
time, Toraldo di Francia, thought that bringing a controversial scientific topic to the
forefront might stall the split. Franco Selleri’s proposal to dedicate the 1970
Varenna summer school to the foundations of quantum mechanics was accepted
and Bernard d’Espagnat was invited to head it and set diplomatic rules for manag-
ing the controversy. Varenna was the Woodstock of quantum dissidents. Wigner
made the keynote address and different interpretations for quantum theory were
presented. Shimony and Bell spoke on experiments for testing locality and quantum
mechanics. Zeh presented what would be later called the decoherence approach to
the measurement problem. The quantum dissidents left political dissidence aside to
concentrate on the quantum controversy. Later on, political dissidence escalated in
European physics settings while on the other side of the Atlantic, the editor of
Physics Today, under pressure from those who wanted the American Physical
Society to rally against the Vietnam War, decided to feature less controversial
topics. Bryce DeWitt was invited to publish a paper on the many interpretations of
quantum mechanics, including Everett’s many worlds interpretation. A huge debate
erupted in the magazine after DeWitt’s paper. In this chapter we will show how
physicists exploited the political climate of the late 1960s to push for changes in the
science establishment, including its research agenda.



6.1 Introduction

The 1960s and the early 1970s are landmarks in twentieth century history
concerning cultural turning points and political unrest. The emergence of counter-
cultures, rock music, drugs, sexual liberation, environmental concerns, feminist
movements, and protests against the Vietnam War and the political establishment
featured in the news at that time. The expressions “soixante-huitards” and “’68
generation” are used nowadays as part of the common lexicon when identifying
particular social sensitiveness. The implications of the 1968 events were far


© Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2015 197
O. Freire Junior, The Quantum Dissidents, DOI 10.1007/978-3-662-44662-1_6
198 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


reaching. As one contemporary observer noted, “the student strike is a new phe-
nomenon in European history. Students in the capitalist countries usually do not
strike. But now, all under the heaven is great chaos.” These were the words of Mao
Zedong, while trying to obtain insights from those events for Chinese geopolitics
(apud Kissinger 2011, p. 207). More recently, the sociologist Michael Hölscher
(2012) considered those events exemplary of a “transnational social movement,”
writing
Specifically, as a transnational social movement, the generation of ‘68 connects such
diverse events as the Prague Spring, the Summer of Love in the United States, the Paris
May, the international anti-Vietnam congress in Berlin, Zengakuren’s attack on Tokyo, the
Tlatelolco massacre in Mexico, and the protests of the Black Power movement in the
United States after the assassination of Martin Luther King Jr.

As for science, it could be thought it was to a certain extent the ongoing political
activism of a small but vocal group of scientists which emerged after World War II
in the wake of the production and dropping of the atomic bombs by the US, the
beginning of the Cold War, and the arms race between the US and the USSR.
However, it was more than this. Indeed, in the late 1960s, this political activism
underwent a phase transition and the physics community faced new challenges.
These included the research strike at MIT against the military use of research
results, senior physicists such as Hans Bethe publicly speaking out against the
arms race, the American Physical Society meetings being upset by political pro-
testers, and the Nobel Prize winner Gell-Mann being obstructed from giving a talk
at the centenary Collège de France. What set this period apart from previous
political activism was that now scientists were being accused by other scientists
of collaborating with the military on the application of science. As recalled by
Ravetz (1990, p. 902), “the complicity of American science in some of the most
reprehensive dirty tricks of the dirty Vietnam war was signaled by dissident
students and researchers.” He continues that this was part of a wide criticism of
the early vision of modern science leading to the result that “all the contradictions in
the ideology of science that had been latent, through the centuries of triumph, now
became manifest.” In a certain sense, the social agreement around the use of physics
research in military applications, so typical in the Cold War times, had been called
into question.
“Although the millenarian aspirations of the 1960s, in politics and in experience,
are now reduced to an object of historical study, the permanent changes achieved
then should not be underestimated,” according to Ravetz (1990, p. 901). However,
as noted by the historian Eric Hobsbawm (1994, p. 613), “there are as yet no
properly historical treatments of the social and cultural revolutions in the second
half of the century,” despite his chapter “Cultural Revolution” in Age of Extremes.
Thus those times remain an open field for historical research. As for the permanent
changes in science, some terrain has already been charted, and the current work
aims to contribute towards fulfilling it. A short and far from comprehensive account
of the issues already analyzed through scholarly works include the following:
Daniel Kevles (1978) identified the 1970s as a time when there was a decline in
6.1 Introduction 199


public support for the increasing budgets spent on physics, typical of Cold War
times in the 1950s. Gary Werskey (2007), while reviewing the Marxist critique of
capitalist science, dedicated a section on the British scientific Left of the 1970s,
which included his own influential book The Visible College. Paul Forman (2012)
saw the early signals of the end of modernity and the dawn of postmodernity,
marking the transition between the two cultural-historical epochs, in “the dramatic
fall, between the early 1960s and the early 1970s, in the cultural valuation of
professions and of disciplines.” The sociologist Kelly Moore (2008) analyzed the
political engagement of American scientists from 1945 to 1975, discussing the
changes in the social authority of the scientific enterprise. Andrew Jamison (2012),
writing on science and technology in postwar Europe, titled a section “From the
1960s to the 1980s: A Period of Debate and Reform” but he did not deal with the
influence of such events on the very content of science. Stevens (2003) remarked
that American physicists from the high energy domain changed their discourse on
the importance of their field from its value in national defense and scientific
competition to its cultural value. Later, David Kaiser (2012a) spotted the influence
of the counter culture, hippies in particular, in the development of the field of
foundations of quantum mechanics. Kaiser has shown us in a telling case that the
no-cloning theorem, nowadays a central piece in quantum information, resulted
from instigations from physicists gathered at Berkeley who identified themselves
with the counter culture trends of the time. Kaiser also exemplified how the wide
cultural environment may shape the production of textbooks, analyzing the incep-
tion of two of them in the US in the mid-1970s (Kaiser 2012b).1 Matthew Wisnioski
(2012, pp. 11â€"12) analyzed the “ideology of technological changes” resulting from
the tension among American engineers between 1964 and 1974 related to perceived
“out-of-control technology.” However, other studies have noted the destructiveness
of this radicalization concerning some scientific institutions, at least on the Italian
scene. According to Capocci and Corbellini (2002), and Cozzoli and Capocci
(2011), the political context played a role in thwarting institutions in health
sciences, such as the International Laboratory of Genetics and Biophysics in Naples
and the Italian Higher Institute of Health, which suffered from the accusation of
being too American in style, a deadly sin in Italy at that time. However, in spite of
the value of such works, the influence of the context on the practice of science, on
its research agenda, and its relationship with the public at large has yet to be more
extensively charted.
In a previous paper (Freire Jr. 2004) I suggested that the context of political and
cultural unrest of the late 1960s might have helped to open the way for the
emergence of marginal themes such as foundations of quantum physics. My
purpose in this chapter is to substantiate such a suggestion. I will approach this
theme through two case studies. The first one concerns the Italian Physical Society
(SIF, in Italian), its summer school (Enrico Fermi school, held yearly in Varenna),
which in the early 1970s included Foundations of Quantum Mechanics, History of


1
The books analyzed were Misner, Thorne, and Wheeler’s Gravitation and Capra’s The Tao of
Physics.
200 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


Physics in the twentieth century, and Physics and Society as some of its themes
(d’Espagnat 1971; Weiner 1977).
The Italian Physical Society was created in 1935 in Bologna in the wake of the
flourishing of Italian research in modern physics led by Enrico Fermi and the young
physicists gathered at Via Panisperna, where the Physics Institute in Rome was
located. The Fascist racial laws dispersed the group and destruction from World
War II represented a strong setback for the Italian physics. However, particularly
under the leadership of Edoardo Amaldi, a remnant from Fermi’s team, this
community was rebuilt and the Nobel Prize awarded to two of them, Fermi and
Emilio Segré, contributed to a renewed self-esteem of Italian physicists. They
relaunched the traditional journal Il Nuovo Cimento, whose creation dates from
the nineteenth century; created the Enrico Fermi summer schools, in Varenna, in
1953; some of them also supported the creation of the International Centre for
Theoretical Physics, in Trieste, and associated to the creation of CERN. In the
mid-1960s thus the Italian physics community was recovered and its association
and its summer school and journal garnered prestige inside Italy and in the world
physics community (Amaldi et al. 1997, 1998; Salvini 2005).2
Recollections from both senior and young Italian physicists who acted in that
context indicate that political motivations lay behind the decision to hold such
schools. For instance, the young physicist Augusto Sabbadini recalled that “the ’68
movement was still in full swing and I felt very much part of it. The sense of
openness, the readiness to consider things in new and unconventional ways had to
some extent spread from the streets into the academia, Varenna was partly an
expression of that;” while the president of the Italian Physical Society, Toraldo di
Francia, said that the inclusion of such themes in the summer schools was a way to
prevent society from splitting due to the political tensions of the time.3 The political
background motivating the promotion of the school dedicated to the foundations of
quantum mechanics was noted by observers external to the Italian physics milieu.
According to the recollections from Bernard d’Espagnat, who was already a senior
French physicist in 1970,
I suppose there was, coming from the grassroots, some demands on calling into question the
received views. It was 1970, that is, a time with much political and intellectual agitation. In
Italy, like in France, there were young physicists who were activists. This might have
played a role.4


2
Amaldi reports, in Amaldi et al. (1998, pp. 244â€"246 and 285â€"286), the creation of the Varenna
summer school, the reorganization of the Italian Physical Society, and the journal Il Nuovo
Cimento. His account emphasizes the role of Giovanni Polvani, as the new president of the society,
in all these initiatives and how he was inspired by the creation of the Les Houches summer school
in Theoretical Physics by the French physicist Cécile Morette (later C. DeWitt-Morette). On the
role played by the Varenna summer schools, in the 1950s and 1960s, see also Schweber (2014).
3
Augusto Shantena Sabbadini to the author, e-mail, 18 Jan 2011. Toraldo di Francia, interview
with Olival Freire, Florence, 01 July 2003, deposited at the Center for History of Physics â€"
American Institute of Physics, College Park, MD.
4
“Je suppose aussi qu’il y avait, en provenance de ‘la base’, une certaine demande de mise en
question des idées reçues. C’était en soixante-dix, c’est-à-dire, à une époque de pas mal d’agitation
politique et intellectuelle. Et, en Italie comme en France, il y avait des jeunes physiciens qui
6.2 The Mesh of Science and Politics: The Varenna Summer Schools 201


For the second case, we move to the American scene, where reminiscences from
John Clauser, the leader of the first successful experiment on Bell’s theorem,
suggest he changed his research from the subject of cosmic background radiation
to alternative interpretations of quantum mechanics for cognitive and political
reasons. While a graduate student at Columbia University, influenced by l’air du
temps of the protests against the Vietnam War, he recalled that he wanted to shake
the world, and quantum mechanics was one of the targets of this desire. According
to his words, “the Vietnam War dominated the political thoughts of my generation.
Being a young student living in this era of revolutionary thinking, I naturally
wanted to ‘shake the world.’ Since I already believed that hidden variables may
indeed exist, I figured that this was obviously the crucial experiment for finally
revealing their existence” (Clauser 2002, p. 80). Our focus, however, will be on the
role played in the US by the magazine Physics Today in opening the debate on the
diversity of interpretations of quantum mechanics in 1970. Our point is that both the
opening of such a debate and the way it was received were influenced by the
political climate of the times. This influence is better documented in the Italian
case, where accommodating to the political climate was influential in the decisions
of the Italian Physical Society. In the American case, while such influence is very
plausible, documentary evidence is not so strong.
This chapter is organized as follows. The second section covers the background
to the SIF’s decision to hold such schools and the sensitivities around their themes.
Then I present the two schools, their results, and the political climate and the
influence of this on the subjects in question. In the fourth section I briefly present
the immediate continuity of political unrest and the fading of the political climate.
The fifth section is dedicated to the conflicts experienced by the American Physical
Society and Physics Today as a consequence of the political tensions of the times. In
the sixth section the focus is placed on the opening of the debates on the quantum
controversy in the magazine Physics Today and the reception of such an opening.
Then I present the conclusions.



6.2 The Mesh of Science and Politics: The Varenna
Summer Schools

The political unrest of the late 1960s put politically active young physicists in
particular under pressure. Some of them, as we have seen in the case of Clauser,
reacted to this cultural ambiance by focusing their research on foundations of
physics issues. Historically, research on the foundations of physics has been a
way to criticize established scientific doctrines, not unlike the case of Ernst Mach

contestaient. Cela a peut-eÌ‚tre joué son roÌ‚le.” Bernard d’Espagnat, interviewed by the author, Paris,
26 Oct 2001, Niels Bohr Library & Archives, American Institute of Physics, College Park, MD
[AIP hereafter]. D’Espagnat made these comments without being asked about this kind of
background.
202 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


and his criticism of mechanics in the nineteenth century. This was the case of Tito
Tonietti, an Italian physicist who got his degree in 1966 and would later go on to a
career in the history of physics. According to his testimony,
I graduated with an original thesis on gauge theories, but at that time nobody cared about
it. Then, in the political context of late sixties, we hoped for a deep change not only in
society, but even in the way of doing physics. So, we started from the foundations of Q.M.,
which I learned from Messiah.5

Tonietti’s motivation to look at the foundations of quantum physics is an
example of the way of thinking that went into the decision making of the Italian
Physical Society when it took the stand of dedicating one of its summer schools,
held in Varenna, to the subject. Several testimonies, in addition to Tonietti’s,
converge on the influence of the political dissension of the times in that decision
as well as to the decision to dedicate another school to the subject of history of
physics and its social implications. Angelo Baracca, for instance, had graduated in
1965 and was “Professore incaricato” of Statistical Mechanics at the University of
Florence. He was then “engaged in high-energy physics research and was also very
sensitive to the general flux of critical considerations and practices against institu-
tional science and its social commitments.” According to his recollections about
these schools,
I was among the young physicists who participated in the Meeting and Assembly of the
Italian Physical Society, in which we criticized institutional research, and expressly pro-
posed this School in the programs of the Varenna Summer Schools, with the proposal of
introducing a reflection on the foundations of Physics. In fact we had a subsequent
initiative, proposing and getting a Summer School on the History of Physics, that we
considered a concrete way to study the social implications of Science.6

It would be misleading, however, to think about these proposals as an initiative
only from young physicists. Franco Selleri, who formally presented the proposal on
foundations of quantum mechanics, was then a mature particle physicist, aged
36 years old. As he recalled,
I was then a member of the directive board of the Italian Physical Society so I suggested
that a summer school be organised in Varenna by the Italian Physical Society on the
foundations of quantum mechanics. The idea was accepted and d’Espagnat was named
director of the school and many influential people were invited.7

In his talk at the Varenna school Selleri presented a research program designed
to reform quantum physics and in which physics, philosophical and social commit-
ment made up equal parts. Among the arguments for adopting a realistic philoso-
phy, he claimed,




5
Tito Tonietti to the author, e-mail, 19 Jan 2011. Messiah is a reference to the classical quantum
physics textbook written by the French physicist Albert Messiah (1961).
6
Angelo Baracca, e-mail to the author, 17 Jan 2011.
7
Franco Selleri, interview with Olival Freire, Bari, 24 June 2003, deposited at AIP.
6.2 The Mesh of Science and Politics: The Varenna Summer Schools 203

In this time where the social responsibility of the scientist is so strong, where the destruc-
tion or the survival of the world depends also on him, it is important to develop a science
not in basic contradiction with the social reality. The foundations of physics (and in
particular of quantum mechanics) should then better be based on a realistic philosophy.
(Selleri 1971)

The following year, Selleri (1972) published a long paper in Critica Marxista, an
Italian cultural and political magazine, in which the connection between his
approach to quantum problems and philosophical choices were made rather more
explicit. He used the thesis of the divorce between the two cultures (scientific and
humanistic), a thesis developed by the British chemist-novelist Charles P. Snow
(1959), to argue that contemporary physics was suffering from three weaknesses,
namely absence of history of science, distance from philosophy, and abandonment
of the idea of physical reality. Then Selleri developed his arguments mobilizing
Marxist authors such as Marx, Engels, and Lenin to criticize what he considered to
be the standard interpretation of quantum theory, that is, the complementary
interpretation. Finally he established connections between physicists’ political
stands and their views of the interpretation of quantum physics. Selleri labeled
critics of complementarity, such as Einstein and Schrödinger, progressive, and its
supporters, such as Bohr, Heisenberg, Born, and Jordan, conservatives.8 Selleri
maintains this intertwinement between science, philosophy, and politics until today,
as he stated: “it is our duty to build a science that can be communicated to
everybody,” and added “at those times I was thinking in terms of the working
class, the working people. [. . .] Seeing that important ideas of the realist people like
de Broglie and Einstein and so on were as much as possible forgotten, I understood
that the scientific community does not work properly.” Thus for him criticisms of
the foundations of quantum theory, philosophical realism, and socialist inclinations
were aspects which come together.9
Yet more meaningful was the fact that these proposed themes for the summer
schools, expressed as they were in that context, were readily accepted by the board
of the Italian Physical Society. In fact, there was a kind of political agreement on the
board led by Giuliano Toraldo di Francia (1916â€"2011), the president of the society.
A senior researcher in optics who went on to win the Max Born medal from the
Optical Society of America, Toraldo di Francia led the society between 1968 and
1973. In his later memoirs, he defined himself as a left-wing man, while not a
communist, very sensitive to the philosophical dimensions of science. In 2003, he



8
In the 1970s, the Italian scholars who were Marxism-inclined and involved with the quantum
controversy reproduced the same divide from the early 1950s, a divergence we examined in
Chap. 2. Thus, contrasting with Selleri, the philosopher Silvano Tagliagambe, supported by
Ludovico Geymonat, published a translation of the relevant Soviet papers on the quantum
controversy with an analysis favorable to Fock’s stand. Tagliagambe’s work, however, apparently
did not influence the physicists who were interested in the quantum controversy and himself, after
a while, moved towards different subjects. See Tagliagambe (1972) and Freire Jr. (2011).
9
Franco Selleri, interview with Olival Freire, ibid.
204 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


recalled the agreement he reached with his peers and how correct it was later
considered in hindsight.
I found myself in a way, as we say, between the hammer and anvil, between the two,
because on one part I had my professors, my old teachers who were not fascists, not at all,
but certainly reactionary, and the young people who were pro-Communists, but too much. I
said no, you are right here and you are wrong here, and I found myself in a very different
position. But later it was acknowledged that by taking that standpoint, I saved the Italian
Physical Society. Because it certainly risked being split in two at that time. I said no, we
cannot split, we must continue to do very good research in particle research as has been
done; but also take care of our needs of the society, which particles don’t do, but I could do,
and later was recognized that it was a reasonable standpoint.10

As for the school dedicated to the history of physics in the twentieth century,
traces of the political background of the times may be seen in the topics Charles
Weiner chose to include on the agenda of the school. Weiner was then the head of
the Center for the History of Physics at the American Institute of Physics and had
been chosen by the board of the Italian society to be the director of the school,
which was held in 1972. Alongside the traditional topics in the history of science,
there were topics reflecting socio-political issues. Among the former, we find
“Roots of Modern Physics,” “Origins and Development of Quantum Theory,”
“History of Nuclear and Particle Physics”, while among the latter there was “The
Rise of Big Science,” “Historical Prospectives on Physics, Technology and Soci-
ety,” and “The Social Role of the Professional Physicist.” The “subsequent initia-
tive” mentioned by Baracca was adopted, according to historian of physics Arturo
Russo’s recollections, at the 1971 SIF congress held in L’Aquila. The society had
asked Giovanni Jona-Lasinio, who lectured on the history of physics and was a
reputed physicist in areas such as quantum field theory and statistical mechanics, to
organize the summer school on the history of physics in the twentieth century.
Indeed, Charles Weiner was invited to be the director of the school and Jonas-
Lasinio its organizer. Still according to Russo, in 1970, the SIF had organized a
conference on “Science in the contemporary society” where critical reflections on
the current trends in science were presented by, among others, Marcello Cini, Silvio
Bergia, and Toraldo di Francia. This conference published its proceedings under the
less neutral title “Science in the capitalistic society.” We will see more on the
politics around these schools later.11
As the Italian case is so well documented with regard to interactions between the
political and cultural context and scientific content itself, or at least the agenda of


10
Toraldo di Francia, op. cit.
11
Russo, Arturo. (2007). Writing the history of modern physics in Italy: a personal reflection. In
S. Boudia, D. Pestre, and S. Soubiran (orgs.), ‘Writing the History’ of the Physical Sciences after
1945: state of the art, questions, and perspectives, Strasbourg, 7â€"9 June 2007; unpublished papers
for private circulation. I am indebted to Xavier Roqué for bringing Russo’s paper to my attention.
The proceedings of “Science in the capitalistic society” are in Società Italiana di Fisica (1971).
Charles Weiner to Toraldo di Francia, 17 June 1971. Archives of the Italian Physical Society
[ASIF hereafter], Bologna.
6.2 The Mesh of Science and Politics: The Varenna Summer Schools 205


research, we may ask how singular was this case. The issue is more pertinent if one
considers that no major Italian physicist openly criticized the orthodox view of
quantum mechanics before 1970. While the question is difficult to give a clear-cut
answer to, historians have given hints about how deeply rooted the Italian 1968
crisis was compared to other cases. In his comparative history of postwar Europe,
the historian Tony Judt concluded his comparison between the French and the
Italian 1968 events, after considering the social context, including universities, of
both countries (Judt 2005, p. 416)12:
Whereas French students had played with the idea that public authority might prove
vulnerable to disruption from below, a caprice that Gaullism’s firmly-grounded institutions
allowed them to indulge with impunity, Italy’s radicals had good reason to believe that they
might actually succeed in rending the fabric of the post-Fascist Republicâ€"and they were
keen to try.

Indeed, to fully understand the particularities of the Italian case we should
consider both the labor and social movements, which were increasing since the
mid-1960s, and its deployments, which ran till the early 1980s, a period known now
in Italian history as the Years of Lead. While the latter radicalization falls beyond
the timeline of our case and its historical documentation is still today hugely
controversial, in fact its beginning predates the 1970 Varenna summer school. As
remarked by Judt, “on April 24th 1969, bombs were planted at the Milan Trade Fair
and the central railway station. Eight months later, after the Pirelli conflicts had
been settled and the strike movement ended, the Agricultural Bank on the Piazza
Fontana in Milan was blown up,” to conclude that “the ‘strategy of tension’ that
underlay the lead years of the Seventies had begun.” Furthermore, according to Judt
(2005, pp. 476â€"477), “from 1977 to 1982 especially, the country was under the
siege from random acts of extreme violence by far Left, far Right and professional
criminals alike.” Though it is beyond the scope of this study to consider events in
those later years, the singularity and extension of the Italian upheavals have been
commented on by analysts from distinct ideological perspectives. Thus the
politician-turned-historian Lucio Magri, writing “a possible history of the Italian
Communist Party,” christened the political context in question “Italy’s Long Sixty-
Eight” (Magri 2011, p. 195).13




12
Some readers may inquire about bringing together Judt and Hobsbawm as commentators of the
same events, given their ideological opposite stances. I may defend my procedure citing
Hobsbawm’s obituary of Judt in which the book I am quotingâ€"Postwarâ€"is highly appreciated.
See “After the Cold War - Eric Hobsbawm remembers Tony Judt”, London Review of Books, 34
(8), 26 April 2012, p. 14; available at http://www.lrb.co.uk/v34/n08/eric-hobsbawm/after-the-
cold-war
, accessed on 10 April 2014. I am thankful to Thiago Hartz for bringing this obituary to
my attention.
13
For studies related to the upheavals in Italy, see also Cento Bull and Giorgio (2006).
206 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


6.3 The Schools and Their Results

6.3.1 1970: Foundations of Quantum Mechanics

The 1970 Varenna Summer School was successful due to the scientific and philo-
sophical discussions it stimulated. Its 84 participants, the quality of their talks, the
quick publication of its proceedings (d’Espagnat 1971), the first debates on Bell’s
theorem and experiments, the debates on the quantum measurement problem, and
the diversity of its speakers, including John Bell, David Bohm, Eugene Wigner,
Louis de Broglie, Josef-Maria Jauch, Abner Shimony, Heinz-Dieter Zeh, Franco
Selleri, and Bryce DeWitt, created an air of excitement around research into
foundations. In the case of this school the subject already had a small but
unconnected community and the school helped network these scientists, bringing
together most of the physicists who would go on to contribute to the blossoming of
this research in the 1970s. For instance, John Bell, Abner Shimony, Bernard
d’Espagnat, and Franco Selleriâ€"all of them worked on Bell’s theorem. In the
case of Bell and Shimony they had already been working on this subject, and in
the case of d’Espagnat and Selleri they turned their attention to it. However, they
had been working independently before becoming part of a network (Freire
Jr. 2006, p. 592). The following years, Shimony would spend a time with
d’Espagnat in France and d’Espagnat would help Alain Aspect to look for support
for his experiments. For Selleri it was the first opportunity to become acquainted
with the theme, which would go on to occupy all his professional energy from then
on, becoming the most vocal critic of loopholes in these experiments, which
according to him would save local realism. As for d’Espagnat, he was then
beginning to work on foundations and the success of the school led him to be
regarded as one of the experts in the field. He had already published a book
(d’Espagnat 1965) on the subject and would publish an influential textbook on
conceptual issues in quantum physics (d’Espagnat 1989 [1st edition 1971]). It was
also an important event for Zeh, who needed encouragement for the research he was
beginning and which would later lead him to the decoherence effect (Freire
Jr. 2009, pp. 281â€"282). The school was also the event at which Bryce DeWitt
expressed his recent conversion to Everett’s many-worlds interpretation. It con-
veyed the feeling of openness towards the existence of a diversity of interpretations
of quantum mechanics rather than just the complementarity interpretation. The
school was also helpful for some of its attendees who would later become leaders in
the research on the foundations of quantum physics. This was the case with Basil
Hiley and Emilio Santos. Hiley was then an assistant of David Bohm at Birkbeck
College in London and would become the key protagonist in Bohm’s quest for a
mathematical treatment for the ideas of wholeness and implicate order. Santos
would work on stochastic electrodynamics and implications for the interpretation
of quantum theory and animate conferences on foundations in Spain. Finally, the
school strengthened the existence of a quantum measurement problem, and Eugene
Wigner, as one of its keynote speakers, presented the diverse proposals to solve
6.3 The Schools and Their Results 207


it. The debate between Wigner and Giovanni Prosperi, who had clashed on the
quantum measurement problem the decade before, presented in Chap. 4, was an
attraction of the school. In short, the school encouraged physicists to change their
research agenda to include these topics and/or encouraged those already working on
them, thus contributing to the professional recognition of a research theme in
serious need of attention.

E. Wigner The subject of our discussions
J. M. Jauch Foundations of quantum mechanics
H. Stein and Limitations on measurements
A. Shimony
M. M. Yanase Optimal measuring apparatus
B. d’Espagnat Mesure et non séparabilité (Revue sommaire)
G. M. Prosperi Macroscopic physics and the problem of measurement in quantum
mechanics
J. Kalckar Measurability problems in the quantum theory of fields
J. S. Bell Introduction to the hidden-variable question
A. Shimony Experimental test of local hidden-variable theories
L. Kasday Experimental test of quantum predictions for widely separated photons
B. S. DeWitt The many-universes interpretation of quantum mechanics
H. D. Zeh On the irreversibility of time and observation in quantum theory
G. Ludwig The measuring process and an axiomatic foundation of quantum
mechanics
F. Herbut and On a new development in the description of correlations between two
M. Vujičić quantum systems
A. Frenkel Superselection rules and internal symmetries
K. E. Hellwig Measuring process and additive conservation laws
L. de Broglie L’interprétation de la mécanique ondulatoire par la théorie de la double
solution
J. Andrade e Silva Une formulation causale de la théorie quantique de la mesure
F. Selleri Realism and the wave-function of quantum mechanics
H. Neumann Seminar notes
D. Bohm Quantum theory as an indication of a new order in physics
A. Shimony Philosophical comments on quantum mechanics
Lecturers and talks at the Varenna 1970 school on Foundations of Quantum Mechanics

Its success was to a large extent a result of the abilities that d’Espagnat brought
to its organization. In the mid-1960s, while pursuing a career in high energy physics
at CERN, he was attracted by the increasing interest in the foundations of quantum
mechanics. At CERN he became close to John Bell on recognizing that they shared
a common interest in the foundations of quantum physics. A major contribution of
d’Espagnat to the research on foundations required, however, not only his scientific
training and philosophical inclination but also his diplomatic skills. When the
council of the Italian Society of Physics decided to dedicate one of its Varenna
Summer Schools to the foundations of quantum mechanics it was taking a decision
208 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


to focus on a theme that was itself controversial. Since World War II the summer
schools had been a privileged gathering of young promising physicists to train in
research at the frontiers of physics. However, the issue arises: How should one train
scientists on issues where no consensus exists? d’Espagnat dealt with this by setting
the standards of behavior scientists should adhere to in case of controversy. He set
out these rules in the invitation letter he sent to all participants. These diplomatic
rules included (d’Espagnat 1971)14:
1) We should not take as our goals the conversion of the heretic but rather a better
understanding of his standpoint. 2) We should not suggest that we consider as a stupid
fool anybody in the audience (lest the stupid fools should in the end appear clearly to be
ourselves!). 3) We should try to cling to facts. 4) Nevertheless, we should be prepared to
hear without indignation very nonconformist views which have no immediate bearing on
facts.

Considering the role played by d’Espagnat in this school and the increasing role
he would play in this field, a few more words on him seem appropriate. He has been
interested in both philosophy and science since his school days. Indeed, he got a
French Baccalauréat in Mathematics and Philosophy but realized that investiga-
tions into the philosophy of science in the twentieth century required scientific
training, which led him to a career in physics. In the mid-1960s, while pursuing a
career in high-energy physics at CERN, he was gradually attracted by the increas-
ing interest in the foundations of quantum mechanics. In 1965 he published
Conceptions de la physique contemporaineâ€"Les interprétations de la mécanique
quantique et de la mesure, which would be followed 10 years later by the influential
Conceptual Foundations of Quantum Mechanics, both part of his series of much-
praised books (d’Espagnat 1965, 1989). The Varenna school and the growing
interest in foundations during the following decade absorbed almost all of
d’Espagnat’s energy. In 1977 he visited the US as a Visiting Professor at the
University of Texas, Austin, a place that John Archibald Wheeler had succeeded
in establishing as a major American institution devoted to research on the founda-
tions of quantum mechanics and general relativity. d’Espagnat arrived in the US
continuing his crusade to “tolerate difference of views,” as noted by Wheeler.
However, discussions there with Wheeler, Everett, DeWitt, Henry Stapp, George
Sudarshan, and James Hartle led d’Espagnat to change his former view on the
interest of American physicists in foundational issues, as he wrote to Wheeler, “In
fact, these three weeks made me discover both very attractive specific problems and
also some aspects of the general trend of ideas in the United States that were novel
to me, and that may perhaps correspond to a genuine evolution.”15 Eventually,


14
d’Espagnat’s diplomatic skills, however, were not enough to keep Léon Rosenfeld on the list of
lecturers, as we have discussed in Chap. 4.
15
d’Espagnat to Wheeler, 27 Apr 1977, Wheeler Papers, Series IIâ€"Box DE, folder d’Espagnat.
“Tolerate difference” and references to the discussions are in Wheeler’s notebook, pp. 145â€"149.
Idem, Series V, Notebook October 1976â€"December 1977. Wheeler Papers, American Philosoph-
ical Society, Philadelphia, PA (WP hereafter). Bernard d’Espagnat, interviewed by the author,
26 Oct 2001, op. cit., AIP.
6.3 The Schools and Their Results 209


d’Espagnat abandoned high-energy physics and followed his dream to devote
himself full-time to research into science and philosophy, now always related to
the foundations of quantum mechanics.
The success of the 1970 school on foundations of quantum mechanics as a
school was not, however, self-evident for all those present. The exceptionality of
a summer school dedicated to a scientific controversy, about subjects on which
there was a wide diversity of conflicting standpoints, was noted by one of its
younger participants. Anders Barany was then 28 years old, a PhD student in
theoretical physics at the University of Uppsala, Sweden. Barany had high expec-
tations about the school as his doctoral research concerned the foundations of
quantum mechanics, in particular the quantum measurement problem. However,
for him such a school was different. According to his recollections,
What most impressed me was that many (maybe even most) of the highly qualified
scientists lecturing at the school could not cooperate to try and help the students form a
coherent picture of the different problems connected with the foundations of quantum
physics. Instead they immediately started arguing with each other and at some points were
really fighting each other (almost physically!). In retrospect, having both attended and
organized a large number of scientific meetings, I would not really call this a summer
school, where “school” in some sense means that it should play an educational role, but
rather a conference for mature scientists trying to bring forward their own results and
messages.16

On his return to Sweden Barany filed the papers he had collected on the
foundations of quantum mechanics and “did not touch them for many years.” He
went on the reflection, “If scientists such as Wigner, Jauch, Bohm, etc, could not
agree on a proper direction to go, how could I even think of making a
contribution?”17
As for the political background of that school, recollections from the attendees
highlight the role played by the Italian and French students. “I remember that the
Italians discussed politics a lot, but I don’t remember what were the topics,” are the
memories from the German Michael Drieschner.18 The German H. Dieter Zeh had
more vague recollections, but they also point towards the Italians, meshing their
political commitments with their critical stances about quantum physics: “Some-
body told me that there were many communists (hence materialists) among the
Italian organizers. Hence their problems with non-realism.”19 Zeh’s and Selleri’s
cases should be contrasted to shed light on the development of the research on
foundations. They had opposing philosophical views on quantum issues. While




16
Anders Barany to the author, e-mail, 13 Jan 2011.
17
Idem.
18
Michael Drieschner to the author, e-mail, 24 Jan 2011.
19
Dieter Zeh to the author, e-mail, 15 Jan 2011.
210 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


Selleri supported realism and criticized the usual quantum theory, Zeh had no
qualms with non-realism and trusted the linear mathematical apparatus of quantum
physics to obtain new quantum features (Freire Jr. 2009). As diverse as their stands
were, both benefited from the creation of a professional and intellectual space for
the foundations of quantum physics, which the 1970 Varenna school indeed was.
Returning to politics, the reminiscences of the Swede Anders Barany are
revealing20:
There were violent political discussions going on, mainly emanating from the Italian
(or “Latin”) students. Most of the discussions were held “out-of-lectures”, but as I remem-
ber it, a student “agitator” occupied the stage and read or wanted to read a revolutionary
manifesto in front of the audience. This is where Wigner intervened and in my memory he
managed to calm down the student and there was instead a peaceful discussion.

Barany’s memories bring to surface two aspects noted by several participants.
The political climate, while strong, did not interfere with the workings of the school
and the singular role of the physicist Eugene Wigner. Indeed, the political episode
most recalled is the incident related to July 4th involving Wigner. The incident may
be described using various testimonies, including those from Basil Hiley, Emilio
Santos, Andor Frenkel, Rémy Lestienne, and Giovanni Prosperi. Hiley, when asked
about political incidents in the school, recalls:
Yes, there was one classic political episode that took place. Wigner decided to throw a party
and he happened to choose the 4th July. Remember that was the time of Vietnam and the
Italian students, mainly Italian, tried to get the date changed. They were not going to take
part in a party on 4th July. Of course Wigner refused to change the day. There was a lot of
arguments and protests, a lot of hot air over this, but the party eventually went ahead on the
4th July as planned. It went off without incident.21

Another testimony, from the Spaniard Emilio Santos, while essentially similar to
Hiley’s, suggests a generational divide between those who protested and those who
went to the party offered by Wigner:
I remember very well that Eugene Wigner invited people to a party on the occasion of the
National Day of USA, July 4, and there were some (mainly young) people who attempted to
convince other people not to attend the party because the USA was involved in the Vietnam
war at that time. Actually most senior people (myself in particular) attended the party. I
remember that Wigner was very kind with the same young people who boycotted the party
and there is even a photo of Wigner with them.22




20
Anders Barany, op. cit.
21
Basil Hiley to the author, e-mail, 22 Jan 2011.
22
Emilio Santos to the author, e-mail, 19 Jan 2011.
6.3 The Schools and Their Results 211




Picture 6.1 Participants at the 1970 Varenna school on foundations of quantum mechanics.
Wigner is seated in the middle, the only one wearing tie. On his right: Sabbadini and then Bell.
Reproduced with permission from “Foundations of Quantum Mechanics”, Proceedings of the
International School of Physics “Enrico Fermi”, course IL, edited by B. d’Espagnant (Academic
Press), © SIF, 1971

The Hungarian physicist Andor Frenkel recalls that the hot political climate was
not only related to the date and the Vietnam War, but also to the fact that Wigner’s
support for the war was well known: “Professor Wigner was a supporter of the war
against Vietnam, and many participants of the School wanted the US out of
Vietnam.”23 Recollections from Giovanni Prosperi describe some of those who
opposed Wigner’s initiative more vividly: “On Sunday there was no lesson and as it
was USA independence day, Wigner wanted to give participants a party. It was the
time of the Vietnam War and Selleri, who was quite left wing, was rather disap-
pointed and tried to prevent it calling Toraldo di Francia in Bologna. However,
Wigner was very determined and the party took place.”24 The party organized by
Wigner was the political event most recalled among the attendees, highlighting
Wigner as the main conservative pole, both for his professional prominence and his
support for the Vietnam War. However, there was a kind of peaceful coexistence
and competition, to use the political jargon, between the political conflicts and
Wigner’s role as a supporter of the debates around the foundations of quantum
physics. Tonietti’s reminiscences are evidence of such a coexistence:
The intermingling of political and “technical-physical” arguments was evident, and palpa-
ble during these days in Varenna. Still keenly, I remember a direct discussion with
E. Wigner at the dinner table. First we talked a little about the best formalism for Q.M.;
then Wigner said that students of the ‘68 movement “must be mad”. To that I replied: “They
must be clever”. Our conversation stopped. Toraldo di Francia, and Franco Selleri both
sided with the Partito Comunista Italiano, I sided with the students’ movement against the
Soviet Union hoping for a New Left.25


23
Andor Frenkel to the author, e-mail, 13 May 2011.
24
Giovanni Prosperi to the author, e-mail, 28 Jan 2011.
25
Tito Tonietti, op. cit.
212 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


Some political anxiety related to the school on the foundations of quantum
mechanics survived the school and surfaced when d’Espagnat was editing the
proceedings. He was afraid of the influence of the political context on the editing
process. The source of d’Espagnat’s worries, as expressed in his letter to the
president of the Italian Physical Society, came from some of Franco Selleri’s
statements. “According to him, in fact, a trend would have appeared in [the Italian
Physical] society whose goal would be to intimately associate scientific activities
with activities from a different order.”26 D’Espagnat was then reassured by Toraldo
di Francia, who wrote to him saying that,
The directors of the Varenna’s courses were, always, the final judges of what should be
included in their proceedings and your case is not an exception. By the way, it is true that
there is in our society the trend of not occupying itself only with technical issues, and this
trend is more and more strong and well founded. However, surely, by foundations of
quantum mechanics we understand the foundations of quantum mechanics, and this is the
title of the proceedings to be published. Thus I hope to have dissipated your anxieties.27

In other words, what Toraldo di Francia was saying meant that while the political
context had been influential in the choice of the subject of the school, its influence
should be restricted to only this. The society’s editing processes would not be
influenced by it.
Before moving to the school dedicated to the history of physics, it is useful to
enlarge the biographical information about Franco Selleri, because among the
Italian physicists who suggested the school on foundations he would become in
the future years a leader in this field of research. In 1958 Franco Selleri got his PhD
in physics in Bologna where he was educated under the influence of the physicist
Giampietro Puppi. In the following 10 years Selleri undertook a successful career in
high-energy physics, which included original contributions such as the one-pion
exchange model. These achievements assured him a position at Bologna University
when he returned from a series of fellowships in Switzerland, France, and the US.28
Disenchanted with the political and cultural climate in the Department of Physics at
Bologna University and attracted by an invitation to start theoretical physics at a
new university, he moved to Bari in 1968, where he remained till the end of his life.
Selleri had become frustrated with the scarce amount of physical realism one could

26
“D’après lui, en effet, une tendance se serait manifestée dans votre Société, ayant pour but
d’associer intimement aux activités scientifiques des activités d’un autre ordre.” Bernard
d’Espagnat to Toraldo di Francia, 03 Sep 1970. ASIF.
27
“Les directeurs des cours de Varenna ont été, toujours, les derniers juges de ce que doivent
contenir les compte-rendus et votre cas ne fait pas d’exception. D’ailleurs, si il est vrai que dans
notre Société la tendance à ne s’occuper pas seulement de questions techniques est de plus en plus
forte et très bien justifiée, il est neanmoins certain que par ‘Fondements de la mécanique
quantique’ nous entendons les fondements de la mécanique quantique. Et tel est le titre du volume
de compte-rendus qui va eÌ‚tre publié. J’espère d’avoir dissipé comme ça vos perplexities.” di
Francia to d’Espagnat, 16 Sep 1970; d’Espagnat to di Francia, 22 Sep 1970, emphasis in the
originals; all letters in the ASIF.
28
Tarozzi and van der Merwe (2004). The following citations and information come from Franco
Selleri, interviewed by Olival Freire, 2003, op. cit.
6.3 The Schools and Their Results 213


lend to the approaches used in particle physics and began to see “the problems in
elementary particle physics [as] due to the fact that quantum mechanics is poorly
understood and anyway is a very abstract idea.” He eventually became a full-time
researcher working on the foundations of quantum mechanics and more recently on
the theory of relativity. During this transition, his reading of d’Espagnat’s 1965
Conceptions de la physique contemporaine was influential, as he realized how
many interpretations could be accommodated by the quantum formalism.
Selleri elaborated a unique approach to foundations, combining his mistrust of
the quantum formalism with an agenda to appeal for more and more experiments on
these issues. Indeed, not only did he disagree with the complementarity interpreta-
tion for philosophical reasons, but he also thought that Hilbert space as a mathe-
matical structure for quantum theory would eventually be considered erroneous and
be replaced by a description in the normal space-time frame. He was among the first
to suggest experiments to test de Broglie’s wave plus particle picture, the “double
solution,” to expose loopholes in most of the first Bell’s theorem experiments, and
to suggest testing Bell’s inequalities in particle physics. Experimental work to date
has frustrated his expectations as it has confirmed quantum mechanics’ predictions.
However, his role as a kind of critical consciousness of experiments on Bell’s
theorem has probably been responsible for his high regard in this field. Further-
more, Selleri has mixed his defense of a realistic approach to quantum mechanics
with what he considers wider social responsibilities.29 In the 1980s he was respon-
sible for building a bridge between critics of quantum mechanics and the philoso-
pher Karl Popper, who was himself concerned with this physical theory, bringing
the controversy in quantum mechanics to a wider audience. Selleri and Sexl’s
(1983) widely translated book, Die Debatte um die Quantentheorie, was part of
this endeavor.
Turning his research to foundational issues did not cause any major damage to
Selleri’s professional career. Although his full professorship was postponed for
10 years, until 1980, explained by him as a result of his switch, he has never
encountered major professional obstacles to his field of research: “I have been
treated fairly. I have not been discriminated for the activity I did.” Leaving a major
center to work in a new center, Bari, with younger physicists also eased potential
obstacles, as he acknowledged: “In Bologna it would have been more difficult.” In
hindsight, Selleri also considers that the Italian environment also contributed to the
new stage of his career, “anyway, I have the feeling that Italy is more tolerant than
other countries to the foundations of quantum mechanics,” a feature he attributes to
a factor not yet studied by historians: Enrico Fermi’s criticisms of quantum



29
“I always thought [. . .] that it is our duty to build a science that can be communicated to
everybody. And at those times I was thinking in terms of the working class, the working people.
That is to say, if the only way to understand what I’m doing is to study differential equations or
Hilbert space, [. . .] there is too high a threshold. If instead I build physics in three-dimensional
space and in time according to the rules of causality then I can communicate my results.” Franco
Selleri, interviewed by Olival Freire, idem.
214 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


mechanics. However, in the early 1970s he did not think of Italy in the same way.
For him,
For some time Paris was looking as the most interesting place on earth for my type of
research, because de Broglie was alive. There was the de Broglie Foundation, there was
Vigier, there was d’Espagnat. There were young leftists like Paty and Levyâ€"Leblond
interested in fundamental questions, so it seemed like a paradise.

Such a conducive climate did not last. According to his recalling,
I have seen with time the paradise melting away completely, slowly, because eventually de
Broglie died, the de Broglie Foundation after his death followed a path of low profile and it
was not anymore a real defense of de Broglie’s ideas, d’Espagnat changed completely his
philosophy, and Vigier was very difficult to agree with from the beginning, because he
considered himself a nonlocal realist, a position whose motivation for me is still very
difficult to understand. [. . .] And then the young leftists converted to the orthodox line of
thought as well, so with time nothing was left, and Paris disappeared from my horizon.

The turn of events in Paris was for him indicative of a negative feature of science
at the time. He thinks that among the founding fathers of quantum mechanics there
were two conflicting camps of equal sizes and it became “99 to 1” in favor of the
complementarity view among those active in research. He suspects that dogmatism
was the cause of the change. “How was it possible, through repression and control
of positions and publications? And then also a lot of dogma exists. People do not
dare to oppose important ideas.”30



6.3.2 1972: History of Physics in the Twentieth Century

The school on the history of contemporary physics, under the direction of Charles
Weiner, brought together both junior and senior historians of physics. Among them
were Joan Bromberg, Robert Cohen, Gerald Holton, Marcello Cini, Yehuda Elkana,
John Heilbron, Paolo Rossi, Max Jammer, Jerome Ravetz, and Martin Klein.
Among the lecturers there was also a number of senior physicists such as the
Nobel Prize winner Paul Dirac, Hendrik B. G. Casimir, Viktor Weisskopf, Edoardo
Amaldi, and Léon Rosenfeld, who had a deep interest in the history of physics
(Jacobsen 2008). Weiner had tried to bring Thomas Kuhn and Paul Forman, but was
unsuccessful. The students and participants included a number of people who
would later be directly or indirectly related to the history and philosophy of physics.
Among them were Françoise Balibar, Angelo Baracca, Silvio Bergia, João Caraça,
Penha Dias, Giulio Giorello, Sandro Petruccioli, Arcangelo Rossi, Carlo Tarsitani,
John Worrall, Fritjof Capra, Manuel Doncel, Salvo d’Agostino, Noretta Koertge,
Jean-Marc Lévy-Leblond, Luis Navarro, and Tito Tonietti. Other participants, such
as Giancarlo Ghirardi and Constantine Philippidis, would later give meaningful
contributions to the foundations of quantum physics, as we will see later.


30
All quotations from Franco Selleri, interviewed by Olival Freire, ibid.
6.3 The Schools and Their Results 215


Compared to the school on the foundations of quantum mechanics, the school on
the history of physics can be said to have been less influential in the reshaping of its
own field insofar as it was already a well-defined scholarly field at the time. And
yet, it was part of the process through which a number of young Italian physicists
moved towards the history of physics, a process that only stabilized a few years
later after facing other professional obstacles, according to analysis by Arturo
Russo, who was one of the young physicists who converted to the history of
science.31 At any rate, the lectures became references for scholarly work (Weiner
1977) and it is right to say that a school dedicated to the history of physics organized
by a professional society of physicists was, and is, unusual.32

M. J. Klein The beginnings of the quantum theory
J. L Heilbron Lectures on the history of atomic physics 1900â€"1922
P. A. M. Dirac Recollections of an exciting era
J. Bromberg Dirac’s quantum electrodynamics and the wave-particle equivalence
H. B. G. Casimir Development of solid-state physics
H. B. G. Casimir Superconductivity
H. B. G. Casimir Some recollections
P. Rossi From Bruno to Kepler: man’s position in the cosmos
Y. Elkana The historical roots of modern physics
G. Holton Electrons or subelectrons? Millikan, Ehrenhaft and the role of
preconceptions
P. A. M. Dirac Ehrenhaft, the subelectrons and the quark
E. Amaldi Personal notes on neutron work in Rome in the 30s and the post-war
European collaboration in high-energy physics
M. J. Sherwin Niels Bohr and the atomic bomb: the scientific ideal and international
politics, 1943â€"1944
(continued)




31
The historian David Cassidy makes an analysis of the cultural unrest of the late 1960s and its
influence on the history of physics with some similarities with the Italian case we are presenting.
According to Cassidy (2011b, p. 141), “in the critical social environment of the day, historians and
sociologists began to dismantle the apolitical, asocial, amoral ideology regarding the disinterested,
value-free purity of physics,” and yet, “The utilization of social perspectives, historian Paul
Forman argued at the time, was essential to achieving intellectual independence from physicists’
constructs and practices.” See also Cassidy (2011a). On Russo, see Russo (2007), unpublished, op.
cit.
32
On Rosenfeld, see Jacobsen (2012). On the absence of Kuhn and Forman, see Charles Weiner,
cable, 19 Feb 1972, ASIF. The following Brazilians were enrolled in this course: Amélia Império
Hamburger, Enio Frota da Silveira, Penha Maria Cardoso Dias, Ernst Hamburger, and Ennio
Candotti. The Hamburger couple were prevented from participating by the Brazilian military
dictatorship (1964â€"1985) as they were then on trial for political offences. Promemoria per la SIF â€"
Elenco dei candidati accettati per Il 3 corso di Varenna; Amélia e Ernst Hamburger, cable,
27 June 1972; Amélia and Ernst Hamburger to Toraldo di Francia, 26 July 1972; ASIF.
216 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


L. Kowarski New forms of organization in physical research after 1945
W. Goldstein Science, politics and international affairs
V. F. Weisskopf Physics and physicists the way I knew them
H. B. G. Casimir The relations between science and technology
Lecturers and talks at the Varenna 1972 school on History of Twentieth Century Physics

Some of the young attendees as well as some lecturers at the 1972 school on the
history of physics were also interested in the debates on the foundations of quantum
theory, the subject of the 1970 school, although they did not attend it. Some cases
may illustrate this overlapping. Lévy-Leblond had been interested in the founda-
tions of quantum physics since the mid-1960s, an interest which was not indepen-
dent of his political engagement. He was immersed in the influence of Italian
communism among the French communists, which had led to renewed attention
to the role of science as a cultural phenomenon. The other influence came from
reading the philosopher Gaston Bachelard through courses delivered by the Marxist
philosopher Louis Althusser in Paris. All these influences merged in a very singular
style which characterized Lévy-Leblond’s contributions to the debate on the quan-
tum foundations, contributions marked more by the critical analysis of established
concepts than by new theoretical developments.33 Max Jammer, one of the lec-
turers, was then writing a piece of history which would become a reference in the
field of the quantum controversy (Jammer 1974). In 1985 Giancarlo Ghirardi
proposed the Ghirardiâ€"Riminiâ€"Weber theory (GRW), which became a landmark
in the quantum controversy as a systematic attempt to solve the quantum measure-
ment problem, namely the collapse of the quantum states during measurements,
through an addition of a stochastic term to Schrödinger’s equation (Frigg 2009).
Finally, Constantine Philippidis, a student of David Bohm and Basil Hiley, would a
few years later renew the early Bohmian approach by using computers to generate
the first graphic displays of the quantum potential and trajectories obtained through
that approach, as we have seen in Chap. 2 of this book.




33
For Lévy-Leblond’s early interest in the foundations of physics, see the debate among Michel
LeBellac, Jean-Pierre Vigier, François Lurçat, Pierre Lehmann, and himself in Clarté (n 53, pp.
14â€"43, Janvier 1964), which was the magazine of the French Communist Student Union. Talk with
the author, Nice, 5 November 2012.
6.3 The Schools and Their Results 217




Picture 6.2 Italian Physical Society, Varenna on Lake Como, Villa Monastero, 31st Julyâ€"12th
August 1972. Summer school on the History of Twentieth Century Physics. AIP Emilio Segre
Visual Archives


When the 1972 Varenna school was held, political activism among the young
scientists against the Vietnam War had escalated following the revelations of
American official documents about the JASON project. This project had gathered
a number of elite American scientists, most of them physicists, to advise the US in
defense matters, including the Vietnam War (Moore 2008, p. 170; United States
Department of Defense 1971; Finkbeiner 2006; Aaserud 1995). On 13 June 1972
protests reached a new level when French activist physicists impeded the Nobel
Prize winner Murray Gell-Mann, one of the JASON scientists, from giving a talk at
the prestigious Collège de France (Moore 2008, p. 172). This event motivated a
number of similar incidents in Europe and in the US with JASON scientists being
publicly targeted and criticized for their activities related to the military. The
French physicist Jean-Marc Lévy-Leblond, one of the leaders of the protests
which blocked Gell-Mann at the Collège de France, wrote to the Varenna school
organizers asking, “would you be interested in a seminar on ‘Radical views about
science to-day?’”34 At the school itself, apparently there was no internal conflict as
there had been at the 1970 school involving Wigner. Indeed there was no politically
conservative pole at the school as most of the professors, and naturally the students,

34
Jean-Marc Lévy-Leblond to G. Jona-Lasinio, 28 June 1972, ASIF.
218 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


were left-wing inclined. As recalled by Joan Bromberg, one of the young historians
to talk at the school, “My memories of that Varenna conference: that the students
were busy with student protests while the faculty, a bunch of old leftists, were
baffled as to how to respond.”35
The apex of the political climate at the school was the approval of a manifesto,
with 58 signatories, criticizing the involvement of scientists in the Vietnam War.
Some fragments of the manifesto may give us a flavor of the discussions at the
Varenna school:
In recent weeks diplomats, journalists and responsible visitors to North Vietnam have
reported the bombing of dykes [sic] by the United States Airforce. Officials of the
U.S. government have acknowledged that several dykes have in fact been damaged by
bombing. [. . .] The last tactics in the American war has been made possible by a systematic
application of scientific discoveries for military purposes. [. . .] These new technologies
have been fostered by scientists working in such projects as the Jason program of the
Institute for Defense Analysis. This program has enlisted more than 30 top rank physicists,
including five Nobel prize winners. [. . .] Our discussions have convinced us that it is no
longer possible to separate our attitude on these issues from our professional activities. [. . .]
We also call for the immediate ending of the bombing of Vietnam and the total withdrawal
of American forces . . .36




6.4 Ongoing Political Activism and Its Later Fading

Manifestations such as the expulsion of Gell-Mann from the Collège de France in
Paris and the Varenna 1972 manifesto also happened in other places, among them
with Gell-Mann again at CERN, in Geneva, Sidney Drell in Rome, and John
Archibald Wheeler in Erice, Sicily. One of the most telling events happened in
Trieste, at the International Center for Theoretical Physics during the symposium
“Development of the physicist’s conception of nature,” to honor the 70th anniversary
of the physicist Paul A. M. Dirac, held on 18â€"25 September 1972. The triggering
events were the presence of Wheeler and Wigner, both well known to be JASON
members and supporters of the American war in Vietnam. In addition to street
demonstrations, including clashes with the riot police, there was the “Trieste Letter,”
signed by 450 scientists or students. It is noteworthy that the only public reaction
from the conservative quarters came from Wigner, who carried a poster at the

35
Joan Bromberg to the author, e-mail, 28 Jan 2011.
36
The manifesto is reprinted in “The War Physicists”, a volume with documents from the
manifestations organized and published by Bruno Vitale (1976). Parts of the manifesto are
translated into French in Jaubert and Lévy-Leblond (1973, pp. 186â€"187). These two sources are
good repositories of original documents related to the political unrest of the late 1960s and early
1970s. Gell-Mann’s episode at the Collège de France, Drell’s at Cargese, and the events in Trieste
and Varenna are recorded, under the title “European Confrontation Spoils Jason’s Summer
Vacation,” in the American magazine Science for the People, 4(6), 9â€"14, 1972. The creation of
the Science for the People movement will be presented later. I am thankful to Virgile Besson for
calling my attention to this record.
6.4 Ongoing Political Activism and Its Later Fading 219


symposium opening session with the words “I am flattered by your accusations. They
are compliments for me.”37 The events around the Varenna summer schools were not
a European singularity. Indeed, as remarked by Kelly Moore analyzing the American
case, rebel scientists “disrupted many of the public rituals that had traditionally
provided science with public demonstrations of unity around shared rules for social
action, such as professional meetings and awards.” Moore also indicates the political
connection across the Atlantic, “[these] activities were paralleled in Europe in the
summers of 1971 and 1972 by student activists in Italy and France. These campaigns
were led by younger scientists who, like their American counterparts, wanted the
United States to withdraw from Vietnam.” She went on to conclude, “the war in
Vietnam drew scientists into activism, both as targets and as active participants in
social movements” (Moore 2008, pp. 19â€"20 and 171).38




Picture 6.3 Cover of “The War Physicists”, collection of documents from European physicists
protest against physicists’ involvement in the Vietnam War, organized by Bruno Vitale




37
For documents related to that demonstration, see “The War Physicists” (Vitale 1976, pp. 100â€"
143). See also the report in the French newspaper Le Monde on 30 September 1972.
38
For a review of Moore’s book, see Harper (2009).
220 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


Science political activism continued in the 1970s but its strength began to fade,
or at least to be socially assimilated or transmuted, and this lies beyond the scope of
the present study. However, the fate of the 1972 Varenna manifesto is evidence of
the disagreements among young scientists and students and senior scientists despite
sharing a common stand against the Vietnam War. The manifesto was intended to
have a wide circulation, particularly to be published in professional vehicles, which
failed to occur. H. B. G. Casimir, then a senior physicist in Holland and one of the
lecturers at the 1972 Varenna school, expressed his doubts about the content of the
manifesto:
For the time being I feel still reluctant about the publication [of the manifesto] in
Europhysics News. [. . .] Also I must confess that I don’t feel too happy about the actual
text. [. . .] whereas a statement by physicists urging their colleagues to abstain from military
work may have some effect, the statement by that same group that America should
immediately withdraw his troops is somewhat ridiculous and therefore weakens the possi-
ble impact.39

Stronger disagreement was expressed by the physicist and Nobel Prize winner
Hans Bethe, then an open critic of the arms race, in a letter to Bruno Vitale accusing
him of misrepresenting the involvement of JASON scientists with the Vietnam
War. According to Bethe:
It would be unfair to the members of Jason, and to other American scientists who do some
occasional consulting for the military establishment, to take the opinions of Drs. Wheeler
and Wigner as typical of the Jason group or of these other scientists. In contrast to the great
majority of American scientists, including those consulting for Jason, Drs. Wheeler and
Wigner still support the American war in Vietnam. While it may be interesting to have a
discussion with them, it would certainly not give a fair picture of the opinion of these other
American scientists.40

The fate of the Varenna manifesto also reveals a cleavage between American
and Italian physicists’ sensitivities to the approach adopted in the manifesto. At the
International Conference on High Energy Physics held in Batavia, Chicago, in
September 1972, the Varenna statement was widely distributed and signatures
requested but only 22 signatures were collected, two of them from American
scientists. In contrast, at the 1972 Annual Congress of the Italian Physical Society
in Cagliari, November 1972, the general meeting of the members of the society
endorsed the Varenna statement (Vitale 1976, pp. 143â€"147). Officially, the mani-
festo survived, as Charles Weiner summarized at the introduction of the
proceedings:
Another important feature of the Varenna summer school was the intense and spirited
discussion that engaged a large proportion of the faculty and students in informal evening
sessions. The school took place during the Vietnam War, and the lectures on the social and
political history of physics gave rise to concern about the role of physics in contemporary


39
H. B. G. Casimir to J-M Lévy-Leblond, 04 Sep 1972, published in “The War Physicists” (Vitale
1976, p. 97).
40
Hans Bethe to Bruno Vitale, letter, 12 September 1972, published in The War, op. cit. pp. 120â€"
121.
6.4 Ongoing Political Activism and Its Later Fading 221

history. These discussions culminated in a statement, drafted by some of the participants,
condemning the war and the use of physics to prosecute it. The statement was approved by
most of the school’s participants. (Weiner 1977, p. xi)

In the mid-1970s the political activism was further fading. An evidence of this
fading is telling for our story because it is related to foundations of quantum
mechanics. It was the colloquium held in Strasbourg in 1974 to commemorate the
fiftieth anniversary of the creation of this physical theory (Lopes and Paty 1977).
The gathering was organized by the French physicist Michel Paty, then making a
conversion to a career in philosophy of science, and the Brazilian physicist José
Leite Lopes, who was at time exiled from his country due to the military dictator-
ship prevailing in Brazil. Paty and Lopes, together with the philosopher Hervé
Barreau, were the main organizers of one of the research teams dedicated to history
and philosophy of science created in the wake of political turmoil and reorganiza-
tion of the French academic system after 1968. They ran the colloquia and the
publication titled Fundamenta Scientiae (Berthelot et al. 2005, p. 49). Paty and
Lopes invited both sides of the previous political battles for the conference: John
Wheeler and Jean-Marc Lévy-Leblond, open supporter of the Vietnam War and
activist against it, respectively.
In a sign of the times, differently from the Trojan war in the play by the French
dramatist Jean Giraudoux (Giraudoux and Fry 1955), which eventually happened,
the Strasbourg war did not take place. Interest in the foundations of quantum
mechanics from both sides and the imminent resolution of the war in favor of
Vietnam paved the truce. “Since you had shown some interest in my ideas at the
Colloquium in Strasbourg, I indulge in sending you along various pieces of work,”
wrote Lévy-Leblond cordially to Wheeler. Remains of the expected battle can
however be found in this correspondence. Lévy-Leblond also sent to Wheeler a
copy of a letter he had sent to Paty before the colloquium, assuring him, who “was
somewhat anxious about a possible clash in Strasbourg,” that in spite of the
divergences among them about the invitation to Wheeler, there will not be any
political conflict during the event. Wheeler jotted on the letter a few words to his
secretary “you may be interested in the opinions of this left wing activist!” and
carefully translated several words from the French to the English in the letter Lévy-
Leblond had sent to Paty, which evidences his own interest in the whole affair.41
The Italian case is then an evidence of how physicists who were politically
active were able to open the borders of the physics discipline to include and value
themes which were not usual in the discipline’s agenda, namely foundations of
quantum mechanics and history of physics. The activists were joined by physicists
who, independent of their political stances, were interested in promoting the
research on such themes or accepted them as a strategy to accommodate social



41
J-M Lévy-Leblond to John Wheeler, 13 May 1974; Lévy-Leblond to Michel Paty, 18 Feb 1974,
J. A. Wheeler Papers, Series I â€" Box L, folder Lévy-Leblond, American Philosophical Society,
Philadelphia.
222 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


and professional tensions. In the case of foundations of quantum mechanics, this
confluence allowed the creation of a professional space to boost its research.



6.5 On the Other Side of the Atlantic: The Schwartz
Amendment

On the other side of the Atlantic related histories were unfolding and we need come
back to the late 1960s in order to follow the events. On one hand, an enduring
hostility of the American Physical Society and its magazine Physics Today towards
the debates and manifestations against the Vietnam War. On the other hand, from
1970 on, a warm reception of Physics Today to debates on the interpretation of
quantum theory. I would like to ask the following: Did the experience of the
American physics establishment in dealing with the former have an influence on
the latter? More broadly, did the very existence of a political controversy within the
physics community create a more permissive atmosphere for a philosophical
controversy? These are at least plausible conjectures, even though, as we shall
see, we have at present no direct evidence of links.
The entire story of the protests in the United States against the escalation of the
Vietnam War and the racial discriminations from the mid-1960s on has been the
subject of many scholarly works.42 While we focus here on the protests against the
Vietnam War, due to its close influence on the case we are studying, the US indeed
lived through the 1960s a wave of manifestations related to racial discrimination,
which had its apex at riots following the assassination of Martin Luther King, Jr., on
April 4, 1968 (McLaughlin 2014). As for the protests against the Vietnam War,
physicists and physics students actively participated in those protests but the subject
was far more controversial than in Europe insofar as a number of very influential
American physicists took stands supporting the war. Eugene Wigner and John
Archibald Wheeler, protagonists in our history, were among them. The American
Physical Society (APS), the American Institute of Physics, and the magazine
Physics Today were some of the scenes for conflicts among physicists but they
were not the only places. The magazine has been the traditional house organ of the
American physics establishment, formally linked to the American Institute of
Physics, while APS is by far the largest professional organization in the American
Institute of Physics. Many protests targeted research facilities installed at the
university campuses where military research was taking place and later protests
were directed against the scientists who were involved in the JASON project,
particularly the work related to the electronic fence in Vietnam.
Divisive conflicts involving Physics Today began when Charles Schwartz,
physics professor at the University of California at Berkeley, wrote to R. Hobart
Ellis Jr., editor of the magazine, on May 28, 1967 asking him to publish a letter in


42
See Moore (2008) and references therein.
6.5 On the Other Side of the Atlantic: The Schwartz Amendment 223


which he suggested “that the membership of the American Physical Society or the
American Institute of Physics shall be polled to yield a consensus opinion about the
War in Vietnam.” In the letter, Schwartz left no doubt about the stand he expected
to be taken by American physics organizations: “I am one of a great many
Americans who believe that the present course of this country’s actions in Southeast
Asia is wrong, deadly wrong.” Unlike those who think that these organizations
should not “offer public opinions on every question of the day,” he argued, “my
position regarding the Vietnam War is that this is a matter of such vital urgency that
we cannot remain quiet, that we ought, as respected members of an important
contributing profession in this country, to give this problem our best study and then
speak out to the public of what we see.” Physics Today’s editor and the board of the
societies procrastinated answers and the unpublished letter triggered one of the
most divisive episodes in the history of American physics.43
To cut a long story short, as his request was not answered Schwartz came up with
the idea of amending the APS constitution in order to allow its members to discuss
and vote on public issues, an episode known as the Schwartz Amendment. The APS
board of directors refused to submit this amendment to vote, arguing with the APS
bylaw regulations, then after protests the board withdrew and the amendment was
submitted to voting. However, “when the ballots were sent out in May 1968, the
board included a statement of its opposition to the amendment,” and the amendment
was defeated by a three-to-one margin. The movement behind the Schwartz
amendment ultimately led to the creation of a new organization, later known as
Science for the People (SftP). The new organization was the idea of three physics
professorsâ€"Martin Perl (Stanford, later he would share the 1995 Nobel prize),
Schwartz (Berkeley), and Marc Ross (Michigan)â€"and a postdoctoral student,
Michael Goldhaber. The idea was presented for consideration at the 1969 meeting
of the APS.44
In the development of this story, the prestige and credibility of Physics Today
and the APS were called into question. Schwartz blamed the APS for its early
refusal to submit his proposal to vote accusing it of a “censorship completely alien
to the principles of free discourse upon which a scientific community is built.”
Twenty years later he defended the same stand: “this was direct political censor-
ship.” The Physics Today editor had to argue with some of his peers abroad to
defend the procedures of APS and Physics Today. Thus, he wrote to the editor of the
New Scientist in the UK criticizing an editorial in the magazineâ€"entitled “Physics


43
C. Schwartz to R. Hobart Ellis Jr, 28 May 1967, Physics Today Papers, Correspondence 1948â€"
1970, Box 20, AIP.
44
Soon after the creation of this organization it began to publish a bi-monthly magazine with the
same title, Science for the People. Later the organization changed its name to Science and
Engineers for Social and Political Action (SESPA). The magazine was published from 1970
until the late 1980s. It provides a window to analyze how deep, wide, and entrenched the radical
criticism to science was in the US in those times. On the events leading to the creation of the
Science for the People organization, including quotations, see Moore (2008, pp. 133â€"157). A
report on its first decade is Greeley and Tafler (1980).
224 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


Revolution”â€"for describing events in US physics in a biased manner. To the editor
of the German Physikalische Bl€ atter, he wrote saying that it was wrong to report
that “the letter on the Vietnam question was rejected by the society’s newspaper”
because the APS does not have a newspaper and “the letter was rejected by
PHYSICS TODAY, which is a publication of the American Institute of Physics.”
This was a rather defensive actionâ€"administrative definitionsâ€"because in fact
both the magazine and the organizations were acting in agreement in the whole
affair.45
Eventually, APS and Physics Today accepted some political changes, albeit
minor ones when compared to the changes proposed by Schwartz and his col-
leagues. In particular the APS accepted the creation of a forum to deal with the
relationship between physics and society, which eventually led in 1972 to the
setting up of the Forum on Physics and Society. The proposal came from another
Schwartz, this time Brian Schwartz, a theoretical physicist at MIT. “It was like APS
was being squeezed from the east coast and the west coast by two Schwartzes,”
according to Brian Schwartz’s later recollections. Charles Schwartz would later
acknowledge these changes, “about that time, as you say, within APS, things
happened; Physics Today certainly opened up. There was the formation of the
Forum on Physics and Society.”46
It was against this background that Physics Today decided to deal with softer
issues rather than the hot political issues of the times. It took up the controversy
over the interpretation of the quantum theory. Unlike what we had seen in the case
of the Italian Physical Society and its Varenna summer school, where the connec-
tions between political unrest and the choice of themes for the schools are
documented, in this case such a connection is plausible, persuasive, and contributes
to making sense of the events we are presenting, but it is less documented. One of
the main protagonists in this process was R. Hobart Ellis Jr., then the magazine’s
editor. He was an expert in nuclear engineering who had expressed some interest in
conceptual issues in quantum physics. To exemplify this interest, he used the
Physics Today’s column entitled Phimsy, usually dedicated to short notes with a
comic flavor, to write a note entitled “The function is the particle.” A little earlier,
informed that Robert B. Lindsay would make a lecture tour for Sigma XI addressing
the theme “Physics: To What Extent Is It Deterministic?”, he wrote to him asking
for a manuscript for Physics Today. About the same time, he wrote to George
Trammell, from Rice University, asking for a reprint of a paper by Trammel and
saying that “in reading it I see that you appear to be concerned with something that
has intrigued me for some timeâ€"the real meaning of the wave function.” Then he
went to ask him for a good paper about this issue for the magazine. While he did not

45
C. Schwartz, “censorship”, in Physics Today 19, August, 9â€"10. C. Schwartz, “political censor-
ship”, in Interview of Charles Schwartz by Finn Aaserud on 15 May 1987, AIP. R. Hobart Ellis
Jr. to Bernard Dixon, 30 Oct 1969, and R. Hobart Ellis Jr. to Ernst Brüche, 21 Oct 1968, Physics
Today Division Records, 1948â€"1970, Boxes 18 and 20, respectively, AIP.
46
Interview of Charles Schwartz, op. cit. Interview of Brian Schwartz by Patrick McCray on
10 Aug 2001, AIP.
6.6 Physics Today and the Second Life of Everett’s Quantum Proposal 225


get much reaction from Lindsay and Trammel, things would be different with Bryce
DeWitt.47



6.6 Physics Today and the Second Life of Everett’s
Quantum Proposal

Bryce DeWitt was a theoretical physicist, trained at Harvard with a PhD under
Julian Schwinger. From 1956 to 1971 he was at the University of North Carolina at
Chapel Hill. He worked on the quantum theory of the gravitational field and since
1957 had followed the appearance of Everett’s interpretation, as we have seen in
Chap. 3. Ten years later, in 1967, DeWitt revived Everett’s idea and certain factors
were influential to the success of this revival. First, DeWitt used Everett’s ideas in
an intellectual context that was different from that of the dispute concerning the
interpretations of quantum mechanics. Following a suggestion by John Wheeler,
DeWitt arrived at a formalism that could describe the wave function of the whole
universe. Its interpretation was far from evident, since there was no external
observer to make a measurement in the sense of the ordinary quantum mechanics.
In addition, he needed to combine general relativity and quantum theories, which
was at the time, and still is, far from being a solved problem. In the early 1960s,
already working on the quantum theory of gravity, he went into battle with Léon
Rosenfeld about the proper interpretation of Bohr and Rosenfeld’s thoughts about
the measurement of quantum fields.48 From this episode DeWitt inferred the idea of
the existence of a dogmatic circle around the Copenhagen interpretation which was
hampering research on the foundations of quantum physics. In a letter to Wheeler,
he wrote: “The digs at the Copenhagen School were never meant to be included in
the published version. [. . .] I must confess I made those digs, slightly maliciously,
for your benefit. [. . .] (Re my use of the word ‘rigid’ in referring to the ‘Copenhagen
doctrine’, how would you describe Rosenfeld’s attitude on the subject?)”49


47
Physics Today, August 1969, p. 21. R. Hobart Ellis Jr. to R. B. Lindsay, 01 March 1968;
R. Hobart Ellis Jr. to G. T. Trammell, 26 March 1968, Physics Today Division Records, 1948-
1970, Boxes 20 and 17, respectively, AIP.
48
On this subject, see the doctoral dissertation of Thiago Hartz (2013) and the paper (Hartz and
Freire Jr. 2015).
49
DeWitt to Wheeler, 20 Apr, 1967; Wheeler Papers, Series Iâ€"Box Co-De, Folder DeWitt, WP.
This letter refers to the paper “Quantum Theory of Gravity” (DeWitt 1967), whose manuscript he
had sent to Wheeler’s evaluation. In this manuscript, but not in the published version, DeWitt had
written: “It is [. . .] clear that the quantum theory of space-time must ultimately force a deviation
from the rigid Copenhagen doctrine.” Wheeler circled the rigid Copenhagen doctrine and jotted
“unfortunate.” DeWitt also wrote “as conventionally formulated quantum mechanics comes in two
packages: (1) formalism and (2) interpretation, the latter being supplied by a licensing office in
Copenhagen.” Wheeler jotted “bad tone.” The manuscript is at the Bryce Dewitt’s personal files,
University of Texas at Austin, Austin, TX. I am grateful to Thiago Hartz for sharing with me the
information about the manuscript. The full background of this story is analyzed by Hartz in the
paper “Bryce DeWitt’s road to the Many Worlds”, forthcoming.
226 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


In the first of a trilogy of highly cited papers on the quantum theory of gravity
(DeWitt 1967; Freitas and Freire Jr. 2003), in which what is now called the
“Wheelerâ€"DeWitt equation” appeared, DeWitt considered Everett’s interpretation
adequate to make sense of the tentative quantized equation of the whole universe.
The reason was that this interpretation does not call for an “external observer” to
perform measurements. According to DeWitt (1967, p. 1141),
Everett’s view of the world is a very natural one to adopt in the quantum theory of gravity,
where one is accustomed to speak without embarrassment of the “wave function of the
universe.” It is possible that Everett’s view is not only natural but essential.

DeWitt was not only interested in using Everett’s idea in the context of cosmol-
ogy but he also wanted to advertise Everett’s ideas among physicists. He went on to
rechristen it as the “many-worlds” interpretation, a label far from Everett’s own
goals, but responsible for popularizing the interpretation beyond the circle of
professional physicists. In the late 1960s DeWitt found a wider audience than
Everett had gotten 10 years before. The interest in Everett’s ideas came not only
from their implications for cosmology but also from the changing views shared by
many physicists in the early 1970s about the matter of the foundations of quantum
mechanics. DeWitt’s paper was well received both among cosmologists and the
flourishing community of foundations of quantum mechanics (Freitas and Freire
Jr. 2003). He was invited to lecture on the relative states interpretation at the
Varenna 1970 summer school, as we have seen earlier, and his proposal to publish
a bibliographical review on the foundations of physics, which was part of the
dissertation of Neil Graham, his PhD student, was well received by the American
Journal of Physics’ editors, who published it in a prestigious section of the journal,
its “Resource Letters” (DeWitt and Graham 1971). He managed to publish the
whole of Everett’s dissertation, still then unpublished (DeWitt et al. 1973). Among
his allies he would find a powerful and influential one, the editor of Physics Today.
As part of his crusade to favor Everett’s ideas and favoring the diversity of
interpretations of quantum theory, DeWitt approached R. Hobart Ellis, Jr., then
editor of Physics Today. He asked the editor about the interest of the publication in
“initiating another vigorous debate in a different area, which is also of keen interest
to most physicists, namely the interpretation of quantum mechanics,” and
suggesting himself to write about Everett’s interpretation. The reference to “another
vigorous debate” comes from the fact that DeWitt had written a letter on tachyons,
particles with speed greater than light [Physics Today 22(12), 1969]. He was
surprised at the strong interest of Hobart Ellis Jr. in the subject. The editor wrote,
“Your letter of 21 October strikes a very responsive chord. For a long time I
personally have been dissatisfied with the apparent contradictions that physicists
appear to be ready to live with in quantum mechanics and its interpretation.” Hobart
Ellis continued presenting the current state of the quantum interpretation issue as
analogous to that which had preceded the Copernican Revolution at the dawn of
modern science, which could be considered an outrage by physicists aligned with
Bohr’s complementarity views. Still, according to Hobart Ellis, “someone has
compared the present situation with that in which cycles and epicycles could
explain all the movements in the heavens and science was well satisfied with the
6.6 Physics Today and the Second Life of Everett’s Quantum Proposal 227


view until the Copernican theory took over. I feel the comparison is particularly
apt.” Next, Hobart Ellis mentioned his previous project for publishing physicists’
replies to a questionnaire on the subject, a project that failed due to the scant time
available to do it. Finally, he concluded that “it seems to me that the article you
propose would be a very interesting and useful contribution to Physics Today”, but
added that “in fact I think a general review of different interpretations of quantum
mechanics without special emphasis on any one would be of interest”.50 The paper
was published along the lines suggested by Hobart Ellis Jr., while keeping the
author’s stand favoring Everett’s interpretation (DeWitt 1970). It is noteworthy that
since the revival of the debate on the interpretations of quantum physics, with David
Bohm’s proposal in the early 1950s (see Chap. 2), this was a rare episode, one of the
first times the influential Physics Today would open its pages to a major paper on
the controversy on the foundations of quantum theory.51




Picture 6.4 Bryce DeWitt, circa 1970. Courtesy of North Carolina Collection, University of
North Carolina at Chapel Hill Library


Some time after the publication of DeWitt’s paper, “Quantum mechanics and
reality,” Harold L. Davies, who had succeeded Hobart Ellis Jr. in the magazine

50
Bryce DeWitt to R. Hobart Ellis Jr, 21 Oct 1969; Hobart Ellis, Jr. to Bryce Dewitt, 24 Oct, 1969.
Physics Today Division, Records, 1948â€"1970, AIP.
51
Evidence about how influential that article was is the fact that nowadays it gathers 126 citations,
which is a meaningful figure if one considers that Physics Today is not a technical physics journal.
Source: Web of Science, consulted on 17 June 2013. In the 1950s there was only a paper
(Margenau 1954) while in the late 1960s papers on Landé’s new book on the interpretation of
quantum mechanics appeared [see Shimony (1966), Landé (1967), and Born and Biem (1968)].
There was also a paper by W. E. Lamb (1969).
228 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


editorial office, undertook a typical editorial procedure, that of putting emphasis on
a certain subject through calling a debate on it. Physics Today published in the same
article, under the title “Quantum-mechanics debate,” six long letters by L. E.
Ballentine, Philip Pearle, Evan H. Walker, Mendel Sachs, Toyoki Koga, and Joseph
Gerver, with different but critical points of view on Everett’s interpretation, besides
DeWitt’s reply. The article was followed by several letters debating the theme, one
of which remarked very incisively on the changing mood among physicists
concerning the subject, a mood quite different from that in which Everett’s inter-
pretation had emerged 10 years before.52 In fact, M. Hammerton (1971), from the
Medical Research Center, Cambridge, UK, captured this changing mood, writing in
a clear-cut manner,
The very interesting contributions to the quantum mechanics debate in your April issue, and
the paper by DeWitt which triggered them, exemplify the highly complex and subtle ways
in which scientific opinion can change. When I was an undergraduate reading physics
20 years ago, [. . . ] the Copenhagen line was “scientific,” anything else was meaningless,
mumbo-jumbo, or, at best, mistaken. Now the curious thing is that, as far as I am aware,
there has been no major finding or theoretical insight that could be held to demolish or
supersede this interpretation. Nevertheless, there is now considerable dissatisfaction with it,
and a willingness to regard other points of viewâ€"for example, hidden variablesâ€"as being
at least respectable.

Hammerton did not exploit the “highly complex and subtle ways in which
scientific opinion can change.” Surely, however, these ways included not only the
standard cognitive factors, such as empirical evidence and theoretical construc-
tions, but also social factors that may be related to the contextual setting of the
production of science. In our case, opening a debate on quantum physics was a
minor problemâ€"to editors of Physics Todayâ€"when compared with the strong
debate they had to host about the political role of the American Physical Society,
a debate mainly related to the widespread idea of physics being closely related to
the military efforts in the Vietnam War.


Conclusion
Our histories corroborate some general findings about the political and
cultural unrest of the late 1960s and about history of physics at large. Through
Europe and across the Atlantic, it was a true “transnational social movement,”
to use Hölscher’s (2012) terminology. However, the transnational feature did
not mean that topics such as foundations of quantum physics were equally
supported in all the places involved. From our cases, we can see that ulti-
mately the Italian Physical Society opened more room for this topic than its

(continued)


52
See “Quantum-mechanics debate” (Ballentine et al. 1971). “Still more quantum mechanics,”
with letters by G.L. Trigg, M. Hammerton, R. Hobart Ellis Jr., R. Goldston, and H. Schmidt (Ellis
1971; Goldston 1971; Hammerton 1971; Schmidt 1971; Trigg 1971).
6.6 Physics Today and the Second Life of Everett’s Quantum Proposal 229



consort, the American Physical Society, did. While the former opened its
prestige summer school to the subject of foundations of quantum mechanics,
the latter opened the pages of its magazine to the same subject. While both
societies opened room for the same subject it seems that the Italian experi-
ence was larger and more effective than the American one. These cases thus
seem to corroborate an analogous conclusion reached by Kaiser (2012a,
p. 121) comparing the policies of the Physical Review and Nuovo
Cimentoâ€"the leading scientific journals of the respective societiesâ€"towards
papers on the controversy over the quantum interpretation. As for Paul
Forman’s analysis of the rupture with disciplinarity as a sign of the appear-
ance of postmodernism (Forman 2012), our characters confirm this assess-
ment, but only to a certain extent. At least on the Italian scene, some of the
young physicists who asked the SIF to dedicate its summer schools to subjects
such as foundations and history of physics eventually left physics and did not
get professionally involved with either physics or the history of physics.
However, some others followed the disciplinary path to become part of the
professional communities dedicated to such subjects.
The decision of the Italian Physical Society to dedicate some of its summer
schools to topics such as foundations of quantum physics and history of
physics in the twentieth century was neither motivated by developments in
Italian physics nor physics at large. Indeed, their main instigation came from
a convergence of interests among young Italian activist physicists and senior
ones. The former looked for a way to do physics outside the mainstream.
Senior physicists attempted to appease an upset scientific community, which
included bringing topics which were at the margins of physics, such as the
foundations of quantum physics, into the spotlight of the international physics
community. The case concerning Physics Today in the turmoil of the late
1960s indicates how much easier it was for the American magazine of the
American Physical Society to open its pages to a controversial topic in
science than to open its pages to the heated political debate concerning the
Vietnam War.
In a broader manner, the episodes we have analyzed confirm features of
the workings of science that have been exploited by other historians. In fact,
as noted by historians of science such as Timothy Lenoir (1997), Alexis de
Greiff (2002), and Alexei Kojevnikov (2004), the sphere of politics does not
necessarily hamper the practice of good science. The Italian case, in partic-
ular, reminds us of the case built by the historian Paul Forman when he argued
on the influence of social factors in the direction of the research adopted in the
building of the quantum theory in the early 1920s.53 As science is a locally

(continued)

53
Forman’s paper on the dispensing of causality in quantum mechanics and the context of Weimar
Republic is Forman (1971). This now classic paper is reprinted in Forman et al. (2011, pp. 85â€"
201).
230 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .



situated cultural practice, it is influenced by all the other dimensions from
culture to politics and economics. According to the historian Norton Wise
(2010), the cultural context, broadly conceived, may be considered a repos-
itory of resources that individuals as active protagonists may mobilize for the
development of their intellectual and professional agendas (Wise 2010,
pp. 430â€"431).54
This seems to have been the case of these Enrico Fermi summer schools in
Varenna in the early 1970s and the debate on interpretations in the pages of
Physics Today. Groups of physicists, young and not so young, exploited the
political climate of the times to push for changes in the science establishment,
suggesting and organizing schools which helped to foster the field of foun-
dations of quantum physics as well as the field of the history of contemporary
physics and publicizing the diversity of interpretations of quantum theory.
Through these engagements they contributed to change the professional and
intellectual environment, allowing a freer development of the research on the
foundations of quantum theory.


References

Aaserud, F.: Sputnik and the Princeton 3 â€" the National-Security Laboratory that was not to
be. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci. 25, 185â€"239 (1995)
Amaldi, E., Battimelli, G., De Maria, M.: Da via Panisperna all’America: i fisici italiani e la
seconda guerra mondiale. Editori riuniti, Roma (1997)
Amaldi, E., Battimelli, G., Paoloni, G.: 20th Century Physics: Essays and Recollections â€" A
Selection of Historical Writings by Edoardo Amaldi. World Scientific, River Edge, NJ (1998)
Ballentine, L., Pearle, P., Walker, E.H., Sachs, M., Koga, T., Gerver, J., Dewitt, B.: Quantum-
mechanics debate. Phys. Today 24(4), 36â€"44 (1971)
Berthelot, J.-M., Martin, O., Collinet, C.: Savoirs et savants les études sur la science en France.
Presses universitaires de France, Paris (2005)
Born, M., Biem, W.: Dualism in quantum theory. Phys. Today 21(8), 51â€"56 (1968)
Capocci, M., Corbellini, G.: Adriano Buzzati-Traverso and the foundation of the International
Laboratory of Genetics and Biophysics in Naples (1962â€"1969). Stud. Hist. Philos. Biol.
Biomed. Sci. 33, 367â€"391 (2002)
Cassidy, D.: Paul Forman and the Environment and Practice of Quantum History. Weimar Culture
and Quantum Mechanics â€" Selected Papers by Paul Forman and Contemporary Perspectives on
the Forman Thesis C. Carson, A. Kojevnikov and H. Trischler, pp. 263â€"276. Imperial College
Press & World Scientific, London (2011a)
Cassidy, D.: A Short History of Physics in the American Century. Harvard University Press,
Cambridge, MA (2011b)


54
Wise’s paper was part of an ongoing debate on the historiography of physics involving Wise,
Forman, and the reception of Forman’s paper on the quantum physics in Weimar Germany.
Unfortunately, however, most of this debate has happened through unpublished papers. On this
debate, see Paul Forman, Reflections on the rejection of “Weimar Culture, Causality, and
Quantum Theory” by modern and by postmodern historians of science, 2007, unpublished
paper. I am thankful to Forman for bringing this paper to my attention.
References 231

Cento Bull, A., Giorgio, A.: Speaking Out and Silencing: Culture, Society and Politics in Italy in
the 1970s. Legenda, London (2006)
Clauser, J.: Early history of Bell’s theorem. In: Bertlmann, R.A., Zeilinger, A. (eds.) Quantum
[Un] Speakables â€" From Bell to Quantum Information, pp. 61â€"98. Springer, Berlin (2002)
Cozzoli, D., Capocci, M.: Making biomedicine in twentieth-century Italy: Domenico Marotta
(1886â€"1974) and the Italian Higher Institute of Health. Br. J. Hist. Sci. 44(4), 549â€"574 (2011)
d’Espagnat, B.: Conceptions de la physique contemporaine â€" les interprétations de la mécanique
quantique et de la mesure. Hermann, Paris (1965)
d’Espagnat, B.: Foundations of Quantum Mechanics â€" Proceedings of the International School of
Physics “Enrico Fermi”. Academic, New York (1971)
d’Espagnat, B.: Conceptual Foundations of Quantum Mechanics, 2nd edn. Addison-Wesley,
Redwood City, CA (1989) [1st ed 1971]
DeWitt, B.S.: Quantum theory of gravity. I. Canonical theory. Phys. Rev. 160(5), 1113â€"1148
(1967)
DeWitt, B.S.: Quantum mechanics and reality. Phys. Today 23(9), 155â€"165 (1970)
DeWitt, B.S., Graham, R.N.: Resource letter IQM-1 on interpretation of quantum mechanics.
Am. J. Phys. 39(7), 724â€"738 (1971)
DeWitt, B.S., Everett, H., Graham, N.: The Many-Worlds Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics:
A Fundamental Exposition. Princeton University Press, Princeton, NJ (1973)
Ellis, R.H.: Still more quantum mechanics. Phys. Today 24(10), 11â€"13 (1971)
Finkbeiner, A.: The Jasons: The Secret History of Science’s Postwar Elite. Viking, New York
(2006)
Forman, P.: Weimar culture, causality, and quantum theory, 1918â€"1927: adaptation by German
physicists and mathematicians to a hostile intellectual environment [Reprinted in P. Forman
et al. (eds.) Weimar culture and quantum mechanics: selected papers by Paul Forman and
contemporary perspectives on the Forman thesis, 2011]. Hist. Stud. Phys. Sci. 3, 1â€"115 (1971)
Forman, P.: Production and curation: modernity entailed disciplinarity, postmodernity entails
antidisciplinarity. Osiris 27(1), 56â€"97 (2012)
Forman, P., Carson, C., Kojevnikov, A., Trischler, H.: Weimar Culture and Quantum Mechanics:
Selected Papers by Paul Forman and Contemporary Perspectives on the Forman Thesis.
Imperial College Press & World Scientific, London (2011)
Freire Jr., O.: The historical roots of “foundations of quantum mechanics” as a field of research
(1950â€"1970). Found. Phys. 34(11), 1741â€"1760 (2004)
Freire Jr., O.: Philosophy enters the optics laboratory: Bell’s theorem and its first experimental
tests (1965-1982). Stud. Hist. Philos. Mod. Phys. 37, 577â€"616 (2006)
Freire Jr., O.: Quantum dissidents: research on the foundations of quantum mechanics circa 1970.
Stud. Hist. Philos. Mod. Phys. 40(4), 280â€"289 (2009)
Freire Jr., O.: On the connections between the dialectical materialism and the controversy on the
quanta. Yearbk. Eur. Cult. Sci. (Jahrbuch Für Europäihce Wissenschaftskultur) 6, 195â€"210
(2011)
Freitas, F.H.A., Freire Jr., O.: Sobre o uso da Web of Science como fonte para a história da ciência.
Revista da SBHC 1(2), 129â€"147 (2003)
Frigg, R.: GRW theory (Ghirardi, Rimini, Weber model of quantum mechanics). In: Greenberger,
D., Hentschel, K., Weinert, F. (eds.) Compendium of Quantum Physics Concepts, Experi-
ments, History and Philosophy, pp. 266â€"270. Springer, Berlin (2009)
Giraudoux, J., Fry, C.: Jean Giraudoux. Tiger at the gates. (La Guerre de Troie n’aura pas lieu.)
Translated by Christopher Fry. [London, Appolo Theatre, 2 June 1955.]. Methuen, London
(1955)
Goldston, R.: Still more quantum mechanics. Phys. Today 24(10), 11â€"13 (1971)
Greeley, K., Tafler, S.: History of science for the people: a ten year perspective. In: Arditti, R.,
Brennan, P., Cavrak, S. (eds.) Science and Liberation, pp. 369â€"383. South End Press, Boston,
MA (1980)
232 6 “From the Streets into Academia”: Political Activism and the. . .


Greiff, A.D.: The tale of two peripheries: the creation of the International Centre for Theoretical
Physics in Trieste. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci. 33(1), 33â€"59 (2002)
Hammerton, M.: Still more quantum mechanics. Phys. Today 24(10), 11â€"13 (1971)
Harper, K.C.: Disrupting science: social movements, American scientists, and the politics of the
military, 1945-1975. Isis 100(1), 197â€"199 (2009)
Hartz, T.: As heterodoxias qu^anticas e o olhar do historiador: uma história dos usos dos
argumentos de Niels Bohr acerca da medição de campos qu^anticos (1930-1970). PhD disser-
tation, Universidade Federal da Bahia and Universidade Estadual de Feira de Santana (2013)
Hartz, T., Freire, O. Jr.: Uses and appropriations of Niels Bohr’s ideas about quantum field
measurement (1930-1965). Scientia Danica, Series M â€" Mathematica et Physica: Forthcoming
(2015)
Hobsbawm, E.J.: The Age of Extremes. The short twentieth century 1914-1991. Penguin, London
(1994)
Hölscher, M.: 68 Generation. In: Anheier, H.K., Juergensmeyer, M. (eds.) Encyclopedia of Global
Studies, pp. 1552â€"1553. Sage, London (2012)
Jacobsen, A.S.: The complementarity between the collective and the individual â€" Rosenfeld and
Cold War History of Science. Minerva 46(2), 195â€"214 (2008)
Jacobsen, A.: Léon Rosenfeld â€" Physics, Philosophy, and Politics in the Twentieth Century. World
Scientific, Singapore (2012)
Jamison, A.: Science and technology in postwar Europe. In: Stone, D. (ed.) The Oxford Handbook
of Postwar European History, pp. 630â€"648. Oxford University Press, Oxford (2012)
Jammer, M.: The Philosophy of Quantum Mechanics â€" The Interpretations of Quantum Mechanics
in Historical Perspective. Wiley, New York (1974)
Jaubert, A., Lévy-Leblond, J.-M.: Autocritique de la science. Éditions du Seuil, Paris (1973)
Judt, T.: Postwar â€" A History of Europe Since 1945. Penguin, New York (2005)
Kaiser, D.: How the Hippies Saved Physics: Science, Counterculture, and the Quantum Revival.
W. W. Norton, New York (2012a)
Kaiser, D.: A tale of two textbooks experiments in genre. Isis 103(1), 126â€"138 (2012b)
Kevles, D.J.: The Physicists: The History of a Scientific Community in Modern America. Knopf,
New York (1978)
Kissinger, H.: On China. Penguin, New York (2011)
Kojevnikov, A.: Stalin’s Great Science: The Times and Adventures of Soviet Physicists. Imperial
College Press, London (2004)
Lamb, W.E.: An operational interpretation of nonrelativistic quantum mechanics. Phys. Today 22
(4), 23â€"28 (1969)
Landé, A.: New foundations for quantum physics. Phys. Today 20(2), 55â€"58 (1967)
Lenoir, T.: Instituting Science: The Cultural Production of Scientific Disciplines. Stanford Uni-
versity Press, Stanford, CA (1997)
Lopes, J.L., Paty, M.: Quantum Mechanics: A Half Century Later. Holland/D. Reidel, Dordrecht/
Boston, MA (1977)
Magri, L.: The Tailor of Ulm: Communism in the Twentieth Century. Verso, New York (2011)
Margenau, H.: Advantages and disadvantages of various interpretations of the quantum theory.
Phys. Today 7(10), 6â€"13 (1954)
McLaughlin, M.: The Long, Hot Summer of 1967: Urban Rebellion in America. Palgrave
Macmillan, New York (2014)
Messiah, A.: Quantum Mechanics. North Holland, Amsterdam (1961)
Moore, K.: Disrupting Science: Social Movements, American Scientists, and the Politics of the
Military, 1945-1975. Princeton University Press, Princeton, NJ (2008)
Ravetz, J.: Orthodoxies, critiques and alternatives. In: Olby, R.C., et al. (eds.) Companion to the
History of Modern Science, pp. 898â€"908. Routledge, London (1990)
Salvini, G.: Book review: Edoardo Amaldi. Da via Panisperna all’America: I fisici italiani e la
seconda guerra mondial. Isis 96(2), 295 (2005)
Schmidt, H.: Still more quantum mechanics. Phys. Today 24(10), 11â€"13 (1971)
References 233

Schweber, S.S.: Writing the biography of Hans Bethe: contextual history and Paul Forman. Phys.
Perspect. 6, 179â€"217 (2014)
Selleri, F.: Realism and the wave-function of quantum mechanics. In: d’Espagnat, B. (ed.)
Foundations of Quantum Mechanics. Proceedings of the International School of Physics
“Enrico Fermi”, pp. 398â€"406. Academic, New York (1971)
Selleri, F.: Sull’ideologia nella fisica contemporanea. Critica marxista Quaderni 6, 120â€"150 (1972)
Selleri, F., Sexl, R.U.: Die Debatte um die Quantentheorie. F. Vieweg, Braunschweig (1983)
Shimony, A.: Review of Alfred Landé, new foundations of quantum mechanics. Phys. Today 19,
85â€"90 (1966)
Snow, C.P.: The Two Cultures and the Scientific Revolution. Cambridge University Press,
New York (1959)
Società Italiana di Fisica: La scienza nella società capitalistica. Donato, Bari (1971)
Stevens, H.: Fundamental physics and its justifications, 1945-1993. Hist. Stud. Phys. Biol. Sci. 34,
151â€"197 (2003)
Tagliagambe, S. (ed.): L’interpretazione materialistica della meccanica quantistica â€" fisica e
filosofia in URSS. Feltrinelli, Milan (1972)
Tarozzi, G., van der Merwe, A.: For Franco Selleri on his seventieth birthday. Found. Phys. 34(1),
1613â€"1615 (2004)
Trigg, G.L.: Still more quantum mechanics. Phys. Today 24(10), 11â€"13 (1971)
United States Department of Defense: The Pentagon Papers; the Defense Department History of
United States Decision Making on Vietnam. Beacon, Boston, MA (1971)
Vitale, B.: The War Physicists [Documents About the European Protest Against the Physicists
Working for the American Military Through the JASON Division of the Institute for Defence
Analysis, IDA]. B. Vitale, Napoli (1976)
Weiner, C.: History of Twentieth Century Physics. Academic, New York (1977)
Werskey, G.: The Marxist critique of capitalist science: a history in three movements? Sci. Cult. 16
(4), 397â€"461 (2007)
Wise, M.N.: Forman reformed, again. In: Carson, C., Kojevnikov, A., Trischler, H. (eds.) Weimar
Culture and Quantum Mechanics: Selected Papers by Paul Forman and Contemporary Per-
spectives on the Forman Thesis, pp. 415â€"431. Imperial College Press & World Scientific Press,
London (2010)
Wisnioski, M.: Engineers for Change: Competing Visions of Technology in 1960s America. MIT
Press, Cambridge, MA (2012)
Chapter 7
Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory:
Bell’s Theorem and Its First Experimental
Tests (1965â€"1982)


Abstract This chapter deals with the ways that the issue of completing quantum
mechanics was brought into laboratories and became a topic in mainstream quan-
tum optics. It focuses on the period between 1965, when Bell published what we
now call Bell’s theorem, and 1982, when Aspect published the results of his
experiments. Discussing some of those past contexts and practices, I show that
factors in addition to theoretical innovations, experiments, and techniques were
necessary for the flourishing of this subject, and that the experimental implications
of Bell’s theorem were neither suddenly recognized nor quickly highly regarded by
physicists. Indeed, I will argue that what was considered good physics after
Aspect’s 1982 experiments was once considered by many a philosophical matter
instead of a scientific one, and that the path from philosophy to physics required a
change in the physics community’s attitude about the status of the foundations of
quantum mechanics.




7.1 Introduction1

Quantum non-locality, or entanglement, that is the quantum correlations between
systems (photons, electrons, etc.) that are spatially separated, is the key physical
effect in the burgeoning and highly funded search for quantum cryptography and
computation. This effect emerged in relation to the investigation of the possibility
of completing quantum theory with supplementary variables, an issue once consid-
ered very marginal in physics research. This paper deals with the ways that the issue
of completing quantum mechanics, especially completing it according to the
criterion of locality, was brought into laboratories and, later on, became a topic in
mainstream quantum optics. Discussing some of the past contexts and practices


1
This chapter is a modified version of the work: Freire Jr., O. Philosophy Enters the Optics
Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and its First Experimental Tests (1965â€"1982), Studies In History
and Philosophy of Modern Physics, v. 37, p. 577â€"616, 2006. Additions from later archival research
were introduced, references were updated, and stylistic rules were adapted to this book. Acknowl-
edgements are in the original paper.

© Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2015 235
O. Freire Junior, The Quantum Dissidents, DOI 10.1007/978-3-662-44662-1_7
236 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


related to Bell’s theorem, I hope to show that factors in addition to theoretical
innovations, experiments, and techniques were necessary for the flourishing of
research on this issue, and that the experimental implications of Bell’s theorem
were neither suddenly recognized nor quickly highly regarded by physicists.
Indeed, I will argue that what was considered good physics after Alain Aspect’s
1982 experiments was once considered by many a philosophical matter instead of a
scientific one, and that the path from philosophy to physics required a change in the
physics community’s attitude about the intellectual and professional status of the
foundations of quantum mechanics. I have argued elsewhere (Freire Jr. 2004) that a
new attitude toward the foundations of quantum mechanics matured around 1970
related to subjects like the measurement problem and alternative interpretations of
quantum mechanics, which were related neither to Bell’s theorem nor to experi-
mental tests. In the present chapter, I argue that even concerning Bell’s theorem and
its tests a similar new attitude was required. On these events and periods there are
already a number of testimonies, popular science books, and science studies
works.2 This chapter, however, differs in that it attempts a historically oriented
study about how what was considered a philosophical quarrel became a genuine
topic of physics research.
Horne et al. (1990) have produced a historical account of the concept of
entanglement. These authors showed that as early as 1926 Erwin Schrödinger
realized that this concept is a consequence of the mathematical structure of quan-
tum mechanics, and that in the same year Werner Heisenberg explained the energy
structure of the helium atom using states that are entangled.3 However, they also
showed that in none of the first quantum mechanical treatments of many-body
systems “was entanglement exhibited for a pair of particles which are spatially well
separated over macroscopic distances” and that only with the Einsteinâ€"Podolskyâ€"
Rosen Gedanken experiment, proposed in 1935 (Einstein et al. 1935), was this
feature of the mathematical structure of quantum mechanics explicitly discussed.
Finally, they showed that Schrödinger not only reacted to this ideal experiment by
introducing the term “entanglement”, but also asked himself if this quantum feature
would be confirmed by experiments, or not. The authors continued sketching the
historical record, passing through the appearance of Bell’s theorem and its first tests
until the appearance of down-conversion pairs of photons, in the late 1980s, led to
improved tests of Bell’s theorem. This paper has a narrower timeline. I focus on the
period between 1965, when John Bell published what we now call Bell’s theorem,


2
See, for instance, Aczel (2002), Bernstein (1991), Gilder (2008), Clauser (1992, 2002, 2003), and
Wick (1995). Studies with a sociological or historical approach are Harvey (1980), Harvey (1981),
Pinch (1977), and Bispo et al. (2013). The latter is a study of the techniques and instruments used
in Clauser’s first experiment. The authors argue that this experiment could not have been carried
out earlier as it used phototubes called “quanticons” which had just arrived on the market. For this
information, see Gilder (2008, p. 266).
3
“If two separated bodies, each by itself known maximally, enter a situation in which they
influence each other, and separate again, then there occurs regularly that which I have just called
entanglement of our knowledge of the two bodies” (Schrödinger 1983, p. 161).
7.1 Introduction 237


and 1982, when Alain Aspect published the results of his experiments violating
Bell’s inequalities and supporting quantum mechanics.4 I leave aside Albert
Einstein’s and Niels Bohr’s previous works and the debates on the interpretation
and foundations of quantum mechanics in the 1930s, the debates on hidden vari-
ables triggered by the appearance of David Bohm’s causal interpretation in the
1950s, which was the subject of Chap. 2 in this book, and the ongoing series of new
experiments on Bell’s inequalities, since the late 1980s, which will be discussed in
the Chap. 8. Of these excluded topics, we only need to consider the context of the
debates around Bohm’s interpretation, since it strongly influenced the production
and the initial reception of Bell’s work. Indeed, Bell’s decision to approach the
hidden variable issue came from the very existence of Bohm’s interpretation. Bell
and his associates also inherited from the 1950s what, retrospectively Clauser
(2003, p. 20) named the “stigma [. . .] against any associated discussion of the
notion of hidden variables in quantum mechanics.”
The period in focus also allows us to discuss why optics became the privileged
bench for experimental tests of Bell’s inequalities. John Bell himself did not think it
would be so at the beginning. It were those who first pushed these inequalities into
the laboratories, such as Abner Shimony and John Clauser, who realized the
conceptual advantages of optical tests when compared to tests with positronium
annihilation, proton scattering, and other experiments. However, in addition to
these advantages, other reasons operated in favor of optics. Training in optics was
an asset of many who were willing to work on Bell’s theorem and, for this reason,
they could do their best and achieve telling results. By 1969 there was a balanced
distribution of scientific skills, Clauser and Richard Holt being the optics experi-
menters and Shimony and Michael Horne the theoreticians without training in
optics. Later, a meaningful number of protagonists were trained in optics. One
would like to inquire further into the connection between quantum optics and
foundations of quantum mechanics. This question is not central to this book, but I
remark that Joan Bromberg (2006), who is working on the history of quantum
optics in the US, suggested that “device physics was pursued in tandem with
fundamental physics, and even with research into the foundations of quantum
mechanics,” and that device research led to fundamental physics problems, and
the latter in turn inspired new devices. Indeed, technical improvements made
available while the experiments were being carried out, such as the tunable laser,
dramatically improved the accuracy of the experimental results.
While following the theoretical, experimental, and technical issues related to
Bell’s theorem and its tests, I will pay attention to the biographical sketches of a few
physicists involved in this story, addressing questions like: what factors led them to
choose issues from the foundations of quantum mechanics as research themes?
What issues did each one come to grips with? What were the favorable factors, and


4
Bell’s theorem (Bell 1964) was indeed published in 1965. In addition, for the sake of chronology,
it should be noted that Bell’s papers, (Bell 1964; Bell 1966), were written in the inverse order of
their publication.
238 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


the obstacles, to their activities? To what extent did they succeed in their endeavor?
Comparing their biographies, and thereby drawing resources from the method of
prosopography in history and history of science,5 I can draw a rough collective
biography of these figures. As a whole, it is a story of success since they pushed a
subject from the margins of physics to its mainstream; but it also included failures
and hopes not fulfilled. It suggests to us that foundations of quantum mechanics
was, at least in the period under analysis, still a job for quantum dissidents, fighting
against the dominant attitude among physicists according to which foundational
issues in quantum mechanics were already solved by the founding fathers of the
discipline. However, the common ground of the quantum dissidents was minimal
and focused just on relevance of the research in the foundations of quantum
mechanics, since these scientists supported different interpretations of this physical
theory and chose different approaches and issues in their research. The different
features of these biographies are as enlightening as their common traits are, and I
will address both the contrasts and common features in this paper.
The second section of this chapter deals with the context in which Bell’s theorem
was produced, its content, and its initial and uncomprehending reception; it covers
the period between 1965 and 1969. Next I move on to analyze John Clauser and
Abner Shimony’s reactions, their proposal to submit the theorem to a viable
experimental test, the involvement of American teams with these experiments,
and the conflicting results among the first two experiments with optical photons.
These events took place roughly between 1969 and 1974. The fourth section
analyzes how the physicists involved settled the experimental tie with two new
experiments carried out by Clauser and Edward Fry. This section is focused on the
period between 1975 and 1976. It also treats the socialization of the physicists
involved with research on Bell’s theorem as well as the professional recognition of
such themes of research. It pays attention to the cases of the journal Epistemological
Letters and of the Erice 1976 meeting, which was seen by some physicists as the
turning point in the acceptance that quantum nonlocality was indeed a new physical
effect. The fifth section analyzes the road toward what was considered at the time
the new challenge, an experiment changing the analyzers while the photons are in
flight. It roughly deals with the period between 1976 and 1982, when Alain Aspect
announced the results of his last experiments. Aspect’s experiments resonated with
the shifting attitude among physicists in the direction of a wide recognition of the
importance of Bell’s theorem. I conclude the chapter by drawing conclusions on the
way physicists changed their views on such subjects of research and by drafting a
collective biographical sketch of the physicists who brought hidden variables to the
optics laboratories.




5
For methods in prosopography, see Stone (1971) and Kragh (1987, pp. 174â€"181).
7.2 Bell’s Theorem, the Context of Its Production, and Its Initial Reception 239


7.2 Bell’s Theorem, the Context of Its Production,
and Its Initial Reception

The title of Bell’s first paper, “On the problem of hidden variables in quantum
mechanics,” suggests a strong relation with the research program aiming to intro-
duce hidden variables into quantum theory that was conducted by David Bohm,
Louis de Broglie, and Jean-Pierre Vigier in the 1950s. However, the title cannot be
taken at face value. Although they were historically intertwined, Bell’s contribu-
tions did not give a new breath to this program. Rather, Bell led the hidden variable
issue in a completely new direction. Indeed, Bell’s approach and main achieve-
ments in quantum mechanics are of a very different strain when compared to
Bohm’s (1952) hidden variable interpretation. While Bohm built models that
would first mimic quantum mechanics and later on lead to distinctive results, Bell
was interested in the critical analysis of the assumptions behind mathematical
proofs and Gedanken experiments. This way, Stöltzner (2002) has argued that
despite Bell’s enduring criticisms of von Neumann’s proof of the impossibility of
hidden variable in quantum mechanics, “a mathematically minded view on the
relation between the theorems of von Neumann and Bell” should consider Bell’s
theorem to be “a generalization of von Neumann’s.” Stöltzner’s point is that “if one
considers [. . .] Hilbert’s axiomatic method as a critical enterprise, Bell’s theorem
improves von Neumann’s by defining a more appropriate notion of ‘hidden vari-
able’ that permits one to include Bohm’s interpretation which recovers the predic-
tive content of quantum mechanics.” However, Bell’s work has a close historical
connection with Bohm’s work on a hidden variable interpretation. He was directly
motivated by the very existence of Bohm’s proposal and by its reception among
physicists. Bell’s (1982, 1987) statementsâ€"“In 1952 I saw the impossible done,”
and “Bohm’s 1952 papers on quantum mechanics were for me a revelation”â€"hide
more truth than is usually recognized.
240 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .




Picture 7.1 John Bell (1928-1990)â€"on the board, drawing of Aspect’s 1982 experiment with
two-channel polarizers. Courtesy: Nature


Born in 1928, in Belfast, Bell had no scientific or educational family back-
ground; indeed, he was the first of his family to go to high school. He went to
Queen’s University in Belfast, where he earned a BSc in Physics and formed the
conviction that he would be a theoretical physicist. A job at the Atomic Energy
Research Establishment at Harwell permitted him a leave of absence to begin his
doctorate in Birmingham under Rudolf Peierls. Bell built his reputation working on
high-energy particle physics theory and the design of particle accelerators, and from
1960, he and Mary Bell, his wife, worked at CERN in Geneva. His early concerns
about quantum mechanics can be traced back to his undergraduate courses in
Belfast, where he quarreled with Richard Sloane, his teacher, because Sloane was
not able to afford him a plausible explanation of Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle
(Whitaker 2002, pp. 14â€"17). Later on, he avowed: “When I was a student I had
much difficulty with quantum mechanics. It was comforting to find that even
Einstein had had such difficulties for a long time” (Bell 1982, p. 989). Since then
he began to think about the transition between quantum and classical descriptions of
the world.6

6
We can reconstruct this account due to Bell (1982) and Jeremy Bernstein (1991), who wrote his
Quantum Profiles based on extensive talks with Bell and John Wheeler. Besides Bernstein,
biographical information on Bell can also be collected from Shimony (2002), Whitaker (2002),
and from papers by Bernard d’Espagnat, Michael Horne, and others, gathered in Bertlmann and
Zeilinger (2002). For a comprehensive evaluation of Bell’s scientific contributions, see Jackiw and
Shimony (2002), Jackiw and Shimony (2008). His selected papers are in Bell et al. (1995) and his
papers on the foundations of quantum physics are collected in Bell (2004b).
7.2 Bell’s Theorem, the Context of Its Production, and Its Initial Reception 241


“Smitten by Bohm’s papers,”7 the Irish physicist attempted to determine what
was wrong with von Neumann’s proof, since it did not allow for hidden variables in
quantum mechanics. Bell knew von Neumann’s proof only indirectly, from his
reading of Max Born’s Natural Philosophy of Cause and Chance, but he could not
read von Neumann’s book because at that time there was no English edition of
it. The solution was to ask Franz Mandl, his colleague at Harwell, about the content
of the book. “Franz was of German origin, so he told me something of what von
Neumann was saying. I already felt that I saw what von Neumann’s unreasonable
axiom was.” He wrote to Wolfgang Pauli (Pauli and Meyenn 1999, p. 28) asking for
reprints of his paper on Bohm’s proposal, but he probably did not like the views
expressed there since Pauli (1953, p. 33) had considered Bohm’s hidden variables
as “artificial metaphysics.” He went to Birmingham in 1953, including hidden
variables as one of the possibilities for his studies. Asked by Peierls to give a talk
about what he was working on, “Bell gave Peierls a choice of two topics: the
foundations of quantum theory or accelerators.” Peierls chose the latter, which was
the end of the first stage of Bell’s involvement with hidden variables. The inter-
mezzo lasted 10 years; he only resumed this work at Stanford, during a leave of
absence from CERN.
However, as we will see, there were intermediate events which prompted Bell to
resume his early reflections. In the first of the two articles on foundations of
quantum mechanics he published while in the US, Bell (1966) recorded in the
acknowledgments both the very origin of his investigation and earlier and later
influences: “The first ideas of this paper were conceived in 1952. I warmly thank
Dr. F. Mandl for intensive discussion at that time. I am indebted to many others
since then, and latterly, and very especially, to Professor J. M. Jauch.” In fact, while
in Geneva in the early 1960s, Bell attended some seminars of the group led by Jauch
at the University of Geneva. Both Jauch and Constantin Piron, his doctoral student,
had converted Geneva in one of the world centers working in the axiomatic
formulation of quantum physics, an approach, as we had seen in Chap. 4,
remounting to von Neumann’s works. Discussions with Jauch had represented a
true challenge for Bell, since Jauch “was actually trying to strengthen von
Neumann’s infamous theorem.” It was, of course, von Neumann’s proof against
the existence of hidden variables compatible with quantum mechanics. According
to Bell: “For me, that was like a red light to a bull. So I wanted to show that Jauch
was wrong.” In fact, Bell (1966) opened his first paper addressing it directly to Josef
Jauch: “The present paper [. . .] is addressed to those who [. . .] believe that ‘the
question concerning the existence of such hidden variables received an early and
rather decisive answer in the form of von Neumann’s proof on the mathematical
impossibility of such variables in quantum theory’” (Bell 1966, p. 447).
Bell’s work can therefore be placed in the crossroad between the tradition related
to the reinforcing of proofs against hidden variables and the tradition of building of
viable models with such variables. If the possibility of introducing hidden variables


7
Quotations are, unless indicated, from Bernstein (1991, pp. 65â€"68).
242 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


in quantum mechanics was the motivation, Bell’s approach was far from Bohm’s, as
we have remarked. Indeed, he was not interested in building viable models mim-
icking quantum mechanics. Instead, his works focused on the critical analysis of the
assumptions behind von Neumann’s proofs and its reformulations, and later on the
assumptions behind the Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen Gedanken experiment.
From the 1950s Bell received a heritage with a double meaning. In addition to
the motivation derived from the existence of Bohm’s work, he needed to face a
widely shared idea that the matter of hidden variables was just a philosophical
controversy and not a job for professional physicists. I have analyzed in the Chap. 2
in this book the context of the disputes about Bohm’s interpretation in the 1950s.
Here I just need to summarize it, pointing out that the label of “philosophical
controversy” resulted from the overlapping of several factors. It originated with
the physicists closely associated with the Copenhagen interpretation such as Pauli
(1953, p. 33), Rosenfeld (1953, p. 56), and Heisenberg (1958, p. 131). “Artificial
metaphysics,” “debate [in] the field of epistemology,” and “ideological superstruc-
ture,” were respectively the words used to dismiss Bohm’s hidden variable inter-
pretation. These terms were used in the context that Jammer (1974, p. 250) named
“the almost unchallenged monocracy of the Copenhagen school in the philosophy
of quantum mechanics,” describing the early 1950s. Bohm and collaborators
unintentionally reinforced this label because the results they were able to obtain
did not conflict with the predictions of quantum mechanics; neither did they present
a heuristic advantage over that theory. In addition, Bohm, Vigier, and de Broglie
emphasized what they considered to be epistemological advantages of their
approach when compared to the complementarity interpretation. That the idea
this was a philosophical controversy was largely shared can be seen from state-
ments written by physicists who tried impartially to represent the controversy.
Albert Messiah (1961, p. 48), in his very influential textbook, published originally
in 1958, wrote, “the controversy has finally reached a point where it can no longer
be decided by any further experimental observations; it henceforth belongs to the
philosophy of science rather than to the domain of physical science proper.” A
similar example is Fritz Bopp’s statement, during a conference dedicated in 1957 to
foundational problems in quantum mechanics (Körner 1957, p. 51): “. . .what we
have done today was predicting the possible development of physicsâ€"we were not
doing physics but metaphysics.” Bopp’s declaration becomes still more meaningful
if one considers that he was working on another alternative interpretation, the
so-called “stochastic interpretation.” Finally, these widely shared views were
reinforced by a pre-existent belief that foundational problems were already solved
by the founding fathers of the quantum theory. In the middle of the 1960s the spirit
of the “old battles” from the 1950s was still alive.8

8
“Old battles” was the term used by Abdul Salam in 1966 to explain to Rosenfeld an affair that
happened at the International Centre for Theoretical Physics, in Trieste, Italy, related to a paper
criticizing some tenets of the Copenhagen interpretation that had been written by the physicist
Klaus Tausk. This episode is analyzed in Chap. 5 in this book. Abdul Salam to Léon Rosenfeld,
26 Sep 1966, Rosenfeld Papers, Niels Bohr Archive, Copenhagen.
7.2 Bell’s Theorem, the Context of Its Production, and Its Initial Reception 243


Bell had a fine sensitivity for the prejudices nurtured in the old battles. He knew
how strong the shared belief that he needed to face was. Just when he had published
his papers on the conflict between quantum mechanics and certain hidden-variable
theories, he received a not encouraging letter, to say the least, from Léon Rosenfeld:
“I need not tell you that I regard your hunting hidden parameters as a waste of your
talent; I don’t know, either, whether you should be glad or sorry for that.”9 Thus in
the very period when he published his two seminal papers, he also published a third
on the measurement problem in quantum mechanics, co-authored with Michael
Nauenberg, a physicist from the University of California, Santa Cruz, in which they
criticized the view shared by the majority of the physicists:
We emphasize not only that our view [that quantum mechanics is, at the best, incomplete] is
that of a minority but also that current interest in such questions is small. The typical
physicist feels that they have long been answered, and that he will fully understand just how
if ever he can spare 20 minutes to think about it. (Bell and Nauenberg 1966)

As the paper was dedicated to Victor Weisskopf, they rhetorically appealed for
Weisskopf scientific authority to support their own research: “It is a pleasure for us
to dedicate the paper to Professor Weisskopf, for whom intense interest in the latest
developments of detail has not dulled concerns with fundamentals.” Ten years later,
even with experiments on his inequalities underway, Bell kept the same sensitivity.
When Alain Aspect formulated his proposal of new experiments on Bell’s inequal-
ities, he met Bell to discuss them. Bell’s first question was, “Have you a permanent
position?” After Aspect’s positive answer, he warmly encouraged and urged him to
publish the idea, but warned him that all this was considered by a majority of
physicists as a subject for crackpots.10
Let us now focus on the results that Bell achieved in the middle of the 1960s. In
his first paper, Bell (1966) isolated the assumption of von Neumann’s proof that
seemed to him to be untenable, and showed that while quantum mechanics satisfies
this assumption it is not reasonable to require that any alternative theory have the
same property. This assumption was that “any real linear combination of any two
Hermitian operators represents an observable, and the same linear combination of
expectation values is the expectation value of the combination.” Next, he moved to
analyze the new version of the proof that had been suggested by Jauch and Piron
(1963), and made a similar objection. These authors had drawn an analogy between
the structure of quantum mechanics and the calculus of propositions in ordinary
logic, and they introduced a generalized probability function w(a). They assumed as
an axiom that “if a and b are two propositions, such that for a certain state w(a) ¼
w(b) ¼ 1, then this means that a measurement of a and b will give with certainty the
values 1.” Bell pointed out that this property, which is valid in ordinary logic and
satisfied by ordinary quantum mechanics, should not be required of theories that
were supposed to be alternatives to quantum mechanics. Bell also criticized


9
Léon Rosenfeld to John Bell, 2 Dec 1966. Rosenfeld Papers, Niels Bohr Archive, Copenhagen.
10
Aspect (2002, p. 119). Michael Nauenberg (pers. comm., 16 April 2005) also heard this
anecdote from Bell.
244 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


Gleason’s (1957) work on similar grounds for his use of quantum mechanical
properties that were not reasonable to require of alternative theories. Bell remarked,
however, that Gleason’s work did not intend to reinforce proofs against hidden
variables but rather to reduce the axiomatic basis of quantum mechanics.11
After showing that previous proofs against hidden variables included assump-
tions that were not reasonable, Bell (1966) considered whether some features
should be required from models with hidden variables, if these models were to be
physically interesting. “The hidden variables should surely have some spatial
significance and should evolve in time according to prescribed laws.” He recog-
nized that “these are prejudices,” but added “it is just this possibility of interpolat-
ing some (preferably causal) space-time picture, between preparation of and
measurements on states, that makes the quest for hidden variables interesting to
the unsophisticated.” As the ideas of space, time, and causality had not been
relevant in the assumptions hitherto considered, he attempted to determine what
implications follow from hidden variables related to such ideas. After recalling that
Bohm’s (1952) proposal was “the most successful attempt in that direction,” he
wrote the wave function of a hidden-variable model for the case of a system with
two spin 1/2 particles. Then, he showed that this wave function is in general not
factorable and presents a grossly non-local character, since “in this theory an
explicit causal mechanism exists whereby the disposition of one piece of apparatus
affects the results obtained with a distant piece.” As the state of two spin 1/2
particles could represent a system similar to that suggested by Einstein, Podolsky,
and Rosen, Bell concluded, “in fact the Einsteinâ€"Podolskyâ€"Rosen paradox is
resolved in the way which Einstein would have liked least.” Bell asked himself if
non-locality is the price to be paid for the existence of hidden-variable theories, and
admitted that there was no proof of this. Indeed, he was already looking for such a
proof while writing the paper.
To obtain such a proof, Bell took the next logical step: to isolate what reasonable
assumption was behind Einstein’s argument and check the compatibility between
this assumption and quantum mechanics. For Bell (1964), the “vital assumption”
when dealing with a two-particle system is that what is being measured on one of
them does not affect the other. He recalled Einstein’s dictum, according to which,
“on one supposition we should, in my opinion, absolutely hold fast: the real factual
situation of the system S2 is independent of what is done with the system S1, which
is spatially separated from the former.” As Bell knew that Bohm’s hidden-variable
theory did not satisfy this dictum, he went to build a simple model of a hidden-
variable theory obeying such a supposition and showed that its results conflict with
quantum mechanical predictions in very special cases. This is Bell’s theorem: no
local hidden-variable theory can recover all quantum mechanical predictions. In a
very rough description, Bell’s theorem can be derived when one considers a hidden
variable model of a system with two spin 12 particles in the singlet state moving in


11
It was Jauch who had called Bell’s attention to Gleason’s paper, which is an additional piece of
evidence of how influential Jauch was in Bell’s resuming of his own work on hidden variables.
7.2 Bell’s Theorem, the Context of Its Production, and Its Initial Reception 245


opposite directions, a system that is analogous to the system suggested in the
Einsteinâ€"Podolskyâ€"Rosen argument. Bell built a function that is the expectation
value of the product of spin components of each particle, and using different spin
components derived an inequality with this function. The theorem is demonstrated
when one uses quantum mechanical predictions in such inequality, since some
quantum mechanical predictions violate this inequality. Since then, many other
analogous inequalities have been obtained, adopting somewhat different premises,
as we will see along this chapter; thus today it is usual to speak of Bell’s inequalities
as the quantitative measurement of Bell’s theorem. In spite of its simplicity, Bell’s
theorem has been considered by many one of the most important results in quantum
physics since its creation in the middle of the 1920s, but awareness that the issue at
stake was locality and not just hidden variables spread through a slow process. Even
considering those who were already involved with foundational issues, not all of
them quickly grasped the real meaning of Bell’s theorem; which will be illustrated
with David Bohm’s and Louis de Broglie’s cases. Research on the connections
between quantum non-locality and relativity theory only began in the late 1970s,
when the balance between experiments suggested confirmation of quantum
mechanical predictions and violations of Bell’s inequalities. How important as
the cognitive obstacles were, however, they were not independent of attitudinal
obstacles, which were mainly related to the intellectual and professional status
physicists attributed to subjects such as hidden variables and foundations of quan-
tum theory.
The simplicity of Bell’s theorem has given rise to the following question,
suggested by Shimony (2002): why was it Bell who arrived at such an “elegant
but not very difficult” result? Reviewing Bell’s steps in his career as a physicist,
Shimony suggested that “Bell’s moral character is primarily responsible for his
discovery of Bell’s Theorem,” relating this discovery to his independence and
tenacity in pushing critical analysis to its last consequences. As we will see, Bell
actively participated in the endeavor to bring his theorem to laboratories, in the
1970s, and followed closely the wide recognition of his contribution in the 1980s.
He died prematurely in 1990. In the next decade, Bell’s theorem was the key
concept behind the search for technological applications of quantum effects in
quantum computation. Since then, his fame has only increased, and we may even
be witnessing the birth of a new founder myth. According to physicist Daniel
Greenberger (2002, p. 281),
John Bell’s status in our field has the same [like Isaac Newton, James Watson, and Linus
Pauling] mythic quality. Before him, there was nothing, only the philosophical disputes
between famous old men. He showed that the field contained physics, experimental
physics, and nothing has been the same since.

Let us now come back to the reception of Bell’s theorem.12 It opened the
possibility of using experimental physics in order to reject some theories and


12
Bell’s theorem paper was cited more than 4,000 times. I include information related to the
number of citations of some of the main papers concerning the tests of Bell’s theorem as evidence
246 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


preserve others; however, physicists did not see the subject in this way so promptly.
Ballentine (1987) remarked, “the awareness of its significance was slow to
develop,” quoting a graph with the number of citations of Bell’s (1964) paper.
Indeed, consulting the Web of Science database one can check that before Clauser’s
(1969) note at the American Physical Society, and the Clauser et al. (1969) paper,
only three papers cited Bell’s paper: (Bell 1966), himself, and two letters that
missed the point as concerns Bell’s theorem.13 Another evidence of the poor initial
reaction to Bell’s theorem can be found in the colloquium “Quantum Theory and
Beyond” held at Cambridge in July 1969, which “intended to provide opportunity
[. . .] to discuss some possible alternative theories to see what a real change might
involve.” The colloquium was organized by Edward Bastin and David Bohm,
chaired by Otto Frisch, and gathered physicists interested in foundations of quan-
tum mechanics, such as Yakir Aharonov, Jeffrey Bub, Mario Bunge, H. J.
Groenewold, Basil Hiley, Aage Petersen, G. M. Prosperi, and C. F. von Weizsäcker.
None of them cited Bell’s works.14 Before going to Clauser’s and Shimony’s
reactions, however, it is interesting to see that no reaction to Bell’s theorem came
from exactly where it would be expected, i.e. the partisans of hidden-variable
approaches such as David Bohm and Louis de Broglie.



of their resonance among physicists. The data were updated on 15 February 2014. I am aware of
the limits of such kind of information (Freitas and Freire Jr 2003), but it could help us just as one
more piece of information. According to Podlubny (2005), there is no reasonable criterion in the
available literature for comparisons between “scientists working in different fields of science on
the basis of their citation numbers.” However, just as a guess, I took data from the number of US
article output and citations of US articles, in the field of physics, for the years 1997, 1999, and
2000, available at http://www.nsf.org, and I obtained an average of 7.1 citations by article. Redner
(2005), considering only citations in Physical Review of papers published in this journal, con-
cluded that “nearly 70 % of all PR articles have been cited fewer than 10 times” and that “the
average number of citations is 8.8.” These numbers match the physicists’ shared tacit perception
that an article should receive more than ten citations to be known. Spires, Stanford’s database for
high energy physics preprints (http://www.slac.stanford.edu/spires/), suggests the following clas-
sification: “unknown papers (0); Less known papers (1â€"9); Known papers (10â€"49), Well-known
papers (50â€"99), Famous papers (100â€"499 cites), and Renowned papers (500+ cites).” Comparison
with research on the foundations of quantum theory should be taken with a grain of salt due the
huge difference in the number of active physicists in such fields. The source of data is the Web of
Science.
13
Sachs (1969) cites Bell’s paper just incidentally. Clark and Turner (1968) realized that Bell’s
theorem predicts a conflict between quantum mechanics and hidden variables, but they exploited
neither the nature of this conflict nor viable tests to reveal this conflict.
14
For the proceedings of the conference, see Bastin (1971). Henry Stapp claimed that a paper by
himself, “widely circulated in 1968,” was the first recognition of the importance of Bell’s theorem.
This paper “was to appear in the proceedings of Bastin’s conference on Quantum Theory and
Beyond, which occurred in the summer of 1968.” Stapp to Clauser, 5 Feb 1975, John Clauser
Papers. These proceedings did not list Stapp among the attendance of the colloquium. The preprint
paper was later reprinted, with the information it had been distributed in 1968. It is H. P. Stapp,
“Correlation Experiments and the Nonvalidity of Ordinary Ideas about the Physical World,” LBL
5333, 9 July 1976. I am thankful to Gustavo Rocha for obtaining a copy of this paper. The first
paper published by Stapp, in which Bell’s theorem is explicitly considered is Stapp (1971).
7.2 Bell’s Theorem, the Context of Its Production, and Its Initial Reception 247


It is certain that David Bohm read Bell’s (1966) paper, which contains references
to the other paper in which the theorem was demonstrated.15 Bohm could have
exploited the full implications of Bell’s theorem. Instead, he, with his former
student Jeffrey Bub, reacted by building another type of hidden-variable theory,
an explicitly nonlocal one. This time they used some ideas implicit in the “differ-
ential-space” theory of Norbert Wiener and Armand Siegel, and suggested a
threshold, a relaxation time of the order of 10 13 s, below which there would
appear conflicts with quantum mechanical predictions. These ideas had been used
by Bub in his doctoral dissertation.16 They presented this theory as a candidate for
solving the so-called measurement problem of quantum mechanics, which was the
focus of Bub’s dissertation. As far as I know this was the only time Bohm suggested
a figure to contrast hidden variables with quantum mechanics. In the 1950s, he had
just begun to speculate that changes in his model could produce different pre-
dictions in the domain of the size of an atomic nucleus, but did not carry out the
promised changes. Immediately after Bohm and Bub’s proposal, the Harvard
experimentalist Costas Papaliolios tested it. Papaliolios (1967) successively mea-
sured linear polarization of photons emitted from a tungsten-ribbon filament lamp.
The measurements were carried out within time intervals lesser than the threshold
suggested by Bohm and Bub, and he found their theory untenable. Bohm was
notified of the result before its publication and tried to reduce the reach of this
experiment, “I regard our ‘theory’ largely as something that is useful for refuting
von Neumann’s proof that there are no hidden variables. I would not regard it as a
definitive theory, on which predictions of experimental results could be made.” In
addition, he admitted that “the time, Ï„ kT ℏ
10 13 s is just a guess,” and not a
17
consequence of their theory. Papaliolios conceded that “the primary purpose of


15
Bohm and Bub (1966) cites Bell (1966), which cites the paper where the theorem is demon-
strated (Bell 1964). In addition, according to Jeffrey Bub, Bell’s papers and his theorem were
discussed by Bohm and him. Bub also recalls that only later, while in Minnesota, he fully realized
the implications of Bell’s theorem. Talk with Jeffrey Bub, 22 May 2002, American Institute of
Physics, College Park, MD.
16
Wiener and Siegel’s ideas are in Wiener and Siegel (1953), Wiener and Siegel (1955), Siegel
and Wiener (1956). Previously, Wiener had been influenced by Bohm’s works: “I have been
tremendously influenced in my thinking by my conversations and correspondence with Mr. Gabor
and Mr. Rothstein, and by reading a sequence of two papers [. . .] which appeared this January
under the authorship of David Bohm.” In addition, in a talk given at the MIT-Harvard physics
seminars, in 1956, Siegel cogitated of experimental predictions different from the standard ones,
and N. F. Ramsey (Harvard) and Martin Deutsch (MIT), who attended the talk, “were quite willing
to discuss the question as a serious and legitimate claim.” “Paper to be presented on May 3 [1952]
before the American Physical Society by Norbert Wiener,” [7pp, unpublished, Box 29C, folder
678] and Armand Siegel to Norbert Wiener, 18 May 1956, [Box 15, folder 217], Norbert Wiener
Papers, Institute Archive, MIT, Cambridge, MA. Wiener’s interest in the foundations of quantum
mechanics has not been analyzed yet, as far as I know, in the historical and philosophical literature
on this subject.
17
Costas Papaliolios to David Bohm, 17 February 1967; Bohm to Papaliolios, 1 March 1967,
2 March 1967, 11 May 1967. Papaliolios Papers, Accession 14811, Harvard University Archives,
Boxes 23, folder “Hidden variables,” and 10, folder “Bohm letters,” respectively (CPP hereafter).
248 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


[Bohm-Bub’s] paper was to demonstrate, by means of an explicit theory, how one
can circumvent Von Neumann’s proof,” but emphasized the role that experimental
predictions and real experiments, such as the one he carried out, should play in the
choice between theories in the foundations of quantum physics. Papaliolios did not
profess an empiricist view on choice of theories, he simply noted the advantages
when experimental results are available. His reply to Bohm was a premonition of
the coming times in the foundations of quantum mechanics:
It is to your credit that you make your theory testable by stipulating a definite relaxation
time [. . .]. If [it] had been left unspecified then you could always hide behind a suitably
short relaxation time thereby making the hidden variable theory experimentally indistin-
guishable from the usual quantum mechanics. This latter approach is not entirely without
merit, but one would have to use a non-experimental criterion such as elegance, simplicity,
etc., in order to choose between the two theories.18

While the Papaliolios’ experiment did not deal with Bell’s theorem, it is an
interesting case for our study since it was the first time ever that an experiment was
devised to test hidden-variable theories. Bohm and Aharonov (1957) had compared
the ideal experiment suggested by Einstein, Podolsky, and Rosen with real data, but
using results from a previous experiment that had not been designed with this goal.
The context of Papaliolios’ experiment indicates the shifting mentality concerning
experiments and foundations of quantum physics among the physicists. It exhibits
both old and new behaviors. Papaliolios was a Bell’s theorem experimentalist avant
la lettre, since for him Bohm-Bub’s theory simply triggered what he had already
been reflecting on, that is, he had been wondering about “hidden variable experi-
mental possibilities,” including a number of different possible approaches. For
instance, he asked himself if “is there some effect which ¼ 0 for quantum mechan-
ics that 6¼ 0 for hidden-variable theories?”19 Aware of the old behavior of bias
against the hidden variable subject, the U.S. Naval Ordnance Lab physicist Thomas
Phipps praised the experiment and encouraged him to pursue this kind of experi-
ments, noting, “even though this may not represent the most fashionable mode of
research of the day.”20 Papaliolios received a similar and stronger encouragement
from the Physical Review Letters’ referee who evaluated his paper. “This paper
should be published, but only if the author includes a discussion of the feasibility of
these improvements and indicates plans to pursue the matter further.” Papaliolios
changed his paper according to the referee’s requirement â€"“an experiment is now
in progress to set even lower, upper bound on Ï„ by using a thinner polarizer”â€"and
in fact elaborated plans to work out an improved experiment, but nothing came out
of these attempts.21 Yet, Papaliolios’s optical experiment exhibits the interaction



18
Papaliolios to Bohm, 20 March 1967, CPP, box 23, folder “Hidden variables,” ibid.
19
“V. Experimental Possibilities?”, minute by Costas Papaliolios, [w/d], CPP, box 23, folder
“Hidden variables,” ibid.
20
Thomas Phipps to Papaliolios, 19 Apr 1967, Papaliolios Papers, ibid.
21
George Trigg [editor of Physical Review Letters] to Papaliolios, with the referee’s report
enclosed, 28 Feb 1967; Papaliolios to Trigg, 7 March 1967, CPP, ibid.
7.3 Philosophy Enters the Labs: The First Experiments 249


between scientific experiments and new technical devices that would be a driving
force in Bell’s theorem experiments. After his experiment, Papaliolios approached
R. Clark Jones, Director of Research of Polaroid Corporation, showing how the
polarizers produced by this corporation had been useful in a foundational experi-
ment, and asking if Polaroid could supply thinner polarizers for new experiments.22
Louis de Broglie, the other main proponent of hidden variables, only reacted
when experiments on Bell’s theorem were already being carried out, and he did not
grasp their full implications. de Broglie’s argument, based on an analogy between
quantum states and light wave packets, was that the wave function of a two-particle
system would factorize after the particles fly a certain distance, which is a conjec-
ture due to Wendell Furry. He did not realize that experimental tests of Bell’s
theorem could check this hypothesis. In addition, de Broglie (1974, p. 722) con-
sidered that quantum correlations between two electrons spatially separated would
imply an instantaneous exchange of information, thus violating the relativity
theory; an issue not yet elucidated. A harsh controversy followed between 1974
and 1978 that pitted Bell and Abner Shimony against de Broglie and George
Lochak, a former student of de Broglie.23 Lochak (1978) still maintained, “Bell’s
attempt, as interesting as it is, does not say, and cannot say, anything decisive about
the existence of hidden variables, local or nonlocal.” By that time, Bohm had
realized the full implications of Bell’s theorem, and stated that non-locality was
the most important quantum property.24 In fact, Bell’s theorem survived and was
fully exploited in the hands of a new generation with very different approaches
from those of the older one, as we will see now.



7.3 Philosophy Enters the Labs: The First Experiments

The philosopher and physicist Abner Shimony and the physicist John Clauser were
the key figures in the move to bring Bell’s theorem to the laboratory. Before
analyzing what they did let us see who they were at the time. Shimony, born in
1928, had been interested in science, mainly physics and mathematics, and philos-
ophy since his undergraduate studies at Yale, where he was a joint philosophy and
mathematics major.25 When he was finishing his doctorate in Philosophy at Yale,


22
Papaliolios to R. Clark Jones, 7 March 1967, CPP, ibid.
23
See Broglie (1974), Bell (1975), Lochak (1975). Bell’s paper is followed by a discussion
between Bell and Lochak. Lochak’s stance provoked Shimony’s irony: “In view of the extreme
implausibility of such behavior [to admit a conspiratorial behavior of the detectors for explaining
the experimental results violating Bell’s inequalities], the local hidden-variable theories are very
hard to defend, and their advocates should remember the sermon of Donne ‘And therefore never
send to know for whom the bell tolls; it tolls for thee’” (Shimony 1976).
24
See Bohm (1971), and especially Bohm and Hiley (1975).
25
Shimony’s biographical sketch is based on Wick (1995, pp. 106â€"109), Aczel (2002, pp. 149â€"
155), and Joan L. Bromberg, “The rise of ‘experimental metaphysics’ in late twentieth century
250 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


working on probability, in the winter of 1952â€"1953, a reading of Max Born’s
Natural Philosophy of Cause and Chance revived his interests in physics, espe-
cially in classical statistical mechanics and quantum mechanics, and prompted him
to take a second doctorate in physics under Eugene Wigner at Princeton. There he
worked with statistical mechanics. In the early 1960s, even before finishing his
physics doctorate, Wigner’s interests in the measurement problem of quantum
mechanics excited him.26 Ever after, Shimony focused on the foundations of
quantum mechanics, publishing his first paper on the subject in 1963. I have argued
in the Chap. 4 in this book that Wigner played a unique role in elevating the status
of such issues. He was also very supportive of his students and colleagues who
worked on this subject. His dispute with Leon Rosenfeld and the Italian physicists
Daneri, Loinger, and Prosperi, in the second half of the 1960s, which contributed to
breaking down the monocracy around the Copenhagen school, was primarily
motivated by his defense of young physicists like Shimony who had been strongly
and unfairly criticized. In the letter to Jauch suggesting him a joint reply to the
Italian physicists, he wrote, “Needless to say, I am less concerned about myself than
about other people who are much younger than I am and whose future careers such
statements may hurt.”27 The lasting interaction with Wigner was fruitful for both of
them. Shimony had Wigner’s authoritative support for his entry into the field of
foundations of quantum mechanics, and Wigner met in Shimony an informal
assistant for philosophical matters.
Shimony’s background in philosophy facilitated his physical research. Influence
from Peirce and Whitehead facilitated his acceptance of quantum mechanics, and
the remaining conflict, related to his commitment to realism, has been a major
factor in his lasting “search for a world view that will accommodate our knowledge
of microphysics.” His double training also facilitated his professional career. He
was hired by MIT’s philosophy department in 1959, and gave courses on founda-
tions of quantum mechanics there in the early 1960s. After a while, he moved to
Boston University, in 1968, for a double affiliation in philosophy and physics. So he
never depended exclusively on his physics training and his achievements in foun-
dations of quantum mechanics for his professional career. His double training
permitted him, however, to be considered a physicist with a philosophical culture
among the physicists, and a philosopher with physics training among the philoso-
phers. His achievements in the foundations of quantum physics have carried him to


physics,” unpublished manuscript, 2004. See also Abner Shimony, Interviewed by Joan Lisa
Bromberg, 2002, Niels Bohr Library, American Institute of Physics, College Park, MD.
26
“I found your paper on the mindâ€"body problem extremely stimulating. It is one of the few
treatments of the problem which considers the mindâ€"body relationship to be a legitimate subject
for scientific investigation, without achieving this scientific status for the problem by reducing it to
behavioristic or materialistic considerations.” Abner Shimony to Eugene Wigner, 1 May 1961.
Wigner Papers, box 94, folder 1, Manuscripts Division, Department of Rare Books and Special
Collections, Princeton University Library (WigP hereafter). Shimony’s first paper on the mea-
surement problem is Shimony (1963).
27
Eugene Wigner to Josef M. Jauch, 6 September 1966. Wigner Papers, box 94, folder 7, WigP.
7.3 Philosophy Enters the Labs: The First Experiments 251


a key position in this field. With Shimony, foundations of quantum mechanics
entered the optics laboratory, but did not lose its philosophical implications.28




Picture 7.2 Left to right: Daniel Greenberger, unidentified man, Abner Shimony, and Lev
Vaidman at a dinner in Baltimore, Maryland. 10 Aug 1993. AIP Emilio Segre Visual Archives




Picture 7.3 John F. Clauser. AIP Emilio Segre Visual Archives, gift of John Clauser




28
For a sample of this approach, see Shimony (1993).
252 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


John Clauser, born in 1942, has been uneasy about quantum mechanics since his
undergraduate studies at Berkeley and graduate studies at Columbia, an uneasiness
that he may have inherited from his family background. Francis Clauser, his father,
was an aeronautical engineer and researcher who worked with Theodore von
Karman on the physics of fluids. According to the younger Clauser, “he always
was trying to understand physics, and there were very strong similarities between
the mathematics of fluid flow and the mathematics of quantum mechanics, and he
didn’t understand quantum mechanics. And he kind of pre-programmed me as the
guy who might help try to solve the problem that he couldn’t solve.” His father was
also a strong influence on Clauser’s skepticism, which was very instrumental for his
discovery that no previous experimental data were adequate to test Bell’s theorem.
“Son, look at the data. People will have lots of fancy theories, but always go back to
the original data and see if you come to the same conclusions.”29
Clauser was finishing his thesis on measurement of the cosmic microwave
background under the direction of Patrick Thaddeus at Columbia University
when he became interested in Bell’s theorem. Clauser’s doctoral training, including
the measurement of microwaves, enabled him to foresee and design quantum optics
experiments to test Bell’s inequalities. However, the appeal coming from the
discovery of an interestingâ€"but not yet doneâ€"experiment was not the only
motivation behind his quick shift to a subject related to the foundations of quantum
mechanics. Pedagogical and political factors were also influential factors. Clauser’s
approach to physics demands visualization and construction of physical models, not
just abstract mathematics. So, he collided with the traditional way in which
quantum mechanics has been taught.30 Additionally, he (Clauser 2002) read
EPR’s paper and Bohm’s and de Broglie’ works, and “while [he] had difficulty
understanding the Copenhagen interpretation, the arguments by its critics seemed
far more reasonable to [him] at that time.” To his awareness that he had discovered
that a good experiment had not yet been done, was added a political influence, “l’air
du temps.” As he remembers, “the Vietnam war dominated the political thoughts of
my generation. Being a young student living in this era of revolutionary thinking, I
naturally wanted to ‘shake the world.’ Since I already believed that hidden variables
may indeed exist, I figured that this was obviously the crucial experiment for finally
revealing their existence” (Clauser 2002).31 To shake quantum mechanics was then
the target of his desire.




29
Clauser’s biographical sketch is based on Clauser (2002), Wick (1995, pp. 103â€"106), and Aczel
(2002, pp. 155â€"159). Quoted fragments are from John F. Clauser, interviewed by Joan Lisa
Bromberg, 2002, pp. 3 and 19, Niels Bohr Library, American Institute of Physics, College Park,
MD (AIP hereafter).
30
For the teaching of quantum mechanics, see Kaiser (2007) and Greca and Freire Jr (2014). For
the role of pedagogy in the production of physics, see Kaiser (2005).
31
For this context in American physics, see Kevles (1978, pp. 393â€"409) and Chap. 6 in this book.
7.3 Philosophy Enters the Labs: The First Experiments 253


Since 1968, Shimony and Clauser, independently and without mutual knowl-
edge, had been working on Bell’s theorem. Indeed, Bell’s paper early claimed
Shimony’s attention. He wrote to Eugene Wigner on New Year’s day, 1967.32
There is a paper by J. S. Bell [. . .] which I found very impressive as evidence against hidden
variable theories. He shows that in an Einsteinâ€"Podolskyâ€"Rosen type of experiment the
supposition of hidden variables, with any statistical distribution whatever, is certain to
disagree with some of the predictions of quantum mechanics unless there is a kind of action
at a distance.

In the summer of 1968, just before beginning to teach physics and philosophy at
Boston University, Shimony enlisted the physics graduate student Michael Horne
for designing a “realizable Bohm-type EPR experiment” as a dissertation subject.
Horne was the right choice as he was attracted to physics for the intellectual
endeavor it embodied. He was captivated by physics while reading I. B. Cohen’s
The birth of a new physics in high school, and the reading of E. Mach’s The science
of mechanics, while at the University of Mississippi, led him to decide that he
wanted to do research on the conceptual foundations of physics. In the early 1969,
however, Shimony was surprised by Clauser’s abstract in the Bulletin of the
American Physical Society suggesting an experiment to test Bell’s theorem. “We
were scooped,” told Shimony to Horne.33 After consulting Wigner, Shimony
decided to call Clauser and suggest collaboration, which was accepted by Clauser.34
By the time they began to collaborate they had already independently realized that
no previously available experimental results were able to test Bell’s theorem and
that the most adequate and viable test would be to repeat in slightly different
conditions an optical experiment done by Carl Kocher as a doctoral student of
Eugene Commins in 1967. The CHSH paper, which will be analyzed later, was the
first result of this collaboration.35
The first news Bell had from the American reaction to his work did not come,
however, through Shimony. According to Wick (1995, p. 106), “The letter from the
American student was the first serious reaction [Bell] got to his paperâ€"after a lag
time of five years.” The American student was, surely, Clauser. It is worth noting
the letters exchanged between Clauser and Bell, not only for what they correctly
predicted but also for their unfulfilled hopes. Clauser rightly assured Bell that the
results from the Wu-Shaknov experiment with the annihilation of positronium were
not adequate to test Bell’s inequalities. He suggested, instead, a modified extension


32
Shimony to Wigner, 1 Jan 1967. Wigner Papers, Box 83, folder 7, WigP.
33
Horne (2002) and Horne (pers. comm., 8 June 2005). Clauser’s abstract is Clauser (1969).
34
“It was a pleasure talking to you on the telephone on Thursday. Mike Horne and I had been
through a bad day after we found you had done an analysis that sounded very much like ours.”
Shimony to Clauser, 20 Apr 1969, Abner Shimony Papers, Box 2, Folder 9, (Early Work on
Hidden Variables, 1969), Archives of Scientific Philosophy, Special Collections Department,
University of Pittsburgh (ASP hereafter).
35
CHSH paper is Clauser et al. (1969). Kocher’s experiment is reported in Kocher and Commins
(1967). For the roads of Clauser and Shimony to Bell’s theorem, and for their meeting, see Wick
(1995, pp. 103â€"113) and Aczel (2002, pp. 149â€"169).
254 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


of the Kocher and Commins experiment with the polarization correlation of pho-
tons from an atomic decay cascade. He also promised that “it might also be possible
to ‘rotate’ the polarizers by means of magneto-optic effects while the photons are in
flight to rule out all local hidden-variable theories;” a promise that would wait more
than 10 years to be fulfilled, and then not by Clauser but by Alain Aspect with a
different method for obtaining time-varying analyzers.36 Bell rightly anticipated the
results of the experiments, holding slight hope for a breakthrough37:
In view of the general success of quantum mechanics, it is very hard for me to doubt the
outcome of such experiments. However, I would prefer these experiments, in which the
crucial concepts are very directly tested, to have been done and the results on record.
Moreover, there is always the slim chance of an unexpected result, which would shake the
world.

Bell also revealed that he expected to be performing experiments in particle
physics: “experiments have been proposed involving neutral kaons [. . .] and will
become practical in the course of time.” Particle physics, though, never became the
main bench for experiments with Bell’s theorem.
It is interesting that among the three quantum dissenters, Clauser and Bell were
more optimistic about the possibility of obtaining results violating quantum
mechanics than Shimony, and that Clauser was by far the most optimistic among
them. Before they met each other, Shimony wrote to Clauser: “Incidentally, I am
amazed at your estimate of the probabilities of the possible outcomes of the
experiment. I would estimate a million to one in favor of the quantum mechanical
correlation function. Needless to say, I hope I am wrong in this.” “Do keep
imagining that it will come out against quantum theory; that makes it very inter-
esting!” were words from Horne to Clauser. In 1972, when Clauser notified the
results he had eventually obtained, confirming quantum mechanics predictions and
violating Bell’s inequalities, Shimony remarkedâ€"in his distinctive literary veinâ€"
how Clauser’s early expectations were frustrated: “Your paper finally arrived today.
It is a classic, but unfortunately a classic tragedy, since the hero dies, and dies
nobly.”38 Shimony kept these memories of Clauser’s hopes, “. . . he was absolutely
convinced that the experiment was going to come out for the local hidden variable
theory and against quantum mechanics, and it was going to be an epoch-making
experiment.”39
The CHSH (1969) paper is a fine piece in physics literature both for its concision
and breadth.40 It is an acronym for Clauser, Horne, Shimony, and Richard Holt, a
Harvard University student of Francis Marion Pipkin. The authors fulfilled three


36
Clauser to Bell, 14 Feb 1969, Clauser Papers (JCP hereafter).
37
Bell to Clauser, 5 March 1969. Idem.
38
Shimony to Clauser, 14 Jan 1972, Abner Shimony Papers, Box 1, Folder 4 (Clauser, John F.â€"
Correspondence, 1971â€"1972), ASP.
39
Shimony to Clauser, 20 Apr 1969; Horne to Clauser, 18 Apr 1969; both in JCP. Abner Shimony,
interviewed by Joan Lisa Bromberg, 2002, on p. 71, AIP.
40
Clauser et al. (1969). This paper has 2,286 citations.
7.3 Philosophy Enters the Labs: The First Experiments 255


goals. They modified Bell’s theorem in order to make it usable for real, not
idealized experiments, they showed that data available from previous experiments
did not produce evidence against local hidden-variable theories, and they suggested
a viable test with optical photons suggesting optics as the privileged bench for tests
of Bell’s theorem. They showed that the experiment by Madame Chien-Shiung Wu
and I. Shaknov, performed in 1950 using the annihilation of positronium for
measuring polarization correlation of γ photons, was not adequate to test Bell’s
theorem because “the direction of Compton scattering of a photon is a statistically
weak index of its linear polarization,” and there are no good polarizers for high-
energy photons.41 They also showed that the Kocher and Commins experiment
measuring polarization correlation of photons emitted in an atomic decay cascade
of calcium, performed in 1967, was in principle adequate for testing Bell’s theorem
but that these experimentalists had only measured anglesâ€"0 and 90 â€"in which
there is no conflict between quantum mechanical predictions and local hidden-
variable theories. For this reason the proposed experiment was essentially a revision
of the Kocher and Commins experiment with anglesâ€"22.5 and 67.5 â€"in which
there is a maximum conflict of predictions. It is curious to remark that Kocher and
Commins (1967, p. 575) explicitly presented their experiment “as an example of a
well-known problem in the quantum theory of measurement, first described by
Einstein, Podolsky, and Rosen and elucidated by Bohr,” but they were not aware of
Bell’s work.
In order to make Bell’s theorem testable, CHSH authors introduced additional
assumptions that were determined by the type of experiments they wanted to
do. The three additional assumptions were related to: avoiding Bell’s assumption
of perfect correlation between the pair of particles; considering rates of emergence
or not of photons from the filters instead of their detection (a change due to the
small efficiencies of the available photoelectric detectors); and taking the proba-
bility of joint detection as being independent of the orientation of the polarization
filters. They considered that the latter assumptions, which can be called a fair
sampling assumption, “could be challenged by an advocate of hidden-variable
theories in case the outcome of the proposed favors quantum mechanics;” but
they did not assess them a flaw in the proposed experiment because “highly
pathological detectors are required to convert hidden-variable emergence rates
into quantum mechanical counting rates” (Clauser et al. 1969). As necessary as
these assumptions were for the time we are analyzing, to perform experiments



41
The suggestion of a test with optical photons faced competition to be established. The compe-
tition pitted the teams involved with atomic cascade and those with positronium annihilation.
When both experiments were already done, Shimony wrote to Clauser (19 May 1972, Clauser
Papers): “Freedman told me about the difficulties raised by Wu, Ullman, and Kasday. What has
been the upshot of that? I think the only way to handle it is to continue to state, politely but firmly,
that their experiment is a fine one, but much less decisive than yours, because of their additional
assumption.” Wu’s early experiment was Wu and Shaknov (1950). Later, Kasday led the repetition
of this experiment (Kasday 1971; Kasday et al. 1975).
256 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


relaxing them has been the holly grail for physicists involved with foundations of
quantum mechanics.




Picture 7.4 Citations of Bell’s theorem paper, from 1965 to 2014. Source of the data: Web of
Science


The CHSH paper awakened interest among Europeans physicists, such as Bell,
Bernard d’Espagnat, de Broglie and Franco Selleri, who were already involved with
hidden-variables theories. As a consequence of this paper, Shimony was invited by
d’Espagnat to lecture at the Varenna school on foundations of quantum mechanics,
in 1970. The Varenna summer school, that is, the “International School of Physics
‘Enrico Fermi’,” had been organized by the Italian Physics Society starting in 1953,
and had become a traditional gathering for training European physicists in novel
themes of research. The 1970 school was the first to be dedicated to the theme of the
foundations of quantum mechanics, an episode we have discussed in the previous
chapter. There, Shimony gave three lectures, made acquaintance with and began a
lasting friendship with Bell and d’Espagnat, and became still more involved with
issues related both to Bell’s inequalities and measurement problem. We can con-
clude that by the early 1970s Shimony had received recognition in Europe and the
United States for his work on foundations of quantum mechanics. It is also worth
remarking that the Varenna school was an important meeting point for developing
research on Bell’s theorem as it brought together a number of physicists who were
already working on the subject but had never met each other previously.42

42
Varenna’s school had 84 participants. For its proceedings, see d’Espagnat (1971). For its
stimulus on the research on foundations of quantum mechanics, see Freire Jr. (2004) and the
previous chapter. Shimony thinks he was invited to Varenna for his previous work on measure-
ment problem (Shimony, interviewed by Joan Lisa Bromberg, 2002, op. cit., on pp. 75â€"82).
However, d’Espagnat remembers that it was Bell who suggested he invite Clauser and Shimony
(Bernard d’Espagnat, interviewed by Olival Freire, 2001, AIP).
7.3 Philosophy Enters the Labs: The First Experiments 257


From the CHSH authors emerged the two teams that conducted the first exper-
iments with optical photons. At Berkeley there was Clauser, who moved there as a
postdoc of Charles Townes, and Stuart Freedman, a doctoral student of Commins.
At Harvard, there was Holt, a student of Pipkin. Holt’s work involved not only
Pipkin, his adviser, but also Costas Papaliolios, who two years before had
performed the experiment on the Bohmâ€"Bub theory. At Berkeley, Clauser had
the support of Charles Townes for the experiment. “Townes was the guy who
actually twisted Commins’ arm to put Stu Freedman on the experiment and to
steer Atomic Beam Group funds into doing the experiment.” However, Clauser did
not receive a wide support from the Berkeley faculty. Clauser remembers that even
after the experiment was performed “most of the physics faculty at Berkeley all said
[this was junk], because as ‘you got exactly what you expected, what was the
point?” For Clauser, “they did not understand Bell’s Theorem.” Commins, who had
performed the experiment that Clauser was repeating with some modifications, was
no exception; “what a pointless waste of time all of that was” are Clauser’s (2002,
pp. 12â€"13) memories of Commins’s remarks.43 In fact, as early as February 1969,
Commins had “dismissed the idea [repetition of his experiment] as worthless,” and
stated that “there are ‘thousands’ of experiments which already prove” what
Clauser was looking for, which led Clauser to appeal for Townes’ mediation.44
Harvard’s environment was very different. In 1969, even before his meeting with
Clauser, Shimony was enthusiastic about the involvement of Harvard experimen-
talists. “There is a great deal of interest in the experiment at Boston University and
at Harvard, though I think it could be done quickly only at Harvard. [. . .] The man
most interested at Harvard is Costas Papaliolios. [. . .] However, he is very busy
now, and therefore suggested it to two men whom I have not met yet. One is
Nussbaum, who did his doctoral works at Harvard under Pipkin, looking at photon
polarization correlation in a mercury cascade. The other is Dick Holt, another
student of Pipkin who inherited Nussbaum’s apparatus.”45 In the late 1969, the
possibility of three tests of quantum mechanics caught the attention of popular
science magazines. “Acid test for quantum theory,” advertised Scientific Research,
explaining that “three versions of the same experiment, just getting under way at
three separate laboratories, may supply a definitive answer as to whether there are
indeed ‘hidden variables’ that provide a more deterministic view of reality than is


43
John Clauser, interviewed by Joan Lisa Bromberg, 2002, pp. 12â€"13, AIP.
44
Clauser to Eugene Commins, 18 Feb 1969, [cc: C. Townes], Clauser to Townes 18 February
1969, Clauser Papers.
45
Shimony to Clauser, 20 April 1969. Clauser Papers. Papaliolios recorded his first meeting with
Shimony in the following way: “Hidden variablesâ€"March 18, 1969. Talked with Shimony today.
(has studentâ€"Mike Horne). He pointed out 2 good references (1) Kocher & Commins, Phys Rev
Lett 18, 575 (1967) (2) Bell, Physics 1, 195 (1964). It may be poss. to do an Einsteinâ€"Rosenâ€"
Podolsky exper. with Nussbaum apparatus. Shimony also left me two of his references [on the
measurement problem]. See Bull of APS (for 1969 Wash. Meeting). Clauser has independently
come up with the same experimental test.” Papaliolios Papers, box 24, folder “EPR Experimen
(Shimony-Clauser)”, CPP.
258 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


possible with quantum mechanics.”46 Gilbert Nussbaum, then at the Bell Labora-
tories, did not, in fact, comply, but his place was occupied later on by the Texas
A&M University physicist Edward Fry, who would be the leader of the third team
to carry out experiments with optical photons.
Fry had been trained in atomic physics and spectroscopy, while doing his thesis
at the University of Michigan under Bill Williams. He was appointed as Assistant
Professor at Texas A&M, in 1969. There he was introduced by James McGuire, a
theorist in atomic collision physics, to the CHSH paper, in “evening philosophical
society discussion in late fall 1969.” Fry was “immediately intrigued,” figured out
an experimental scheme and applied to National Science Foundation for funding. It
was not a good experience for his first ever application. “The reviews did not argue
about the physics, their theme was basically that NSF should not waste money on
fruitless pursuits.” Discouraged by the result and by technical troubles with the
available devices, he did not actively pursue the intended experiments until after the
Clauser and Holt results. Meanwhile, his bets for the results of such experiments
were against quantum mechanics predictions. He considers that he “had the same
bug as Clauser and may have even, in part contracted it from him.” As he recalls, “I
was really hoping for a major breakthrough in our understanding of the quantum
world. Clearly, a violation of the Bell inequalities does improve our understanding;
but it does not provide the dramatic overthrow of existing thought that I had
anticipated.”47
The first round of experiments ended in a tie. The experiment conducted by
Freedman and Clauser (1972) confirmed the quantum mechanical predictions and
violated Bell’s inequalities, while the experiment held by Holt (1973) under the
supervision of Pipkin produced the opposite results.48 Freedman and Clauser
observed pairs of photons emitted by transitions in calcium. They used “pile-of-
plates” polarization analyzers, and the experiment ran for 200 h. For a certain

46
Scientific Research, 4(23), 10 November 1969, p. 19. Information about the plans for the third
experiment is independently confirmed: “There is yet a third experiment on another atom, at Bell
Labs. So all in all we ought to get some firm results.” Richard Holt to Frederick Belinfante, 6 Jan
1970, Shimony Papers, Box 2, Folder 9B, ASP. Belinfante, who was writing a book on hidden
variables (Belinfante 1973), had criticized CHSH calculations and this triggered a huge corre-
spondence among them. Most of these letters are at Box 2, Folder 9B, ASP. Belinfante eventually
acknowledged his criticisms were unfounded.
47
Edward Fry (pers. comm., 5 Aug 2005). James McGuire to Clauser, 3 Jan 1972, and 24 Feb
1972, Clauser Papers. The collaboration with James McGuire led to a derivation of Bell’s theorem
and comparison with data from the experiment by Freedman and Clauser (McGuire and Fry 1973).
For the technical troubles, see Harvey (1980, p. 154). Fry considers the NSF’s reviews to be a
“clear window” in the physics culture at the time: “there was a real culture at the time that thought
that this wasn’t something you should do, in spite of it seemed things were more reasonable at
Harvard and maybe even at Berkley.” In addition, the reviewers wrote: “there was a specific
reference to the time and money already being wasted at Berkley and Harvard and that NSF
shouldn’t waste any more money on this.” Fry’s lecture at the symposium “Optics and the Second
‘Magic Decade’ of Quantum Mechanics,” meeting of the Optical Society in San Jose, CA, 2007. I
am thankful to Joan Bromberg for sharing this manuscript with me.
48
Freedman and Clauser’s paper has 612 citations.
7.3 Philosophy Enters the Labs: The First Experiments 259


variable that resulted from count rates of photons they obtained 0.300 0.008. For
the sake of simplification, let us name this magnitude S. Bell’s inequality for this
variable and this experimental setup was 14, and the quantum mechanical
prediction for the same variable was 0.301 0.007. Holt and Pipkin observed
photon pairs from transitions in the isotope of mercury 198Hg. They used calcite
prisms as polarization analyzers, and the experiment lasted 154.5 h. For this case,
the quantum mechanical prediction for the same variable was 0.266, and they
obtained 0.216 0.013. As we will see later, the main effect on the physicists
was the desire for new experiments. Clauser repeated Holt’s experiment, Fry used
new techniques for getting better results, and Alain Aspect devised what he
intended to be an experiment able to settle the controversy.
In addition to these experiments with polarization correlation of optical photons
there appeared experiments in fields other than optics. The experimentalist
L. Kasday, a doctoral student at Columbia, the Italian group of G. Faraci in Catania
and the group led by A. Wilson at Birkbeck College, in London, repeated the Wu
and Shaknov experiment with γ photons, with further assumptions, and arrived at
conflicting results. Kasday’s and Wilson’s results confirmed quantum mechanics
while Faraci’s results confirmed Bell’s inequalities. At Saclay, France, M. Lamehi-
Rachti and W. Mittig performed an experiment with spin correlation in proton-
proton scattering, confirming quantum mechanics.49 In the 10 years between
Freedman and Clauser’s result in 1972 and the three experimental results Aspect
and his collaborators would publish in 1981 and 1982, we had 11 experiments and
8 teams involved with tests of Bell’s theorem.
Since experiments with optical photons were considered by Shimony, Clauser,
and Bell the most adequate to test local hidden variables, and the resonance of
results from atomic cascade experiments evidences that this stance was widely
shared by the physicists involved with Bell’s theorem, it is interesting to focus on
the period between 1973 and 1974, when the only available results from such
experiments were in conflict with each other, and see how the physicists reacted
to this disagreement. The physicists involved in these issues did not consider that
there was a true tie. Harvard physicists did not trust their own results but suspected
them of systematic errors, which, however, they could not identify. They decided
not to publish the results, but Holt’s work was recognized and he received his PhD
degree. Behind this decision was their trust in quantum mechanics. Pipkin concisely
recorded that “the measurements on the polarization correlation disagree with
quantum mechanics and agree with the predictions of hidden variable theory. So
far efforts to explain this discrepancy have not been successful.”50 He did not

49
Kasday (1971), Kasday et al. (1975), Faraci et al. (1974), Wilson et al. (1976), Lamehi-Rachti
and Mittig (1976). After 1978 many authors cited the review by Clauser and Shimony (1978),
which has 783 citations, instead of each experimental result. This may partially explain the lesser
number of citations of these papers.
50
Pipkin, F. M. “Atomic Physics Experiments Using Fast Atomic Beams”. NSF Grant proposal.
[To begin on 01 June 1974]. Pipkin Papers [Accession 12802], box 25, folder “NSF Proposal
1974â€"1975,” Harvard University Archives (PP hereafter).
260 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


ponder the possibility that their results had exposed a deficiency of quantum theory.
Holt, in his thesis, dared more, writing, “the polarization correlation results present
a far more puzzling (and perhaps) exciting prospect. The statistical accuracy is
certainly great enough to allow us to say that a discrepancy with quantum mechan-
ics exists. The arguments of the preceding section show that all the obvious sources
of systematic errors have been examined.” Next he attenuated his claim, “on the
other side are two arguments for disbelieving the results,” the first one being the
results already published by Freedman and Clauser. He did not discuss why this
previous result should be considered more reliable than his own results. Next, he
stated the main reason for his caution, “the second argument against our results is
the enormous success that has been enjoyed by quantum mechanics in the correct
prediction of experimental results” Holt (1973, pp. Vâ€"27). Holt’s awareness that
this argument could not be definitive led him to conclude, “this, however, is not a
telling argument because it is quite conceivable that a deterministic theory sub-
structure could yield the same ensemble average as quantum mechanics in all other
experimental situations save this one, in which the least intuitive features of
quantum mechanics are strikingly displayed.” Holt’s back and forth reasoning did
not surprise Harvey (1980, p. 143), who has written sociological studies on these
experiments. For him, “despite its possible philosophical significance, [local hidden
variables] could hardly be described as a highly plausible theory.” Yet, he showed
how the idea of plausibility, widely used by the physicists involved in the debate on
Bell’s theorem, was strongly dependent on “their immersion in the culture of
physics” and could not be reduced to logical reasoning or data evaluation (Harvey
1981, p. 105). Trust in quantum mechanics was, and is, an essential part of the
culture of physics.
We have good evidence of this trust in quantum theory in a review of the results
written in 1974 by the French physicist Michel Paty. He was at the time an
experimentalist in particle physics, very interested in epistemological issues, pre-
paring himself for a conversion to a philosophical career by taking a second
doctorate, this time in philosophy. Together with the Brazilian physicist José
Leite Lopes, he ran a series of seminars and a journal under the title Fundamenta
Scientiae. In 1974, they organized in Strasbourg a colloquium dedicated to the 50th
anniversary of quantum mechanics in which Paty presented a review on “the recent
attempts to verify quantum mechanics.” After concluding that “the present balance
sheet of the experiments designed to test Bell’s inequalities is therefore as follows:
three agree with quantum mechanics, and two disagree;” he asked, “has quantum
mechanics now revealed its limitations, or more exactly, the limits of its field of
application?” He conjectured that “This would not be unthinkable a priori, [. . .].
This would also be the case for a theory as powerful as quantum mechanics, which
itself is highly powerful, but at the same time probably has a frail basis.” Next,
however, he did not accept his own conjecture, and reaffirmed a trust in quantum
mechanics: “However, it may seem doubtful that such an established theory might
be questioned in such simple experiments. And in fact quantum mechanics may
only appear to be frail; its hold on our conceptions is paradoxically shown in this
recent questioning: it is not quantum mechanics which is put into doubt, so much as
7.3 Philosophy Enters the Labs: The First Experiments 261


the basis of these very experiments or at least their interpretation.” Anyway, Paty
was careful about this conclusion, and urged for more refined experiments.51 This
kind of discussion shows the tacitly shared view that foundational problems in
quantum mechanics were already solved by its founding fathers being reinforced by
the increasing practical success of this theory. Even physicists like Pipkin, Holt, and
Paty, who spent time doing or reviewing such experiments and for this reason
cannot be counted among those who developed prejudices against hidden-variable
theories as a subject, embodied this trust in quantum mechanical predictions.
Now I want to take the case of the Harvard experimenters for close consider-
ation. Compared to Berkeley, Harvard seems to have been a friendly intellectual
and professional environment for those who were interested in Bell’s theorem. We
can infer this both from the involvement of its experimenters with tests of hidden
variables and from the testimony of Holt. Papaliolios was a key figure in the
creation of this intellectual and professional environment, since he was openly
involved with tests of hidden variables since 1967 and throughout the 1970s.
Acknowledgements in Holt’s (1973) and Horne’s (1970) dissertations, and in the
CHSH (1969) paper testify to his role in the first tests of Bell’s theorem. He
published with Freedman and Holt a review on the status of hidden variable
experiments, and in 1975 gave a course at Harvard on hidden variables.52
Papaliolios earned a PhD from Harvard in 1965, and was a professor of physics
there from that time until his retirement in 2001, while being also a physicist at the
Harvard-Smithsonian Center for Astrophysics. His main research interests were
related to astrophysics, but he included hidden variables as one of his topics of
research in Harvard’s reports to its visiting committees even before he was tenured
as a Professor in 1971.53 It was Papaliolios who invited Pipkin to undertake an
experiment on Bell’s theorem. Pipkin went to Harvard after his PhD in Physics at
Princeton and there became a member of the faculty in 1957. Reputed as a good
experimentalist both in low-energy atomic physics and high-energy particle phys-
ics, Pipkin had begun in the middle of the 1960s a line of research on precision
measurement of the atomic fine and hyperfine structure, which was continuously
funded by the National Science Foundation. This approach included the study of
correlation of photons from atomic cascade in order to calculate lifetime of atomic
states. Papaliolios’ proposal was easily accommodated in Pipkin’s project through
the thesis work of Holt, his doctoral student, but Pipkin’s interest in foundations of
quantum mechanics were never as strong as Paliolios’ were. Holt’s history at
Harvard presents nuances that show us distinctive features in the social and




51
Paty (1977) included in his count not only optical photons experiments, but also protonâ€"proton
scattering and positronium annihilation experiments.
52
Freedman et al. (1976). The readings for this course are in the Papaliolios Papers, box 16, folder
“Fall 75 Hidden Variablesâ€"Reading Courseâ€"(P351)”, CPP.
53
Reports of Visiting committees are in Costas Papaliolios Papers, box 5, folder “Visiting
Committee, 1970â€"1973,” idem.
262 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


intellectual recognition of the importance of Bell’s theorem.54 In general, he did not
encounter prejudices or disdain but merely a lack of interest. Edwin Purcell was on
the committee examining his thesis and considered the subject “a worthwhile
endeavor,” but in his introductory quantum mechanics course, which Holt attended,
quantum measurement was handled via Schwinger’s measurement operator alge-
bra, in which the full measurement problem is not explicit.55 As a different
example, he has the vivid image of the graduate quantum mechanics course given
by Paul Martin, in which not only measurement was carefully presented via Kurt
Gottfried’s textbook, but also Bell’s theorem was introduced.56 Holt read Bell’s
paper but did not become interested himself, and considers that even if he was not
yet a physicist he shared the attitude of the time. Thus, Holt does not speak of
stigma associated with the subject but rather of little interest in the subject, and even
this little interest was not unanimous. As a sign of the times, Holt opened his thesis
with an approach that in other times and places would have been considered
heretical. He analyzed the measurement problem in quantum mechanics and
presented the “Copenhagen interpretation” as one of its possible solutions, the
others being the “Everett-Wheeler interpretation,” the “Wigner’s idea,” and the
“hidden variables” (Holt 1973, pp. Iâ€"6â€"14). Incidentally, I remark that, 15 years
before, regarding the Copenhagen interpretation as only one of the possible inter-
pretations of quantum mechanics was removed from a dissertation before its
publication. It happened with Hugh Everett’s dissertation at Princeton under John
Wheeler.57
As favorable as Harvard was for the experimental tests of Bell’s theorem, its
participation in our account is not a story of success. Holt and Pipkin did not trust
their result, but they were not able to identify the source of errors. They circulated it
as a preprint that was never published, meaning that in fact they did not claim to
have found a violation of quantum mechanics prediction. In his sociological studies
Harvey discussed how their cautious stance was conditioned by local and cultural
circumstances such as Holt’s status as doctoral student, trust in quantum theory, and
a previous failure of Pipkin’s, who had a violation of quantum electrodynamics that
was not eventually confirmed.58 As important as these factors could have been, and
were, I think one should add a fact that was not determined by such factors. Pipkin
and Holt gave up the subject, they did not pursue it to its ultimate consequences, by
repeating the same experiment or by planning a new one, in spite of the interest
their unpublished result awakened even beyond the group of physicists already


54
Richard Holt (pers. comm., 21 March 2005). See also Wick (1995, p. 108).
55
The composition of the committee who examined Holt’s thesis was Pipkin, Papaliolios, and
Purcell.
56
Gottfried (1966). The whole Section IV is dedicated to “The measurement problem and the
statistical interpretation of quantum mechanics.” Bell’s (1966) paper is suggested for reading.
57
On this case, see Chap. 3 in this book.
58
Harvey (1980). Pipkin’s claim of a violation of quantum electrodynamics was Blumenthal
et al. (1965).
7.3 Philosophy Enters the Labs: The First Experiments 263


involved with Bell’s theorem.59 Thus, the University of Southern California phys-
icist Marc Levenson wrote to Pipkin, “I have obtained a preprint of your paper with
Holt which casts doubt upon the validity of quantum mechanics. This result
distresses me somewhat as I am expected to introduce our juniors to this subject
next semester,” and Levenson continued discussing possible sources of error.60 One
can conjecture that neither Pipkin nor Holt were able to foresee the importance that
this subject would acquire in physics. Pipkin only took it up again in 1976, when
Clauser and Fry were announcing the new results we discuss below. Pipkin then
stated, “a careful study was made of systematic effects which could account for the
deviation from the quantum mechanical prediction but no candidates were found. In
view of the result reported by Freedman and Clauser [. . .] it was concluded that the
experiment should be repeated with a somewhat different configuration of the
apparatus.”61 However, they had not tried and they did not try any repetition; it
was up to Clauser, Fry, and later Aspect to make new experiments on Bell’s
theorem. Two years later, Pipkin made his “closing arguments,” while reviewing
the “atomic physics tests of the basic concepts of quantum mechanics.” After
repeating that they had “recommended that the experiment be repeated by someone
else with a different configuration of apparatus,” he cited Clauser’s new results and
concluded, “this experiment thus indicated that the Holtâ€"Pipkin experiment was
incorrect although it did not localize the source of the error in the earlier experi-
ment.”62 Their failure to analyze what was wrong with their experiment was
probably responsible for the deletion of their role in the current story of success
associated with Bell’s theorem. So, Aczel (2002), in his popular science book
Entanglement, dedicated one chapter to “the dream of Clauser, Horne, and
Shimony,” and another to the “Alain Aspect.” Holt, Pipkin, and even Edward
Fry’s roles were sent to the backstage of the history. Symptomatically, Pipkin’s
Harvard colleagues, while writing his official obituary, did not include experiments
in foundations of quantum mechanics among his achievements.63


59
When Clauser was repeating Holt’s experiment, the latter wrote to the former, “every time that
Stu Freedman asks me when we’re going to publish, I tell him I’m waiting for your results.” Holt to
Clauser, 31 Aug 1975, Clauser Papers.
60
Marc Levenson to Pipkin, 03 December 1974. Pipkin Papers [Accession 12802], box 12, folder
“NSF proposal 1974â€"1975,” PP.
61
Holt and Pipkin (1976). This report was presented at the Erice workshop by Pipkin. Similar
words appeared in Freedman et al. (1976).
62
Pipkin (1978, pp. 317â€"319). Until today, Holt holds the same opinion, “I think it is still accurate
to say that the source of the error remains unknown.” Richard Holt (pers. Comm., 21 March 2005).
Clauser and Shimony’s conjecture is that “stresses in the walls of the Pyrex bulb used to contain
the electron gun and mercury vapor” made the glass optically active, and this systematic error was
not adequately compensated. A similar problem appeared while Clauser was repeating the
experiment. After the stresses were removed, “the experiment was re-performed, and excellent
agreement with quantum mechanics was then obtained. On the other hand, Holt and Pipkin did not
repeat their experiment when they discovered the stresses in their bulb” (Clauser and Shimony
1978, p. 1910).
63
Gary Feldman, Paul Horowitz, Costas Papaliolios, Richard Wilson, and Robert Pound
(Chairman), “F. M. Pipkin â€" Memorial Minute,” Harvard Gazette, 26 Nov 1993, p. 15. At
264 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


Describing Holt and Pipkin’s case as a failure risks anachronism.64 After all,
experiments of Bell’s theorem became mainstream physics in the 1980s, and one
needs to consider the importance of the result for them, at the time they performed
the experiment. Indeed, neither for Pipkin nor for Holt did this experiment have the
importance that we attribute to it today. Pipkin was developing a line of research on
precision measurement of the atomic fine and hyperfine structure, from which
Nussbaum’s thesis on lifetime of atomic states obtained through atomic cascade
experiments was one of the first results (Nussbaum and Pipkin 1967). Holt’s
experiment on Bell’s theorem was a small extension of this method.65 Indeed, in
Pipkin’s 1972 NSF proposal the completion of Holt’s experiment is listed as #6 out
of a list of seven goals, while it also included a precision measurement of the
lifetime of the 73S1 state of atomic mercury, a result that was indeed published.66
Apparently, Pipkin’s reputation as experimenter was not damaged by the unsolved
problem with the test of Bell’s theorem. In 1990, the physicist who evaluated his
NSF grant extension in the same domain stated, “Professor Pipkin is a well-
established leader in the field of high-precision measurements of fundamental
atomic systems,” and rated the proposal as “excellent.”67 Holt made a successful
career working with precision measurement in atomic physics at the University of
Western Ontario, Canada, but never returned to the subject of Bell’s theorem.
The 1970s was the decade when hidden variables, an issue once considered a
question of philosophical taste, entered the lab. These experimental activities did
not mean, however, a decline in theoretical work on hidden variables. There was a
flow of new derivations of Bell’s inequalities. In 1978, reviewing the subject,
Clauser and Shimony analyzed at least 11 different derivations, by Bell himself,
Wigner, Frederik Belinfante, Holt, Clauser and Horne, Henry Stapp, d’Espagnat,
D. Gutkowski and G. Masotto, Selleri, and L. Schiavulli, in addition to a new and

Harvard, this kind of obituary is commissioned. See Jeremy Knowles to Papaliolios, 10 Apr 1992.
Papaliolios Papers, box 26, folder “Frank,” CPP.
64
Harvey (1980, p. 158) spoke of “Holt’s virtual capitulation.” I think that he singled out too much
Holt’s profile as a graduate student. Indeed, as we have seen, it would be more reasonable to
describe the case as a story of failure of the Harvard experimentalists involved, which was
responsible for the deletion of their participation in the present story of success of Bell’s theorem.
65
In his “Proposal: Atomic Physics Experiments Using Photon Coincidence Techniques,” [1969],
Pipkin listed as goal #2 “To continue the present coincidence measurements of the 4358â€"2537A
photon cascade in mercury [. . .],” and listed Holt as doctoral student, but no reference was made to
the hidden variable test, which would only appear in the proposal of the next year. See F. M.
Pipkin, “Atomic Physics Experiments Using Fast Atomic Beams and Photon Coincidence Tech-
niques,” NSF Grant Proposal [GP22787], [1970]. He was funded $54,200.00 for 2 years, cf. Rolf
Sinclair [NSF] to Pipkin, 26 May 1970. Pipkin Papers, box 23, folder “NSF Atomic 1973,” PP.
66
F. M. Pipkin, “Proposal for a Grant from the NSF to continue atomic physics experiments using
fast atomic beams and photon coincidence techniques.” He was funded $112,380.00 for 2 years.
Rolf Sinclair [NSF] to Pipkin 25 May 1972. Pipkin Papers, box 23, folder “NSF Atomic 1973,” PP
(Holt and Pipkin 1974).
67
Referee report on “Atomic Physics Experiments Using Lasers and Fast Atomic Beams”, NSF
proposal PHY-9016886, enclosed with Marcel Bardon [NSF] to F. M. Pipkin, 13 Dec 1990. Pipkin
Papers, box 21, folder “NSF awards,” PP.
7.4 Settling the Tie and Turning the Page 265


different derivation by Bell, which was criticized by Shimony, Horne, and
Clauser.68 Two new books appeared, one by Belinfante (1973), entirely dedicated
to the hidden-variable issue, and another by d’Espagnat (1989) [first appeared in
1971], dealing with the foundations of quantum mechanics. The derivations made
by Bell and Clauser & Horne helped to focus what the issues at stake were in these
experiments. Bell (1971) presented a proof that his theorem was not restricted to
deterministic theories, and Clauser and Horne (1974) further developed this deri-
vation of Bell’s theorem. They showed that the available experimental data also
falsified stochastic local theories, a conclusion, however, that depended on a
supplementary “no-enhancement” assumption; which is weaker than the fair sam-
pling assumption adopted by Clauser in the CHSH paper.69 In any way, these
results evidenced that it was locality and not determinism that was at stake in
Bell’s theorem.70 Since then, to speak of the tests of Bell’s theorem as tests of
determinism, as we have seen in the notice published in Scientific Research, is less
than accurate.



7.4 Settling the Tie and Turning the Page

Let us now consider the period between 1975 and 1976. Indeed, it was a time of new
and impressive experimental results as well of new experimental challenges
concerning Bell’s theorem. Two new experiments, by Fry and by Clauser, promise
of a new one, by Aspect, new social settings for gathering the physicists involved in
the debate, and the feeling, by certain physicists, of a turning point in this story were
the main features of the time.
As we have seen, Edward Fry, from Texas A&M University, became interested
in experiments on Bell’s theorem in the early 1970s. Having learnt from his first
unsuccessful application that many physicists had disdain for these experiments,
Fry changed his strategy. Now, he tried funding from Research Corporation, and
added two new assets. He attached two letters supporting the application, one from
Eugene Wigner, who wrote “a strong supportive letter,” and the other from his


68
Clauser and Shimony (1978, pp. 1886â€"1900). The debate between Bell, on one hand, and
Shimony, Horne, and Clauser, on the other hand, was published in Epistemological Letters and
reprinted in Bell et al. (1985). Clauser and Shimony’s paper became the canonical review on the
experiments of Bell’s theorem. Wigner’s (1970) paper included as a footnote a historical remark
about what was von Neumann’s main reason for stating the inadequacy of hidden-variable
theories. This footnote stirred up a strong Clauser’s (1971a, b) criticism, and the whole affair
demanded the intervention of Shimony’s diplomacy. Wigner to Shimony, 5 October 1970, Wigner
Papers, box 72, folder 1, WigP, and Wigner (1971).
69
Clauser and Horne’s (1974) paper has 725 citations.
70
The philosopher Karl Popper is an example of somebody who conjectured that the real conflict
concerned determinism and not locality. For a criticism of this stance, see Bell (1972) and Clauser
and Horne (1974, p. 526).
266 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


former adviser Bill Williams. And yet, he “tried to justify the pursuit of this subject
in terms of a plethora of other more conventional capabilities that it also offered.”71
As a consequence of this strategy, Fry (1973) wrote that he was mainly interested in
coincidence observation of optical photons from an atomic cascade as an experi-
mental technique with variegated applications; and that experimental tests of local
hidden variables were just one of the uses of such a technique, others being the
determination of excited-state lifetimes and g values, branching ratios, absolute
quantum efficiencies and source strengths.72 The strategy adopted by Fry calls our
attention to the kind of technical devices used in tests of Bell’s theorem.
The experimental tests of Bell’s theorem used technical devices that can be
framed in what Peter Galison calls the “logic tradition” by contrast to those in the
“image tradition.” Both, according to Galison, formed two distinct traditions in the
material culture of high-energy particle physics. In the logic tradition statistics
played the key role and there was no room for the picture of the “golden” and
unique event that was important in the image tradition. The very counterintuitive
nature of nonlocality prevents us from visualizing the phenomenon at stake. In the
experiments with correlation of photons coming from atomic cascades, the most
sensitive pieces of the apparatus are the photodetectors and the electronics to count
them if there is coincidence, that is, if the pair of detected photons comes from the
same cascade decay. Indeed, Galison’s (1997, p. 464) logic tradition came “out of
the established electronic logic tradition of counters,” which was roughly available
in the 1930s but was dramatically improved during the war.73 As we have seen, Fry
was particularly interested in improved detectors. Experiments with Bell’s theorem
also depended on good polarizers and optical filters in addition to efficient methods
to excite the atomic samples to the right level in order to obtain the intended
cascade decay. In contrast to Papaliolios, who used the polarizers produced by
Polaroid Corporation, experimenters dealing with Bell’s theorem used more tradi-
tional polarizers, like calcite prisms and “pile-of-plates” polarizers, a cluster of
glass plates arranged in certain angles, due to their large efficiency in observing
linear polarization. To excite the atomic sample, the experimenters used resonance
absorption with radiation emitted by lamps and passed through interference filters
or electron bombardment, methods that had the undesirable effect of exciting many
levels and not only those which were intended. Among all these technical devices,
the technical innovation that changed the scene of these experiments in the 1970s
was a new technique to excite the atomic samples, the tunable dye laser. Peter
Sorokin and John Lankard invented dye lasers in 1965, but “it took several years
before tunability emerged as preeminent among its properties.”74 It quickly became

71
Edward Fry (pers. comm., 5 August 2005).
72
Fry’s style was noted by Harvey (1980, p. 156) in the following terms: “. . . a major part of Fry’s
strategy was to develop experimental techniques per se, and then apply them to a number of quite
different empirical problems.”
73
For the development of such techniques during the war, see Galison (1997, pp. 239â€"311).
74
Bromberg (1991, p. 184). Still according to Bromberg, “the dye laser was also discovered
independently by Mary L. Spaeth and D. P. Bortfield at Hughes and by Fritz P. Schaefer and
coworkers in Germany. Both of these groups published later.”
7.4 Settling the Tie and Turning the Page 267


a revolutionary technique for spectroscopy insofar as it yieldedâ€"within a certain
rangeâ€"the precise optical wavelengths one required to excite the atomic levels
needed by experimenters.
Indeed, when Fry, helped by his graduate student Randall Thompson, went to
carry out a new test of Bell’s theorem he could take advantage of this new
technique, the tunable dye laser. He used it for exciting exactly the atomic cascade
of interest, and this permitted an improved speed of accumulating data. A number
can summarize the improvements; while Clauser and Holt needed about 200 h for
collecting data, Fry and Thompson performed the experiment in 80 min. Their
results strongly violated Bell’s inequalities and matched quantum mechanical pre-
dictions. The Bell’s inequality under consideration was δ 0, the quantum mechan-
ical prediction was δqm ¼ + 0.044 0.007, and they obtained
δexp ¼ + 0.046 0.014.75
Meanwhile, Clauser repeated at Berkeley, in slightly different conditions, the
experiment carried out before by Holt and Pipkin at Harvard, with the aim of
breaking the previous experimental tie. The main difference was due to economic
and practical reasons. He used “pile-of-plates” polarizers instead of calcite prisms.
He obtained results confirming quantum mechanical predictions and violating
Bell’s inequalities. The experiment ran for 412 h. The Bell’s inequality under
consideration was δ 0, the quantum mechanical prediction was δqm ¼ 0.0348,
and he obtained δexp ¼ + 0.0385 0.0093.76 For the second time, Clauser obtained
experimental results that contradicted his hopes. He reported them to Wheeler in the
following terms: “Dr. Henry Stapp here at LBL has told me that you were interested
in the latest results from my experiments. These were attempting to reproduce the
results observed by Holt and Pipkin at Harvard. Unfortunately, I have failed to do
so, and obtained more or less good agreement with the quantum mechanical pre-
dictions.”77 Freedman and Holt also thought of repeating Holt and Pipkin’s exper-
iment, but this project did not happen.78
Clauser’s and Holt’s hopes and actual results deserve a remark on the literature
in sociology of science. Harvey (1980, p. 157) convincingly argued that “the
particular social, historical and cultural context in which the LHV [local hidden
variable] experiments took place had a major effect on many features of these
experiments.” As examples of this effect, he cited location, physicists who carried
them out, “the way in which they were presented, and the response to anomalous
results.” Holt’s experiment fitted well in his claims. However, Harvey’s claims were
stronger, reflecting the then new trends in the sociology of science. For him (Harvey


75
Fry and Thompson (1976). This paper received 220 citations.
76
Clauser (1976). This paper received 159 citations.
77
Clauser to John Wheeler, 27 Oct 1975. Clauser Papers.
78
“You might be interested that I have decided to repeat Dick’s mercury experiment here with
pile-of-plates polarizers. [. . .] I hear you and Dick are considering collaborating on a similar
repeat. Have you made a final decision on that?” Clauser to Freedman, 25 Jan 1974. Clauser
Papers.
268 7 Philosophy Enters the Optics Laboratory: Bell’s Theorem and Its. . .


1981, p. 106), “the social and cultural, as well as the technical, context in which a
scientist finds himself will influence not only the style, timing and presentation of
his work but also (at least in principle) its content.” This strong claim about the
content of the experimental results does not meet evidence when one compares the
prospects nurtured by both Holt and Clauser. As Shimony remarked, after making
the caveat that he “dislike[s] the idea that experimental results are theory laden, that
somehow experimenters see what they want to see,” the two physicists obtained
results opposed to their expectations.79 Evidence about Clauser’s hopes on violat-
ing quantum mechanics was already available at the time Harvey conducted his
research. Harvey made reference to them, but did not extract the full consequences
of the contrast between Clauser and Holt’s cases. Nowadays, with more archival
evidence available, it is harder to accept that local contexts determined the content
of their experimental results.
Since the early 1970s there already had been a small community of physicists
who were interested in Bell’s theorem. In the middle of the 1970s they looked to
reinforce their links and to create opportunities for discussions and gathering. In
addition to the usual trips and leaves of absence physicists use as regular means for
circulating professional information, our protagonists used two others: the Erice
Thinkshops on Physics, and the journal Epistemological Letters. The latter was an
unusual vehicle for scientific debates. It was conceived as a permanent written
symposium on “Hidden Variables and Quantum Uncertainty,” and defined itself in
this way: “Epistemological Letters are not a scientific journal in the ordinary sense.
They want to create a basis for an open and informal discussion allowing confron-
tation and ripening of ideas before publishing in some adequate journal.”80 Indeed,
the journal was more than this. It published short letters, kept open debates for
several issues, announced news of interest, republished some papers, and even kept
a list of the recipients of the journal. It was, in a certain sense, a predecessor of the
contemporary Internet discussion lists. Instead of circulating via the electronic web
it was mimeographed and sent to its recipients. Thirty-six issues were published
from November 1973 to October 1984. About 60 authors wrote in the journal, and
Shimony, Bell, d’Espagnat, Lochak, Costa de Beauregard, P. A. Moldauer,
F. Bonsack, J. L. Destouches, and M. Mugur-Schaechter wrote at least five pieces
each. Many papers were indeed published elsewhere but some debates which were
not well documented elsewhere, such as the refusal of de Broglie and his collabo-
rators to accept the full implications of Bell’s theorem, are uniquely recorded there.
It was published in Switzerland by the “Association F. Gonsethâ€"Institut de la
mèthode,” under the editorial responsibility of the philosopher of science François
Bonsack, who was the secretary of this association. Shimony also acte